Exhibit 1
Technical Specifications
Table of Contents
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK .................................................................................................... 4
SECTION 01 14 17 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS (SECTION 1-05.14) ........12
SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES .................................................................................................................13
SECTION 01 25 13 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE .............................................................15
SECTION 01 27 00 MEASUREMENT (SECTION 1-09.1 and 1-09.2)................................................17
SECTION 01 29 73 PAYMENT (SECTION 1-09.3 through 109.10) ..................................................21
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS ....................................................................................................29
SECTION 01 32 13 PROGRESS SCHEDULE (SECTION 1-08.3) ..........................................................33
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS (SECTION 1-06) ................................................................................38
SECTION 01 35 24 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS (SECTION 1-07.23) ..................................................47
SECTION 01 35 43 SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS (SECTIONS
1-07.5/1-07.6/1-07.16) .....................................................................................................................50
SECTION 01 35 44 UNKNOWN HAZARDOUS AND CONTAMINATED SUBSTANCES
(SECTION 1-07.5) .................................................................................................................................55
SECTION 01 35 53 SECURITY PROCEDURES ...........................................................................................64
SECTION 01 45 10 QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS (SECTION 1-06) ................................66
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ........................................................67
SECTION 01 55 26 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL (SECTIONS 1-07.7, 1-07.23 and 1-10)
79
SECTION 01 56 39 VEGETATION PROTECTION AND RESTORATION (SECTION 1-07.16) ..83
SECTION 01 57 00 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE FACILIITES ...................................................................90
SECTION 01 57 10 WATERING (SECTION 2-07) ....................................................................................91
SECTION 01 57 13 EROSION CONTROL AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL (SECTIONS 107.15 and 8-01) .....................................................................................................................................92
SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................96
SECTION 01 71 13 MOBILIZATION (SECTION 1-09.7) ........................................................................99
SECTION 01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING (SECTION 1-05.4) ......................................................... 101
SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES (SECTIONS 1-05.11 and 1-05.12) .................. 106
SECTION 01 78 24 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS (SECTION 1-06.5)........ 108
SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ......................................................................... 110
1
SECTION 02 41 20 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS (SECTION 2-02) ..... 114
SECTION 03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMING .............................................................................................. 118
SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING ..................................................................................... 122
SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ........................................................................... 126
SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS ........................................................................................... 151
SECTION 06 51 13.11 UHMW CURB PROTECTION............................................................................. 160
SECTION 06 64 10 TRANSLUCENT RESIN PANEL SYSTEM ............................................................ 162
SECTION 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS............................................................................................. 169
SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ................................................................ 176
SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS .......................................................................................................... 182
SECTION 08 84 00 POLYCARBONATE PLASTIC GLAZING .............................................................. 187
SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING....................................................................................... 196
SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNS and IDENTIFYING DEVICES ................................................................... 206
SECTION 10 14 53 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE .................................................................................................... 220
SECTION 12 93 00 SITE FURNISHINGS .................................................................................................. 221
SECTION 12 93 01 SITE FURNISHINGS – 7TH STREET AT TURTLE PLACE .............................. 224
SECTION 13 13 00 PLATFORMS AND STATIONS ................................................................................ 226
SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ................................................ 231
SECTION 26 0519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ........ 247
SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ......................... 252
SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSError! Bookmark not defined.
SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .................................. 255
SECTION 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSError! Bookmark n
SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ............................................... 266
SECTION 26 2416 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM PANELBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS ..... 278
SECTION 26 2417 METERED SERVICE PEDESTAL ............................................................................. 288
SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES......................................................................................................... 293
SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING ................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
SECTION 26 56 19 ROADWAY LIGHTING .............................................................................................. 299
SECTION 27 09 00 ITS CONDUIT SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 322
SECTION 27 27 00 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK WIRING SYSTEMS ......................... 324
2
SECTION 31 15 00 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND ROADSIDE CLEANUP (SECTION 2-01) .... 351
SECTION 31 23 33 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING (SECTION 7-08) ........................................... 353
SECTION 31 23 34 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL (SECTION 2-09) ................... 354
SECTION 31 23 35 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT (SECTION 2-03)Error! Bookmark not def
SECTION 31 34 19.16 GEOTEXTILE SOIL REINFORCEMENT (SECTION 2-12) ........................ 358
SECTION 32 01 31 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY (SECTION 1-07.16) 365
SECTION 32 11 23 CRUSHED SURFACING (SECTION 4-04)........................................................... 367
SECTION 32 12 20 HOT MIX ASPHALT (SECTION 5-04) ................................................................. 368
SECTION 32 13 74 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT (SECTION 5-05) ........................................ 381
SECTION 32 14 13 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING .................................................................. 388
SECTION 32 16 14 CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS (SECTIONS 8-04) .................................. 393
SECTION 32 16 15 CEMENT CONCRETE DRIVEWAY ENTRANCES (SECTIONS 8-06) .......... 395
SECTION 32 16 16 CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALKS (SECTIONS 8-14) ..................................... 397
SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKING............................................................................................. 399
SECTION 32 31 13 SITE FENCING ............................................................................................................. 401
SECTION 32 32 13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE RETAINING WALLS (SECTION 6-11)............ 412
SECTION 32 84 23 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION ............................................................................... 414
SECTION 32 92 23 SODDING....................................................................................................................... 426
SECTION 32 93 43 TREE, SHRUB PLANTING (LANDSCAPE PLANTING)Error! Bookmark not defined.
SECTION 33 01 00 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF UTILITIES .......................................... 431
SECTION 33 05 13.14 ADJUSTMENT OF INCIDENTAL STRUCTURES (SECTION 7-05)Error! Bookmark not d
SECTION 33 10 00 WATER SYSTEMS (7-09, 7-12, 7-14 and 7-15)............................................... 446
SECTION 33 41 00 STORM DRAINAGE AND SANITARY SEWER PIPING (SECTIONS 7-01, 704, 7-08, 7-17, 7-18 and 7-19) ...................................................................................................... 456
SECTION 33 44 19 STORMWATER TREATMENT STRUCTURES................................................... 466
SECTION 33 49 00 STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES (SECTION 7-05) ...................................... 470
SECTION 33 49 23 BIORETENTION BASINS ......................................................................................... 478
SECTION 34 41 13 TRAFFIC SIGNALS ..................................................................................................... 483
APPENDIX A .................................................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
APPENDIX B ....................................................................................................................................................... 496
3
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. This Work consists of construction of the C-TRAN Fourth Plain Boulevard Bus
Rapid Transit (BRT) system and associated facilities within the City of Vancouver,
Washington, along East 7th Street, Broadway and Washington Streets, McLoughlin
Blvd, Fort Vancouver Way, Fourth Plain Blvd, NE Thurston Way, and NE Vancouver
Mall Drive. Additionally, a Transit Center will be constructed at the Westfield
Vancouver Mall under a different Contract.
Some of the notable categories of the Work include:
1. Passenger stations including station platforms and shelters:
a. 7th Street at Turtle Place Station
b. Washington and 12th Street Station
c. Broadway and 13th Street Station
d. Broadway and 15th Street Station
e. McLoughlin and Washington Street Station
f. Marshall/Luepke Community Center Station – Eastbound
g. Marshall/Luepke Community Center Station – Westbound
h. Central Campus Station – Eastbound
i. Central Campus Station – Westbound
j. Gaiser Hall Station – Eastbound
k. Gaiser Hall Station – Westbound
l. Fourth Plain and Fort Vancouver Way Station – Eastbound
m. Fort Vancouver Way and Fourth Plain Station – Westbound
n. Grand Boulevard Station – Eastbound
o. Grand Boulevard Station – Westbound
p. Todd Road Station – Eastbound
q. Todd Road Station – Westbound
r. General Anderson Station – Eastbound
s. General Anderson Station – Westbound
t. Stapleton Road Station – Eastbound
u. Stapleton Road Station – Westbound
v. 57th Avenue Station – Eastbound
w. 57th Avenue Station – Westbound
x. 65th Avenue Station – Eastbound
y. 65th Avenue Station – Westbound
z. Andresen Road Station – Eastbound
aa. Andresen Road Station - Westbound
bb. 78th Avenue Station - Eastbound
cc. 78th Avenue Station - Westbound
dd. 86th Avenue Station - Eastbound
4
ee. 86th Avenue Station - Westbound
ff. Thurston Way Station - Eastbound
gg. Thurston Way Station - Westbound
2. Sidewalks, landscaping and urban design treatment throughout this
segment.
3. Roadway drainage and traffic signals.
4. New and reconstruction of concrete and asphalt pavement streets.
B.
Measurement
1. No separate measurement will be made for the Work in this Section.
C.
Payment
1. No payment shall be made for the Work described in this Section.
1.02
REFERENCES
Sponsor
WSDOT
WSDOT
WSDOT
City of Vancouver
1.03
Subject
WSDOT Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and
Municipal Construction (2014),
Amendments to the WSDOT Standard Specifications for
Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction (2014)
included in the Contract as of the Bid Date
Standard Plans
Standard Plans
PROJECT INFORMATION
A. The C-TRAN Fourth Plain Bus Rapid Transit Project Final Geotechnical Report is
made a part of this Contract and is located on C-TRAN’s Web site as part of the
Item For Bid package.
1.04
CITY OF VANCOUVER MUNICIPAL CODE
A. The Contractor is required to comply with the Noise/Public Disturbance
Information contained in the City of Vancouver Municipal Code, Section 7.05.010
Public disturbance.
1.05
HOURS OF WORK
A. Work shall be performed during the hours of 7:00 a.m. through 8:00 p.m.
B. B. Refer to the City of Vancouver Municipal Code, Section 7.05.010 Public
disturbance, for exceptions to these hours.
5
C. Night Work
1.
2.
The Washington Department of Transportation may require that some
or all work within the State right of way occur at night as a contingency
to permit. If night work is required or proposed by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall obtain all required noise variance permits from the
local agencies for night work.
Construction beyond these hours shall be allowed only after the
Contractor applies for and receives a noise variance from the
jurisdiction having authority to regulate hours of Work.
D. Surfacing Operations
1.
The Contractor shall arrange surfacing operations so that the placing
of materials will be accomplished during daylight hours. However,
when necessary to complete a specific portion of the project within
the time specified, or to avoid peak periods of public traffic, Work may
be undertaken during the hours of darkness, provided the Contractor
applies for and receives a noise variance from the jurisdiction having
authority to regulate hours of Work and furnishes and operates
adequate lighting. Inability to demonstrate reliable and satisfactory
results will be reason to order termination of night operations, and
the Contractor shall procure additional equipment and personnel
necessary to satisfactorily complete the Work as specified while
operating during daylight hours only.
E. Construction Area Lighting
1.
2.
All working areas utilized by the Contractor to perform Work during the
hours of darkness shall be lighted to conform to the minimum
illumination intensities of Occupational Safety and Health Construction
Safety Orders and any additional jurisdictional requirements.
All lighting fixtures shall be mounted and directed in a manner
precluding glare to approaching traffic and adjacent housing facilities.
F. Equipment
1.
2.
Equipment shall comply with pertinent equipment noise standards of
the Washington State Department of Ecology and any additional
jurisdictional requirements.
All equipment shall have sound control devices no less effective than
those provided on the original equipment. All exhausts shall be muffled.
6
1.06
SEASONAL RESTRICTIONS ON WORK
A.
The following Table 01 11 00 -1 provides a list of events which may impact
the Contractor’s construction activities. The Contractor is required to
schedule the Work so as not to disrupt or disturb the events as scheduled.
The table refers to route maps for certain events which are included in
Appendix B – Event Route Maps of these specifications.
Table 01 11 00 -1
Events/Scheduling for Fourth Plain BRT Contract
Entity/Event
Downtown Vancouver
Location
Provision/Dates
Block 10/ City of Vancouver
Block bounded by
Washington, 8th,
Columbia, 9th
Downtown Vancouver
Turtle Place
Vancouver USA Marathon
Summer Solstice Scavenger
Hunt
See route map
Big Shindig Car Show
Twilight Half-Marathon Bike
Race
Not available for construction
staging during all of 2015 and 2016.
No events until the construction has
been completed, Contractor is no
longer using Turtle Place as a
staging area, and C-TRAN has reopened Turtle Place for public use
June 18-21, 2015; June 16-19, 2016.
See route map; construction
activities must avoid impacts on
these routes during those dates.
Broadway at 11th
Empty Lot Between
Main and
Washington (north
of Mill Plain)
Saturday, June 20, 2015
See route map
Saturday, July 11, 2015
Main Street
through downtown;
Washington Street,
City of Vancouver Cruisin the McLoughlin to 6th.
Gut
See route map.
See route map. 8th
Cosmo 7K Walk/bike/run
Street south.
Evergreen Blvd.
south. See route
Champagne Bike Ride
map.
7
Saturday, July 11, 2015
Saturday, July 18, 2015; Saturday,
July 16, 2016. No construction
activates on Main, Washington or
Broadway during those dates
Saturday, August 08, 2015
Sunday, August 09, 2015
Entity/Event
Uptown Show and Shine Car
Show
Location
Provision/Dates
Main Street
Main Street
between
McLoughlin and
Evergreen. See
Vancouver Century Bike Ride route map.
Friends of the Poor Walk/ St.
James Church
Girlfriends Half Marathon
City of Vancouver
Fort Vancouver Way
Clark College
Westfield Vancouver Mall
Westfield Vancouver Mall
C-TRAN Facility
Citywide
August 29, 2015. Construction
activities allowed but may not
detour traffic to Main Street.
September 26, 2015. Construction
activities may not detour traffic to C
or Columbia Streets during this
time.
October 11, 2015.
Construction activities must comply
with City's Noise Ordinance Section
7.05.010: generally, construction
limited to 7AM to 8PM with few
exceptions.
Fort Vancouver
Way
Allowable Work window: July 1
through Labor Day, September 7,
2015 and September 5, 2016
Mall
No construction Veterans' Day,
November 11 through New Year's
Day, January 1 on-site
See route map.
See route map.
C-TRAN
Maintenance
Facility
C-TRAN
South Lot
1.07
Saturday, August 15, 2015
Roadeo August 22-23, 2015; no
construction activities in current
maintenance/bus yard during that
time
No off-site user use of parking lot,
starting July 1, 2015 until end of
project
PROJECT CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT WEB SITE
A. A project specific construction Web site will be administered by the
Construction Manager and will be used for purposes of managing
communication and documents during the construction stages.
B. Use Construction Manager's provided Project Construction Management Web
site for the purpose of managing project communication and documentation
until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include hosting and the following
functions:
8
1. Project directory.
2. Project correspondence.
3. Meeting minutes.
4. Contract modifications forms and logs.
5. RFI forms and logs.
6. Task and issue management.
7. Photo documentation.
8. Schedule and calendar management.
9. Submittals forms and logs.
10. Payment application forms.
11. Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing, and updating.
12. Online document collaboration.
13. Reminder and tracking functions.
14. Archiving functions.
C. Contractors and other parties granted access by the Construction Manager
to the Project Construction Management Web site shall execute a data licensing
agreement in the form of AIA Document C106 or Agreement acceptable to
Contracting Agency and Construction Manager.
1.08
SUSPENSION OF WORK
A. Section 1-08.6 is supplemented with the following:
(January 5, 2015)
Contract time may be suspended for procurement of critical materials
(Procurement Suspension). In order to receive a Procurement Suspension, the
Contractor shall within 21 calendar days after execution of the contract by the
Contracting Agency, place purchase orders for all materials deemed critical by
the Contracting Agency for physical completion of the contract. The Contractor
shall provide copies of purchase orders for the critical materials. Such purchase
orders shall disclose the purchase order date and estimated delivery dates for
such critical material.
The Contractor shall show procurement of the materials listed below as
activities in the Progress Schedule. If the approved Progress Schedule indicates
that the materials procurement are critical activities, and if the Contractor has
provided documentation that purchase orders are placed for the critical
materials within the prescribed 21 calendar days, then contract time shall be
suspended upon physical completion of all critical work except that work
dependent upon the below listed critical materials:
9
Traffic Signal Poles
Charging of contract time will resume upon delivery of the critical materials to
the Contractor or 120 calendar days after execution by the Contracting Agency,
whichever occurs first.
1.09
STAGING
A. C-TRAN has identified Turtle Place as a potential staging area for the
Contractor’s use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
BUY AMERICA REQUIREMENTS
A. Products named in these specifications indicate minimal Basis of Design functional
requirements, although the products may not meet FTA Buy America
requirements. The Contractor is required to obtain Certificate of Materials Origin
for all products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
REQUIREMENTS
A. Work under this contract shall be performed in compliance with the contract plans,
these unique specifications and special provisions, and the WSDOT Standard
Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction (2014), including
amendments included in the Contract as of the bid date
B. These specifications, though prepared in CSI Masterspec© form, adopt by
reference the WSDOT Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal
Construction (2014), including amendments included in the Contract as of the bid
date, hereafter referred to as the Standard Specifications. All work shall be
performed in compliance with the Standard Specifications unless specifically
amended by these special provisions. Should a discrepancy with jurisdictional
requirements be found that is material to the work being performed, the
Construction Manager shall determine which requirements shall apply.
C. In the event of conflicts between these unique specifications and special provisions
and the WSDOT Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal
Construction (2014), including amendments included in the Contract as of the Bid
date, the most stringent requirement as determined by the Construction Manager
shall apply. When the Contractor believes a conflict exists, the Contractor shall
notify the Construction Manager who shall make the determination regarding the
requirements to be followed. The Construction Manager’s decision in these matters
shall be final.
10
D. For the purposes of these special provisions, amend shall mean to alter, modify,
rephrase, or add to or subtract from. Modify shall mean to change, alter, or amend.
E. Where a measurement or payment section is included in these specifications, it
shall be understood that the section replaces the same from the Standard
Specifications in its entirety, unless specifically indicted otherwise.
3.02
DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions shall be added to the list presented in Section 1-01.3 of
the Standard Specifications. Where a term definition already exists in the Standard
Specifications, the term defined below shall supersede that existing definition.
1. Agency, C-TRAN, Owner – See definition for Contracting Agency in Section
1-01.3.
2. Permitting Agency – The jurisdiction having permit authority over the
Work, typically the City of Vancouver
3. Resident Engineer, Project Engineer, Resident Architect, Architect, Owner’s
Representative – See definition for Engineer in Section 1-01.3. Where these
terms appear in the Contract, it shall typically be meant to refer to the
Construction Manager. Where a specific review, submittal, test, etc. is
indicated to be completed by the Project Engineer, architect, or similar from
the designer of record, the Contactor shall make such request to the
Construction Manager for scheduling.
4. Owner – The Owner of this project is C-TRAN (“C-TRAN” or “Owner”) which
is governed by its Board of Directors (“Board”).
5. City of Vancouver – Local permitting agency with authority to inspect Work
in adherence to the project Contract Documents
6. WSDOT – Washington State Department of Transportation, State permitting
agency for work within State owned right of way.
7. Standard Specifications – WSDOT “Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge,
and Municipal Construction”, (2014), including amendments included in
the Contract as of the bid date, published by the Washington State
Department of Transportation.
END OF SECTION
11
SECTION 01 14 17 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS (SECTION 1-05.14)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 1-05.14 –
Cooperation with Other Contractors and other sections referenced therein, of the
Standard Specifications as amended herein.
B. Description
1. The Work in this Section includes the Contractor’s coordination with
adjacent projects.
C. It is anticipated that the following work adjacent to or within the limits of this
project will be performed by others during the course of this project and will
require coordination of the work:
1. Artwork for the C-TRAN Fourth Plain BRT and Vancouver Mall Transit
Center.
2. Technology Procurement Contract.
3. C-TRAN Fourth Plain BRT Maintenance Facility Expansion
4. C-TRAN Fourth Plain BRT Vancouver Mall Transit Center
5. Clark College Red Lot 2 Repaving
D. The Contractor shall coordinate with the work of other Agency and utility projects
and plan this coordination during routine Contractor coordination meetings.
E. Measurement
1. No separate measurement will be made for the Work of this Section.
F.
Payment
1. No separate payment shall be made for the Work described in this Section.
The cost of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to other Contract
prices.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not Used
PART 3 – EXECUTION – Not Used
END OF SECTION
12
SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes alternate bidding and award procedures. General Bidding
and Award procedures and requirements are covered in the C-TRAN General
Conditions and Procurement Requirements.
1.02
ALTERNATES BIDDING
A. This Bid Proposal requires the bidder to bid on each Alternate as part of the bid.
As such the bidder is required to submit a Base Bid and a bid for each of the
Alternate(s).
B. Bid Proposal
The bid proposal is composed of the following parts:
1. Base Bid
a. The base bid shall include constructing all stations as indicated in
the Contract Documents.
2. Bid Alternates
a. Alternate 1 as indicated below as Alternate 1A, 1B. 1C, and 1D,
changes Minor Stations to Major Stations. This is done by changing
which Platform Type applies at specific locations. All locations
where Alternate 1 could be exercised, up to 17 total stations as
noted on the Plans, are Platform Type 2b or 2b sim in the base bid.
If the alternate is implemented at these locations the Platform
Type will change from 2b to 1a or 2bsim to 1b. The footprint of the
platform remains unchanged, the primary difference between the
Platform Types for the Major and Minor Stations include; the
shelter length, extent of railings, quantity of amenities, extent of
footings, quantity of electrical and lighting components, etc.
b. Each alternate listed below consists of changing a select quantity
number of stations within the range indicated from Minor Stations
to Major Stations. Upon execution of an alternate, the Contracting
Agency has the option of determining the number of stations
within the range specified, as well as which specific stations, to
change from Minor to Major.
c. The four (4) alternates were created to allow the Contracting
Agency the flexibility of upgrading specific quantities of stations at
the Contracting Agency’s discretion. The purpose of the alternate
options is to realize economies of scale as the number of stations
changed increases with each successive alternate.
13
d. The 7th Street at Turtle Place Station is the only station that is
currently indicated in the Base Bid as being a Major station and
will not be counted in any alternate that is executed.
e. The bidder shall enter on the Bid Form, a net increased cost per
each station to change from a Minor Station to a Major Station for
each alternate indicated.
f. The bid alternates are described as follows:
1) Alternate 1A
Construct at least 1 and up to 4 Station Platforms as Major
Station Platforms.
Unit cost increase per each station.
The bid item for Alternate 1A is 13 13 00.A.
2) Alternate 1B
Construct at least 5 and up to 8 Station Platforms as Major
Station Platforms.
Unit cost increase per each station.
The bid item for Alternate 1B is 13 13 00.B.
3) Alternate 1C
Construct at least 9 and up to 12 Station Platforms as Major
Station Platforms.
Unit cost increase per each station.
The bid item for Alternate 1C is 13 13 00.C.
4) Alternate 1D
Construct at least 13 and up to 17 Station Platforms as
Major
Station Platforms.
Unit cost increase per each station.
The bid item for Alternate 1D is 13 13 00.D.
C. Bidding Procedures
1. To be considered responsive the bidder shall submit a price on each and
every item of work included in the Base Bid and all Alternates.
D. Award Procedures
1. The successful bidder will be the bidder submitting the lowest
responsible bid for the Base Bid plus alternates determined at the sole
discretion of the Contracting Agency.
2. In any case, the award will be subject to the requirements of C-TRAN
General Conditions and Procurement Requirements.
END OF SECTION
14
SECTION 01 25 13 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Description
1. This Work consists of providing substitutions for products that become
unavailable or when product substitution may be advantageous to the
Contracting Agency.
B. Measurement
1. No measurement will be made for Work described in this Section.
C. Payment
1. No separate payment shall be made for the Work described in this Section.
The cost of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to other Contract
prices.
PART 2 EXECUTION
2.01
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through
no fault of the Contractor.
B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of
proposed substitution with Contract Documents, including materials
demonstrating compliance with Buy America provisions for manufactured
goods.
C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or
exceeds the quality level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified
product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may
be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to
Contracting Agency.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may
subsequently become apparent.
15
5. Will reimburse Contracting Agency and Design Engineer for review or
redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities.
6. Each request for substitution approval shall include:
a. Identity of Product for which substitution is requested; include
Specification page and line number.
b. Identity of substitution; include complete Product description,
drawings, photographs, performance and test data, and any other
information necessary for evaluation.
c. Quality comparison of proposed substitution with specified product.
d. Changes in other Work required because of substitution.
e. Effect on construction progress schedule.
f. Cost of proposed substitution compared with specified product.
g. Any required license fees or royalties.
h. Availability of maintenance service.
i. Source of replacement materials.
D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop
drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when
acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.
E. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit information electronically as required by Section 01 33 00, and
provide three (3) copies of request for substitution for consideration.
Limit each request to one (1) proposed substitution.
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to
the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
3. The Construction Manager will notify Contractor in writing of decision to
accept or reject request.
4. Contracting Agency will be sole judge of acceptability of any proposed
substitution.
2.02
SUBSTITUTIONS DURING BIDDING PERIOD
A. For substitution procedures during the biding period, refer to section 2.3 and 2.4
of the bid documents.
2.03
CONTRACT COMPLIANCE
A. Substitution approval does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for proper
execution of the Work and for compliance with other Contract requirements.
END OF SECTION
16
SECTION 01 27 00 MEASUREMENT (SECTION 1-09.1 and 1-09.2)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision replaces Sections 1-09.1 and 1-09.2 of the Standard
Specifications.
B. All Work acceptably completed under this Contract will be measured, unless
otherwise specified, using United States standard measure.
C. No payment will be made for:
1. Work performed or Materials placed outside of lines indicated in the
Contract drawings or established by the Construction Manager.
2. Materials wasted, used or disposed of in a manner not called for under the
Contract.
3. Rejected Materials, including Material rejected after it has been placed, by
reason of the failure of the Contractor to conform to the provisions of the
Contract.
4. Hauling and disposing of rejected Materials; Material remaining on hand
after completion of the Work.
5. Compliance with the requirements of this Section.
1.02
1.03
REFERENCES
Sponsor
ASTM
Number
D4311
RCW
Chapter 19.94
Subject
Determining Asphalt Volume Correction to a Base
Temperature
MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES
A. The method of measurement and computations to be used in determination of
quantities of Material furnished or of Work performed under the Contract will be
those methods generally recognized as conforming to good engineering practice
and will be carried to the proper significant figures or fractions of units for each
item.
B. All items measured on an area or volume (in-place) basis will be measured to the
neat line dimensions shown on the Contract drawings, stated in the Specifications,
or as directed by the Construction Manager. Unless otherwise specified,
measurements will be made horizontally or vertically.
17
C. All items which are measured by length, such as pipe culverts, under-drains, etc.,
will be measured in a horizontal plane parallel to the Structure’s base or
foundation unless otherwise shown in the Contract drawings.
D. Materials to be measured by volume in the hauling vehicle shall be hauled in
approved vehicles and measured therein at the point of delivery. Vehicles for this
purpose may be of any size or type acceptable to the Construction Manager,
provided that the body is of such shape that the actual contents may be readily and
accurately determined. When required by the Construction Manager, the loads
shall be leveled when the vehicles arrive at the point of delivery to facilitate
measurement. Measurement of volume will be the mean height times width times
length.
E. In computing volumes of excavation and embankment, the average end area
method will be used. Corrections for curvature will be made where deemed
advisable by the Construction Manager.
F. Structures will be measured according to neat lines shown in the Contract
Drawings or as directed by the Construction Manager to fit field conditions.
G. When a complete structure or structural unit is specified as the unit of
measurement, the unit will include all necessary fittings and accessories.
H. When standard manufactured items are specified such as fence, wire, plates, rolled
shapes, pipe conduit, etc., and these items are identified by gauge, unit weight,
section dimensions, etc., such identifications will be considered to be nominal
weights or dimensions.
I. The term "ton" means the short ton consisting of 2,000 pounds avoirdupois.
J. Portland cement will be measured by the pound, ton, sack, bag, or barrel. The
terms "sack" and "bag" of cement will each mean 94 pounds and the term "barrel"
of cement will mean 376 pounds.
K. Asphalt will be measured by the gallon or ton in US measure. Volumes will be
measured at 60F or will be corrected to the volume at 60F in accordance with
ASTM D4311.
L. All quantities marked "Fixed Quantity" on the bid list are approximate and denote
final pay quantities, based on the neat lines shown on the Contract drawings. The
Owner makes no representations concerning the accuracy of the quantity, nor will
the quantity be revised based on new calculations or field measurements.
However, if the neat lines are revised by Change Order, the Owner will revise the
fixed quantities accordingly.
18
M. For all pay quantities which require a field measurement of quantity for pay
purposes, the Contractor shall make said measurement, provide the Construction
Manager field notes documenting the measurement and certify as to the accuracy
of the notes and measurements prior to submittal of request for final payment for
any bid item. Measurements which cannot be verified by the Construction Manager
after completion of construction due to the Work being covered or inaccessible,
will be verified by the Construction Manager prior to covering and while the Work
is accessible.
N. Lump sum, when used means the Work described shall be completed and accepted
without measurement unless the Construction Manager orders changes in writing.
If estimated quantities of the Work to be performed are listed, they are only to
provide a basis for adjusting payment. The estimated quantities are approximate
only and are made from a reasonable interpretation of Contract drawings and
intent. No guarantee is made that computations based on the details and
dimensions shown on the Contract drawings or in the Specifications will equal
these estimated quantities.
1.04
WEIGHING DEVICES
A. When the method of measurement requires determination of pay quantities by
weighing, the Contractor shall utilize and maintain acceptable beam-type scales or
other approved weighing devices. Each weighing device shall be accurate within
0.5 percent throughout the range of use and the Contractor shall have scales
checked, adjusted certified, and approved under rules of the Washington State
Department of Agriculture’s Weights and Measures Section and shall conform to
RCW Chapter 19.94. Use platform scales of sufficient size and capacity to permit
the entire vehicle or combination of vehicles to rest on the scale platform while
being weighed. Combination vehicles may be weighed as separate units provided
they are disconnected while being weighed.
B. The daily record of scale weights shall be checked and compiled. Certified weigh
slips and daily summary weigh sheets shall be furnished. A duplicate weigh slip or
a load slip shall be furnished to the driver of each vehicle and delivered to the
Construction Manager at the point of delivery of the Material.
C. On a daily basis, those trucks used to haul Material being paid for by weight shall
be weighed in an empty state. Weight shall be marked at such additional times as
the Construction Manager may require. Each truck shall be marked with a plainly
legible identification.
D. Payment for all costs involved in providing, maintaining, inspecting and testing the
scales and transporting Materials to the scales will be included in the payment
made for the listed pay items.
19
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
END OF SECTION
20
SECTION 01 29 73 PAYMENT (SECTION 1-09.3 through 109.10)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Sections 1-09.03
through 1-09.10 – Payment Sections and other sections referenced therein, of the
Standard Specifications as amended herein.
B. Related Sections
1. 01 32 13 - Progress Schedule
C. Measurement
1. Measurement will be made for Work as described in this Section.
2. No separate measurement will be made for the Schedule of Values.
D. Payment
1. Payment shall be made for Work as described in this Section.
2. No payment shall be made for Schedule of Values. The cost for meeting
these requirements shall be incidental to other Contract prices.
1.02
REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 1-09.9 is amended to include preparation of a Schedule of Values as
follows:
1. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Construction Manager at the
Pre-Construction Meeting, a detailed a Preliminary Schedule of Values in
conjunction with the Preliminary 90 Day Schedule covering the first 90 days
in acceptable detail and the balance of the project activities in outline
following Notice to Proceed. Within seven (7) days of receipt, the
Construction Manager will either respond with acceptance or direction to
amend and resubmit.
2. Approval of the Contract Schedule of Values is required prior to approval of
the Contract schedule submittal; therefore, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit the Contract Schedule of Values within 30 days after the date of
Notice to Proceed. Within 15 days, the Construction Manager will either
respond with acceptance or direction to amend and resubmit.
21
1.03
CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. The Schedule of Values is a supplemental detailed version of the Bid Schedule and
will be the basis for cash flow.
B. The Schedule of Values shall be developed by subdividing the Bid Schedule into
sufficient detail to serve as the basis for cash flow reports and projections, and may
be used to facilitate calculations of progress payments.
C. The Schedule of Values will follow a numbering format directly related to that of
the Bid Schedule and which can also be directly related to Contractor’s Baseline
Construction Schedule line items.
D. The Schedule of Values shall not exceed the quantities, values, or lump sum price in
the Bid Schedule.
E. The Schedule of Values will be updated as necessary to reflect changed, deleted, or
additional Work.
1.04
SCOPE OF PAYMENT
Section 1-09.3 is supplemented with the following:
(February 13, 2012)
Fuel Cost Adjustment
General
The Contracting Agency will make a fuel cost adjustment, either a credit or a payment,
for qualifying changes in the index price of on-highway diesel fuel. The adjustment will
be applied to partial payments made according to Section 1-09.9.
The adjustment is not a guarantee of full compensation for fuel price changes. Any
adjustment provided by this provision shall not obligate the Contracting Agency for any
costs due solely to changes in fuel costs beyond the amount adjusted by this provision.
The Contracting Agency does not guarantee that fuel will be available at the base fuel
cost or monthly fuel cost. No additional adjustment will be made for rates of fuel
consumption or actual fuel types that differ from those specified for the purpose of
determining the adjustment.
22
For the purpose of calculating the adjustment, the Base Fuel Cost shall be the Weekly
fuel price from the U.S. Energy Information Administration Web site. The Web site
location and directions are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
http://www.eia.gov/petroleum/gasdiesel/
On the web page, click on the West Coast less California, listed under the
heading U.S On-Highway Diesel Fuel Prices*(dollar per gallon) at the lower
end of the web page.
In the pull down box labeled Period pull down Weekly.
Click on the fuel price history found under the column heading View History
for the line Diesel (On-Highway) – All Types.
On this web page obtain the nearest weekly fuel cost for the Monday
occurring three (3) weeks prior to the date that bids are opened. This weekly
fuel cost becomes the Base Fuel Cost and is fixed for the duration of the
Contract and will be used in calculating all adjustments.
The Monthly Fuel Cost shall be the most recent Monthly fuel price from the U.S. Energy
Information Administration Web site. The Web site location and directions are as
follows:
•
•
•
•
•
http://www.eia.gov/petroleum/gasdiesel/
On the web page, click on the West Coast less California, listed under the
heading U.S On-Highway Diesel Fuel Prices*(dollar per gallon) at the lower
end of the web page.
In the pull down box labeled Period pull down Monthly.
Click on the fuel price history found under the column heading View History
for the line Diesel (On-Highway) – All Types.
On this web page obtain the most current monthly fuel price.
If the specified index ceases to be available for any reason, the Contracting Agency at its
discretion will select and begin using a substitute price source or index to establish the
Monthly Fuel Cost.
Measurement
No adjustment will be made if the Monthly Fuel Cost is within ten (10) percent of the
Base Fuel Cost. No adjustment will be made for work performed after the authorized
Time for Completion.
If the Monthly Fuel Cost is greater than or equal to 110 percent of the Base Fuel Cost,
then:
Adjustment = (Monthly Fuel Cost – (1.10 x Base Fuel Cost)) x Q
If the Monthly Fuel Cost is less than or equal to 90 percent of the Base Fuel Cost, then:
Adjustment = (Monthly Fuel Cost – (0.90 x Base Fuel Cost)) x Q
23
Where Q =  ((Fuel Usage Factor for each Eligible Bid Item) x (Quantity paid in the
current months progress estimate for each Eligible Bid Item)) for all Eligible Bid Items
listed below:
Eligible Bid Item
31 23 34.01 Structural Excavation (Stations)
31 23 34.02 Structural Excavation (Retaining Walls)
31 23 35.06 Roadway Excavation Incl. Haul
32 11 23.01 Crushed Surfacing Top Course
(or Base Course - Roadway)
32 11 23.02 Crushed Surfacing Top Course
(or Base Course - Conc Bus Pad)
32 12 20.01 HMAC CL. 1/2" PG 70-22 (Base Course)
32 12 20.02 HMAC CL. 1/2" PG 70-22 (Wearing Course)
32 13 74.01 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
(Dowelled) – 12" Thickness
32 13 74.02 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
(Dowelled) – 11" Thickness
Fuel Usage Factor
0.25 gal/cy
0.25 gal/cy
0.29 gal/cy
1.02 gal/cy
1.02 gal/cy
0.90 gal/cy
0.90 gal/cy
1.0 gal/cy
1.0 gal/cy
Payment
Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1 for the following bid item
included in the bid proposal:
01 29 73.01 Fuel Cost Adjustment, by calculation.
To provide a common proposal for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an
amount in the proposal to become a part of the Contractor’s total bid.
(January 5, 2015)
Steel Cost Adjustment
The Contractor may elect to participate in the steel cost adjustments for work
permanently incorporated into this Contract. Steel cost adjustment is not a guarantee of
full compensation for changes to the cost of steel items; not eligible for all items with
steel; and any adjustment provided by this provision will not obligate the Contracting
Agency for any costs beyond the amount adjusted by this provision.
This Special Provision provides the option to opt-in to steel cost adjustments for eligible
Bid items. The Contractor is provided one opportunity to opt-in and there are no future
opt-out provisions. The steel cost adjustment requirements of this Special Provision
apply for the duration of the Contract.
General
The Contractor may select Bid items from the list below to be included in the steel cost
adjustment. The Contractor is not obligated to select any Bid items or to participate in
24
the steel cost adjustment program. The steel cost adjustment will apply only to the Bid
items selected by the Contractor.
Prior to Contract execution, the Contractor shall submit the Steel Cost Adjustment OptIn Bid Item List, WSDOT Form 410-031, to the Clark County Public Transportation
Benefit Area (dba C-TRAN) Administration Office. The form is to be received at the
C-TRAN Administration Office located at 2425 NE 65th Avenue, PO Box 2529,
Vancouver, WA 98661-2529. The Steel Cost Adjustment Opt-In Bid Item List shall be
signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor. Should the Contractor fail to
return this document as required no Bid items will be eligible for steel cost adjustment.
Steel Index Values
The Contracting Agency will use the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) producer price
index (PPI) series Id: WPUSISTEEL1 index value for steel cost adjustments.
The Base Steel Materials Value (BV) will be the most recent value published on the BLS
Web site on the day of bid opening. This value will be fixed on the day of bid opening
even if the BLS lists this as a preliminary value. The Monthly Steel Materials Value (MV)
will be the final index value published on the BLS Web site for any month during the
Contract.
Measurement
The Contracting Agency has determined the initial cost basis of steel to be $0.40. This
cost basis is reflected in the steel cost adjustment calculations below, is nonnegotiable,
and will be taken as a fixed value for the duration of the Contract.
For each month that steel material is incorporated into the permanent Work of the
Contract or paid for as Materials on Hand and the MV is more than 110 percent or less
than 90 percent of the BV the Contractor shall provide the Construction Manager with
the following for each eligible Bid item by the end of the following month:
1. The weight of steel material for the month.
2. Documentation of the weight and shipment to the Contractor of the steel
material by bills of lading, invoices, or purchase orders.
Should the Contractor not provide the required documentation as specified the
following shall apply:
1. Steel material that has an MV that is more than 110 percent of the BV will not be
eligible for a steel cost adjustment.
2. The steel cost adjustment for a Bid item with an MV that is less than 90 percent
of the BV will be calculated using a weight of steel determined by the
Construction Manager.
Steel materials will not be eligible for cost adjustments until all requirements of the
Contract have been met. Steel added to a Contract as part of a Value Engineering Change
25
Proposal will not be eligible for steel cost adjustment. Steel cost adjustments made in
accordance with this Special Provision will not be reflected on payments made to the
Contractor until after the index value required for the calculation becomes final.
Preliminary index values may be used to establish the BV, but will not be used to
establish the MV in calculations.
For each Bid Item selected by the Contractor on the Steel Cost Adjustment Opt-In Bid
Item List form a cost adjustment evaluation will be made. A cost adjustment will only be
made if the MV for the month the Work associated with the Bid Item is performed
differs by more than ten-percent from the BV.
The steel cost adjustment will be determined as follows:
1. If the MV is within ten-percent of the BV, there will be no adjustment.
2. If the MV is more than 110 percent of the BV, then
CA = (((MV - BV) ÷ BV) - 0.10) × ($0.40/lb × WS)
3. If the MV is less than 90-percent of the BV, then
CA = (((MV - BV) ÷ BV) + 0.10) × ($0.40/lb × WS)
Where:
CA = Cost Adjustment, dollars
MV = Monthly Steel Materials Value from BLS for the month determined above
BV = Base Steel Materials Value taken as the most recent value published on the
BLS Web site on the day of bid opening.
WS = Weight of steel eligible for cost adjustment
The following Bid Items are eligible for the steel cost adjustment program for this
Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
13 1300.01 7th Street at Turtle Place Station, Complete LS
13 1300.02 Washington and 12th Street Station, Complete LS
13 1300.03 Broadway and 13th Street Station, Complete LS
13 1300.04 Broadway and 15th Street Station, Complete LS
13 1300.05 McLoughlin and Washington Street Station, Complete LS
13 1300.06 Marshall/Luepke Community Center Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
13 1300.07 Marshall/Luepke Community Center Station - Westbound, Complete LS
13 1300.08 Central Campus Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
13 1300.09 Central Campus Station - Westbound, Complete LS
13 1300.10 Gaiser Hall Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
13 1300.11 Gaiser Hall Station - Westbound, Complete LS
13 1300.12 Fourth Plain and Fort Vancouver Way Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
13 1300.13 Fort Vancouver Way and Fourth Plain Station - Westbound, Complete LS
26
n. 13 1300.14 Grand Boulevard Station – Eastbound, Complete LS
o. 13 1300.15 Grand Boulevard Station – Westbound, Complete LS
p. 13 1300.16 Todd Road Station – Eastbound, Complete LS
q. 13 1300.17 Todd Road Station – Westbound, Complete LS
r. 13 1300.18 General Anderson Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
s. 13 1300.19 General Anderson Station - Westbound, Complete LS
t. 13 1300.20 Stapleton Road Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
u. 13 1300.21 Stapleton Road Station - Westbound, Complete LS
v. 13 1300.22 57th Avenue Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
w. 13 1300.23 57th Avenue Station - Westbound, Complete LS
x. 13 1300.24 65th Avenue Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
y. 13 1300.25 65th Avenue Station - Westbound, Complete LS
z. 13 1300.26 Andresen Road Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
aa. 13 1300.27 Andresen Road Station - Westbound, Complete LS
ab. 13 1300.28 78th Avenue Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
ac. 13 1300.29 78th Avenue Station - Westbound, Complete LS
ad. 13 1300.30 86th Avenue Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
ae. 13 1300.31 86th Avenue Station - Westbound, Complete LS
af. 13 1300.32 Thurston Way Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
ag. 13 1300.33 Thurston Way Station - Westbound, Complete LS
ah. 32 13 74.01 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Dowelled) – 12" Thickness
ai. 32 13 74.02 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Dowelled) – 11" Thickness
aj. 32 32 13.01 Cast-in-Place Concrete Retaining Wall
Payment
Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1 for the following bid item
included in the bid proposal:
01 29 73.02 Steel Cost Adjustment, by calculation.
To provide a common proposal for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an
amount in the proposal to become a part of the Contractor’s total bid.
1.05 PAYMENT FOR MATERIAL ON HAND
The last paragraph of Section 1-09.8 is revised to read:
(August 3, 2009)
The Contracting Agency will not pay for material on hand when the invoice cost is less
than $2,000. As materials are used in the work, credits equaling the partial payments
for them will be taken on future estimates. Each month, no later than the estimate due
date, the Contractor shall submit a letter to the Construction Manager that clearly states:
1) the amount originally paid on the invoice (or other record of production cost) for the
items on hand, 2) the dollar amount of the material incorporated into each of the
various work items for the month, and 3) the amount that should be retained in
material on hand items. If work is performed on the items and the Contractor does not
submit a letter, all of the previous material on hand payment will be deducted on the
27
estimate. Partial payment for materials on hand shall not constitute acceptance. Any
material will be rejected if found to be faulty even if partial payment for it has been
made.
1.06 RETAINAGE
Section 1-09.9(1) content and title is deleted in its entirety.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
END OF SECTION
28
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
B.
Measurement
1.
C.
No measurement will be made for Work described in this Section.
Payment
1.
1.02
This Work consists of attendance, responsibilities, coordination,
cooperation, and time requirements for Project meetings.
No separate payment shall be made for the Work in this Section. The
costs of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to other
Contract prices.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A.
The Construction Manager will schedule the pre-construction meeting, prior to
the start of any Work and within 30 days of the notice to proceed, at the Project
site and will notify all parties concerned of the time and place of the meeting.
B.
The meeting will be conducted by the Construction Manager and shall address
the conduct of the job, lines of communications and the like.
C.
The Contractor and their principal Subcontractors shall attend. Others, at the
Contractor’s option, are invited to attend.
D.
The Construction Manager may invite other C-TRAN, City of Vancouver, and
WSDOT staff to attend.
E.
At a minimum, the agenda shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Establish a sound working relationship among the Contractor, the
Contracting Agency’s Project Manager and Communications
Coordinator, the Construction Manager and staff, and representatives of
appropriate agencies.
Discuss progress, submittal and delivery schedules.
Review communities' concerns.
Distribution and discussion of list of Subcontractors and tentative
Construction Schedule.
29
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
F.
The Construction Manager will perform the following at this meeting:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
G.
Discussion of critical Work sequencing.
Designation of Contractor's responsible personnel.
Processing field decisions and Contract Change Orders.
Miscellaneous procedures such as recordkeeping, first aid, security,
housekeeping, etc.
Submittal of Working and Shop Drawings, Project data and Samples.
Procedures for maintaining record documents.
Office and storage areas.
Contracting Agency’s use of premises requirements, including South Lot
parking.
Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
Materials furnished by the Contracting Agency.
Tree and water quality protection.
Open discussion.
Explain and discuss the responsibilities and authorities of the
Contracting Agency, the Contracting Agency’s Construction Manager's
organization, including the office of the Construction Manager.
Discuss Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) and affirmative action
requirements.
Explain the requirements of labor provisions stipulated by U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT).
Explain and discuss laws, codes, traffic regulations, permit requirements
of public agencies and their regulations.
Discuss procedures for processing Requests for Information (RFIs),
change notices, Change Orders, Shop and Working Drawings, Product
Data and Samples.
Discuss monthly pay estimate cut-off dates.
Discuss partial and final payments.
Discuss Community Affairs functions and procedures.
The Contractor shall perform the following at this meeting:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ensure the attendance of the Project Manager/ Superintendent, QC
Manager, Safety Representative, EEO Officer, Subcontractor
representatives and Community Affairs representatives.
Introduce Contractor's representatives and briefly describe each
person's responsibilities. Discuss how the QC management group will
perform independently to insure quality in the constructed facilities.
Distribute and discuss a list of major Subcontractors.
Discuss use of office, storage areas, construction areas and temporary
easements.
Define housekeeping procedures.
30
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
1.03
Discuss construction methods.
Describe construction sequencing of entire Contract, general Work Site
layout, erosion and sedimentation control Plan, haul routes, noise, air
and water pollution control, temporary street closing, and street
restoration.
Discuss coordination and notification for utility Work.
Discuss deliveries and priorities of major equipment.
Discuss breakdown of lump sum items.
Discuss Construction Project Schedule status.
Review the preliminary 90 Day Construction Schedule.
Contractor to identify a Community Affairs person from the Contractor's
personnel to work with the Contracting Agency’s Community Affairs
representative.
CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION MEETINGS
A.
Unless otherwise directed, the Construction Manager will hold weekly job
meetings. These meetings shall be attended by the Construction Manager,
Contractor’s Project Manager, Contractor’s Field Superintendent, other
Contractor and Subcontractor supervisory staff as needed, City Inspectors, and
City Engineering Staff assigned to the project.
B.
On an as needed basis, meetings will be held with representatives of local
jurisdictions, community affairs representatives or other agencies involved
with the Project.
C.
The agenda for the weekly job meeting will, at a minimum, include the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Review minutes of previous meetings.
Note field observations, problems and decisions.
Identify present problems and Plan resolution.
Plan Work progress during next Work period and its effect on the
related Work of others.
a.
Presentation by Contractor of look-ahead schedule of Work Plan
for the next 21 days and a seven (7) day history. Schedules shall
be in a form acceptable to the Construction Manager and
accurately represent both the past weeks progress and the
realistic expectations for the next three (3) weeks.
b.
Discussion of current and previous schedule and Plan and actual
achievements.
Review the status of progress payment requests, change proposals and
Change Orders, submittals, requests for information, and other
outstanding issues.
Expedite the Work to completion within the Project schedule.
31
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.04
MINUTES OF MEETINGS
A.
1.05
1.06
Review status of Construction Progress Schedule.
Coordinate occupancy arrangements and access requirements with the
Construction Manager.
Review safety status.
Review status of other Contractors work in regards to shared access.
The Construction Manager will keep minutes of all meetings and distribute
them to all parties present and to those on the agreed upon distribution list
within five (5) days of the meeting.
OTHER MEETINGS
A.
In addition to the regularly scheduled meetings, ad-hoc meetings will be held to
address significant matters or situations that have a bearing on the successful
prosecution of the Contract.
B.
The Construction Manager may also require that a pre-installation conference
be held with the Contractor and the Subcontractor(s) on selective items of
Work.
OTHER COMMUNICATION
A.
The Contractor shall address all questions, issues, and Requests for Information
directly to the Construction Manager. Requests for Information shall be
submitted in writing through Project Web site. The Construction Manager will
forward the communication to the appropriate Agency and/or the Design Team
and others as necessary.
B.
The Construction Manager may grant the Contractor permission to contact
members of the Design Team (design engineer, design architect, etc.) directly to
more effectively resolve an information request. Such permission will be on a
case by case basis.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
END OF SECTION
32
SECTION 01 32 13 PROGRESS SCHEDULE (SECTION 1-08.3)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 1-08.3
– Progress Schedule and all referenced sections therein of the Standard
Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
D.
The Work in this Section includes preparing and submitting a Baseline
Project Work Schedule, progress schedule updates, and weekly look
ahead schedules as specified herein.
01 33 00 - Submittals
01 29 73 - Payment
01 78 39 - Project Record Documents
Measurement
Section 1-08.3(4) is revised to read:
1.
E.
No separate measurement will be made for Work described in this
Section.
Payment
Section 1-08.3(5) is revised to read:
1.
Payment will be made in accordance with 1-04.1, for each of the
following Bid items:
01 32 13.01 Project Work Schedules by the lump sum
2.
Accepted Project Work Schedules will be paid for at the Contract lump
sum price for "Project Work Schedules". Twenty-five percent of the
lump sum will be paid at the monthly progress payment following
acceptance by the Construction Manager of the Detailed Project Work
Schedule, and the balance in equal monthly installments over the
remaining Contract period. Payment will be subject to acceptance by the
Construction Manager of the relevant monthly schedule updates and
any revisions. If submittal of any acceptable update(s) or revision(s)
33
3.
4.
5.
1.02
is/are overdue, in addition to other remedies available to the
Contracting Agency, all payments for Project Work Schedules will be
suspended until all overdue schedule submittals have been submitted to
and accepted by the Construction Manager.
The Contract unit price will be payment in full for furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and doing all Work
necessary to complete the Work specified.
All costs for providing Progress Schedules and Weekly Look-Ahead
Schedules are considered incidental to other items of Work in the
Contract.
No payment will be made for Schedule Updates that are required due
to the Contractors operations. Schedule Updates required by events
that are attributed to the actions of the Contracting Agency will be
paid for in accordance with Section 1-09.4.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section
01 33 00 Submittals, except as modified herein.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PROJECT WORK SCHEDULE
A.
In Section 1-08.3, replace all occurrences of “Type A and/or Type B” with
“Project Work”.
B.
Replace Section 1-08.3(2)A and B with the following:
1.
Initial Schedule –
a.
Ten (10) calendar days prior to the preconstruction conference,
the Contractor shall provide to the Construction Manager one (1)
digital copy in native schedule format and four (4) paper copies
of a time-scaled bar chart. Project Work schedule. The digital
copy shall be compatible with MS Project 2010 or Primavera P6.
The initial schedule shall show:
1)
The expected beginning and completion date of each
activity, including all stages and phases;
2)
The time needed for completion of the utility relocation
work; and
3)
The elements of the traffic control plan
b.
A logic diagram and a time-scaled bar chart will be acceptable in
lieu of a time-scaled logic diagram. The initial schedule shall
show all Work intended for the first 90 days of the Contract to
34
2.
the level of detail described in (2) below, and shall show the
priority and interdependence (sequencing and network logic) of
all major segments of the remainder of the Work in sufficient
detail to provide a clear representation of Contractors critical
path planning and milestones.
Detailed Project Work Schedule –
a.
In addition to the above requirements, and within
30 Calendar days after First Notification, the Contractor shall
provide the Construction Manager one (1) digital copy and four
(4) paper copies of a detailed time-scaled CPM network Project
Work schedule clearly indicating the critical path. The digital
copy shall be compatible with MS Project 2010 or Primavera P6.
The first submitted detailed time-scaled CPM network Project
Work schedule shall also contain a listing of the quantity of Work
for each activity, when appropriate, in common units of measure.
b.
Detailed work schedule activities shall include the following:
1)
All construction activities;
2)
Any limitations of operation specified in Section 01-1100, Summary of Work;
3)
The time needed for completion of the utility relocation
work;
4)
Implementation of MTP for each stage and phase;
5)
Submittal and approval of required Material samples, mix
designs, and shop drawings must be represented and be
appropriately linked to the project critical path reflecting
the following:;
a)
Agency timeframes to process and return
Contractor submitted plans, working drawings,
equipment lists and other submittals (See Section
01-33-00, Submittals);
b)
Procurement of critical Materials;
c)
Fabrication, installation, and testing of special
Material and Equipment;
d)
Duration of Work, including completion times of
all stages and their sub-phases; and
e)
Specified cure times for all concrete elements.
c.
The activities shall be separately identifiable by coding or use of
sub-networks or both. The duration of each activity shall be
verifiable and consistent with the description in the Project
narrative required in (3) below.
d.
Detailed sub-networks shall include all necessary activities and
logic connectors to describe the Work and all restrictions on it. In
the restraints, include those activities from any Project Work
schedule that initiated the sub-network as well as those
restrained by it.
e.
The time scale used on the Contractor's detailed time-scaled CPM
35
f.
g.
network Project Work schedule shall be appropriate for the
duration of the activities and the Project duration. The time scale
shall be in normal workdays, defined as every day except
Saturday, Sunday and legal holidays, with calendar dates
identified no less than the first and midpoint of each calendar
month. Legal holidays are defined as January 1st, the third
Monday of January, the third Monday of February, Memorial Day,
July 4th, Labor Day, November 11th, Thanksgiving day, the day
after Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. The smallest unit shown
shall be one day. No activity duration shall exceed 30 calendar
days. The network shall show the length of the activity or part
scaled to accurately represent the number of normal workdays
Scheduled. Distinct symbols or graphics shall be used to show
multiple shift, holiday, or weekend work. The schedule network
drawing(s) shall include a title block showing the Contract name
and number, Contractor's name, date of original schedule, and all
update dates; and a legend containing the symbols used, their
definitions, and the time scale, shown graphically. To ensure
readability the drawings shall be on a reasonable size of paper
up to a maximum of 36 inch x 36 inch, using multiple sheets
when needed. The Contractor shall include a tabulation of each
activity in the computer mathematical analysis of the network
diagram. The following information represents the minimum
required for each activity:
1)
Event (node) number(s) for each activity;
2)
Maintain event (node) numbers throughout the Project;
3)
Activity description;
4)
Original duration of activities (in normal workdays);
5)
Estimated remaining duration of activities (in normal
workdays);
6)
Earliest start date and actual start date (by calendar
date);
7)
Earliest finish date and actual finish date (by calendar
date);
8)
Latest start date (by calendar date);
9)
Latest finish date (by calendar date); and
10)
Slack or float time (in workdays).
Computer print-outs shall consist of at least a node sort and an
"early start/total-float" sort.
Within 14 calendar days after submission of the detailed timescaled CPM network Project Work schedule, the Construction
Manager and the Contractor shall meet to review the detailed
time-scaled CPM network Project Work schedule as submitted.
Within seven (7) calendar of the meeting, the Contractor shall
resubmit to the Construction Manager one (1) digital and four
(4) paper copies of the detailed time-scaled CPM network
36
Project Work schedule, including required revisions. This first
accepted detailed time-scaled CPM network Project Work
schedule, also called the accepted Project Work schedule, shall
represent all Work, as well as the planned sequence and time for
the Work. Review and acceptance of any Project Work schedules
and Project narratives by the Construction Manager shall not
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for timely and efficient
execution of the Contract.
END OF SECTION
37
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS (SECTION 1-06)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 1-06 –
Control of Material and all referenced sections therein of the Standard
Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
D.
No separate payment shall be made for the Work described in this
Section. The cost of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to
other Contract prices.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
1.03
No measurement will be made for Work described in this Section.
Payment
1.
1.02
01 32 13 – Progress Schedule
01 78 39 - Project Record Documents
Measurement
1.
E.
This Work consists of meeting the requirements and procedures for
submitting documents defined herein to the Construction Manager.
Sponsor
ANSI
DOD
Number
Y14 Series
Standard 100
Subject
American Drafting Standards
Engineering Drawing Practices
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Drawings, Product Data and Samples required by individual
Specification sections for permanent incorporation in the Work.
B.
Working Drawings: Submit Working Drawings in compliance with Section 105.3 of the Standard Specifications.
38
1.04
C.
Samples: Samples of Materials or equipment submitted to the Construction
Manager for approval prior to incorporating in the Work, as required by
Specification sections.
D.
Certification: Certificates or certified test results submitted by the Contractor
which demonstrate proof of compliance with the Specifications for products,
Materials, equipment, systems, and qualifications of personnel, manufacturers,
fabricators, and installers including Certificate of Materials Origin for materials
subject to Buy America requirements.
E.
Documentation: Documents required to be submitted by the Specifications
including test reports, calculations and miscellaneous items such as delivery
tickets, batch tickets and Bills of Material.
F.
Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Operations and maintenance manuals
for equipment and systems as required by the Specifications.
G.
Record Documents: Documents as described in Section 01 78 39 Project Record
Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL
A.
1.05
Shop Drawings and record documents shall be prepared to a high standard of
quality, to appropriate CAD drafting standards, and in a reproducible, “photo
ready” form.
CHANGES
A.
Changes in approved submittals shall not be permitted unless those changes
have been accepted and approved, in writing, by the Construction Manager.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST
A.
When a product meeting the Contract requirements is listed on the WSDOT’s
QPL, the Contractor shall select a qualified product from the approved list. Note,
due to differing interpretations of Buy America provisions as applicable to
manufactured goods between FHWA and FTA, not all products listed on the
QPL may comply with Buy America for projects funded by FTA. Therefore the
Contractor shall still obtain Certificate of Materials Origin for QPL listed
products.
39
2.02
MASTER LIST OF SUBMITTALS
A.
2.03
Identify the submittals that will be required and determine the date on which
each submittal will be required in conformance with the schedules specified in
Section 01 32 13 Progress Schedule. Within 45 days after the effective date of
the Notice To Proceed, furnish a master list of submittals required by the
Specifications and Plans, with corresponding submittal dates which allow for
not less than 30 Day cycles for review and acceptance by the Construction
Manager. Do not start Work on items until the required submittals are
approved.
SUBMITTAL FORMAT AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Title Block
1.
Show the following information:
a.
Date and revision dates.
b.
Contract title and number.
c.
The names of Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers,
manufacturers, and, when applicable, the seal and signature of a
Professional Engineer currently registered in the State of
Washington, for the involved discipline.
d.
Identification of product by either description, model number,
style number, serial number, or lot number.
e.
Subject identification by Plan or Specification reference.
f.
Relation to adjacent structures or Materials.
g.
Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
h.
Applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal Specification
numbers.
i.
Identification of deviations from the Plans and Specifications.
j.
Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying:
1)
Verification of field measurements.
2)
Review of submittals for compliance with Contract
requirements.
3)
Compatibility of the Work shown thereon with that of
affected trades and other Contracts.
B.
Action Block: Include a blank space, 3 inches by 4 inches, in the lower right
corner, just above the title block, in which the Construction Manager may
indicate the action taken.
C.
Make submittals sufficiently in advance so that acceptance may be made by the
Construction Manager at least 30 days before commencement of related Work.
Submittals required for Qualification of Materials or Product types that require
a long lead time for delivery shall be made sufficiently in advance to allow
acceptance by the Construction Manager at least 30 days before Materials or
40
Products must be ordered. Rejection of any submittal required by this Section
will not be accepted as a basis for any claim for delay.
D.
Ship submittals prepaid.
E.
Accompany submittals with a Contractor Transmittal Form containing the
following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.04
Contractor's name, address and telephone number.
Submittal number and date.
Contract title and number.
Supplier's, manufacturers or Subcontractor's name, address and
telephone number.
Subject identification including Plan and Specification reference.
Identification of deviations from Contract documents, if any, for which
the Contractor seeks approval.
Contractor's stamp and signature that certifies his review for
compliance with the intent of Contract documents and related
Contracts, where applicable.
F.
Supplemental submittals initiated by the Contractor for consideration of
corrective procedures shall contain sufficient data for complete review. Make
supplemental submittals in the same manner as initial submittals.
G.
Submittals prepared on electronic media shall include a thumb drive, DVD, or
compact disk containing a copy of the submittal data using software compatible
with Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, or AutoCAD. See section 3.08 for
additional guidance on how submittals are to be provided.
QUANTITIES
A.
One (1) reproducible Plan and three prints of each Shop Drawing and Working
Drawing.
B.
Three (3) copies of manufacturers' standard schematic drawings.
C.
Three (3) copies of manufacturers' calculations and standard data.
D.
Three (3) copies of manufacturers' printed installation, erection, application,
and placing instructions.
E.
Three (3) Samples of each item specified in the various Specification sections,
unless otherwise specified.
F.
Three (3) copies of inspection reports, test reports and certificates of
compliance.
41
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
3.02
Review submittals, stamp and sign, as reviewed and approved, before
submission to the Construction Manager.
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER 'S REVIEW
A.
Submittals will be reviewed for conformance to requirements of the Plans and
Specifications. Review of a separate item will not constitute review of an
assembly in which the item functions. Review will not relieve the Contractor
from his responsibility for accuracy of submittals, for conformity of submittals
to requirements of Plans and Specifications, for compatibility of described
product with contiguous products and the rest of the system, or for prosecution
and completion of the Contract in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
B.
Review stamp will be affixed, action block will be marked, and stamp will be
signed and dated.
C.
The Construction Manager will review the submittals for general conformance
with the Contract documents and mark, sign and date or forward the submittals
to the Construction Manager or others as appropriate.
D.
The action shall have the following meanings:
1.
2.
3.
The mark "NO EXCEPTION TAKEN" is an acceptance, and means that
every illustration and description appears to conform to the respective
requirements of the Contract documents; that fabrication, assembly,
manufacture, installation, application, and erection of the illustrated and
described product may proceed; and that the submittal need not be
resubmitted.
The mark "EXCEPTIONS NOTED - RESUBMITTAL NOT REQUIRED" is an
acceptance, and means that every illustration and description appears
to conform to the respective requirements of the Contract documents
upon incorporation of the reviewer's corrections into the Work, and that
fabrication, assembly, manufacture, installation, application, and
erection of the illustrated and described product may proceed by
incorporating the noted items into the Work. Submittals so marked
need not be resubmitted unless the Contractor challenges the
reviewer's exception. Reviewer's corrections shall be shown in the asbuilt drawings.
The mark "EXCEPTIONS NOTED - RESUBMITTAL REQUIRED" means
that illustrations and descriptions generally appear to conform to the
respective requirements of the Contract documents, but contain
discrepancies or incomplete data, as noted by the reviewer, and that the
42
4.
5.
3.03
item must be resubmitted with corrections before fabrication, assembly,
manufacture, installation, application, and erection of the illustrated and
described product may proceed.
The mark "REJECTED - RESUBMITTAL REQUIRED" is a rejection, and
means that the submittal is deficient to the degree that the reviewer
cannot correct the submittal with a reasonable degree of effort, has not
made a thorough review of the submittal, and that the submittal needs
revision and is to be corrected and resubmitted.
The mark "REVIEW NOT REQUIRED" means that the Owner doesn't
require a review of the Material submitted and that the Contractor may
proceed with the Work.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Coordinate each submittal with the requirements of the Work; place particular
emphasis upon ensuring that each submittal of one (1) trade is compatible with
other submittals of that trade and submittals of other trades.
B.
Approval of drawings and associated calculations by the Construction Manager
shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for errors or omissions
in the drawings or associated calculations, or from deviation from the Contract
documents, unless such deviations were specifically called to the attention of
the Construction Manager in the letter of transmittal submitted with the
drawings. Contractor will be responsible for the correctness of the drawings,
for shop fits and field connections, and for the results obtained by use of such
drawings.
C.
Distribution of Submittals After Review: Distribute prints of accepted
submittals, bearing the Owner or its designee's stamp and signature, to
Contractor's field office and the Construction Manager's field office; to
concerned Subcontractors, Suppliers and fabricators; and to concerned
members of Contractor's Work force.
D.
Contractor's liability to the Owner, in case of deviation in the submittals from
the requirements of the Contract documents, is not relieved by the
Construction Manager's review and approval of submittals containing
deviations, unless the Construction Manager expressly approves the deviations
by issuing a Change Order.
E.
Do not start Work for which submittals are required until submittals bearing
the stamp of the Construction Manager, and signatures indicating review and
approval, have been received.
F.
Before making submittals, ensure that products will be available in the
quantities required by the Contract.
43
G.
3.04
3.05
Verify field measurements, catalog numbers and similar data.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Prepare Shop Drawings with a maximum sheet size of 22 inches by 34 inches to
a scale large enough to easily depict and annotate each of the various items and
submit electronically per Section 3.08.
B.
Submit a final, corrected plot of each Shop Drawing and show the Work as
actually installed, placed, erected, and applied.
PRODUCT DATA
A.
Modify manufacturers' standard schematic drawings to delete information
which is not applicable to the Contract. Supplement standard information with
additional information applicable to this Contract.
B.
Modify manufacturers' standard catalog cuts, brochures, diagrams, schedules,
performance charts, illustrations, calculations, and other descriptive data to
delete information that is not applicable to the Contract. Indicate dimensions,
clearances, performance characteristics, capacities, wiring and piping diagrams,
and controls.
C.
Modify manufacturers' printed installation, erection, application, and placing
instructions to delete information that is not applicable to the Contract.
D.
Include appropriate information as required herein and in the individual
Specification sections.
E.
Certificates of compliance shall be submitted for those products for which no
Samples and test results are specified. Copy of certificate shall also accompany
the product for which the certificate is prepared. The certificates shall:
1.
2.
3.
4.
State that the product complies with the respective Specification and
Plan requirements.
Be accompanied by a certified copy of test results pertaining to the
product.
Show the submittal date, Contractor's name and address, Contract title
and number, product represented and its location in the Contract,
manufacturer's name, product trade and catalog number, place of
product origin, test date, testing organization's name and address,
quantity of the product to be furnished, and related Plan and
Specifications section number.
Be signed by an officer or other authorized representative of the
manufacturer and be notarized.
44
5.
F.
3.06
3.07
To the extent practical, bundle all the data for all the products required by a
given specification section into a single submittal package.
SAMPLES
A.
Use office Samples of sizes and quantities to clearly illustrate full color range
and functional characteristics of products and Materials include attachment
devices.
B.
Erect field Samples and mock-ups at the Work Site as specified in the individual
Specification sections and as may be necessitated by the Contractor submitting
value engineering proposals, and at locations acceptable to the Construction
Manager.
C.
Include appropriate information as required herein and in the individual
Specification sections.
D.
Furnish required Samples at no additional cost to the Owner.
WORKING DRAWINGS
A.
3.08
Be received by the Construction Manager not later than 30 days before
the products are to be installed.
Prepare Working Drawings per the requirements in Section 1-05.3 of the
Standard Specifications.
USE OF PROJECT CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT WEB SITE TO PROCESS AND
TRACK SUBMITTALS
A.
A Project Construction Management Web site based submittal form must be
created with all relevant fields completed for each submittal.
B.
Attach electronic versions of all relevant documents including, but not
limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Shop or Working Drawing
Relevant Photographs
Operations and Maintenance Manuals
Submittal Form as described in Part 2.03 of this Specification Section
including legible scanned versions of any pages containing signatures
or stamps
Within the Project Construction Management Web site, submittals shall be
assigned only to the Construction Manager for Approval.
45
D.
Submittals will not be processed and will be returned to Contractor if they
have not been created properly and completely within the Project
Construction Management Web site, if the Submittal number on the Web site
and the physical submittal numbers do not match, or if the physical submittal
and attachments do not match the description provided using the Web site.
END OF SECTION
46
SECTION 01 35 24 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS (SECTION 1-07.23)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 107.23 – Public Convenience and Safety and other sections referenced therein, of
the Standard Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
2.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
D.
No separate payment shall be made for Work in this Section. The costs
of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to the other Contract
prices.
ASSISTANCE TO INSPECTORS
A.
1.03
No measurement will be made for Work described in this Section.
Payment
1.
1.02
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
01 71 13 - Mobilization
Measurement
1.
E.
This Work consists of meeting requirements for health and safety of
workers and providing a safe environment.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain a written safety program
conforming to the requirements of applicable local, state, or federal
statutes and regulations.
The Contractor shall provide assistance to the inspectors in the performance of
their duties by furnishing labor, access to Work locations and Materials needed
to complete their tasks.
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Contractor’s Safety Program shall meet all applicable requirements of the
Construction Safety and Security Plan, located on C-TRAN’s Web site as part of
the Issue for Bid package.
47
B.
The Contractor's Safety Program shall be prepared and submitted for approval
to the Construction Manager.
C.
Approval by the Construction Manager of the Safety Plan shall not impose any
liability upon the Construction Manager, nor shall any such approval relieve the
Contractor of any responsibilities under the Contract or applicable local, state
or federal safety statutes and regulations.
D.
Confined Spaces:
1.
2.
3.
Confined spaces are known to exist on the project.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and health of
all on-site workers and compliant with Washington Administrative
Code (WAC 296-809).
The Contractor shall prepare and implement a confined space
program for each confined space identified. The Contractors Confined
Space program shall be sent to the Contracting Agency at least 30 days
prior to the Contractor beginning work in or adjacent to the confined
space. No work shall be performed in or adjacent to the confined
space until the plan is submitted to the Construction Manager as
required. The Contractor shall communicate with the Construction
Manager to ensure a coordinated effort for providing and maintaining
a safe worksite for both the Contracting Agency’s and Contractor’s
workers when working in or near a confined space.
PART 2 – MATERIALS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
SAFETY PROGRAM
A.
If the Contractor's Safety Plan is not submitted within 30 days of NTP, and
subsequently approved by the Owner within 45 days of NTP, the Owner may
suspend payments for mobilization in accordance with Section 01 71 13
Mobilization, until the Safety Plan is approved.
B.
The Contractor's Safety Program and all related elements shall be subject to
inspection and audit by the Owner at any time.
SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS, CODES, RULES, AND REGULATIONS
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all workers and shall
comply with all appropriate state safety and health standards, codes, rules,
and regulations, including, but not limited to, those promulgated under the
Washington Industry Safety and Health Act RCW 49.17 (WISHA) and as set
48
forth in Title 296 WAC (Department of Labor and Industries). In particular
the Contractor’s attention is drawn to the requirements of WAC 296.800
which requires employers to provide a safe workplace. More specifically
WAC 296.800.11025 prohibits alcohol and narcotics from the workplace. The
Contractor shall likewise be obligated to comply with all federal safety and
health standards, codes, rules, and regulations that may be applicable to the
Contract Work.
END OF SECTION
49
SECTION 01 35 43 SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS (SECTIONS 107.5/1-07.6/1-07.16)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 107.5, Environmental Regulations, Section 1-07.6, Permits and Licenses, and
Section 1-07.16, Protection and Restoration of Property, and other sections
referenced therein of the Standard Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
2.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
01 35 44 – Unknown Hazardous and Contaminated Substances
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
01 56 39 – Vegetation Protection and Restoration
01 57 00 – Temporary Drainage Facilities
01 57 13 – Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control
Measurement
1.
E.
Work under this section consists of meeting requirements for
environmental protection and sustainable practices as specified in the
conditions of project approval included in the National Environmental
Policy Act (NEPA) Documented Categorical Exclusion approved by the
Federal Transit Administration (FTA) in November 2014.
Work under this section consists of meeting requirements for the
control of Construction Dust in compliance with the Southwest Clean Air
Agency (SWCAA) Regulations 400-040.
No measurement will be made for Work described in this Section.
Payment
1.
No separate payment shall be made for Work in this Section. The costs
of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to the other Contract
prices.
50
1.02
REFERENCES
Sponsor
FTA
SWCAA
Subject
NEPA Documented Categorical Exclusion,
November 7, 2014
Construction Dust (SWCAA Regulations 400-040)
PART 2 – MATERIALS – Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
DOCUMENTATION
A.
The Contractor shall log measures taken to meet the requirements of this
specification and submit a final report at project completion showing
compliance with these measures including percentages of materials
recycled/reused and percentage of materials sourced locally.
B.
The Contractor shall maintain a file with invoices, purchase orders, or other
documentation certifying fuel purchases used on the project meet Air Resource
Board (ARB) standards for low carbon fuels. Make the file available for
Construction Manager’s inspection on request.
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
A.
Maintain all equipment in proper working condition according to
manufacturer’s specifications. Have equipment checked by a certified mechanic
and determined to be running in proper condition before it is operated.
B.
Cover all trucks transporting materials, wet materials in trucks or provide
adequate freeboard (space from the top of the material to the top of the truck).
C.
Provide wheel washers to remove particulate matter that vehicles would
otherwise carry offsite.
D.
Place quarry spall aprons where trucks enter public roads to reduce mud trackout.
E.
Require appropriate emission-control devices on all construction equipment
powered by gasoline or diesel fuel to reduce CO and NOx emissions in vehicular
exhaust. Use equipment with new technologies when possible (repowered
engines, electric drive trains).
F.
Place stationary equipment, such as compressors and generators, away from
sensitive noise receivers (residences, schools, churches, health clinics,
hospitals).
51
3.03
3.04
G.
Equip each internal combustion engine with a muffler of a type recommended
by the manufacturer.
H.
Limit noisier activities involving large machinery to daytime hours as practical.
Nighttime construction will require a variance from the City of Vancouver’s
Noise Ordinance.
I.
No Contractor staging areas will be allowed within 250 feet of any waters of the
State including wetlands.
SURFACE TRANSPORTATION
A.
Maintain property access to local streets during construction.
B.
Route and schedule construction trucks to reduce delays to traffic during peak
travel times.
C.
Route construction trucks away from residential areas to minimize annoyance
from dust.
RESOURCE CONSERVATION
A.
Spray exposed soil with water or other dust palliatives to reduce emissions of
PM10 and deposition of particulate matter.
B.
Remove particulate matter deposited on paved, public roads to reduce mud and
resultant windblown dust on area roadways.
C.
Plant vegetative cover as soon as possible after grading to reduce windblown
particulates.
D.
Consider the use of natural and artificial barriers (e.g., ground elevation
changes and existing buildings) to shield construction noise.
E.
Comply with standard specifications and all local sound control and noise level
rules, regulations and ordinances. Comply with the City of Vancouver’s noise
regulations. This includes limiting all construction activities within 300 feet of
any residential area to daytime hours (7:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m.), unless a variance
is obtained.
F.
Comply with any noise regulation permits acquired for the project.
G.
Provide an archaeological monitor on site during ground disturbing activities
within downtown Vancouver and the eastbound and westbound 78th Avenue
BRT Stations.
52
3.05
H.
The Contractor shall submit written notification to the Construction Manager
no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to beginning any ground disturbing
activities within downtown Vancouver and the eastbound and westbound 78th
Avenue BRT Stations. The Contractor shall not commence any such ground
disturbing activities until the monitor is present.
I.
If archaeological resources are present, follow the project’s Inadvertent
Discovery Plan.
CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER GENERAL PERMIT
A.
C-TRAN is obtaining the Construction Stormwater General Permit for the
Project. C-TRAN will transfer the Construction Stormwater General Permit to
the Contractor. The Contractor shall implement the measures necessary to
meet the requirements of the permit and work with the Department of Ecology
to ensure the obligations of the permit are being met and for approval of any
modifications to the permit that are necessary to complete the work of the
Project.
B.
Environmental Regulations:
Section 1-07.5 is supplemented with the following:
(August 3, 2009)
No Contractor staging areas will be allowed within 300 feet of any
waters of the State including wetlands.
(August 3, 2009)
The intentional bypass of stormwater from all or any portion of a
stormwater treatment system is prohibited without the approval of
the Construction Manager.
Section 1-07.5(3) is supplemented with the following:
(January 5, 2015)
Once Physical Completion has been given the Contractor shall prepare a
Notice of Termination (Ecology form ECY 020-87). The Contractor shall
submit the Notice of Termination electronically to the Construction
Manager in a PDF format a minimum of seven (7) calendar days prior to
submitting the Notice of Termination to Ecology.
The Contractor shall submit copies of all correspondence with Ecology
electronically to the Construction Manager in a PDF format within four
(4) calendar days.
53
C.
Permits and Licenses
Section 1-07.6 is supplemented with the following:
(January 5, 2015)
The Contracting Agency will obtain the Construction Stormwater
General Permit for this project. A copy of the permit will be provided
to the Contractor upon receipt from Ecology. Copies of this permit are
required to be onsite at all times. Direct communication with the
Department of Ecology is allowed for the Construction Stormwater
General Permit. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining
Ecology’s approval for any Work requiring additional approvals (e.g.
Request for Chemical Treatment Form). The Contractor shall obtain
additional permits as necessary. All costs to obtain and comply with
additional permits shall be incidental to the other Contract prices.
END OF SECTION
54
SECTION 01 35 44 UNKNOWN HAZARDOUS AND CONTAMINATED SUBSTANCES (SECTION 107.5)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 107.5(3), State Department of Ecology and Section 1-07.5(4), Air Quality, and
other sections referenced therein of the Standard Specifications as amended
herein.
B.
Description
1.
2.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
D.
01 35 43 – Special Environmental Protection Requirements
01 45 10 – Quality Control Requirements
01 57 13 – Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control
Measurement
1.
E.
Work under this section consists of meeting requirements for
environmental protection and sustainable practices as specified in the
conditions of project approval included in the NEPA Documented
Categorical Exclusion approved by the FTA in November 2014.
Work under this section consists of meeting requirements for the
control of Asbestos in compliance with the Southwest Clean Air Agency
(SWCAA) Regulation 476.
No separate measurement will be made for the Work of this Section.
Payment
1.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item
Pay Unit
01 35 44.01 Unknown Hazardous and Contaminated Substances Force Account
1.02
REFERENCES
Sponsor
FTA
SWCAA
Subject
Documented Categorical Exclusion, November 7,
2014
Asbestos (SWCAA Regulations 476)
55
1.03
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
In accordance with the terms of this Contract and as requested by the
Construction Manager, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary labor,
equipment, materials, incidentals, transportation and facilities to perform the
identification, characterization, removal, cleanup, mitigation, handling,
transportation, and disposal of hazardous and contaminated substances,
including but not limited to contaminated soils and water and underground
storage tanks and tank contents that are encountered during construction.
B.
No work covered under this Section shall be undertaken by the Contractor
unless requested by the Construction Manager.
C.
Work covered under this Section shall be performed in accordance with
applicable federal, state, and local statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances.
Discrepancies shall be resolved in favor of the more stringent provision. For
hazardous and contaminated substance characterization and cleanup, the
Contractor shall perform the following types of actions, as appropriate, where
sampling and analysis results meet the criteria defined in the designated
regulations based on the Washington Department of Ecology’s (DOE) review of
site-specific information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Underground Storage Tank (UST) Regulations satisfying Revised Code
of Washington (RCW) Chapter 90.76 and Washington Administrative
Code (WAC) Chapter 173-360
Simple Site Characterization and Cleanup satisfying WAC 173-360-360
to 399
Removal Action satisfying WAC 173-340-430
Focused Remedial Investigation and Feasibility Study (RI/FS) and
Remedial Action (RA) satisfying WAC 173-340-350, and -355 through 370
D.
Subject to approval by the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall be
responsible for notifications required by federal, state, and local statutes, rules,
regulations, and ordinances, except for notification to DOE of the initial
discovery of unknown hazardous and contaminated substances. DOE
notification will be the responsibility of the Construction Manager.
E.
If contamination of soil is readily visible, or is revealed by sampling, DOE must
be notified. Contact the Environmental Report Tracking System Coordinator in
the Southwest Regional Office (SWRO) at (360) 407-6300. For assistance and
information about subsequent cleanup and to identify the type of testing that
will be required, contact Craig Rankine with the SWRO, Toxics Cleanup
Program at the phone number given above.
F.
The applicant should make sure only clean soil is used as fill.
56
G.
During construction work provisions and equipment should be on hand to
contain and cleanup a release of oil or fuel from heavy equipment operation.
H.
Subject to approval by the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall be
responsible for securing the necessary and applicable permits, certificates,
licenses, and approvals other than stormwater and sanitary discharge
approvals and permits that are required for the performance of this Work and
shall be responsible for the payment of associated fees, except for those
associated with stormwater and sanitary discharges.
I.
Work covered under this Section shall be conducted only by specialized
personnel who are fully trained, qualified, and certified, as required for
hazardous or contaminated substance site work in accordance with 29 CFR
1910.120 and other applicable federal, state, and local statutes, rules,
regulations, and ordinances.
J.
Contractor personnel who are not properly trained in accordance with this
Section shall not enter or work in areas identified as containing or potentially
containing hazardous and contaminated substances.
K.
All plans prepared and work conducted in the performance of this Section shall
be consistent with DOE's requirements. Upon receipt of laboratory reports,
analytical results shall be provided to the Construction Manager by the
Contractor verbally within 48 hours with written reports to follow within 72
hours. At the Construction Manager's request, the Contractor shall make
available to DOE a split or duplicate of environmental sample(s) taken during
the performance of this Work.
L.
The Contractor shall be required as necessary to attend progress and work
coordination meetings with the Construction Manager and DOE
representatives.
M.
The Contractor shall comply with all required reporting and record keeping
requirements in accordance with the provisions of this Contract and applicable
federal, state, and local statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
57
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
ORDER OF WORK
A.
Prior to construction, the Contractor shall:
1.
2.
B.
In compliance with SWCAA Regulation 476, prior to demolition of renovation of
a structure a thorough asbestos inspection must be conducted by an AHERA
certified inspector to ascertain the presence of Asbestos Containing Material
(ACM). A copy of the AHERA asbestos inspection report must be posted for
viewing at the project site.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Develop procedures for all project improvement areas to identify,
characterize, manage, handle, store, and dispose of contaminated soil
and groundwater encountered during construction activities.
Prepare health and safety plans for construction activities, identifying
potential contaminates of concern, required personal protective
equipment, and emergency response procedures. The health and safety
plans shall be read and signed by all onsite workers.
If the asbestos inspection reveals ACM to be present in the affected
structures or areas the ACM must be removed, or if appropriate,
encapsulated by certified personnel in full accordance with the SWCAA
Regulations 476.
If the asbestos inspection does not reveal ACM to be present in the
affected structure(s) or area(s) a Notice of Intent to Remove or
Encapsulate Asbestos would not be required. A Notification of
Demolition and Renovation and a copy of the AHERA asbestos
inspection report are required and must be submitted to SWCAA.
If the inspection does not reveal ACM to be present in the affected
structure(s) or area(s) and the project involves only renovation that
does not involve the removal of load bearing walls ad Notice of Intent to
Remove or Encapsulate Asbestos and a Notification of Demolition and
Renovation would not be required.
The Contractor shall undertake any of the following order of Work, as
appropriate:
1.
Upon discovery of an abnormal condition or a potential indicator of a
hazardous or contaminated substance, all work activities associated
with this Contract within the area of concern shall be immediately
suspended, and the Construction Manager shall be immediately notified.
Immediate notification shall be construed as no later than one (1) hour
after discovery of an abnormal condition or potential indicator.
58
2.
3.
4.
The Contractor shall secure the area as needed to restrict and protect
Contractor’s personnel, Owner personnel, and the public from exposure
to potential hazardous and/or contaminated substances.
The Contractor shall delineate the exclusion, contamination reduction,
and support zones as required.
As directed by the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall make a
preliminary identification of the problem and implement appropriate
abatement measures as necessary to protect Contractor personnel,
Owner personnel, and the public from exposure. This may involve, but is
not necessarily limited to: preliminary surveying and sampling of visible
fumes/vapors, underground or above-ground storage tank contents,
containers, media, or other suspicious materials to determine whether
hazardous or contaminated substances are present; removing
product(s) from tanks/piping; minimizing product migration; and soil
or groundwater removal.
a.
Ensure utility clearances have been met before subsurface
sampling is initiated.
D.
The Contractor's construction operation shall not resume in the area where an
unknown hazardous or contaminated substance(s) has been discovered or
encountered, until so directed by the Construction Manager.
E.
The Contractor shall conduct any characterization, removal, or cleanup work,
where feasible, to accommodate continued construction activities. The Work
shall be coordinated with other site activities and acceptable to the
Construction Manager.
3.02
PLAN/REPORT COMPONENTS – NOT USED
3.03
WORK PROGRESS SUBMITTALS/APPROVALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33
00 Submittals and Paragraph 3.05 of this Section, except as modified herein.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Before assigning personnel, the names and qualifications of the
personnel or subcontractors to perform this work, including required
training and medical certificates.
The name and qualifications of the Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH)
and the Contractor's Safety Representative(s).
Training logs maintained by the Contractor's Safety Representative.
Air monitoring reports shall be prepared and maintained by the
Contractor's Safety Representative and submitted to Construction
Manager on request.
Safety inspection logs, daily health and safety reports, and a close-out
safety report shall be prepared by the Contractor's Safety
Representative and submitted to the Construction Manager on request.
59
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.04
Required plans and reports identified in Article 3.01, Order of Work.
Copies of necessary and applicable permits, certificates, and approvals
required for the performance of this work.
All manifests, gate receipts, bills-of-lading, and records of final waste
disposition from the accepting disposal facilities, and all other
documentation relating to the off-site transportation and disposal of
waste.
A final project close out report summarizing hazardous and
contaminated substance Work performed under this Contract. This
report shall, at a minimum, include sufficient detail to describe
hazardous and contaminated substance related Work performed, the
problems encountered, and the final resolution and close out status of
each task, including all supporting documentation thereto.
B.
Work shall not proceed to the next phase until the required submittals have
been received and approved by the Construction Manager.
C.
The Contractor shall make necessary modifications to the submittals as
requested by the Construction Manager and shall perform activities in
accordance with such modifications.
CONTAMINANT MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
A.
The Contractor shall manage hazardous and contaminated substances,
including soils, groundwater, surface water, and other contaminated
substances to prevent exposure to Contractor personnel, Owner personnel, and
the public and to prevent any contamination of non-contaminated areas.
Contaminant management procedures for the handling, storage, and disposal of
hazardous and contaminated substances shall be conducted in accordance with
applicable federal, state, and local statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances.
B.
The Contractor shall manage hazardous and contaminated substances in
accordance with the Contaminant Management Plan developed by the
Contractor and approved by the Construction Manager.
C.
The Contractor shall be responsible for sampling and analyses as may be
required by the receiving disposal facilities for off-site disposal of hazardous
and contaminated substances removed or cleaned up during the performance
of this work.
D.
The Contractor shall properly containerize, label, placard, and transport items
removed from the site, including solid and liquid hazardous and contaminated
substances and non-contaminated materials in accordance with federal, state,
and local statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances.
60
E.
Transporter vehicles used for the transportation of hazardous and
contaminated substances for off-site disposal shall be designed to prevent the
release of hazardous substances, and shall be substance compatible, licensed,
insured, and permitted pursuant to federal, state, and local statutes, rules,
regulations and ordinances.
F.
Hazardous and contaminated substances shall be properly disposed off-site at a
permitted and regulated disposal facilities in good standing, in accordance with
federal, state, and local statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances.
G.
The Contractor shall not allow hazardous or contaminated substances to be
spilled or tracked off site at any time during the Project.
H.
The Contractor shall submit to the Construction Manager information and
recommendations regarding proposed facilities for storage or disposal of each
type of hazardous and contaminated substance requiring storage and/or
disposal. Proposed facilities shall be permitted and in good standing. Storage
and disposal facility information shall be submitted to Owner and shall include,
but not be limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.05
Name
Owner
Type of Facility
Permitting Agency and Permit Number
Contact Person and Phone Number
Location
Hours of Operation
Record of Environmental Compliance or Enforcement Actions
I.
Owner will select and approve storage facilities and final disposal facilities for
hazardous and contaminated substances owned by Owner and removed from
the work site(s).
J.
The Contractor shall complete all required manifest forms and bill-of-lading
forms for Owner for the proper transportation and disposal of materials offsite. The Construction Manager shall review, and an Owner representative will
sign manifests for proper shipping and disposal. However, the Contractor shall
be held accountable for ensuring that requirements of the transporter and
receiving disposal facilities and federal, state, and local statutes, rules,
regulations and ordinances are complied with and properly documented.
SCHEDULE
A.
The Contractor shall develop and deliver to the Construction Manager
schedules for the Work. These schedules shall be complete in all respects,
including items to be submitted to Construction Manager for approval.
61
3.06
B.
All Construction Manager /DOE comments and approvals will be provided to
the Contractor within five (5) days of the Construction Manager's/DOE’s
receipt of the Contractors submittals, or as soon thereafter as practicable.
C.
The schedule, as accepted by Construction Manager, shall become part of the
Contract, and the Contractor shall be required to perform in accordance with
this schedule or with a current accepted revision thereof. The Construction
Manager must approve any deviations from the above schedule requirements
in advance, and in writing.
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER RESPONSIBILITY
A.
The Construction Manager will make available to the Contractor the following
information, materials, and services:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.07
A map of the site to be used in preparation of plans and reports.
Copies of available environmental and hazardous/contaminated
substance-related studies and investigation reports developed for this
Project.
Necessary right-of-entry permission for work on adjacent private
property or for work that requires access through private property. The
conditions of the right-of-entry agreement to the property will be
explained to the Contractor prior to the start of the Work. The
Contractor shall know and follow the terms and conditions of right-ofentry agreements.
Notification of the DOE of the initial discovery of unknown hazardous
and contaminated substances encountered during construction, within
24 hours of such discovery. Other required notifications will be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
The Construction Manager will be responsible for coordinating
Contractor submittals to DOE and associated DOE review comments and
approvals regarding the characterization and cleanup of hazardous or
contaminated substances on sites being acquired or used for the BRT
Project construction in accordance with the schedule as approved by the
Construction Manager.
OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Owner accepts ownership responsibility for hazardous or contaminated
substances generated during the performance of this work, except for those
hazardous and contaminated substances brought onto the site by the
Contractor or for releases of hazardous and contaminated substances caused
by the Contractor. Owner will sign manifests for the proper disposal of
hazardous and contaminated substances owned by Owner and removed from
the site.
62
3.08
COORDINATION OF MEETINGS
B.
To ensure complete understanding of the Contract objectives related to this
work, meetings between Construction Manager and the Contractor will be held
as often as deemed necessary by the Construction Manager.
C.
In performance of the work required by this Section, the Contractor shall
maintain daily contact with the Construction Manager and shall immediately
notify the Construction Manager should unanticipated problems arise during
the course of the fieldwork. Depending on the nature of problems encountered,
work may be suspended at the direction of the Construction Manager.
D.
The Construction Manager will serve in a liaison function between the
Contractor and DOE. The Contractor will not deviate from approved plans
prepared by the Contractor without consultation and approval by the
Construction Manager.
E.
The Contractor shall permit the Construction Manager and DOE
representatives to review and inspect the work activities at reasonable times,
including review and inspection on a daily basis, as needed.
F.
Where the Construction Manager or his/her designee is trained according to
the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120, the Contractor shall provide them with
safe access to the work site during field investigation and cleanup activities and
shall furnish them with adequate safety and personal protective equipment
(PPE) for ascertaining that the materials and workmanship are in accordance
with the requirements of this Contract and applicable federal, state, and local
statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances.
END OF SECTION
63
SECTION 01 35 53 SECURITY PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
B.
Related Sections
1.
C.
01 33 00 - Submittals
Measurement
1.
D.
This Work consists of providing security within the construction Work
limits for the duration of the Contract. Contractor shall comply with the
provisions of this Section and those contained in the Construction Safety
and Security Plan.
No measurement will be made for Work described in this Section.
Payment
1.
2.
3.
Accepted Security will be paid for in equal monthly payments over the
Contract term.
The Contract price paid will be payment in full for furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and doing all Work
necessary to complete the Work specified.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item
01 35 53.01
1.02
Pay Unit
LS
Security
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section
01 33 00 Submittals, except as modified herein.
1.
At the end of each month the Contractor shall furnish a report stating all
incidences of breaking and entering, theft, vandalism or damage to
property. The report will state the type and time of activity and an
estimated cost of the damage.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not Used
64
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SURVEILLANCE AND SECURITY
A.
The Contractor’s Surveillance and Security Control Program shall meet all
applicable requirements of the Construction Safety and Security Plan, located
on C-TRAN’s Web site as part of the Issue for Bid package.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the construction and
storage areas at all times during the term of this Contract. The Contractor shall
submit the surveillance and security control program for the Construction
Manager's approval, prior to commencement of the Work. The control program
shall provide for submittal of surveillance and incident reports. The reports
shall be submitted weekly, on Mondays, for the previous week surveillance.
C.
The Contractor shall protect the Work, including products and Materials stored
on site, from theft, vandalism, and trespass, and shall notify the Construction
Manager and local law enforcement agencies of actual and attempted thefts,
vandalism, and trespass.
D.
Products or Materials stored off-site which have been furnished by the Owner,
and those which are stored off-site which have been partially paid for by the
Owner, shall be protected and secured as those stored on site.
E.
Suspension of the Work, for any cause, shall not relieve the Contractor from his
responsibility for the security and surveillance of Materials, equipment, tools,
and for the Work.
F.
Upon failure of the Contractor to maintain adequate surveillance and security
control, the Construction Manager shall take steps to provide and maintain the
necessary measures for security of the Work and the Work Sites at the
Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
65
SECTION 01 45 10 QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS (SECTION 1-06)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 1-06 –
Control of Material, and other sections referenced therein, of the Standard
Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
D.
01 33 00 - Submittals
Measurement
1.
E.
The Work in this Section includes sampling, testing, certification, and
acceptance of materials and work as shown on the Contract Plans and as
specified herein.
The Work under this Section will not be measured separately for
payment.
Payment
1.
Incidental Basis: No separate or additional payment will be made for
sampling, testing, certification, or other associated Work performed
under this Section, whether performed by the Contractor, manufacturer,
producer, or supplier. No payment will be made for providing quality
control personnel.
END OF SECTION
66
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
The Work of this Section includes requirements for temporary utilities,
support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Measurement
1.
D.
1.03
No separate measurement will be made for the Work in this Section.
Payment
1.
1.02
Section 01 11 00, Summary of Work.
Section 01 5710, Watering
Section 32 12 20, Hot Mix Asphalt
Section 32 13 74, Cement Concrete Pavement
No payment shall be made for the Work described in this Section.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities
shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer.
C.
Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used.
D.
Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity
used.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking
areas for construction personnel.
B.
Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with
requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having
jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
67
C.
Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and
authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for
management of fire-prevention program.
D.
Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting
materials and construction from water absorption and damage.
1.
2.
1.04
1.05
Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials
subject to water absorption or water damage.
Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols
for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing
water-damaged Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations
for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and
inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and
permits.
C.
Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S.
Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA
Accessibility Guidelines.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent
service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of
each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's
acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2 inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) thick,
galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with
galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8 inch- (60-mm) OD line posts and
2-7/8 inch (73-mm) OD corner and pull posts[, with 1-5/8 inch (42-mm) OD
top rails] [, with galvanized barbed-wire top strand].
B.
Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2 inch (50-mm), 0.148 inch (3.8-mm)
thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high
with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8 inch (60-mm) OD line posts
68
and 2-7/8 inch (73-mm) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8 inch (42-mm)
OD top and bottom rails. Provide [concrete] [galvanized-steel] bases for
supporting posts.
2.02
C.
Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, 8 feet (2.4 m) high, framed with four 2 by 4
inch (50-by-100-mm) rails, with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not
more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart.
D.
Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10 mil (0.25-mm)
minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and
passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.
E.
Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by
60 inches (914 by 1624 mm).
F.
Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool,
or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of
25 and 50, respectively.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes,
temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B.
Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of
construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings
specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish
and equip offices as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets,
plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.
Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of at least
10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex
receptacles, with no fewer than one (1) receptacle on each wall.
Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4 foot (1.2 m) square
tack and marker boards.
Drinking water and private toilet.
Coffee machine and supplies.
Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor
temperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C).
Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc
(215 lx) at desk height.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped
to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
69
1.
2.03
Store combustible materials apart from building.
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as
required by locations and classes of fire exposures.
B.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Contracting Agency authorizes use of permanent
HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil
heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or
salamander-type heating units is prohibited.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a
qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended location and application.
Permanent HVAC System: If Contracting Agency authorizes use of
permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction,
provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and
remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in
Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures.
Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable
units with four (4) stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency
shutoff. Configure to run continuously.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in
minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify
facilities as required by progress of the Work.
1.
B.
3.02
Locate facilities to limit site disturbance.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove
until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of
completed permanent facilities.
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
70
1.
B.
Arrange with utility company, Contracting Agency, and existing users
for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make
connections for temporary services.
Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1.
Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by
authorities having jurisdiction or other by other approved method.
C.
Water Service: If required install water service and distribution piping in sizes
and pressures adequate for construction.
D.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking
water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and
maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by
construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for
protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or
high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed.
F.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by
construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for
protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select
equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or
elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce
ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
1.
G.
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system
of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction
operations.
1.
H.
Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate
moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of
finishes.
Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated
and/or required.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides
adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections,
and traffic conditions.
71
1.
2.
I.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use
facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one (1) telephone line for
each field office.
1.
2.
3.
3.03
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and
protection requirements without operating entire system.
Install lighting for Project identification sign.
Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a.
Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in
each field office.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a.
Police and fire departments.
b.
Ambulance service.
c.
Contractor's home office.
d.
Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.
e.
Construction Manager’s office.
f.
Design Engineers' offices.
g.
Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two (2)
way radio for use when away from field office.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
B.
Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads
and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary
roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings.
1.
C.
Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located
within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is
noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.
Maintain support facilities until Construction Manager schedules
Substantial Completion inspection.
Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and non-tracking.
Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.
Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads
and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas.
Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for
construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within
construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.
72
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
E.
2.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding
Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or
temporary facilities.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not
permitted.
1.
2.
3.
G.
Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs,
pavement, and utilities.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of
water.
1.
F.
Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with
permanent roads and paved areas.
Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads
and paved areas according to Section 2-06 – Subgrade Preparation of
the Standard Specification and Section 32 11 23, Crushed Surfacing.
Recondition base after temporary use, including removing
contaminated material, regrading, and proofrolling, compacting, and
testing.
Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt
pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hotmix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course
according to Section 32 12 20, Hot mix Asphalt
Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on
Drawings.
Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to
inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a.
Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel
and visitors.
Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes
adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
73
3.04
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment,
structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent
properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to
existing facilities.
B.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities,
and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental
regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil
contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
1.
Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 11 00, Summary
of Work.
C.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of
2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction,
whichever is more stringent and requirements specified in Section 01 57 13,
Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control and Section 31 15 00, Clearing,
Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup.
D.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent
soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to
undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to
erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings, requirements of 2003 EPA
Construction General Permit, or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is
more stringent.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or
generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plantprotection zones.
Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control
measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been
established.
Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by
erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of
Project.
Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize
areas disturbed during removal.
E.
Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade
construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
F.
Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01
56 39, Vegetation Protection and Restoration.
74
G.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or
outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from
construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and
erosion.
H.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize
attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform
extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be
free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control
operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
I.
Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install
site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from
easily entering site except by entrance gates.
1.
2.
Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion
determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting
distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one (1) set of keys to
Owner.
J.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent
unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
Lock entrances at end of each work day.
K.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades,
including warning signs and lighting.
L.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of
construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other
construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weather
tight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
M.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is
incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection
facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and
controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention
program.
1.
Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
75
2.
3.
3.05
Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating
units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
Develop and supervise an overall fire prevention and fire protection
program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire
department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct
personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A.
Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work.
Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B.
Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when
materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores,
protect as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers
but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials
are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Protect porous materials from water damage.
Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact
with concrete.
Remove standing water from decks.
Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components,
or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.
Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water
damage.
Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other
organic matter.
Discard or replace water-damaged material.
Do not install material that is wet.
Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to
grow mold.
Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate
time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior
finishes.
Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of
the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC
systems, maintain as follows:
76
1.
2.
3.
3.06
Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective
dry-in conditions.
Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature,
relative humidity, and exposure to water limits.
a.
Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including
wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the
course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are
considered defective.
b.
Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed
to moisture during construction operations or after installation.
Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing
daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels
higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.
c.
Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their
manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To
minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential
and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity
control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24 hour basis where
required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Operate Project identification sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00
midnight.
D.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary
security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial
Completion.
E.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its
service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a
permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if
necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed
because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean
exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired.
77
1.
2.
3.
Materials and facilities that constitute Contractor temporary facilities
are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of
Project identification signs.
Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or
acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is
intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that
do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials
contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical
compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant
materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and
sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent
facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning
requirements specified in Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures.
END OF SECTION
78
SECTION 01 55 26 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL (SECTIONS 1-07.7, 1-07.23 and 1-10)
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 1-07.7 – Load Limits,
1-07.23 – Public Convenience and Safety, and 1-10 – Temporary Traffic Control, and other
sections referenced therein, of the Standard Specifications as amended herein.
1-07.7 LOAD LIMITS
Section 1-07.7 is supplemented with the following:
If the sources of materials provided by the Contractor necessitates hauling over roads
other than State Highways, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor's expense, make all
arrangements for the use of the haul routes.
1-07.23 PUBLIC CONVEINENCE AND SAFETY
1-07.23(1) CONSTRUCTION UNDER TRAFFIC
Section 1-07.23(1) is supplemented with the following:
(January 2, 2012)
Work Zone Clear Zone
The Work Zone Clear Zone (WZCZ) applies during working and nonworking hours.
The WZCZ applies only to temporary roadside objects introduced by the
Contractor’s operations and does not apply to preexisting conditions or permanent
Work. Those work operations that are actively in progress shall be in accordance
with adopted and approved Traffic Control Plans, and other contract requirements.
During nonworking hours equipment or materials shall not be within the WZCZ
unless they are protected by permanent guardrail or temporary concrete barrier.
The use of temporary concrete barrier shall be permitted only if the Construction
Manager approves the installation and location.
During actual hours of work, unless protected as described above, only materials
absolutely necessary to construction shall be within the WZCZ and only
construction vehicles absolutely necessary to construction shall be allowed within
the WZCZ or allowed to stop or park on the shoulder of the roadway.
The Contractor's nonessential vehicles and employees private vehicles shall not be
permitted to park within the WZCZ at any time unless protected as described above.
Deviation from the above requirements shall not occur unless the Contractor has
requested the deviation in writing and the Construction Manager has provided
written approval.
Minimum WZCZ distances are measured from the edge of traveled way and will be
determined as follows:
79
Regulatory Posted
Speed
Distance From
Traveled Way
(Feet)
10 *
15
20
30
35 mph or less
40 mph
45 to 55 mph
60 mph or
greater
* or 2 feet beyond the outside edge of sidewalk
MINIMUM WORK ZONE CLEAR ZONE DISTANCE
Unless otherwise authorized and permitted by the City of Vancouver’s Traffic
Engineer, lane closures are subject to the following restrictions:
1. Lane closures are allowed during the hours of 7:00 a.m. through 8:00 p.m.
2. Lane closures on Fourth Plain Boulevard are allowed Monday through
Friday from 7:00 a.m. through 3:30 p.m., subject to individual approval(s)
by the City of Vancouver.
If the Construction Manager determines the permitted closure hours adversely affect
traffic, the Construction Manager may adjust the hours accordingly. The Construction
Manager will notify the Contractor in writing of any change in the closure hours.
Lane closures are not allowed on any of the following:
1. A holiday;
2. A holiday weekend; holidays that occur on Friday, Saturday, Sunday or
Monday are considered a holiday weekend. A holiday weekend includes
Saturday, Sunday, and the holiday.
For lane closures which exceed the time restrictions noted above, the Contractor shall
be assessed a pro-rated lane rental fee of $1,000 per hour for any part of an hour the
lane closure exceeds the time restrictions.
1-10.2 TRAFFIC CONTROL MANAGEMENT
General
Section 1-10.2(1) is supplemented with the following:
(December 1, 2008)
Only training with WSDOT TCS card and WSDOT training curriculum is recognized
in the State of Washington. The Traffic Control Supervisor shall be certified by one
(1) of the following:
80
The Northwest Laborers-Employers Training Trust
27055 Ohio Avenue
Kingston, WA 98346
(360) 297-3035
Evergreen Safety Council
401 Pontius Avenue North
Seattle, WA 98109
(800) 521-0778 or
(206) 382-4090
The American Traffic Safety Services Association
15 Riverside Parkway, Suite 100
Fredericksburg, Virginia 22406-1022
Training Department (877) 642-4637
Phone: (540) 368-1701
1-10.2(2) TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANS
Section 1-10.2(2) is supplemented with the following:
1. Contractor shall prepare a traffic plan required for the Work for each stage of
construction on public right-of-way and C-TRAN property. The plan shall
address coordination of timing with other projects in the area. The traffic plan
shall include drawings showing proposed traffic control devices. Contractor shall
apply to the City of Vancouver or other required jurisdictional agency for
approval of the plan and for a permit or permits to work in the public right-ofway. The traffic plan shall also include drawings showing the proposed
pedestrian traffic control devices, signage, and detours for all existing pedestrian
pathways and sidewalks.
2. Contractor shall prepare drawings showing construction equipment traffic and
routing plans for each stage of construction within designated Construction
Work Limits, including clearing/grubbing, embankment subgrade preparation,
BRT station platform structure excavation support construction, excavation,
spoils stockpiling and handling, concrete placement, backfilling, PCC and HMA
paving, and as otherwise requested by the Construction Manager.
3. Public, private, and commercial driveway access shall be maintained by the
Contractor at all times. Signs clearly identifying the businesses and directing
vehicular and pedestrian traffic to the accesses to these businesses shall be
prominently displayed. Any temporary closures shall be approved in advance
through the City of Vancouver and/or C-TRAN.
1-10.4 MEASUREMENT
Reinstating Unit Items With Lump Sum Traffic Control
Section 1-10.4(3) is supplemented with the following:
81
(August 2, 2004)
The bid proposal contains the item “Project Temporary Traffic Control,” lump sum
and the additional temporary traffic control items listed below. The provisions of
Section 1-10.4(1), Section 1-10.4(3), and Section 1-10.5(3) shall apply:
Pay Item
Flaggers
Pay Unit
by the hour
1-10.5 PAYMENT
Section 1-10.5 is revised with the following:
Payment will be made in accordance with 1-04.1, for each of the following Bid items:
Pay Item
01 55 26.01
01 55 26.02
Project Temporary Traffic Control
Flaggers
Pay Unit
LS
by the hour
The lump sum Contract payment for Project Temporary Traffic Control shall be full
compensation for all costs incurred by the Contractor in performing the Contract Work
defined in Section 1-10 except for costs compensated by Bid Proposal items inserted
through Contract Provisions as described in Section 1-10.4(3).
The unit Contract price, when applied to the number of units measured for flaggers in
accordance with Section 1-10.4(2), shall be full compensation for all costs incurred by
the Contractor in performing the Contract Work defined in Section 1-10.3(1)A.
END OF SECTION
82
SECTION 01 56 39 VEGETATION PROTECTION AND RESTORATION (SECTION 1-07.16)
PART 1 1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 107.16 –Protection and Restoration of Property, and other sections referenced
therein, of the Standard Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description:
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
This Work includes protection, care, and maintenance of existing
Designated Trees to remain, replacing protective fencing as required,
taking actions required to protect existing Designated Trees,
providing additional fencing and/or increased protective fencing as
directed by Construction Manager or Landscape Architect, removing
fencing and related materials at Final Acceptance, repairing or
replacing of Designated Trees due to damages caused by Contractor
work.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittals
Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control Requirements
Section 02 41 20 – Removal of Structure and Obstructions
Section 13 13 00 – Platforms and Stations
Section 31 15 00 – Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup
Section 32 01 31 – Protection and Restoration of Property
Section 32 93 43 – Tree Shrub Planting.
Measurement
1.
2.
No separate measurement will be made for existing tree protection
fencing.
No separate measurements will be made for:
a.
Tree protection fence maintenance.
b.
Installation, maintenance, and removal of Increased Protection
Fencing.
c.
Maintenance and care of existing trees including watering,
fertilizing, and pruning.
d.
Repair or replacement of Designated Trees.
e.
Repair or replacement of construction-related damage to soils.
f.
Any other materials or labor used in the protection of trees and
plants.
83
E.
Payment
1.
2.
3.
4.
Existing Tree Protection will be paid for at the Contract lump sum
price for Protection Fencing. Payment includes furnishing labor,
materials and maintenance. Clearing to place the protective fencing,
and removal of the protective fencing at Final Acceptance, and
watering of Designated Trees shall be considered incidental.
No separate or additional payment will be made for provision of
Increased Protection Fencing.
No payment will be made for repair or replacement of Designated
Trees, or for repair or replacement of construction-damaged soils. All
associated costs will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item
01 56 39.01 Tree and Plant Protection Fencing
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.03
Pay Unit
LS
Contractor’s Condition Inspection: include written report and color
photographs of existing conditions prior to work. Submit under provisions of
Section 01 33 00 Submittals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Quality control shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section
01 45 10 Quality Control Requirements.
B.
The Construction Manager shall have the authority to:
1.
2.
C.
Contractor's Qualifications—Contractor must have:
1.
D.
Evaluate the effectiveness of the Contractor's protective measures.
Evaluate damage to trees and soils and to determine necessary
remedial measures and monetary loss suffered by the Contracting
Agency.
Valid Washington Landscape Contractor's license and a valid
Washington Landscape Business license.
Meetings: Request the following by Construction Manager at least 48 hours in
advance:
1.
Meetings:
a.
Pre-construction meeting
b.
Verification of conditions
84
2.
3.
4.
1.04
1.05
COORDINATION
A.
Attend Pre-construction Meeting.
B.
Coordinate with other trades affecting and affected by work of this Section.
C.
Notify workers, including subcontractors, of the requirements to protect
Designated Trees.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
1.06
c.
Preliminary fence location staking review
d.
Tree protection materials installation review
e.
Trenching and excavation locations and methods review
Approvals required prior to:
a.
Removal or modification of fencing
b.
Any construction activities or use of equipment within Zone of
Protection
c.
Root pruning
d.
Tree pruning
See PART 3 - EXECUTION for detailed review requirements.
Coordinate all meetings to coincide with regular progress meetings
where possible.
Complete the installation of Protective Fencing prior to the starting any other
work.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect existing improvements and growth in areas to remain undisturbed
until completion of project. Leave in as good condition as found.
B.
Maintain benchmarks, monuments and other reference points. If disturbed
or destroyed, replace as directed.
C.
Contact local utility companies for verification of the location of all
underground utilities within the project area prior to starting excavation.
Protect utilities and maintain in continuous operation or in operational
condition during work. Repair all damage to known utilities or related
facilities in an approved manner and at Contractor's expense.
D.
Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during
and after installation, and to protect installed work and materials of all other
trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and
replacements as directed by Construction Manager.
85
PART 2 2.01
PRODUCTS
PROTECTIVE FENCING
A.
Fence shall consist of wood, chain link, or plastic construction fencing. At
minimum, fencing shall be plastic construction fencing and related materials
described herein:
1.
2.
3.
2.02
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Water: Provide water, free of harmful contaminants, as needed for plant
health and growth, and for wash-down of soiled foliage.
B.
Planting Soil: As specified in Section 32 93 43 – Tree Shrub Planting.
C.
Bark Mulch: As specified in Section 32 93 43 – Tree Shrub Planting.
PART 3 3.01
Standard Tree Protection Fencing:
a.
Fence Fabric: Constructed entirely from Hi Vu™ Orange Barrier
Fencing, 4 feet high, as manufactured by Amoro Fabrics or
Fiber Co. or approved.
b.
Posts: domestic stud TEEE posts, lightweight (.98) painted
steel, six feet in length with metal flange at bottom.
c.
Ties: 16 gauge galvanized steel wire.
Increased Protection Fencing:
a.
Fence Fabric: Constructed entirely from 11 gauge, galvanized
chain link fabric, 6 feet high
b.
Posts: Galvanized steel, 1.5” inside-diameter line posts and 2.5”
inside-diameter corner posts, and pre-cast concrete bases
c.
Provide lockable gates as necessary.
Materials shall be new or like new and undamaged. Torn, deformed,
or otherwise blemished fabric shall be removed and replaced with
sections of the minimum specified length.
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Verification
1.
Verification of Conditions: Examine Designated Trees with the
Construction Manager and document existing conditions prior to
installation of protection. Identify and inventory trees to be retained.
Discuss Zones of Protection, Critical Root Zone, and related items.
86
B.
Clearing
1.
2.
3.
3.02
Provide clearing and removal of existing vegetation as required to
install preliminary location stakes. Provide clearing and removal as
required to install posts and fence. See Section 31 15 00 – Clearing,
Grubbing and Roadside Cleanup
Keep clearing operations to the minimum needed for fence
installation. Do not clear materials from within the Zone of Protection.
Perform clearing in a manner and to an extent approved by the
Construction Manager.
Remove all trimmings and dispose of offsite in conformance with local
authorities.
PROTECTIVE FENCING
A.
Standard Protection Fencing
1.
2.
3.
B.
Locate Protection Fences at perimeters of Zones of Protection around
Designated Trees, as shown on Drawings.
Preliminary Fence Location Staking Review: Prior to installation of
tree protection fencing, lay out the proposed fencing locations with
paint and/or stakes and string for review by the Construction Manager
and make adjustments in the fence locations and alignment as
directed by Construction Manager.
Install fencing immediately after receipt of Construction Manager’s
approval and before the starting of other construction activities.
a.
Posts:
1)
Install metal fence posts plumb and evenly spaced at 6
feet on center (maximum).
2)
Insert the fence posts 18 to 24 inches into the ground.
Adjacent post heights shall be within 4 inches.
b.
Fence Fabric:
1)
Stretch specified mesh fencing tight between posts.
2)
Provide fabric in long, continuous sections, 50 feet
minimum in length.
3)
Terminate length of mesh at fence posts, providing a
minimum of 12 inches of full height overlap.
c.
Ties:
1)
Fasten fabric firmly to metal posts at two inches below
top of post, at mid-point, and at three inches above the
finish grade with specified ties.
Increased Protection Fencing
1.
The Contracting Agency reserves the right to require the Contractor to
provide Increased Protection Fencing when, in Construction Manager’s
87
opinion, Designated Trees are endangered by the Contractor’s or
Subcontractor’s actions or where standard Tree Protection Fencing
cannot be installed as detailed. Provide specified Increased Protection
Fencing at locations determined by the Construction Manager.
3.03
PRUNING
A.
Tree Canopy Pruning
1.
3.04
WATERING
A.
3.05
Prune canopies of Designated Trees impacted by construction only
upon approval of the Construction Manager. All canopy pruning must
be performed by a certified arborist.
Watering will be required at all existing trees; refer to Plans.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintenance
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Maintain fencing in an upright position and in good condition
throughout the project until Final Acceptance. Replace or repair
damaged fencing immediately. Remove fencing as directed at end of
contract
Provide water, fertilizer, deep root fertilization, pesticides, antidesiccants, and other materials, plus labor as needed to maintain the
existing trees in a healthy and growing condition.
Prune trees where needed to maintain the health of the tree, where
damage has occurred, and to remove branches from the work areas as
directed by the Construction Manager. All pruning shall be performed
in accordance with International Society of Arboriculture standards.
Wash off trees that become soiled, or as directed.
Provide maintenance of trees for the duration of the Contract, until
Final Acceptance.
Warranty
1.
2.
3.
Upon Final Acceptance, the Contracting Agency will assume
responsibility for recommended landscape maintenance of
Designated Trees.
Designated Trees must be in healthy condition at end of the
construction period.
At end of construction period, as directed by Construction Manager
and at no additional cost to Contracting Agency:
88
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Repair Designated Trees damaged by construction operations,
as directed by Construction Manager and at no cost to the
Contracting Agency.
Remove and replace Designated Trees damaged by
construction operations where Construction Manager
determines that restoration to normal healthy condition is not
possible
Pay for administration, consultants, coordination, permits and
all other costs associated with repair, removal or replacement
of existing trees.
Tree replacement schedule:
1)
Trees up to four (4) inch caliper: Replant the same size
and species as damaged tree, and unconditionally
guarantee for five years.
2)
Trees over four (4) inch caliper: Compensate
Contracting Agency as determined by Construction
Manager and ISA Arborists. Value of trees to be replaced
shall be based on the criteria found in “Guide for Plant
Appraisal,” by the Council of Tree and Landscape
Appraisers, 1992 edition.
Actual tree damage such as trunk scoring, broken limbs or
damaged roots inside the Zone of Protection will be assessed
according to the percentage of loss of tree value. The
Construction Manager will determine percentage of tree value
as outlined in "Evaluation of Landscape Trees, Shrubs and
other Landscape Plants" by the International Society of
Arboriculture.
END OF SECTION
89
SECTION 01 57 00 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE FACILIITES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
B.
Measurement
1.
C.
The work in this section consists of furnishing, installing and removing
temporary drainage facilities required for bio-retention basin
remediation construction activities as shown or specified.
No measurement of quantities will be made for work performed under
this section.
Payment
1.
Payment will be made at the Contract unit price:
Pay Item
01 57 00.01
2.
Temporary Drainage Facilities
Pay Unit
LS
Payment will be payment in full for furnishing, placing, maintaining, and
removing drainage facilities, and for furnishing all equipment, labor, and
incidentals necessary to complete the work as specified.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
TEMPORARY DRAINAGE FACILTIES GENERAL
A.
3.02
Furnish and install temporary drainage facilities of sufficient capacity and
strength to carry traffic over the facility and water under the facility. Determine
the actual strength and type of facility needed. The sizes of facilities shown on
the Plans are minimum only. Submit this determination and its basis to the
Construction Manager for review. Do not install until approved.
REMOVAL
A.
Remove temporary drainage facilities when they are no longer needed. The
facilities remain the property of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
90
SECTION 01 57 10 WATERING (SECTION 2-07)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 2-07 -Watering and other sections referenced therein, of the Standard Specifications
as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
D.
01 57 13 – Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control
31 23 35 – Roadway Excavation and Embankment
32 11 23 – Crushed Surfacing
Measurement
1.
E.
This Work consists of furnishing, hauling, and applying water for
compacting embankments, constructing Subgrade, placing of crushed
surfacing, dust control, and as the Construction Manager requires.
No separate measurement will be made for Work described in this
Section.
Payment
1.
No separate payment shall be made for the Work described in this
Section. The cost of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to
other Contract prices.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
91
SECTION 01 57 13 EROSION CONTROL AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL (SECTIONS 107.15 and 8-01)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 107.15, Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control, and Section 8-01, Erosion
Control and Water Pollution Control, and other sections referenced therein, of
the Standard Specifications as amended herein. Work under this section shall
also be completed in conformance with the City of Vancouver’s Erosion
Prevention and Sediment Control Ordinance (VMC 14.24) and Surface
Water/Stormwater Design and Construction Requirements.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
01 33 00 - Submittals
01 32 13 - Progress Schedule
01 35 43 - Special Environmental Protection Requirements
01 57 10 - Watering
31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling
32 11 23 - Crushed Surfacing
31 34 19.16 - Geotextile Soil Reinforcement
Measurement
1.
2.
E.
Work under this section consists of meeting requirements for
environmental protection and sustainable practices as specified in the
conditions of project approval included in the NEPA Documented
Categorical Exclusion approved by the FTA in November 2014. This
Section also covers construction site maintenance, street cleaning, and
dust control.
Street Cleaning will be measured by the hour for actual time spent
cleaning pavement.
All other Work in this Section will be measured by the Lump Sum
basis.
Payment
1.
Accepted erosion control and preparation and submittal of a City of
Vancouver Erosion Prevention and Sediment Control Plan (EPSCP)
will be paid for at the Contract lump sum price for “Soil Erosion and
92
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sediment Control.” No separate payment will be made for
modifications or additions to the EPSCP that become necessary for
permit compliance during construction.
Payment for Site maintenance will be incidental to the work under Soil
Erosion and Sediment Control.
The Contract price paid for each item will be payment in full for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment and incidentals and
doing all Work necessary to complete the Work specified.
No additional payment will be made to the Contractor for compensation
for environmental permits, fees, or fines incurred as a result of these
requirements.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item
01 57 13.01
01 57 13.02
1.02
Soil Erosion and Sediment Control
Street Cleaning
Pay Unit
LS
HR
REFERENCES
Sponsor
FTA
Subject
Documented Categorical Exclusion, November 7, 2014
PART 2 – MATERIALS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL (TESC) PLAN
A.
The Contractor shall prepare and implement a TESC plan to:
1.
2.
3.02
Minimize the extent of exposed soils at any given time.
Conduct extensive soil-disturbing work in the “dry-season” (generally
from June to October).
SPILL PREVENTION AND CONTROL AND COUNTERMEASURES (SPCC) PLAN
A.
The Contractor shall prepare and implement a SPCC plan to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Maintain a 300 foot setback from construction staging areas to Burnt
Bridge Creek and the Columbia River.
Keep spill clean-up equipment available on site.
Conduct paving and painting in dry weather.
Clean paint materials and equipment outside of surface waters.
Establish concrete truck chute clean out areas.
93
3.03
WATER QUALITY BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMPS)
A.
The Contractor shall implement water quality BMPs to:
1.
2.
3.04
3.05
Detain and treat stormwater before it leaves the construction site.
Discharge water so that it does not exceed existing conditions based
on a two (2) year storm event.
SITE MAINTENANCE
A.
The Contractor is required to keep all streets and permanent and temporary
pedestrian ways clean and free of all trash and construction debris on a daily
basis or as directed by the Construction Manager until Final Acceptance of the
Work.
B.
Waste material of any character shall under no conditions be permitted to
remain on the site of the work or on adjacent streets. Immediately, upon such
materials becoming unfit for use in the Work, they shall be collected, carried off
the site, and disposed of by the Contractor at his own expense.
C.
The Contractor shall, at his or her own expense, keep the buildings occupied by
him or her clear of all refuse, rubbish and debris that may accumulate from any
source whatsoever, and shall keep them in a neat condition to the satisfaction
of the Construction Manager.
STREET CLEANING
A.
The Contractor is required to properly clean all construction equipment before
leaving the construction site to prevent tracking debris onto the public right of
way.
B.
Temporary stabilized construction entrance shall be constructed in
accordance with the City of Vancouver Standard Plans, prior to beginning any
clearing, grubbing, embankment or excavation. All quarry spall material used
for stabilized construction entrance shall be free of extraneous materials that
may cause or contribute to track out.
C.
When the stabilized entrance no longer prevents track out of sediment or
debris, the Contractor shall either rehabilitate the existing entrance to
original condition, or construct a new entrance.
D.
When dump trucks and/or other equipment are working on or adjacent to
paved streets and roadways, the Contractor shall be required to clean streets
and/or permanent/temporary pedestrian areas, in accordance with the City of
Vancouver or WSDOT requirements, as appropriate; or as directed by the
Construction Manager.
94
3.06
3.07
3.08
E.
Whenever required by the Construction Manager, self-propelled pickup street
sweepers shall be used, to prevent the transport of sediment and other
debris off the project site. Street sweepers shall be designed and operated to
meet air quality standards.
F.
Street washing with water will require approval by the Construction
Manager.
G.
Any violation of the above requirements shall be sufficient ground for the
Construction Manager to order the streets in question to be cleaned by others,
and the cost of which shall be paid by the Contractor as a deduction from the
monthly progress payment.
DUST CONTROL
A.
The Contractor is required to meet the applicable codes and standards stated in
the National Ambient Air Quality Standards, State Implementation Plan and
City or County Standard Construction Specifications as applicable.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing control of airborne dust and
particles from the areas of Work. Visible dust shall be controlled by use of
water or other appropriate methods.
PROTECTION OF PRIVATE PROPERTY FROM DIRT, DUST AND DEBRIS
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for taking all reasonable steps to control
dirt, dust and debris affecting private property along the alignment.
B.
If the Contractor fails to maintain the work area as required in this Section, and
as a result, adjacent private property is impacted, the Contractor may be
directed by the Construction Manager to take additional steps to clean these
sites. This Work Request shall not be justification for additional payment.
WATERING
A.
The application of water shall be in accordance with Section 01 57 10 Watering
END OF SECTION
95
SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
D.
Measurement
1.
C.
1.03
No measurement of quantities will be made for work performed under
this section.
Payment
1.
1.02
The work in this section provides requirements regarding products,
quality of materials, appurtenances and accessories, packaging and
handling, transportation and delivery, storage and protection, and
material safety data sheets.
No separate payment shall be made for the Work described in this
Section. The cost of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to
other Contract prices.
QUALITY OF MATERIALS
A.
Materials, equipment, and fabricated assemblies to be incorporated in the
Work shall be new, except as may be indicated or specified otherwise in the
Contract Documents.
B.
Materials, equipment, and assemblies shall be manufactured, fabricated,
handled, and incorporated into the Work so as to ensure completed work.
C.
Additional Requirements are included in Section 1-06, Control of Materials of
the Standard Specifications.
APPURTENANCES AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Products to be incorporated in the Work shall be furnished as complete
assemblies or systems with all appurtenances and installation anchors,
fasteners, and accessories as required to provide a complete and finished
product installation.
96
B.
1.04
1.05
1.06
Installed products with moving parts shall be fully operable at proper settings
and levels in accordance with the respective manufacturers' instructions and
recommendations.
PACKAGING AND HANDLING
A.
Avoid bending, scraping, or overstressing materials and equipment. Protect
projecting parts by blocking with wood, by providing bracing, or by other
approved methods.
B.
Materials and equipment shall be protected from soiling and moisture by
wrapping or by other approved methods.
C.
Small parts shall be packaged in containers such as boxes, crates, or barrels to
avoid dispersal and loss. Firmly secure an itemized list and description of
contents to each such container.
TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY
A.
Arrange deliveries of materials and equipment in accordance with the Progress
Schedule specified in Section 01 32 13, Progress Schedule, and coordinate to
avoid conflict with work and conditions at the jobsite.
B.
Deliver materials in undamaged condition, in manufacturers' original
containers or packaging (where applicable), with identifying labels intact and
legible.
C.
Deliver cement, prepared dry mortar mixes, grouting material, and coloring
material in original, unopened and sealed containers, bearing the brand and
manufacturer's name.
D.
Refer also to the individual Specifications Sections for detailed requirements as
applicable.
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A.
The receiving, storage, quality, and inventory control of equipment and
materials required for the Work of this Contract shall be the sole responsibility
of the Contractor. Arrange storage to provide easy access for inspection and
identification of each shipment.
B.
Store materials in such a manner as to ensure the preservation of their quality
and fitness for the work and to facilitate inspection.
C.
Provide sheltered, weathertight, or heated weathertight storage as required to
protect materials and equipment from weather damage and corrosion.
97
1.07
D.
Store manufactured materials in accordance with the various manufacturers'
instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Maintain temperature and
humidity within the ranges required by the various manufacturers'
instructions.
E.
Provide blocking, platforms, pallets, or skids for materials and equipment
subject to damage by contact with earth or pavement. Provide clearances from
adjacent surfaces for stored materials requiring natural ventilation.
F.
Store packaged materials in their original unbroken packages or containers.
G.
Protect materials and equipment from damage and corrosion during
warehousing operations.
H.
Perform periodic inspections of stored materials to assure that materials are
maintained under specified conditions, and are free from damage or
deterioration.
I.
Continue protection of materials and equipment from damage and corrosion
after installation until Final Acceptance of the Work.
J.
Refer also to the individual Specifications Sections for detailed requirements, as
applicable.
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS)
A.
The Contractor shall furnish MSDS for all materials to be incorporated in the
Work. A file drawer or drawers shall be provided in the Contractor's field office
(or other acceptable location) for the filing of all MSDS. MSDS shall be filed in
accordance with Specifications Section numbers, and shall be readily available
to the Construction Manager, jurisdictional inspection authorities, and all
personnel engaged in the Work.
B.
MSDS for material that are flammable or otherwise hazardous shall be posted
on a bulletin board provided for this specific purpose. This bulletin board shall
be located at the project site, sheltered from rain and wind, and shall be readily
accessible to all personnel engaged in the Work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
98
SECTION 01 71 13 MOBILIZATION (SECTION 1-09.7)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
This Special Provision replaces Section 1-09.7 - Mobilization of the Standard
Specifications.
B.
Description
1.
2.
C.
Related Sections
1.
D.
01 35 24 - Safety Requirements.
Measurement
1.
E.
Mobilization consists of preconstruction expenses and the costs of
preparatory Work and operations performed by the Contractor.
Items which are not to be included in the item of Mobilization include
but are not limited to:
a.
Any portion of the Work covered by the specific Contract item
or incidental Work which is to be included in a Contract item
or items.
b.
Profit, interest on borrowed money, overhead, or management
costs.
c.
Any costs of mobilizing equipment for force account Work. For
mobilization for force account Work, see Section 1-09.6 of the
Standard Specifications.
No separate measurement will be made for Work described in this
Section.
Payment
1.
Payment for mobilization shall be:
a.
When five (5) percent of the total original Contract amount is
earned from other Contract items, excluding amounts paid for
materials on hand, 50 percent of the amount Bid for
Mobilization will be paid.
b.
When ten (10) percent of the total original Contract amount is
earned from other Contract items, excluding amounts paid for
materials on hand, 100 percent of the amount Bid for
Mobilization will be paid.
99
2.
3.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item
Pay Unit
01 71 13.01 Mobilization
LS
Nothing herein shall be construed to limit or preclude partial
payments otherwise provided by the Contract.
PART 2 – MATERIALS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Mobilization payments may be withheld if the Contractor is not in compliance
with Section 01 35 24 Safety Requirements.
END OF SECTION
100
SECTION 01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING (SECTION 1-05.4)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
This Special Provision replaces Section 1-05.4 – Conformity With and
Deviations From Plans and Stakes of the Standard Specifications.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
D.
01 33 00 – Submittals.
Measurement
1.
E.
This Work consists of the construction surveys and other measurements
as required to establish lines, slopes, continuous profile grade for
busway, roadway, and crossing streets; center line, bench marks and
other controls deemed necessary to complete the Work required for this
Contract; and measurements required for determination of payment
quantities.
No separate measurement will be made for Work described in this
Section.
Payment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Pre-construction Record of Survey Monuments will be paid for at the
Contract lump sum price.
Post-construction Record of Survey will be paid for at the Contract
lump sum price.
Accepted Field Engineering will be paid for at the Contract lump sum
price for "Field Engineering (Survey)". Payment will include
construction surveys, measurements, calculations, copying of field
notes, and preservation or surveying of monuments. The lump sum
value will be spread into equal monthly installments over the Contract
period for payment purposes.
The Contract price paid will be payment in full for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and doing all Work
necessary to complete the Work specified.
Payment will be made under:
101
Pay Item
01 71 23.01
01 71 23.02
01 71 23.03
1.02
1.03
Pre-construction Record of
Survey Monuments
Post-construction Record of
Survey
Field Engineering (Survey)
Pay Unit
LS
LS
LS
REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Contractor shall provide a Land Surveyor, licensed in the State of
Washington, for construction staking. The Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for the accuracy of the measurements and controls provided by
them. The Construction Manager reserves the right to verify the grades and
locations. Any discrepancies from the grades and locations shown on the Plans
shall be corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B.
The Owner will provide, at no cost to the Contractor, survey control points and
benchmarks as shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall be held responsible
for the preservation of all survey control points and benchmarks, as provided
by the Owner, and any other existing survey monuments of record. Monuments
or control points requiring replacement during construction shall be done by a
surveyor licensed in the State of Washington and at no cost to the Owner. The
Contractor shall immediately notify the Construction Manager in writing of any
discrepancies in the control survey.
C.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Construction Manager in writing of
obvious errors or omissions in the Plans identified during construction Plan
review and stake out. The Contractor shall not construct any facilities identified
during construction Plan review and stake out that are in obvious error.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section
01 33 00 Submittals, except as modified herein.
1.
2.
The Contractor shall submit for approval a minimum of ten (10) days
prior to commencing the survey Work, the name and address of a Land
Surveyor, licensed in the State of Washington, who will be directly
responsible for the survey Work.
Upon request of the Construction Manager, field notes, calculations, and
other documents shall be submitted to verify the accuracy of the field
engineering Work. Field notes for quantity computations for payment
shall be submitted at least five (5) days in advance of the Construction
Manager's calculation of progress estimates.
102
3.
Within 30 days of completion of the Work, two (2) sets of field notes,
calculations, drawings and other documents necessary to accomplish
the field engineering Work for this Contract shall be submitted to the
Construction Manager.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
ACCURACY
A.
Control traverse field surveys and computations, including surveys of main
control lines to determine alignment of major structure components, shall be
performed to an accuracy of at least 1:25000.
B.
The tolerances generally applicable in setting survey stakes shall be as set forth
below. Such tolerances shall not supersede stricter tolerances required by the
Plans or Specifications, and shall not otherwise relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for measurements in compliance therewith.
C.
Tolerances in setting survey shall not exceed the following:
Tolerances for Centerlines, Baselines
or Control Lines
Distance
Tangent
Curve
Survey Stake or Markers
Structures and building
construction:
Equipment installation:
Roadway surfacing, steel
reinforcement, concrete
pipe, and other formed
concrete:
D.
1:10,000
0.01 ft
1/2 min.
As required by manufacturer
1:5,000
0.02 ft.
1/2 min.
Offset grade stakes or markers for:
Tolerances
Horizontal Distance
Survey Stake or Markers
Roadway surfacing, steel
reinforcement, and other
formed concrete:
Structures and building
Construction:
Platform Edge :
103
Elevation
0.02 ft.
0.01 ft.
0.02 ft.
0.01 ft.
0.02 ft.
0.01 ft.
3.02
3.03
3.04
DIARY AND FIELD NOTES
A.
A daily diary shall be maintained of all Work performed by the survey crews.
This diary or daily record shall include the date, weather, crew, type and
location of Work being performed, and Work accomplished.
B.
Field notes shall be maintained for all items of survey Work and measurements.
Notes shall be in English, neat, legible, precise and sufficiently detailed.
C.
All construction field notes shall be accurate, clear, and complete, and shall be
recorded on standard note weatherproof forms.
CONSTRUCTION STAKES
A.
The marking and color coding on construction stakes shall be uniform
throughout the Contract.
B.
Points that may be disturbed or destroyed during construction shall be
referenced to safe and stable locations.
C.
Contractor shall be responsible for protecting his construction staking as
required. No additional compensation will be given for resetting construction
stakes displaced by his construction operation.
D.
Slope stake references may be used to represent the clearing areas.
BENCHMARKS
A.
3.05
The benchmarks shown on the Plans shall be checked for location and
elevations, and additional benchmarks shall be installed as required.
Benchmarks shall not be set on utility poles.
CROSS SECTIONS
A.
Cross sections recorded in the field books shall serve as a quantity pay
document for appropriate Work items performed. Slope stakes shall be used to
indicate the outline of the cut or fill to be made and the slope of cut or fill.
B.
Careful planning of the Work shall be performed so that sufficient preliminary
Work such as centerline staking, benchmarks, and offset lines are established to
permit the cross-sectioning Work to follow in an orderly manner.
C.
For use in determination of pay quantities, the maximum cross-section interval
shall be 50 feet; closer intervals shall be used as directed by the Construction
Manager, for accurate earthwork measurement. Cross sections at intersections
shall be at a 25 feet grid pattern.
104
D.
3.06
FINISH GRADE HUBS
A.
3.07
3.08
3.09
Cross sections shall be taken at structure ends and other locations necessary to
represent the earthwork quantity.
When the rough grading of subgrade has been substantially completed, grade
hubs (blue tops) shall be set on the subgrade at intervals not more than 25 feet
apart.
STRUCTURES
A.
Control lines used as dimensional references on the Plans shall be staked.
Control lines include, but are not limited to, center line or layout line of
structures; center line of footing; grade beams; layout lines of walls.
B.
Specific structure element locations such as edge of footings, end wall, edge of
platforms or other details may be located from the staked lines.
C.
Control lines shall be staked so that they can be used as working lines by
workers as required.
PIPE AND ASSOCIATED STRUCTURES
A.
Manholes, catch basins and inlets shall be staked so that they will fit properly
with curb, gutter, and other subsequent roadway elements.
B.
Unless authorized in writing by the Construction Manager, the gradients or
lengths of runs of pipes shall not be changed from the Plans.
C.
Position of manholes, catch basins, and inlets shall be protected from
disturbance by the straddle hub method with a grade hub offset.
SURVEY MONUMENTS
A.
Survey points that will be removed by construction shall be tied out and
replaced if they are recorded in the County Surveyor's Office. The point
replacement Work shall be done by a licensed surveyor and recorded at the
County Surveyor's Office in accordance with RCW 58.09.
B.
Upon completion of construction the contractor shall hire a professional
licensed surveyor to monument the new right-of-way per the requirements of
RCW 58.09
END OF SECTION
105
SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES (SECTIONS 1-05.11 and 1-05.12)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
This Special Provision replaces Section 1-05.11 – Final Inspection and 1-05.12 –
Final Acceptance of the Standard Specifications.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
D.
No separate payment will be made for the Work in this Section. The cost
of meeting the requirements shall be incidental to other Contract prices.
FINAL INSPECTION
A.
1.03
No measurement will be made for Work described in this Section.
Payment
1.
1.02
01 32 13 – Progress Schedule.
01 78 39 – Project Record Documents.
Measurement
1.
E.
This Section includes the Work to meet the requirements for Project
Closeout and Final Acceptance.
The Construction Manager will not make the final inspection until the physical
Work required by the Contract, including final cleanup and all extra Work
ordered by the Construction Manager, has been completed.
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A.
The Contractor must perform all the obligations under the Contract before a
Completion Date and final acceptance can occur. Failure of the Contractor to
perform all the obligations under the Contract shall not bar the Contracting
Agency from unilaterally accepting the Contract as provided in Section 1-09.9
of the Standard Specifications. The Contracting Agency accepts the completed
Contract and the items of Work shown in the final estimate by signature of the
Final Contract Voucher Certification. The date of that signature constitutes the
acceptance date. Progress estimates or payments shall not be construed as
acceptance of any Work under the Contract.
106
1.04
B.
The Contractor agrees that neither completion nor final acceptance shall relieve
the Contractor of the responsibility to indemnify, defend, and protect the
Contracting Agency against any claim or loss resulting from the failure of the
Contractor (or the Subcontractors or lower tier subcontractors) to pay all
laborers, mechanics, Subcontractors, material persons, or any other person
who provides labor, supplies, or provisions for carrying out the Work or for any
payments required for unemployment compensation under Title 50 RCW or for
industrial insurance and medical aid required under Title 51 RCW.
C.
Final acceptance shall not constitute acceptance of any unauthorized or
defective work or material. The Contracting Agency shall not be barred from
requiring the Contractor to remove, replace, repair, or dispose of any
unauthorized or defective work or material or from recovering damages for
any such work or material.
PREREQUISITES FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A.
Prior to notifying the Contracting Agency that it deems its obligations under the
Contract have been fulfilled, Contractor shall:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Submit certified copy of Construction Manager 's final itemized Punch
List of Work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has
been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, endorsed and
dated by the Construction Manager.
Submit final meter readings for utilities, and similar data.
Submit any other records and documents required by the Contract and
not previously submitted.
Remove from the Project site temporary facilities and services, along
with construction tools and equipment.
Complete final cleanup.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
END OF SECTION
107
SECTION 01 78 24 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS (SECTION 1-06.5)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
This Section replaces Section 1-06.5 – Owner’s Manuals and Operating
Instructions of the Standard Specifications.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Measurement
1.
D.
The Work under this Section will not be measured separately for
payment.
Payment
1.
1.02
This Work consists of submitting bound operations and maintenance
manuals covering all equipment furnished under the Contract.
No separate payment shall be made for the Work in this Section. The
costs of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to other
Contract prices.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
The manuals shall consist of permanent, hardback 3-ring binders not exceeding
3 inches in thickness. Separate volumes shall be furnished as necessary. The
composition and content of each volume shall be approved by the Construction
Manager.
B.
Information shall be typewritten, published literature or detailed Shop
Drawings, size 8-1/2 by 11 inches or accordion-folded to this size.
C.
Instructions shall be in continuous narrative form, not fragmented sections as
prepared by individual equipment manufacturers. Copies of the technical
literature made by photocopying or similar process will not be accepted.
D.
Information shall be arranged and identified with divider sheets and identifying
tabs shall be used for separation of items. A complete table of contents shall be
included in each binder.
E.
Information shall cover the exact equipment provided and shall not contain
"marked-up" general catalog data.
108
1.03
F.
A complete set of Shop Drawings shall be incorporated in each manual,
including control and wiring diagrams, and piping diagrams.
G.
Each binder shall be identified on the outside binding edge with Project name
and number, and systems or components included in the binder.
MANUAL CONTENT
A.
Each manual shall be a compilation of manufacturer's data and specific Project
data, and shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.04
Complete instructions on the operations of all equipment, including
control settings, switch positions, timer operation, and starting and
stopping sequences.
Complete instructions regarding the maintenance of all equipment
including periods and frequencies of all inspections, lubrications and
filter replacements, type of lubricants required; and exact description of
performance of such maintenance and full description of inspections
and corrections on a step-by-step basis.
Complete nomenclature of all replaceable parts, their part numbers, and
the name and address of the nearest vendor.
Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued for components of the
systems, showing all dates of expiration of the completed installation
guarantee specified herein.
Copies of test and balancing reports made on the equipment installed.
SUBMITTAL AND REVIEW
A.
One unbound copy of each manual shall be submitted not less than 60 days
before the projected Contract completion date in accordance with the current
Progress Schedule. Comments of the Construction Manager shall be
incorporated, and three (3) copies of each volume in final form shall be
submitted to the Construction Manager. The final submittal shall be made not
less than 15 days before projected Final Acceptance of the Contract. Receipt of
the final Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be a prerequisite to
acceptance of the Work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
END OF SECTION
109
SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
B.
Related Sections
1.
C.
No measurement will be made for Work described in this Section.
Payment
1.
1.02
01 33 00 – Submittals.
Measurement
1.
D.
This Work consists of annotating, maintaining, and delivering the
Contract Record Documents.
No separate payment shall be made for the Work described in this
Section. The cost of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to
other Contract prices.
REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Contractor shall submit as-built markup of the design within 30 days of
Contracting Agency acceptance of any portion of the Project for the “accepted
work”.
B.
The Contractor shall provide to the Construction Manager as part of Project
Closeout the Contract Record Documents consisting of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
A set of Contract Plans and Specifications marked, as specified herein, to
indicate the "as-built" conditions of the Contract.
Any Contract documents other than the Contract Plans or Specifications
that have been added to the Contract or modified after execution of
Contract.
All other records including, but not limited to, Subcontracts, Purchase
Orders, Employment Records, Shop Drawings, Change Orders, Field Test
Records, Quality Control Documents, Certificates of Inspection.
The Contractor shall deliver to Contracting Agency all Guarantees,
Warranties and Certificates that are required under the Work of this
Contract.
110
C.
The final Record Documents shall show the Work as actually installed, placed,
erected, and applied prior to Final Acceptance of the Work. If the Project
Record Documents as submitted are found to be unacceptable due to
incompleteness or inaccurate information, the Record Documents shall be
returned to the Contractor for corrective action and resubmitted for acceptance
prior to the release of Final Completion payment.
D.
Electronic Documents: Record (“as-built”) information, as applicable, shall be
recorded on an electronic copy of those Record Documents which are required
to be submitted electronically.
1.
2.
For those Record Drawings which are required to be submitted
electronically, submit one complete set of full size (22 by 34 inch, unless
otherwise required) hard copy originals plotted on 20 lb. bond paper,
zero solvent. The image shall be pressure-fused using a laser or LED
plotter. Inkjet plotter is also acceptable. Sepia, blue or brown lines are
not acceptable.
Record Documents for each Submittal which was required to be
prepared and submitted electronically shall include two (2) CD-ROMs of
the electronic version. Electronic files shall include a matrix or
document showing how the files are set up and how to access them.
Include no extraneous files. Folder arrangement must be clear and
understandable and subfolders are to be used only when necessary.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
ANNOTATING CONTRACT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Maintain one annotated record copy of all Contract Documents, Shop Drawings
and Permits, and Change Orders at the site.
B.
Do not use the record drawings and specifications for construction purposes.
Maintain record documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Provide access
to record documents for the Construction Manager's inspection during normal
working hours.
C.
Mark each page or sheet of the record drawings and specification book with
"CONTRACT RECORD DOCUMENT".
D.
Mark the Record Documents to show the "as-built" conditions which deviate
from the Conformed Contract Documents, including field changes.
111
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Legibly record the information concurrent with the construction
progress on at least a weekly basis. Do not conceal the Work until this
information has been recorded. In the event that record documents are
not kept up, the Contracting Agency has the right to withhold all or part
of the Contractor's progress billing until the record documents are
updated to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager.
Mark changes directed by the Contracting Agency or its designee in
green. Mark deviations necessitated by field adjustment in red.
All changes shall be clearly indicated with a cloud and triangle
containing a revision number as specified below.
Each change to a record drawing shall be assigned a revision number
that will be entered in the revision block and initialed and dated by the
Contractor's representative.
The Contractor shall maintain a Drawing Control Log showing the
current drawing revisions.
Unless stated otherwise, Change Notices and Change Orders shall be
incorporated on the Record Drawings.
No references to Field Notes, Change Notices, Change Orders or RFIs
shall be accepted. All information shall be on the drawings.
Record the following utility information:
a.
Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities affected
by the Work.
b.
Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction referenced to visible and accessible features of the
structure.
c.
Field changes of dimension and detail including As-Built
elevation and location (station and offset).
New drawings developed by the Contractor may be included, provided
that:
a.
The drawing information fits into the standard drawing size for
the Project, 22 inches by 34 inches, which includes the border
frame of the drawing.
b.
The drawing shall be sealed by an Engineer registered in the
State of Washington, complete with sealer's full signature, and
registration's expiration date.
c.
The company name and logo shall appear on the drawing.
d.
The drawing number must be assigned by the Construction
Manager. The drawing title and drawing number are to be added
to the record Index of drawings. Such drawings will go in the
back of the package.
112
3.02
RECORD SAMPLE
A.
Record Samples: Immediately prior to the time(s) of Substantial Completion,
the Construction Manager and the Contractor will meet at the site and
determine which of the submitted Samples maintained by the Contractor
during the progress of the Work are to be transmitted for record purposes.
END OF SECTION
113
SECTION 02 41 20 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS (SECTION 2-02)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 2-02 –
Removal of Structures and Obstructions of the Standard Specifications as
amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
2.
3.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
D.
This Section specifies demolition and removal of existing facilities and
obstructions as identified on the Plans, herein, or as necessary to
construct improvements. The Work includes salvage, removal,
disposal, storage, or delivery of existing facilities and cold planing of
existing asphalt pavement.
Existing facilities and obstructions include but are not limited to the
following: signs, posts, mailboxes, trash bins, bike racks, kiosks,
shelters, pavement, curb, sidewalk, walls, parking meters, bollards,
inlets, signals and street lighting including foundations, landscaping,
and other facilities designated to be removed or the removal of which
is necessary for the accomplishment of the improvements.
The existing facilities as described above covered under this
specification will be collectively referred to herein as "material(s)" all
as shown on the Contract Plans and as specified herein.
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
01 57 13 - Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control
10 14 53 – Traffic Signage
Measurement
1.
2.
Except as listed below, no separate measurement will be made for
demolition and removal of existing facilities and obstructions. This
includes the removal and storage of existing signal poles and street
lighting luminaries, and demolition of signal pole and street light
foundations to the specified depth below subgrade.
Drainage structure removal, including removal of area drains, curb
inlets, catch basins, and manholes, shall be measured per each
structure removed. The removal of drainage piping connected to
drainage structures shall be incidental to the removal of the drainage
structures. The abandonment and plugging of drainage piping
connected to drainage structures shall be measured per each pipe.
114
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Removal of concrete Pavement, asphalt pavement, full depth cold plane
pavement removal, concrete sidewalk, concrete curb, and concrete
curb and gutter will be measured as general excavation and paid as
specified in Section 31 23 35 Roadway Excavation and Embankment.
Cold Plane pavement removal for pavement overlay will be measured
by the square yard of surface area planed.
Removal/Disposal/Relocation of existing bus stop amenities will be
measured by the lump sum.
Remove/Store/Reinstall Incl. foundation sculpture will be measured by
the lump sum.
Business sign relocation will be measured by each sign removed and
reinstalled.
Payment
1.
2.
The accepted removal/reinstallation/relocation work, measured as
specified above, will be paid for at the contract unit price. The Contract
unit price will be payment in full for furnishing all labor, materials,
tools, equipment and incidentals, and doing all work necessary to
complete the work, as specified.
Payment will be made under.
Pay Item
Pay Unit
02 41 20.01
Demolition and Removal of Obstructions
LS
02 41 20.02
2” Cold Plane AC Pavement Removal
SY
02 41 20.03
Remove Drainage Structure
EA
02 41 20.04
Abandon Existing Pipe - Plug
EA
02 41 20.05
Removal/Disposal/Relocation of Existing
Bus Stop Amenities
LS
02 41 20.06
Remove/Store/Reinstall Incl. Foundation
Sculpture
LS
02 41 20.07
Business Sign Relocation (Minor)
EA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Ingress and egress requirements shall be maintained. The Work shall be
performed in a manner to cause as little inconvenience to the public as
115
possible. Safe passageways shall be provided for the public around the
demolition area and operations conducted to prevent damage to adjacent
buildings, structures, other facilities, and people.
B.
Protection of Property
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Protect all private property, insofar as it may be endangered by
operations and take every reasonable precaution to avoid damage to
such property.
Restore and bear the cost of any public or private improvement facility,
structure, or land and landscaping within the right-of-way or Easement
which is damaged or injured directly or indirectly by or on account of
an act, omission, or neglect in the execution of the Work. Restore to a
condition substantially equivalent to that existing before such damage
or injuries occurred, by repairing, rebuilding, or otherwise affecting
restoration thereof, or if this is not feasible, make a suitable settlement
with the owner of the damaged property.
Give reasonable notice to occupants of buildings on property adjacent to
the Work to permit the occupants to remove vehicles, trailers, and
other possessions as well as salvage or relocate plants, trees, fences,
sprinkler systems, or other improvements in the right-of-way that are
designated for removal or that might be destroyed or damaged by
work operations.
Protect all designated trees, lawns, and planted areas within the rightof-way or easements. Erosion control shall be in accordance with
Section 01 57 13 Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control of the
Contract Documents.
DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF OBSTRUCTIONS
A.
Removal of Existing Facilities
1.
2.
B.
The Contractor may salvage materials from demolition for use in
temporary facilities but salvage materials shall not be used in the Work
unless approved in writing by the Project Engineer in each specific
case.
Prior to the removal of any U.S. Postal Service mailboxes the Contractor
shall contact the U.S. Postal Service for removal of contents and sealing.
The boxes shall be carefully removed and securely stored until they are
relocated at locations specified by the U.S. Postal Service.
Removal of Signs
The Contractor shall remove and salvage all the existing traffic signs and
similar items as indicated on Plans and in accordance with applicable codes.
116
The Contractor shall deliver signs to a location determined by the Project
Engineer.
C.
Removal of Street Lights and Traffic Signals
1.
3.3
The Contractor shall remove all the existing streetlights, traffic signals,
and related equipment as shown on the Plans or as specified herein.
All salvaged material including signal heads, luminaries, poles and
arms, signs, and cabinets not re-used shall remain the property of the
City and shall be delivered to the City by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall provide a minimum of three (3) days advance notice
to the City prior to delivering salvaged material. Contractor shall offload, disassemble and store all equipment in a permanent, safe, and
secure manner; integrating equipment into the City’s inventory.
DISPOSAL
A.
Unless otherwise stipulated, all materials resulting from the removal of
obstructions shall become the property of the Contractor at the place of origin
and shall be disposed of by the Contractor in conformance with all laws,
regulations, and rules legally imposed on such activities.
B.
Trees, shrubs and plants to be removed shall become the property of the
Contractor, and shall be disposed of in accordance with local codes and
ordinances.
C.
The Contractor shall use recycling as a method of disposal whenever feasible.
END OF SECTION
117
SECTION 03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
B.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
1.3
No separate measurement will be made for concrete formwork.
Payment
1.
1.02
01 33 00 - Submittals
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing
03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
Measurement
1.
D.
This Work includes furnishing, installing and removal of concrete
formwork as specified, and the placement of anchor bolts, embed
plates, and other items furnished under other sections and required
to be embedded in concrete for construction within the Station limits
as defined in Section 13 13 00 – Platforms and Stations.
No separate payment shall be made for the Work described in this
Section. The cost of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to
other Contract prices.
REFERENCES
Sponsor
Number
Subject
ACI
347
Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Forms shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements
of ACI 347.
B.
Forms shall be designed by the Contractor and shall be subject to approval
by the Project Engineer. Form design shall provide for fabrication, support,
118
and removal. Forms shall be substantial enough to accommodate placing
rates, placement and construction loading and shall be adequate to achieve
the specified finish.
1.4
C.
Where fly ash or retarding admixtures are used, the form design pressures
shall be modified accordingly in accordance with the admixture
Manufacturer's written recommendations to reflect increase in pressure
from the improved workability, slower slump loss and retarded setting
characteristics.
D.
Forms shall also be designed for required penetrations of conduits, pipes,
sleeves and other items required by other sections of these Specifications.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01
33 00 Submittals, except as modified herein.
1.
1.5
Manufacturer's data shall be submitted for proprietary Materials
including form coatings, manufactured systems, and form ties.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Quality control shall be made in accordance with the requirements of
Section 01 45 10 Quality Control Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Forms
1.
2.
B.
Materials shall conform to the requirements of ACI 347 and the
following:
a.
Unexposed surfaces - Lumber, steel, plywood.
b.
Exposed surfaces shall require medium density overlay
plywood.
Form Ties shall be of adequate strength and of a type suitable for
the purpose. Wire ties shall not be used. When forms are removed, tie
metal shall be at least 1- 1/2" from any surface that will be exposed to
water or weather, and at least 1" from any other surface. Lugs, cones,
washers or other devices shall not leave a surface depression or hole
larger than 1" in diameter.
Form Coating shall be Horn, Form Film; Meadows, Duo-Guard; Burke, Form
Coating; or approved equal.
119
2.2
FABRICATION
A.
Forms
1.
2.
3.
Forms shall be readily removable without damaging the concrete.
Temporary openings shall be provided where required to facilitate
cleaning, inspection or placing. Reusable forms shall be thoroughly
cleaned before each application.
Chamfer strips, 3/4", feather-edged to prevent offsets, shall be used at
all exposed external angles, unless otherwise shown. Pour strips shall
be provided to assure a clean, straight line at all construction joints
that will be exposed in finished Work.
Provide recesses and joints of shape, size and spacing as shown on the
Plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Embedded Items: Before placing concrete, all metal, anchor bolts, pipes and
conduits to be embedded shall be firmly fastened in place and braced.
Couplings shall be sealed properly to prevent concrete and water from
entering the conduit. Such items shall be free from scale, loose rust, dried
mortar or other coating that might impair the bond. Wood shall not be
embedded unless approved. Embedded items shall not be in electrical contact
with the inside face of the outside layer of reinforcing steel.
B.
Make all forms mortar-tight, set them so finished concrete will conform to
proper dimensions and contours, and make them sufficiently rigid to
prevent distortion due to pressure of the concrete and other loads incident
to construction operations. Construct and maintain forms to prevent warping
and opening of joints.
C.
Make wood forms for concrete surfaces not subject to backfill of dressed
lumber with a uniform thickness. Provide with a form liner of an approved
type. Plywood will be acceptable as a form liner if supported in an approved
manner. Ensure that all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces is smooth
with grain running in the same direction to give a good finished appearance.
Construct metal ties or anchorage within forms to permit their removal to a
depth of at least 1" from face without injury to concrete. Design all fittings for
metal ties so that, upon their removal, cavities that are left will be of
smallest possible size. Fill cavities with cement mortar and leave surface
sound, smooth, even and uniform in color.
120
D.
Keep forms in place for periods, which shall be determined as specified herein.
When forms appear to be unsatisfactory in any way, either before or during
placing of concrete, Work may be ordered stopped until defects have been
corrected.
E.
Maintain shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness and surface smoothness of
re-used forms at all times. Do not re-use warped or bulged lumber, and do
not re-use any forms that, in the opinion of the Project Engineer, are
unsatisfactory in any respect. Thoroughly clean re- used forms of all dirt,
mortar, and foreign matter prior to use.
F.
Cleaning and Coating of Forms
1.
2.
3.2
ERECTION AND TOLERANCES
A.
3.3
Surfaces of forms to be in contact with concrete shall be coated
prior to placing reinforcing steel. Coating shall be applied in
accordance with the Manufacturer's printed instructions.
At the time the concrete is placed in the forms, the surfaces of the
forms shall be free from encrustation of mortar, grout, or other
foreign material, and puddles of form coating.
Forms shall be erected to tolerances specified in ACI 347.
REMOVAL
A.
Forms shall be left in place until the required strength is achieved. The
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage resulting from
premature removal of forms. Do not place earth backfill against walls below
grade, and do not remove forms and shoring from structural slabs or beams
until concrete has reached actual field strength equal to 75 percent of the
specified 28 day design field strength. Actual field strength shall be
determined from field cured test cylinders which shall be cured under
conditions equivalent to the most unfavorable conditions for the portions of
concrete which the cylinders represent.
B.
Do not use methods of form removal likely to cause over-stressing of
concrete. In general, remove forms from the bottom upwards. Do not
remove forms and their supports without approval. Remove supports in
such a manner as to permit concrete to uniformly and gradually take the
stresses due to its own weight.
END OF SECTION
121
SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
This Work consists of furnishing and placing concrete reinforcement
as shown and as specified for construction of station platforms,
footings, and other miscellaneous concrete structures within the
Station limits as defined in Section 13 13 00 – Platforms and
Stations.
B.
Comply with Contract Buy America Provisions
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Measurement
1.
2.
E.
01 33 00 - Submittals
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
03 11 00 - Concrete Forming
03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing
No separate measurement will be made for concrete reinforcement.
Concrete reinforcement, metal inserts for threaded reinforcement,
and galvanized anchor bolts, as shown on the Plans, will not be
measured. The weight of reinforcement in other items where the
reinforcement is included in the Contract price for the item will not be
measured separately.
No separate measurement will be made for clips, wire, separators,
wire chains, and other Material used in fastening the reinforcing in
place. If bars are substituted upon the Contractor's request, resulting
in more steel being used than specified, only the amount specified will
be measured.
Payment
1.
No separate payment will be made for concrete reinforcement,
metal inserts for threaded reinforcement and galvanized anchor
bolts, installed as shown on the Contract Plans. Full compensation
for meeting these requirements shall be considered incidental to the
appropriate Contract unit price and no additional payment will be
made.
122
1.02
1.3
REFERENCES
Sponsor
Number
Subject
AASHTO
M 31
Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel
ASTM
A615
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
AASHTO
M284
Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Bars
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01
33 00 Submittals, except as modified herein.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Prior to fabrication and before ordering Material, submit all order lists
bar schedules, bending diagrams, and spacing of bars and splice
locations for approval. Such approval by Project Engineer in no way
relieves the Contractor of responsibility for correctness of lists and
bending diagrams. Any expense incidental to the revision of Material
furnished in accordance with such lists and bending diagrams in
compliance with the Plans shall be borne by the Contractor.
Certified copies of mill test reports shall be submitted for each heat or
shipment. The reports shall cover the chemical and mechanical
properties of the reinforcing steel as specified in ASTM A615 or ASTM
A706, as applicable.
Welder and welding procedure qualifications shall be submitted at
least 30 days before any welding is to be performed.
Submit Certificate of Origin for all reinforcing materials
demonstrating compliance with “Buy America.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
All materials shall be in conformance with Section 9-07 of the Standard
Specifications.
B.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, Grade 60, unfinished
C.
Reinforcing Steel to be welded: ASTM A706
D.
Reinforcing Accessories:
1.
Tie Wire: Annealed, 16 GA
123
2.2
FABRICATION
A.
Fabrication shall be in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Before placing in forms, all reinforcement and accessories shall be cleaned
thoroughly of mortar, oil, dirt, loose mill scale, loose or thick rust, and
coatings of any character that would destroy or reduce the bond with the
concrete.
INSTALLATION
A.
Reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed and securely held in position using
tie wire with ends pointed away from forms.
B.
Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing
steel, conduits, or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one (1) bar
diameter, resulting arrangement of bars is subject to approval of the Project
Engineer.
C.
Bar supports and their placement shall conform to Chapter 3 of the CRSI
Manual of Standard Practice. Bar supports in areas exposed to view after
stripping shall be of galvanized or plastic coated steel, or of concrete, as
approved by Engineer.
D.
For foundation mats, base slabs, and slabs on grade precast concrete bar
support blocks shall be used and be precast mortar blocks of approved
shape and dimensions and shall have the same compressive strength as the
concrete in which they are placed.
E.
Layers of bars shall be separated by precast mortar blocks or by other
approved devices. The use of pebbles, pieces of broken stone or brick, metal
pipe, and wooden blocks will not be permitted.
F.
Placing bars on layers of fresh concrete as the Work progresses, and adjusting
bars during the placement of concrete will not be permitted.
G.
Bar laps shall be in contact and securely tied. Length of laps for bars shall
conform to requirements of ACI 318, except as otherwise indicated.
H.
Reinforcement shall be continuous through construction joints except as
otherwise indicated.
124
I.
Reinforcement or other fixed metal items shall not be continuous through
expansion joints. Reinforcement shall have a clearance of 2" from each face of
expansion joint.
J.
Bars shall not be field bent unless otherwise approved by the Project
Engineer. Bars shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will damage
the bars. The use of heat to bend or straighten bars will not be permitted.
K.
Tack welding of reinforcing bars will not be permitted.
END OF SECTION
125
SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
B.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
No separate measurement of concrete will be made under this Section.
Payment
1.
2.
1.2
01 33 00 - Submittals
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
03 11 00 - Concrete Forming
03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing
05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing
05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications
13 13 00 - Platforms and Stations
31 23 35 – Roadway Excavation and Embankment
Measurement
1
D.
This Work includes furnishing and placing cast-in-place concrete,
including concrete within the Station limits as defined in Section 13 13
00 – Platforms and Stations, as shown on the Contract Plans.
No separate payment for concrete will be made for the remaining
Work in this Section. The cost of meeting these requirements shall be
incidental to other Contract prices.
At the Project Engineer’s discretion, Material found to test below
specified strength may be accepted at a reduced rate of payment for
the in-place bid price of Portland Cement Concrete provided that the
strength is determined to be within 500 psi of specified strength. The
payment reduction shall be 2 percent of the in-place bid price for each
10 psi below the specified strength requirement.
REFERENCES
Sponsor
ACI
Number
117
ACI
211.1
Subject
Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete
Construction and Materials
Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete
126
ACI
ACI
ACI
301
302.1R
304R
ACI
ACI
ACI
AASHTO
AASHTO
ASTM
ASTM
305R
306R
318
T26
T23
C33
C39
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
C94
C150
C171
C173
ASTM
(AASHTO
ASTM
ASTM
C192
T126)
C260
C309
ASTM
C387
ASTM
ASTM
AASHTO
C494
C566
M295
AASHTO
ASTM
M45
C1017
ASTM
C1107
ASTM
ASTM
D1190
D1751
ASTM
D1752
IBC
CRD
CRD
1905
C-572
C-421
Specifications for Structural Concrete
Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete
Hot Weather Concreting
Cold Weather Concreting
Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
Quality of Water to be used in Concrete
Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
Concrete Aggregates
Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
Ready-Mixed Concrete
Portland Cement
Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by Volumetric Method
Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Laboratory
Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and
Concrete
Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
Total Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying
Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use
as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete
Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing
Concrete
Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, HydraulicCement Grout (Nonshrink)
Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type
Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and
Resilient Bituminous Types)
Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint
Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
Modifications to ACI 318
127
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
In addition to the submittal requirements specified in Section 6-02 of the
Standard Specifications, submittals shall be made in accordance with the
requirements of Section 01 33 00 Submittals, as follows.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Lift drawings for platform slabs and foundations at all platforms shall
be submitted 30 days before placement of backfill below the slab
begins. Drawings shall show the locations of all footings, thickened
slab edges and other structural features, routing of all utilities
under the slab and Plan location dimensions of all platform surface
features, including but not limited to: electrical conduits and stubups, grounding cables, junction boxes, piping and hydrants, anchor
bolts, dowels, embeds for gratings and other features, construction
joints, control joints, and architectural scoring joints.
A construction joint layout for structural slabs shall be submitted
before beginning field layout.
A placing schedule, within the basic Project Schedule, shall be
submitted before starting placing operations, with dates and
sequences of each proposed concrete placement.
Mix Design: Submit concrete mix designs, along with test data
compliant with IBC, at least two weeks prior to placing concrete.
Submit Manufacturer's Product Data and color samples for integral
color concrete to verify color selection and overall compliance with
applicable requirements of this Section.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Quality control shall be made in accordance with the requirements of
Section 01 45 10 Quality Control Requirements, the Standard Specifications.
B.
Prior to placement of reinforced structural concrete, the Contractor's Quality
Control Manager shall inspect, or cause to have inspected by a qualified
person, formwork, reinforcement, conduit embedment, anchor bolts
positioned, batch tickets with each truck delivering concrete, and other
elements of the Work. The Quality Control Manager shall give the Project
Engineer written confirmation of inspection certifying compliance with
requirements of the Plans and Specifications and obtain the Project Engineer
authorization prior to placement.
C.
Textured Surfaces
1.
2.
No roller mat type systems shall be used for textured surfaces specified
herein.
All concrete textured surface installation shall be in accordance with
the mat manufacturers requirements and concrete color and
additives manufacturer requirements.
128
3.
D.
Installer shall use standard tools and practices of the trade in
performing the Work. Exercise great care during execution.
Plant Certification:
1. Ready Mix Plant to follow NRMCA certification regulations.
2. Ready Mix Plant and Equipment: Comply with requirements of ATMC C94.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Foundation conditions, formwork, embedded items, and reinforcing steel shall
be approved by the Project Engineer before concrete is placed.
B.
Temperature and Weather Requirements:
1. Do not place concrete when temperature or weather will affect
performance or appearance of concrete.
2. Maximum wind velocity for unprotected slabs, stairs, ramps, walks and
curbs: 15 mph.
3. Minimum Ambient Air Temperature: 40°F.
4. No precipitation expected within eight (8) hours for unprotected exposed
concrete surfaces.
1.6
MOCK-UP
A.
Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces
(station platform areas) indicated to receive special treatment or finish.
1.
1.7
Slab on Grade Panel Size: 6x6 feet
a.
Pour one panel for each type and color of concrete used in on
grade slabs.
B.
Accepted mock-up panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work.
Keep mock-up exposed to view for duration of concrete work.
C.
Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work.
COORDINATION WITH RELATED WORK
A.
Contractor to coordinate with owner hired artist and architect for locations,
layout, block out and installation of art pavers.
B.
A pre-construction meeting shall be held for the art pavers and include
the Contractor, owner, artist, architect, civil engineer, concrete subcontractor,
and any other subcontractors involved in the placement and finishing of the
platform concrete and pavers.
129
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cement
1.
B.
ASTM C150, Type I Normal Portland type.
Aggregates
1.
The maximum nominal size aggregate shall be no more than onehalf the clear distance between formwork and reinforcement
conforming to ASTM C33.
C.
Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
D.
Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
E.
Admixtures
1.
2.
F.
Expansion Joint Material
1.
G.
Where specifically called out on the Plans at joints where slabs are
placed against concrete walls or at joints requiring a bond breaker, a
40 pound asphalt saturated felt shall be used.
Architectural Concrete Joint Sealer
1.
H.
For colored and textured concrete, use admixtures proved to be
compatible with colored additives and proposed texturing technique.
Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C494, Type A – Water Reducing and Type
D – Water Reducing and Retarding.
Joint sealer on station platforms and other architectural concrete
shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1190. Joint sealers shall
be color coordinated to match concrete color admixtures where
applicable, or as directed by the Project Engineer.
Curing Compounds for Architectural Concrete
1.
2.
3.
Liquid membrane-forming curing compounds shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C309, Type 1, Class A.
Liquid membrane forming curing and sealing compounds shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B.
Compounds shall create a clear film and when placed over colored
concrete, be demonstrated compatible with the coloring agent.
130
I.
Cement Mortar
1.
J.
Use either standard premixed mortar conforming to ASTM C387, or
mortar proportioned with one part Portland cement to two (2) parts
clean, well-graded sand which passes a #8 screen and which
conforms to AASHTO M45. Admixtures may be used, but do not exceed
the following percentages of cement by weight: hydrated lime, ten
(10) percent, and diatomaceous earth or other inert materials, five (5)
percent.
Concrete Accessories for Architectural Construction
1.
2.
3.
Expansion Joint Fillers
a.
1/2 inch and Heavier: ASTM D1752 "Preformed Expansion Joint
Fillers" (Non- Bituminous)
1)
Where required for support of expansion joint, sealant
joint and joints indicated as "preformed joint filler".
Type I gray sponge rubber may be used.
2)
At other locations, provide Type III self-expanding cork.
3)
Acceptable manufacturers: Meadows, Horn, Burke or
approved equal.
b.
At expansion joints smaller than 1/2 inch and corners and
other locations where slabs are placed against concrete walls,
provide 40 pound asphalt saturated felt unless otherwise
indicated.
Non-Shrink Grout
a.
Load-Transfer Applications (usually shown on Structural
Drawings): Comply with Corps of Engineers CRD-C621,
expansive cement type.
1)
Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: Master
Builders "Masterflow 713", or equal
2)
Submit test report from independent laboratory
confirming compliance with CRD-C 621.
b.
Filling and leveling compounds for use where exposed at
completion: Master Builders "Embeco 167", Thoro "Patch" or
equal.
c.
Filling and leveling compounds for use where concealed at
completion: Plaano, Raecolith, Webtex, or equal.
d.
Furnish epoxy grout from WSDOT's QPL.
Concrete Bonding Agents
a.
Exterior and wet areas where topping will be placed within
24 hours: Polyvinyl acetate emulsion type equal to Superior
"Concrete Bonder".
b.
Other Manufacturers and Products: Submit Substitution
Request, prior to Bid Date, complying with requirements of
Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedure.
131
4.
5.
6.
2.2
Flush Shells, Stud Anchors, Expansion Bolts, etc.: Cone expansion
undercutting type self-drilling anchors not dependent upon torque
for grip, Phillips "Red Head", Rawl "Saber Tooth", or approved equal.
a.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for long-term
design loadings, but not more than allowed by ICBO Evaluation
Report.
b.
Other Manufacturers and Products: Submit Substitution
Request, prior to Bid Date, complying with requirements of
Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedure.
Integral Concrete Coloring Agent shall be LM Scofield Co. or approved
equal. Color as scheduled.
Concrete sealer for color concrete textured surfaces.
a.
Concrete textured surface clear sealer shall be a concrete sealer
approved by the integral concrete color manufacture for use
with their colors. Provide Glaze 'N Seal by Glessner, a division
of LaPorte Construction Chemicals, or approved equal.
b.
Sealants
1)
Exposed and sealed aggregate pavements shall be
sealed with Masco 18 percent clear non-gloss cure and
seal compound, or approved equal.
2)
Unless otherwise specified, all sealants shall be colormatched or clear.
3)
Sealants shall be in conformance with the
Manufacturer's recommendations.
c.
Other Additives
1) The Contractor shall verify the compatibility of other
concrete additives when using concrete color additives.
Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations for use
of color additives.
MIXES
A.
High Early Strength – Platform Concrete
1.
B.
High Early Strength Concrete, where called for on the plans, shall be
defined as concrete that through the use of admixtures and/or
additional cementitious materials can achieve 70 percent of the
specified 28 day compressive strength within 24 hours of placement.
Prior to use of a high early strength mixture, a trial batch shall be
prepared by the CCT to provide a set of cylinders upon which
compressive strength tests shall be conducted at 12, 24, and 48 hours.
2.
High Early Strength Concrete is exempt from the requirements in 2.02B
below.
3.
Admixtures for high-early strength concrete.
a.
The use of products containing chloride will not be allowed.
Normal Strength – Platform Concrete
132
1.
C.
Platform concrete shall be Class 4000 and the mix design shall
conform to the requirements of Section 6-02.3(2).
Normal Strength – Structure Footing Concrete
1.
Compressive Strength and mix design shall conform to requirements on
structural Plans.
Proportioning for Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1
requirements.
2.
D.
Fly Ash and Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag
1.
Mix designs shall include Fly Ash or Ground Granulated Blast Furnace
Slag shall be used to replace a portion of the cement at a minimum of
20 percent by weight of the total of cement plus cementitious modifier.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLACING CONCRETE
A.
3.2
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A.
General
1.
B.
Horizontal Joints
1.
C.
Hardened concrete surfaces against which concrete is to be placed and
to which new concrete is to adhere shall be considered as construction
joints. Construction joints shall be made in accordance with ACI 318
unless otherwise specified or shown.
As a lift is completed, the top surface shall be immediately and
completely protected from any condition that will adversely affect the
hardening of the concrete.
Spacing
1.
Spacing of construction joints in structural slabs shall not exceed 50 feet
by 50 feet (15m x 15 m) in Plan, unless otherwise shown or
approved. Spacing of construction joints in slabs on grade shall not
exceed 25 feet by 25 feet in Plan, unless otherwise shown or
approved. Vertical construction joints in walls shall be arranged so
that the horizontal length of placement shall not exceed 50 feet, unless
otherwise shown or approved.
133
D.
Cleaning
1.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
A.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for the
installation of each type of accessory required, unless more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
B.
Expansion Joint Fillers: Trim flush with surface or recess from surface as
indicated leaving minimum exposure at completion.
C.
Non-Shrink Grout and Drypack
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Clean dust and foreign matter from area, and then moisten concrete
surfaces with clean water.
Mix grout as recommended by manufacturer and stir until a smooth,
creamy consistency is produced, using a minimum amount of water.
Pour mixture into space until it overflows the hole.
Wipe off excess, flush and level with adjacent surface, or as indicated.
Keep surface moist for at least 30 minutes after placing.
FINISHES AND FINISHING
A.
3.5
Construction joints shall be cleaned by waterblasting, sandblasting or
light bush hammering after the concrete has reached its final set,
unless modifications are permitted as specified below. The cleaning
shall be continued until all unsatisfactory concrete and all laitance,
coating, stains, debris and other foreign materials are removed. The
surface of the concrete shall be cleaned thoroughly to remove all loose
material. Waterblasting equipment shall be operated at a pressure
sufficient to permit cutting after the concrete has reached its final set.
After forms have been removed, carefully point all depressions resulting
from removal of form ties or from other causes with mortar conforming to
Paragraph 2.0.1.G, Cement Mortar. Maintain thorough saturation of concrete
surface during pointing and patching. Type of finish to be used shall be as
specified or as shown on Plans.
SLAB FINISHES
A.
General
134
1.
B.
Monolithic Finish
1.
C.
Finish slabs to receive fill and mortar setting beds by screeding with
straightedges to bring surface to required finish plane. Remove all
laitance and leave surface clean. Subject to approval, an acceptable
aggregate revealing Material may be used and laitance washed off
when concrete has set.
Wood Float Finish
1.
E.
Finish by screeding and floating with straightedges to bring surfaces to
the required finish elevation shown on the Plans. While concrete is
still green, but sufficiently hardened to bear man's weight without
deep imprint, wood float to a true, even plane with no coarse
aggregate visible. Apply sufficient pressure on wood floats to bring
moisture to surface. After surface moisture has disappeared, steel
trowel concrete to produce a smooth, impervious surface, free from
trowel marks. Give an additional troweling to surface for the purpose
of burnishing. Final troweling shall produce a ringing sound from the
trowel. Do not use dry cement or additional water in troweling. Do not
use excessive troweling.
Rough Slab Finish
1.
D.
Refrain from excessive use of "Jitterbugs" or other special tools
designed for the purpose of forcing coarse aggregate away from slab
surface. Dusting of surfaces with dry Materials will not be permitted.
Consolidate slabs and floors thoroughly by vibration. Round off edges
of slabs and tops of walls with a 1/2 inch radius steel edging tool,
unless specified otherwise.
Finish by screeding with straightedges to bring surface to required line
as shown on Plans. While concrete is still green, but hardened
sufficiently to bear cement finisher's weight, work float surface to a
true and uniform plane with no coarse aggregate visible.
Broomed Floor Finish
1.
Finish concrete as specified for monolithic finish above, except omit
final troweling and finish surface by drawing a fine-hair broom
lightly across surface. Do all brooming in same direction and parallel to
expansion joints unless otherwise shown on the Plans, or in cases of
inclined slabs, perpendicular to slope. For reservoir roof slab, broom
surface in radial direction.
135
F.
Sand Finish
1.
G.
Power Machine Finish
1.
3.6
3.7
Finish slab as directed for a smooth troweled finish, followed by
application of surface cure retardant to facilitate removal of top
cream surface of concrete to expose sand aggregate. Apply and
remove curing retardant as recommended by manufacturer.
In lieu of hand finishing, an approved power machine may be used for
finishing concrete floors and slabs in conformance with directions of
machine manufacturer and as approved.
REPAIR OF CONCRETE
A.
Concrete shall be inspected upon removal of forms and the extent of necessary
repairs will be determined. Such repairs shall be started within 24 hours
after removal of forms and completed within four (4) days, provided that no
repair shall be started prior to inspection of the stripped surface.
B.
Concrete that is defective, damaged or honeycombed shall be removed to
sound concrete with an air driven chipping hammer and satisfactorily
replaced with drypack or concrete. Concrete shall be used when reinforcing
steel has been exposed. When reinforcing steel has been exposed, concrete
shall be removed to a minimum depth of 1 inch behind such exposed
reinforcing steel. An initial cut 0.5 inch in depth shall be made with a
diamond or abrasive saw around defective, damaged or honeycombed concrete
in surfaces exposed to view.
PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
Protecting
1.
2.
Concrete shall be protected from rapid cooling and heating for the first
three (3) days after placing.
Concrete shall be protected against damage and defacement until Final
Acceptance, including, if necessary, providing full time surveillance
during the initial cure to prevent vandalism of the fresh concrete. Such
protection shall be made effective as soon as practicable after the
placing of unformed concrete or after the removal of forms. Flaggers
or workers shall protect newly placed concrete until concrete has
hardened enough to allow walking on surface without damage or
scarring. Surfaces or edges likely to be injured during the construction
period shall be satisfactorily protected.
136
3.
B.
Concrete that has been damaged before Final Acceptance shall be
removed and replaced with concrete matching color and texture of the
adjacent concrete areas or as directed by the Project Engineer. The
limits of removal shall be full depth and to the construction joints
nearest the damaged area. Failure to remove the damaged area to the
Project Engineer's satisfaction will be cause for the Project Engineer to
make the repairs and deduct the cost of repairs from the Contractor's
monthly pay estimate.
Curing
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Unless otherwise specified, concrete shall be cured by one of the
following methods for not less than the first seven (7) consecutive days
after placement.
Water Curing
a.
Newly placed concrete shall be kept wet by the continuous
application of water with a nozzle, soakers, cotton mats or wet
burlap, provided that the process may be interrupted as
necessary to permit repair of surface imperfections and
provided further, that the curing time shall be extended for a
period equal to the duration of the interruption. The curing water
shall be clean and free of contamination substances that will
discolor or adversely affect the concrete. Where wood forms are
used and left in place during curing, the wood shall also be kept
wet during the curing period.
Blanket Curing
a.
The entire surface shall be covered with a blanket of sand or
earth not less than two (2) inches in thickness. Immediately
after placing, the blanket shall be thoroughly wetted and kept
saturated during the curing period.
Sheet Material
a.
The entire surface shall be covered with waterproof paper,
opaque white polyethylene or white burlap-polyethylene
sheets laid directly upon the concrete. The sheets shall be
lapped not less than four (4) inches at edges and ends and shall
be sealed with mastic or pressure-sensitive tape not less than
1-1/2 inches in width. Sheets shall be weighted to prevent
displacement. Holes appearing during the curing period shall
be immediately patched.
Liquid Membrane
a.
The liquid membrane-curing compound shall be applied as
specified by the manufacturer. Surfaces of newly placed concrete
to be cured by the liquid membrane method shall be kept moist
or wet until the curing compound is applied. The curing
compound shall not be applied until all repairing and finishing
has been completed. Concrete shall not be cured by the liquid
137
b.
3.8
3.9
membrane method where additional concrete will be placed on
the concrete being cured, or where coatings or other surface
Materials are to be applied to the surface. Curing compound
shall be reapplied to surfaces that are subject to heavy rainfall
within 3 hours after initial applications. Concrete surfaces on
which the curing compound has been applied shall be
adequately protected for the duration of the curing period so
that the continuity of the membrane will not be disrupted.
Any damage to the membrane shall be repaired immediately
with additional curing compound.
No sealers or curing compounds shall be used on concrete slabs
that are to be covered with pavers. Such slabs shall be covered
and wet cured for a minimum of seven (7) days. The surface,
which is to be covered with pavers, shall be left clean, free of
dust, sealer or curing compounds and from oil. Any such
contamination shall be removed prior to installation of pavers.
TOLERANCES
A.
Tolerances on formed and unformed surfaces shall be in accordance with ACI
301, unless otherwise indicated or specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
B.
Where not otherwise shown or specified tolerances on unformed surfaces shall
be Class B, 0.25 inch in t e n ( 10) feet, as determined by a t e n ( 10) feet
straightedge or the equivalent for curved surfaces.
C.
The tolerance for the dimension shown on the Contract Plans between bus
slab centerline and the station platform edge is minus zero inches and plus
one-half inch, and the variation shall not exceed 0. 25 inch in te n ( 10) feet.
Variation of the platform surface from the elevations shown on the Contract
Plans shall not exceed 0.25 inch.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests.
B.
Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and
testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations.
C.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39. For each test, mold and cure five (5)
concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each
class of concrete placed.
D.
Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on
job site under same conditions as concrete it represents.
END OF SECTION
138
SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Structural steel framing members including but not limited to steel columns,
steel beams, steel purlins and tapered "T" rafters.
B.
Anchor bolts and setting templates.
C.
Grouting under base plates.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 23 00 - Alternates
B.
Section 03 11 00 - Concrete Forming
C.
Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing
D.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
E.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural
steel work; anchor bolts for items other than structural steel.
F.
Section 07 41 13 - Metal Roof Panels
G.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
H.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers
I.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Steel preparation and coatings
J.
Section 13 13 00 - Platforms and Stations
MEASUREMENT
A.
1.4
No separate measurement will be made for Structural Steel Framing.
PAYMENT
A.
No separate payment will be made for Structural Steel Framing. The cost of
meeting these requirements shall be incidental to the work described in
Section 13 13 00 Platforms and Stations.
139
1.5
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc.; 2011.
B.
AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges;
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2010.
C.
AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; latest edition, Chapter 10
(Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel).
D.
AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
Bolts; 2004.
E.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
F.
ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold
Finished; 2013.
G.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.
H.
ASTM A240/A240M - 14 Standard Specification for Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels
and for General Applications, 2014
I.
ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2012.
J.
ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.
K.
ASTM F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws
and Studs (ASTM 2008a)
L.
ASTM F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts, (ASTM, 2009c)
M.
ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011.
N.
ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, HydraulicCement Grout (Nonshrink); 2014.
O.
AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive
Examination; American Welding Society; 2012.
140
1.6
P.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding
Society; 2010 w/Errata.
Q.
RCSC (HSBOLT) - Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts;
Research Council on Structural Connections; 2009.
R.
IBC - International Building Code; current edition with Washington State
Amendments.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Material Samples:
1.
2.
1.7
Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members,
openings, attachments, fasteners, and finish.
Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate
net weld lengths.
Indicate locations, critical dimensions, required clearances,
construction details, installation methods including any splices,
attachments, and anchors. Show holes, threaded fasteners, and welds.
Indicate which members are considered as Architecturally Exposed
Structural Steel.
Indicate portions of members not to be painted due to member
receiving field welding, in contact with concrete, or connected with
slip critical-bolts.
Obtain Architect's acceptance before proceeding with contract work.
Submit sample of all required welds. Approved sample will be used as
the standard for all welding.
Obtain Architect’s acceptance before proceeding with contract work.
D.
Furnish anchor bolts, Anchor Bolt Templates, Setting Drawings, and
Installation Details.
E.
Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel
Construction Manual."
141
B.
Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges" for architecturally exposed structural steel.
C.
Fabricator: Accredited by the International Accreditation Service (IAS)
Fabrication Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172)
D.
Special Inspection and Testing will be performed by an independent testing
lab retained by the Owner.
E.
Welders:
1.
2.
F.
Architect’s Review:
1.
2.
1.8
1.9
Welders must be qualified for Welds to be performed in accordance
with AWS requirements.
For each Welder, submit from approved Independent Laboratory or
Inspection Service, Qualification Test Reports not older than one (1)
year.
Coordinate with Architect to visit the steel fabrication site at intervals,
up to two (2) visits, pertinent to the on-going work to review
fabrication.
a.
One (1) visit when steel fabrication and welding is complete
but prior to painting.
The cost of these Architect visits will be paid by the Owner.
COORDINATION WITH WORK OF RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Coordinate work with Painter
B.
All structural steel members and steel fabricated items to receive paint finish
are to be shop finished before delivery to the installation site. Field painting is
only acceptable adjacent to locations requiring field welding.
MOCK-UP
A.
One (1) complete module "A" of steel columns with beam, rafters, and rails.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Recycled Content: Steel W, T, HSS, Pipe, Angles, Plates, Channels, and Bars are
to meet or exceed the industry standards for recycled content for the electric
arc furnace process. Post-consumer content of 56 percent, Pre-consumer
content of 32 percent. See the current edition of Steel Recycling Institute:
142
Steel Takes LEED with Recycled Content:
http://www.recyclesteel.org/~/media/Files/SRI/Media percent20Center/LEED_Sept2011.ashx
B.
Steel Angles, Plates, Channels, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings. Architectural grade and finish quality where exposed.
C.
Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M (Fy = 50 ksi).
D.
Cold-Formed Structural Tubing and Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500
(Fy=46 ksi), Grade B.
E.
Stainless Steel Tubing: Type 304.
F.
Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.
G.
Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A galvanized to
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C where noted.
H.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade C, zinc-coated.
I.
Anchor Rods: F1554 GR 36 or 55 as noted, unless otherwise noted.
J.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials and conditions
being welded.
1.
E70 Low Hydrogen Electrodes.
K.
Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM
C1107/C1107M and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength
of 5000 psi at 28 days. One (1) inch maximum grout thickness.
1.
2.
3.
"Euco N.S." manufactured by Euclid Chemical Co.
"Crystex" manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals.
"Masterflow 928" by Master Builders
L.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: brite zinc paint or approved,
conform to ASTM 78C, complying with project's VOC limitations.
M.
Epoxy Adhesive for Post-installed Concrete Anchorages: Simpson SET-XP (ICC
ESR-2508) or AT-XP (IAPMO UES ER-263) in cold weather applications, or
HILTI HIT-RE 500SD, or approved complying with ASTM A881 and current
ICC report, or as noted on drawings.
N.
Expansion Anchors: as indicated on drawings.
143
2.2
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.
B.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C.
Form bends to uniform radii, free from buckles and twists.
D.
Provide holes and connections for work of other trades.
E.
Shop assemble components to be field assembled prior to shipping to ensure
fit-up.
F.
Fabricate connections not specifically detailed on Drawings to be consistent
with balance of design and strong enough to fully develop members involved.
G.
Cap and fully weld exposed ends of pipe and tubing.
H.
Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds
smooth.
I.
Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. Hole size 1/16
inch larger than bolt diameter unless shown otherwise, 1/8 inch larger than
bolt at base plates.
J.
Minimum Weld Strengths, unless otherwise shown on Drawings: Develop full
strength of Steel.
FABRICATION - ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL (AESS)
A.
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel is defined as those steel surfaces and
connections which will remain exposed on the following project elements:
1.
2.
B.
Shelters - At locations shown on drawings.
Platform Railings and Handrails - As specified in section 05 50 00
Metal Fabrication.
Ensure that all Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel meets the
requirements set forth in Chapter 10 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice
for Steel Buildings and Bridges, 2005 edition. In addition:
1.
2.
3.
Provide materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes.
Fabrication Tolerance: Fabricate steel to one-half the normal tolerance
as specified in the ASTM 46.
Welds ground smooth: Fabricator shall grind welds of AESS smooth.
For groove welds, the weld shall be made flush to the surfaces each
144
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
side and be within +1/16”, -0” of plate thickness.
Contouring and blending of welds: Where fillet welds are indicated to
be ground-contoured, or blended, oversize welds as required and grind
to provide a smooth transition and to match profile on approved
mock-up.
Continuous Welds: Where welding is noted on the drawings, provide
continuous welds of a uniform size and profile.
Minimize Weld Show Through: At locations where welding on the far
side of an exposed connection occurs, grind distortion and marking of
the steel to a smooth profile with adjacent material.
Coping and Blocking Tolerance: Maintain a uniform gap of 1/8” ±
1/32” at all copes and blocks.
Joint Gap Tolerance: Maintain a uniform gap of 1/8” ± 1/32”.
Piece Marks Hidden: Fabricate such that piece marks are fully hidden
in the final structure or made with such media to permit full removal
after erection.
Mill Mark Removal: Fabricator shall deliver steel with no mill marks
(stenciled, stamped, raised etc) in exposed locations. Mill marks shall
be omitted by cutting of mill material to appropriate lengths where
possible. Where not possible, the fabricator can fill and/or grind to a
surface finish consistent with the approved mock up.
Grinding of sheared edges: Fabricator shall grind all edges of sheared,
punched or flame cut steel to match approved mockup.
Rolled Members: Member specified to be rolled to a final curved shape
shall be fully shaped in the shop and tied during shipping to prevent
stress relieving. Distortion of the web or stem, and of outstanding
flanges or legs of angles shall be visibly acceptable to the Architect
from a distance of 20’ under any lighting condition determined by the
Architect. Tolerances for the vertical and horizontal walls of
rectangular HSS members after rolling shall be the specified dimension
+/- ½”.
Visible seams of hollow structural sections shall be acceptable as
produced. Seams shall be oriented away from view.
145
14.
15.
16.
17.
2.4
Seal weld open ends of round and rectangular hollow structural section
with 3/8” closure plates. Provide continuous, sealed welds at angle to
gusset-plate connections and similar locations where AESS is exposed
to weather.
Shop Connections:
a.
Bolted Connections: Make in accordance with this Section.
Provide bolt type and finish as noted herein and align bolt
heads as indicated on the approved shop erection drawings.
b.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and Section 05120.
Appearance and quality of welds shall be consistent with the
mock up. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that
will maintain alignment of members without warp exceeding
the tolerance of this section.
Erection Brackets: Remove temporary braces or clips, grind welds
smooth. Leave no visible evidence of change in texture from the base
material.
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel shall be sand blast cleaned in
accordance with SSPC-SP-10. Stainless steel materials shall have a #4
brushed finish.
FINISH
A.
Coordinate cleaning, surface preparation, and priming with the Work of
sections 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.
B.
All steel fabricated items to receive paint finish are to be shop finished before
delivery to the installation site. Field painting is only acceptable adjacent to
locations requiring field welding.
C.
Prime and paint edges of access holes and all sides of cover plates.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that
the work may properly proceed.
ERECTION
A.
Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges".
B.
Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain
structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of
erection and installation of permanent bracing. Do not use structure as
working platform until all permanent braces and connections are complete.
146
3.3
C.
Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings.
D.
Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless
otherwise specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in
accordance with RCSC "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength
Bolts".
E.
Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.
F.
Welding through primer, paint or galvanizing is prohibited.
G.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
H.
Touch-up Field Connections and damaged Shop Treatment areas as erection
proceeds. Immediately prior to final covering, remove Rust and retreat any
Members showing evidence of Rust through Shop Treatment over
approximately 5 percent or more to total Shop Treatment area.
I.
Remove loose rust, heavy Mill Scale, Oil, Dirt, and other bond-reducing Foreign
Substances from Members scheduled to receive Finish Painting, or other
direct-to-steel Coatings.
J.
Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with
manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces
smooth, splaying neatly to 45°.
ERECTION - ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
A.
Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, and according to
AISC specifications referenced in this Section.
B.
In addition to the special care used to handle and erect AESS, employ the
following erection techniques:
1.
2.
3.
AESS Erection Tolerances: Erection Tolerances shall meet the
requirements of Chapter 10 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice.
Welds Ground Smooth: Erector shall grind welds smooth in the
connections of AESS members. For groove welds, the weld shall be
made flush to the surfaces of each side and be within + 1/16”, -0” of
plate thickness.
Contouring and Blending of Welds: Where fillet welds are indicated to
be ground contoured, or blended, oversize welds as required; grind to
provide a smooth transition and to match profile on approved mockup .
147
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Continuous Welds: Where noted on the drawings, provide continuous
welds of a uniform size and profile.
Minimize Weld Show Through: At locations where welding on the far
side of an exposed connection occurs, grind distortion and marking of
the steel to a smooth profile with adjacent material.
Bolt Head Orientation: All bolt heads in a given connection shall be
oriented to one side.
Bolt Protrusions: Threaded ends exposed to view to have uniform
extension beyond nuts of two threads +/- 1/8 inch.
Removal of field connection aids: Run-out tabs, erection bolts and
other steel members added to connections to allow for alignment, fitup, and welding in the field shall be removed from the structure. Field
groove welds shall be selected to eliminate the need for backing bars
or to permit their removal after welding. Welds at run-out tabs shall
be removed to match adjacent surfaces and ground smooth. Holes for
erection bolts shall be plug welded and ground smooth.
Filling of weld access holes: Where holes must be cut in the web at the
intersection with flanges on W shapes and structural tees to permit
field welding of the flanges, they shall be filled. Filling shall be executed
with proper procedures to minimize restraint and address thermal
stresses in group 4 and 5 shapes.
C.
Field Welding: Weld profile, quality, and finish shall be consistent with mockups approved prior to fabrication.
D.
Splice members only where indicated.
E.
Obtain permission for any torch cutting or field fabrication from the Architect.
Finish sections thermally cut during erection to a surface appearance
consistent with the mock up.
F.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins.
Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. Replace connection plates
that are misaligned where holes cannot be aligned with acceptable final
appearance.
G.
Field Connections:
1.
2.
Bolted Connections: Install bolts of the specified type and finish in
accordance with Division 5 section “Structural Steel Framing.”
Welded Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, and
appearance.
a.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will
maintain true alignment of axes without warp. Verify that weld
sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for AESS will
limit distortions to allowable tolerances.
148
b.
3.4
3.5
Obtain Architects approval for appearance of welds in repaired
or field modified work prior to finish painting.
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch per 10 feet of height, noncumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
An independent testing agency will perform special inspection, as specified in
Section 01 45 10, Quality Control Requirements for structural welding in
accordance with IBC Chapter 17.
B.
Special Inspection of Structural Steel Welding:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Visually inspect all field welded connections for the following items
prior to commencement of welding:
a.
Proper finish of surfaces to be welded;
b.
Proper thickness of materials to be welded;
c.
Proper preparation of groove if required;
d.
Proper fit-up of pieces including root opening if required;
e.
Proper installation of backing or spacer if required;
f.
Proper welding equipment and material to be used;
g.
Proper welding procedure to be used; and
h.
Overall conformance with contract documents.
Continuous inspection is required during the welding of single-pass
fillet welds larger than 5/16 inch throat dimension, multi-pass fillet
welds, and all complete and partial penetration groove welds per IBC
Table 1704.3.
Periodic inspection is allowed for the welding of single-pass fillet welds
with a throat dimension of 5/16 inch or smaller and welded headed
shear studs.
Additional non-destructive testing using ultrasonic inspection devices
is required for verification of single-pass fillet welds with larger than
5/16 inch throat dimension, multi-pass fillet welds, and all complete
and partial penetration groove welds unless otherwise noted in the
contract documents.
Special Inspector:
a.
The special inspector shall be a qualified person who shall
demonstrate their competence, to the satisfaction of the
building official, for inspection of a particular type of
construction or operation requiring special inspection.
149
b.
6.
Welding Inspector shall be a Certified Welding Inspector (CWI)
holding QCI certification as defined in AWS D1.1.
Duties and Responsibilities of the Special Inspector:
a.
The special inspector shall observe the work assigned for
conformance with the applicable project drawings and
specifications.
b.
The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the
building official, the Owner or the Owner's designated
representative, the Architect, or project manager, the
Structural Engineer of record, the contractor and other persons
designated by the Owner or Owner's designated representative.
All discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of
the contractor for correction, then, if uncorrected, to the
proper design authority and to the building official.
c.
The special inspector shall submit a final signed report stating
whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best
of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance with the project
plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship
provisions of the IBC.
END OF SECTION
150
SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 23 00 - Alternates
B.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in
concrete.
C.
Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing
D.
Section 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND COATING: Paint finish.
E.
Section 13 13 00 - Platforms and Stations
MEASUREMENT
A.
1.4
No separate measurement will be made for Metal Fabrications.
PAYMENT
A.
1.5
Shop fabricated steel and stainless steel items.
No separate payment will be made for Metal Fabrications. The cost of
meeting these requirements shall be incidental to the work described in
Section 13 13 00 Platforms and Stations.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
B.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.
C.
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.
D.
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated
830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013.
E.
ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.
151
1.6
F.
AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive
Examination; American Welding Society; 2012.
G.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding
Society; 2010 w/Errata.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, critical dimensions, connection
attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and
accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where
applicable.
1.
2.
C.
Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the
project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
D.
Furnish anchor bolt setting drawings and installation details for steel items
provided by this Section.
E.
Submit sample railing assembly including partial railing stanchion with
welded connection to section of steel tube. Stanchion should include cable
hole and cable end tab attachment. Sample to provide example of quality of
welds, and overall finish quality of assembly. Quality of assembly to be
approved by Architect prior to fabrication.
1.
2.
F.
1.7
Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding
symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
Indicate members to be galvanized, location and size of drain holes,
and which members are to receive field finish painting that may
impact the galvanizing process.
Include with sample, all cable rail end assemblies including jaw-end
attachment, cable, and bushing for cable penetration holes.
Paint sample to evaluate fit of bushing in hole and adjust hole size as
necessary. Fit of bushing and cable assembly to be approved by
Architect prior to fabrication.
Submit product data on all railing components.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator: Accredited by the International Accreditation Service (IAS)
Fabrication Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172)
152
B.
Welders:
1.
2.
1.8
1.9
Welders must be qualified for Welds to be performed in accordance
with AWS requirements.
For each Welder, submit from approved Independent Laboratory or
Inspection Service, Qualification Test Reports not older than one (1)
year.
COORDINATION WITH WORK OF RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Coordinate work with Painter.
B.
All structural steel members and steel fabricated items to receive paint finish
are to be shop finished before delivery to the installation site. Field painting is
only acceptable adjacent to locations requiring field welding.
MOCK-UP
A.
Minimum four (4) linear feet of steel railing and stanchions complete with
stanchions, cables, and bushings, painted.
B.
One (1) complete bench assembly.
C.
Notify Architect when the mock-up is ready to view and prior to preparation
for finishing.
D.
Accepted mock-up may be used as part of the final project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS - STEEL
A.
Steel channels, angles, bars, and plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M unless otherwise
noted on Drawings.
B.
Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M (Fy = 50 ksi).
C.
Steel Tubing and Hollow Steel Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed
structural tubing.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, with sulfur not exceeding 0.05
percent, (Fy=35 ksi). Finish black. Type S where exposed to view, type E
where concealed from view.
153
2.2
E.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to
ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components.
F.
Anchor Bolts, Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade C, plain.
G.
Stainless Steel Tubing: Type 304, 0.083 inch wall thickness, unless otherwise
noted.
H.
Stainless Steel Plate: Type 304, thickness as indicated on drawings.
I.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being
welded.
J.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with project's VOC
limitations.
K.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic,
complying with project's VOC limitations.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Cable system infill at railings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Cables: 3/16", 1 x 19 construction, Type 316 stainless steel.
Fittings: Type 316 stainless steel swage style terminals, fixed jaw ends,
jaw end turnbuckle, and associated hardware as indicated on
drawings. Use security bolt at jaw ends instead of pin.
a.
At cable runs 30 feet or longer, provide jaw end turnbuckles at
each end of cable.
Bushings: 5/16" outside diameter, inside diameter as necessary to
provide clearance at cable. Black plastic. Provide at each hole in
stanchion for cable. Bushings to be continuous through HSS stanchion.
Design based on CableRail, Sleekline, by Feeney Inc.
(www.feeneyinc.com)
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 25 13 - Product
Substitution Procedure.
FASTENERS, BOLTS, ANCHORS
A.
Anchors for post-installed concrete anchorages: A316 stainless steel allthread rod with stainless steel acorn nuts and washers.
B.
Expansion Anchors: HILTI KWIK-BOLT TZ, Stainless Steel, or approved equal
with current ICC Report providing acceptance for use in cracked concrete.
Size as called out on drawings.
154
C.
Grout, see section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing
D.
Screw for attachment of windscreen channel to top and bottom rail:
1.
E.
2.4
2.5
#12-24 Hex Head 410 Hardened SS Self drilling screws with bonded
neoprene sealing washers and No 5 drill point.
Additional screws and fasteners as indicated on drawings.
FABRICATION
A.
Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C.
Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
D.
Provide holes and connections for work of other trades.
E.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make
exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small
uniform radius.
F.
Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts;
unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where
specifically noted otherwise.
G.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors
and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except
where specifically noted otherwise.
H.
Fabricate any Structural Connections not specifically detailed on Drawings as
Directed by Architect and at no additional cost to Owner. If Directions are
not obtained, fabricate consistent with balance of Design and strong enough
to fully develop Members involved.
I.
Form elbows and bends to uniform radii, free from buckles and twists, and
with finished surfaces smooth.
J.
Cap and fully weld exposed ends of pipe and tubing.
FABRICATION - ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL (AESS)
A.
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel is defined as those steel surfaces and
connections which will remain exposed on the following project elements:
155
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
2.6
Rails and Stanchions:
a.
Size and dimensions per drawings.
b.
Cable Railing infill and accessories per drawings.
Platform Railings and Handrails:
a.
Stainless steel pipe (seamless), size and dimensions per
drawings. Field weld and grind joints.
b.
Finish: #4 uniformly brushed stainless steel.
Steel Benches:
a.
Size and Dimensions per drawings
Bent plate roof support at Icon
a.
Stainless Steel
b.
Finish: #4 uniformly brushed stainless steel.
c.
Size and Dimensions per drawings
Windscreen frame and supports
a.
Size and Dimensions per drawings
Bottom Windscreen Channels
a.
Size and dimensions per drawings
Steel items indicated as Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel shall conform
to the requirements described in Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing.
FABRICATED ITEMS
A.
Handrails:
1.
2.
B.
Railings and Stanchions:
1.
2.
C.
Size and dimensions per drawings.
Cable Railing infill and accessories per drawings.
Galvanized steel angle at Platform edges:
1.
D.
Stainless steel pipe (seamless), size and dimensions per drawings.
Field weld and grind joints.
Finish: #4 uniformly brushed stainless steel.
Size and dimensions per drawings.
Stainless Steel Downspouts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fabricate from Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe and stainless steel plate
formed and welded to shapes shown on drawings.
Fully weld all joints.
After fabrication, finish all exposed surfaces of pipe and plate to
uniform #4 Brushed Finish.
Downspout Fittings: Associated 'ells' and 'spools' as shown on
drawings.
156
5.
E.
Steel Benches:
1.
F.
Size and dimensions per drawings
FINISHES - STEEL
A.
Coordinate cleaning, surface preparation, and priming with the Work of
sections 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.
B.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
C.
All steel fabricated items to receive paint finish are to be shop finished before
delivery to the site. Field painting is only acceptable adjacent to locations
requiring field welding.
1.
D.
2.8
Size and Dimensions per drawings
Bottom Windscreen Channels
1.
2.7
Stainless Steel
Finish: #4 uniformly brushed stainless steel.
Size and Dimensions per drawings
Windscreen frame and supports
1.
H.
Size and Dimensions per drawings
Bent plate roof support at Icon
1.
2.
3.
G.
Coordinate connection to gutter with Work of section 07 62 00 Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim.
Do not paint stainless steel
Provide Galvanized finish at galvanized steel angle at platform edges.
Galvanize steel to ASTM A123. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized
coating.
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A.
Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B.
Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.
157
D.
Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.
E.
Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B.
Examine work to which cables will be anchored or will penetrate. Coordinate
with responsible entity to perform corrective work necessary.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain
true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent
attachments.
C.
Field weld components indicated.
D.
Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
E.
Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F.
Treat field welded areas of galvanized members with zinc solder to replace
galvanized protection.
G.
Touch-up Field Connections and damaged Shop Treatment areas as erection
proceeds. Immediately prior to final covering, remove Rust and retreat any
Members showing evidence of Rust through Shop Treatment over
approximately 5 percent or more to total Shop Treatment area.
H.
Remove loose rust, heavy Mill Scale, Oil, Dirt, and other bond-reducing Foreign
Substances from Members scheduled to receive Finish Painting, or other
direct-to-steel Coatings.
I.
Install Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel elements in conformance with
the requirements described in Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing.
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch per 10 feet, non-cumulative.
158
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch.
C.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/8 inch.
END OF SECTION
159
SECTION 06 51 13.11 UHMW CURB PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
B.
Related Sections
1.
C.
32 16 14 – Concrete Curbs and Gutters
Measurement
1.
D.
This Work consists of furnishing and installing Ultra High Molecular
Polyethylene (UHMW) low friction curb protection as shown on
the Plans and as specified herein.
UHMW Curb Bumper will be measured by the linear foot installed and
is inclusive of all material, labor, and equipment needed to install
the material as shown in the plans including anchors.
Payment
1.
The Contract price paid for each item will be payment in full for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and
doing all Work necessary to complete the Work specified.
2.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item
06 51 13.01
UHMW Curb Bumper
Pay Unit
LF
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
"Polyslick Bus Curb" by Polymer Industries. www.polymerindustries.com
B.
The Contractor may present alternative products “as equal” for
consideration of the Engineer. To be considered equal the product must
be UV stabilized and provide a maximum static coefficient of friction of
0.20 and a maximum dynamic coefficient of friction of 0.15 using the
ASTM D 1894 testing methodology.
160
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
UHMW Material: High visibility UHMW blend with special additives to
protect it from ultra violet degradation. Lubricants shall have been
incorporated in the polymer to insure low coefficient of friction. Color shall
be yellow.
PART 3 – EXECUTION –NOT USED
END OF SECTION
161
SECTION 06 64 10 TRANSLUCENT RESIN PANEL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Enhanced UV-resistant Laminated Translucent Resin Panel System used for
accent stick caps.
B.
Factory fabrication of accent stick caps.
C.
Panel Mounting Hardware
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 23 00 - Alternates
B.
Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing
C.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
D.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers
E.
Section 10 14 00 - Signage and Identifying Devices
F.
Section 13 13 00 - Platforms and Stations
MEASUREMENT
A.
1.4
PAYMENT
A.
1.5
No separate measurement will be made for the work of this section.
No separate payment will be made for Translucent Resin Panel System. The
cost of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to the work described
in Section 13 13 00 Platforms and Stations.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI Z 97.1 - American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in
Buildings -- Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
B.
ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Pendulum Impact
Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastics.
C.
ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
162
1.6
D.
ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
E.
ASTM D 1929 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics.
F.
ASTM D 635 – Standard Test Method for Rate of Building and/or Extent and
Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
G.
ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
H.
CAN/ULC 102.2 – Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Flooring, Floor Coverings, and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contact and
Division 1 specification section 01 33 00 Submittals.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data; include product
description, fabrication information, and compliance with specified
performance requirements.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings showing securement to
structure, design details, and similar data. Drawings and calculations to bare
stamp of Professional Engineer licensed in the State in which the project is
located.
D.
Submit product test reports from a qualified independent third party testing
agency indicating each type and class of panel system complies with the
project performance requirements, based on comprehensive testing of
current products. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if for
current manufacturer and indicative of products used on this project.
1.
E.
Samples for Initial Selection:
1.
F.
Test reports required are:
a.
Rate of Burning (ASTM D 635)
b.
Self-Ignition Temperature (ASTM D 1929)
c.
Density of Smoke (ASTM D 2843)
Submit 4, minimum 8-inch by 8-inch samples. Indicate full color,
texture and pattern variation.
Samples for Verification:
163
1.
G.
1.7
Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data,
including care, repair and cleaning instructions. Include in Project closeout
documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications
1.
1.8
1.9
Submit four (4), minimum 8-inch by 8-inch sample for each type,
texture, pattern, and color of solid plastic fabrication.
Manufacturer must have documented training and qualification
program for fabrication and installation of Translucent Resin Panels.
MOCKUPS
A.
Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects.
B.
Build mockup of one complete Accent stick cap.
C.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed work, once any
unsatisfactory issues have been addressed and mock up has been reviewed
by architect and owner.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver Translucent Resin Panels, systems and specified items in
manufacturer’s standard protective packaging.
B.
Do not deliver Translucent Resin Panels, system, components and accessories
to Project site until areas are ready for installation.
C.
Store materials in a flat orientation in a dry place that is not exposed to
exterior elements. Materials are to be protected against damage from
moisture and direct sunlight.
D.
Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective
coverings to prevent damage or staining following installation for duration of
project.
E.
Before installing Translucent Resin Panels, permit them to reach ambient
temperature.
164
1.10
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer’s Special Warranty on Translucent Resin Panels:
Manufacturer’s standard form agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in
material or workmanship within the specified warranty period.
B.
Warranty Period: five (5) year after ship date.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURER
A.
Manufacturer: 3form, Inc., Salt Lake City, Utah, USA / telephone ( 801) 6492500.
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution
Procedure.
MATERIALS
A.
Basis of Design Product: The design of the Translucent Resin Panel system is
based on 3form "Chroma XT."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Engineered acrylic resin with UV resistance.
Size: Custom sizes as shown on drawings.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Interlayer: Multiple layers of C3 color - see color schedule.
Finish:
a.
Surface 1 (Outside): Renewable matte
b.
Surface 2: Smooth/Patent
c.
Surface 3: Smooth/Patent
d.
Surface 4 (Inside): Matte
Sheet minimum performance attributes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Rate of Burning (ASTM D 635). Material must attain CC2 Rating for a
nominal thickness of 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) and greater.
Self-Ignition Temperature (ASTM D 1929). Material must have a Selfignition temperature greater than 850°F.
Density of Smoke (ASTM D 2843). Material must have a smoke density
less than 10 percent.
Color infusion must use water soluble dyes and penetrate at least 150
microns into material.
Applied coatings must be low-VOC, contain non-toxic pigments, not
contain any heavy metals and be approved for exterior use.
Matte surface should be completely renewable on-site.
165
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate Translucent Resin Panels to designs, sizes and thicknesses
indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes, profiles and other
characteristics are indicated on the drawings, additional fabrication and
installation details can be found on the 3form Partner Preliminary Project
Review, if applicable.
B.
Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations for fabrication.
C.
Machining: Acceptable means of machining are listed below. Ensure that
material is not chipped or warped by machining operations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Forming: Form products to shapes indicated using the appropriate method
listed below. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Cold Bending.
Hot Bending.
Thermoforming: Acceptable only on uncoated material.
Drape Forming.
Matched Mold Forming.
Mechanical Forming.
E.
Laminating: Laminate to substrates indicated using adhesives and techniques
recommended by manufacturer.
F.
Bonding: Provide light seams for all joinery of fabricated light box and
adhesive seams using adhesives and techniques recommended by
manufacturer.
G.
Edges:
1.
2.
2.4
Sawing: Select equipment and blades suitable for type of cut required.
Drilling: Drills specifically designed for use with plastic products.
Routing.
Tapping.
Provide Renewable Matte edge finish where panel edges are exposed.
Ease edges.
PANEL MOUNTING HARDWARE
A.
Provide a complete system of connectors and fasteners as shown on drawings
or specified herein.
1.
Hardware suitable for exterior installations:
166
a.
2.5
Stainless Steel Barrel Point Support attachment
1)
XT cap
(a)
1.5" cap with 1.5" M10 threads
2)
Delrin Shoulder Washer
3)
Barrel, size as indicated on drawings
(a)
1.5" x 1" barrel
4)
Expanded Polytetrafluoroethylene (EXPTFE) Washer
5)
Additional washers, screws, gasketing material, and
other anchors as recommended by manufacturer for a
complete system.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Gaskets shall be as per manufacturer’s standards to meet performance
criteria.
B.
Fasteners shall be per manufacturer’s standards to meet performance
requirements.
C.
Blind Rivet Nuts: Stainless steel, round shank, flat head with underhead seal.
Open end to receive bolt.
1.
Similar to Tubtara Blind Rivet nut with integral Plasticol sealing
material.
D.
Bonding Cements: May be achieved with solvents or adhesives, suitable for
use with product and application.
E.
Sealants shall be per manufacturer's standards to meet performance
requirements.
1.
Sealant: Momentive Performance Silicones, SilGlaze II SCS 2801,
Translucent
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of Translucent
Resin Panels will occur, with Installer present, for compliance with
manufacturer’s requirements. Verify that substrates and conditions are
satisfactory for installation and comply with requirements specified.
167
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for the installation
of Translucent Resin Panels. Sizes, profiles and other characteristics are
indicated on the drawings.
B.
Manufacturer’s shop to fabricate items to the greatest degree possible.
C.
Utilize fasteners, adhesives and bonding agents recommended by
manufacturer for type of installation indicated. Material that is chipped,
warped, hazed or discolored as a result of installation or fabrication methods
will be rejected.
D.
Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in
accordance with approved shop drawings and product data.
E.
Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended procedures. Locate
seams in panels so that they are not directly in line with seams in substrates.
F.
Provide gaskets between dissimilar materials as recommended by
manufacturer.
G.
Apply threadlocking tape at all threaded points in Translucent Resin Panel
Hardware.
H.
Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's
requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation
instructions.
Perform sealant installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and
sags.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges.
Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these
temperature ranges.
Tool sealant joints concave. Remove and replace sealant in joints
improperly tooled.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect surfaces from damage until date of substantial completion. Repair
work or replace damaged work, which cannot be repaired to Architect’s
satisfaction.
END OF SECTION
168
SECTION 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Structural roofing system of preformed steel panels.
B.
Fastening system.
C.
Factory finishing.
D.
Accessories and miscellaneous components.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 23 00 - Alternates.
B.
Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Roof framing and purlins.
C.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
D.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants.
E.
Section 13 13 00 - Platforms and Stations.
MEASUREMENT
A.
1.4
PAYMENT
A.
1.5
No separate measurement will be made for metal roof panels.
No separate payment will be made for metal roof panels. The cost of meeting
these requirements shall be incidental to the work described in Section 13
13 00 Platforms and Stations.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process; 2013.
B.
ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 percent
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.
C.
IBC - International Building Code; current edition with Washington State
Amendments.
169
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,
including:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and
penetration conditions, spacing and type of connections, flashings,
underlayments, and special conditions.
1.
D.
1.7
Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.
Verification Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit samples of
minimum size 12 inches square, representing actual roofing metal,
thickness, profile, color, and texture.
1.
Include typical panel joint in sample.
2.
Include typical fastening detail.
E.
Submit specified trade association installation instructions.
F.
Indicate load rating for uplift and snow, complying with IBC.
G.
Provide ASTM E1592 testing for panel strength, clip and fastening system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
Installation methods.
Specimen warranty.
Installer Qualifications: Company trained and authorized by roofing system
manufacturer.
MOCK-UP
A.
Construct mock-up of sheet metal roofing, span of shelter roof by 36" wide,
illustrating associated attachments.
B.
Locate where directed.
C.
Acceptable mock-up represents expected quality level of remaining work.
D.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
170
1.9
1.10
1.11
RE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
One combined meeting for Metal Roof Panels and Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim.
B.
Convene one (1) week before starting work of this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Provide strippable plastic protection on prefinished roofing panels for
removal after installation.
B.
Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to
minimize damage to panels prior to installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide two (2) year installation warranty to ensure weathertightness.
Warranty period to begin at substantial completion. Warranty shall include
coverage of repairs required to maintain roof and flashings in watertight
conditions, and to repair or replace without additional cost to Owner any
water leaks and resulting damage to Building Materials as may occur under
normal usage within Warranty Period. The Warranty to be signed by
General Contractor and Metal Roof Installer.
B.
Provide a manufacturer's warranty for the PVDF finish. Warrant that for a
period of 20 years the finish will not:
1.
2.
3.
Peel, Check, or Crack.
Chalk in excess of a numerical rating of 8, as measured using the
procedures of ASTM D214-89 (Method D-659) Fabrication of sprayapplied product is not recommended or warranted.
Fade or change color in excess of 5* units (*Hunter Color Difference)
as measured using the procedure ASTM D2244-85.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Design is based on Design Span HP, manufactured by AEP-Span.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers are:
1.
2.
ATAS International, Inc: www.atas.com.
Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation: www.metalsales.us.com.
171
C.
2.2
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution
Procedure.
STRUCTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS
A.
Metal Panels: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
ATTACHMENT SYSTEM
A.
Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized steel
concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered
to meet performance requirements, including anticipated thermal
movement. Similar to "Design Span HP Fastener Clips" by AEP Span.
1.
2.4
2.5
Steel Panels:
a.
Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated SS (structural steel) sheet
conforming to ASTM A792/A792M; minimum AZ50 coating.
b.
Steel Thickness: Minimum 22 gage.
Profile: Standing Seam; concealed fastener system.
Texture: Smooth.
Length: As indicated on drawings.
Width: Maximum panel coverage of 16 inches; center roof layout as
shown on drawings.
Rib height: 2 inch
Anchor clips shall be tested to establish that the clips will have 75
percent of the material thickness remaining after 100,000 cycles of
the full range of motion.
PANEL FINISH
A.
Fluoropolymer Coating (PVDF) System: Manufacturer’s standard AAMA
2605, multi-coat thermocured coating system, including minimum 70
percent fluoropolymer color topcoat with minimum total dry film thickness
of 0.9 mil; color and gloss as scheduled.
B.
Underside finish: Manufacturer's standard off-white enamel primer.
C.
Color and finish of accessories to match roofing where exposed to view.
ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A.
Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, trim, closure strips, and
similar sheet metal items of the same material, thickness, and finish as used
for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation may
optionally be made of stainless steel.
172
2.6
B.
Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of
steel with corrosion resistant finish or combination steel and closed-cell
foam.
C.
Stainless steel rivets: 3/16" diameter open end domed rivet by Emhart
Industrial.
D.
Sealants: Polyurethane type as specified in Section 07 90 05.
FABRICATION
A.
Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from
distortion or defects.
B.
Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, same gage as roofing sheet,
interlockable with sheet.
C.
Fabricate starter strips, interlockable with sheet.
D.
Form pieces in single length sheets.
E.
Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
F.
Form material with standing seams, except where otherwise indicated. At
moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked
seams.
G.
Form flashings as shown on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates
have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify
Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to
installation. Strip film carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces.
B.
Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering
rubberized asphalt sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof
panel manufacturer.
173
3.3
3.4
INSTALLATION
A.
Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details.
B.
Lay out fastener clips per drawings and attach to roof purlins with stainless
steel pop rivets, minimum 2 per clip.
C.
Paint rivets where they protrude though rafter. Coordinate with Work of
section 09 90 00.
D.
Lap panels away from prevailing wind direction.
E.
Do not stretch or compress panel side-lap interlocks.
F.
Secure panels without warp or deflection.
G.
Fully engage battens.
H.
See drawings for roof termination at eave ends.
I.
Lay sheets with long dimension perpendicular to eaves. Apply pans
beginning at eaves.
J.
Lock fastener clips into seams.
K.
Touch-up: Only minor scratches and abrasions will be allowed to be touched
up. Any other damaged material shall be replaced.
L.
Panels or flashings that have severe paint and/or substrate damage shall be
replaced as directed by the Architect.
M.
Allowable Erection Tolerances: Maximum alignment variation of 1/8 inch in
10 feet.
CLEANING
A.
At completion of each day’s work, sweep panels, flashings and gutters clean.
Do not allow fasteners, cuttings, filings or scraps to accumulate.
B.
Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease
and oil films, excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from
installation, leaving the work clean and unmarked, free from dents, creases,
waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.
174
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels.
Provide temporary walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to
completed work. Protect roofing until completion of project.
B.
Replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of Substantial
Completion. Panels or flashings that have severe paint and/or substrate
damage shall be replaced as directed by the Architect’s or Owner’s
representative.
END OF SECTION
175
SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters,
and related items.
B.
Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications.
C.
Fabricated sheet metal back roof extension and associated flashings.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 23 00 – Alternates.
B.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Downspouts.
C.
Section 07 41 13 - Metal Roof Panels: Flashings associated with roofing
system.
D.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Field Installed Sealants.
E.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
F.
Section 13 13 00 - Platforms and Stations.
MEASUREMENT
A.
1.4
PAYMENT
A.
1.5
No separate measurement will be made for Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
No separate payment will be made for sheet metal flashing and trim. The
cost of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to the work described
in Section 13 13 00 Platforms and Stations.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
B.
ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
C.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
176
1.6
1.7
1.8
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
One (1) combined meeting for Metal Roof Panels and Sheet Metal Flashing
and Trim.
B.
Convene one (1) week before starting work of this section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details,
fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C.
Samples: Submit two (2) samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating metal finish
color.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.9
1.10
Perform work in accordance with SMACNA 1793 requirements and standard
details, except as otherwise indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide
ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B.
Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
MOCK-UP
A.
A mock up of the following sheet metal and/or flashing assemblies.
1.
2.
3.
Typical front HSS column collar flashing assembly.
Typical Icon column collar flashing assembly.
Four foot section of back roof extension showing back HSS flashing
condition.
B.
Notify Architect when the mock-up is ready to view. Do not proceed with
fabrication of additional components until mock-up has been reviewed and
accepted.
C.
Accepted mock-ups may be used as part of the final project.
177
1.11
1.12
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide
ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B.
Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide two (2) year warranty.
B.
Include material, installation, and repairs resulting from weather tightness
failure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET MATERIALS
A.
Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: Match roofing material specified in Section 07
41 13 Metal Roof Panels.
1.
2.
B.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A666 Type 304, soft temper, minimum.024 inch (24
ga) thick; smooth No. 4 finish. Fully annealed.
1.
2.2
Extent of Work: Flashings and Trim.
a.
22 gauge
Extent of work: Back Roof Extension.
a.
16 gauge
Extent of Work: Gutters, scuppers, downspouts and accessories
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene
washers.
B.
Rivets: Stainless steel, type as required for condition of use.
C.
Underlayment: ASTM D226/D226M, organic roofing felt, Type I ("No. 15").
D.
Primer: Zinc chromate type.
E.
Protective Backing Paint: Asphaltic mastic, ASTM D4479 Type I.
F.
Sealant to be Concealed in Completed Work: Non-curing butyl sealant.
178
2.3
G.
Sealant to be Exposed in Completed Work: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant,
100 percent silicone with minimum movement capability of plus/minus 25
percent and recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed;
clear.
H.
Sealant: Polyurethane type specified in Section 07 90 05.
I.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
J.
Solder: ASTM B32; Sn50 (50/50) type.
K.
Flux: Rosin, cut Muriatic Acid, or commercial preparation suitable for use.
L.
Strainers: Low profile so top does not extend beyond top of gutter. Same
material as gutter. Provide within gutter at each downspout.
M.
Coordinate connection to downspout with the requirements of section 05 50
00.
FABRICATION
A.
Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from
distortion or defects.
B.
Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum two (2) inches wide,
interlocking with sheet.
C.
Form pieces in longest possible lengths, where jointing is symmetrical on
either side of column.
D.
Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
E.
Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At
moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked
seams.
F.
Fabricate corners from one (1) piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam
for rigidity, seal with sealant.
G.
Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and
hemmed to form drip.
H.
Seal all metal joints.
179
2.4
GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION
A.
Gutters: Profile as indicated.
B.
Downspouts: Profile as indicated, pipe and 'ells' as specified in 05 50 00.
C.
Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
1.
D.
Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements.
Downspout Boots: Steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify roof openings, pipes, sleeves and curbs.
B.
Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
PREPARATION
A.
Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B.
Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a
minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.
INSTALLATION
A.
Conform to drawing details.
B.
Install Work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, tool marks, fastening
stresses, distortion, or defects which impair strength of mar appearance.
C.
Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners
only where permitted.
D.
Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight
in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.
E.
Seal metal joints watertight.
F.
Install planes and lines in true alignment. Allow for sheet metal expansion
and contraction.
180
G.
Soldering at Precoated Sheetmetal: Remove paint from surfaces to be
soldered. Clean and flux metals prior to soldering. Sweat solder completely
through seam widths.
H.
Apply primer and paint soldered or otherwise damaged factory finished
sheet metal as recommended by coating manufacturer. Repairs to match
adjacent color.
I.
Touch-up: Only minor scratches and abrasions will be allowed to be touched
up. Any other damaged material shall be replaced.
J.
Gutters:
1.
2.
K.
Downspouts:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Gutter to be placed tight within cut HSS steel member as shown on
drawings.
Size thimble to match inside diameter of drain piping furnished by
shelter fabricator.
Telescope upper sections into lower sections 1 1/2 inches min., rivet
and solder.
Except where otherwise shown on Drawings, install downspouts
plumb.
Connect downspouts to storm sewer at rubber coupler - see civil.
CLEANING AND REPAIRING
A.
As Work progresses, neutralize excess flux with 5 to 10 percent washing
soda solution, and thoroughly rinse.
B.
Including Work of other sections, clean, repair, and touch-up, or replace
when directed, products that have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by
Work of this Section.
C.
Remove debris from project site upon completion of Work or sooner, if
directed.
END OF SECTION
181
SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 23 00 – Alternates.
B.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.
D.
Section 13 13 00 - Platforms and Stations.
E.
Section 32 14 13 - Precast Concrete Unit Paving.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
B.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
C.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168;
current edition; www.aqmd.gov.
MEASUREMENT
A.
1.5
No separate payment will be made for Joint Sealers. The cost of meeting
these requirements shall be incidental to the work described in Section 13
13 00 Platforms and Stations.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.7
No separate measurement will be made for Joint Sealers.
PAYMENT
A.
1.6
Sealants and joint backing.
Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.
182
B.
1.8
1.
Include temperature ranges for storage and application of materials,
and special cold-weather application requirements or limitations.
2.
SpecData sheet for substrate cleaner and substrate primer
recommended by sealant manufacturer for specific substrate surface
and conditions.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples, 1/2 x 4 inches in size illustrating sealant
colors for selection.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures,
surface preparation, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics,
performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, color availability,
and installation instructions.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant
manufacturer during and after installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Correct defective work within a five (5) year period after Date of Substantial
Completion.
B.
Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail
to achieve airtight seal and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or
cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Gunnable and Pourable Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems:
www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com.
Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones):
www.momentive.com.
Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
Substitutions: See Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedure.
183
2.2
SEALANTS
A.
Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile
organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality
Management District Rule No.1168.
B.
Definitions from ASTM C 920:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS,
Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Grade: Characteristics of sealant during installation. P - Pourable, NS
- Non-Sag, SL, Self-Leveling.
Class: Measurement of movement, as a percentage.
Uses: A - appropriate for Aluminum, G - appropriate for glass, I continuously submerged, M - appropriate for Mortar, NT - for nontraffic areas, T - for traffic areas, O - for use with other substrates not
listed otherwise.
Type: Type S - Single Component, Type M - Multi-Component.
Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard
range.
Product: Similar to Dymonic FC manufactured by Tremco or equal.
Applications: Use for:
a.
Joints in steel structure where directed by Architect.
b.
Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.
c.
Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
Sealant for station platform paving: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920,
Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A; chemical curing, non-staining, nonbleeding; multi-component;
1.
2.
Face color: per color schedule.
Product:
a.
Vulkem 45SSL (1-Part) and THC-901 (2-Part) manufactured
by Tremco.
b.
Dynatred manufactured by Pecora.
c.
SL-2 manufactured by Sonneborn.
d.
Urexpand NT-200 manufactured by Pecora.
3.
Applications: Use for:
a.
b.
At all objects that vertically penetrate though concrete and/or
paver.
Horizontal joints between concrete, pavers, and other
materials.
184
4.
2.3
Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard
range.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
B.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667,
closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer to suit application.
E.
Masonry Sand: Mason's Sand and Silica Mix for use over still wet sealant at
all control and expansion joints in concrete paving and detectable warning
pavers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of
sealant.
B.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
ASTM C1193.
D.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or
disfigurement.
INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for
preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.
185
3.4
B.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C.
Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth
ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by
manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated.
D.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult
manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature
ranges.
G.
Tool joints concave. Remove and replace sealant in joints improperly tooled.
H.
Spread Mason's Sand and Silica Mix over still wet sealant at all control and
expansion joints in concrete paving and at detectable warning pavers at
stations.
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION
186
SECTION 08 84 00 POLYCARBONATE PLASTIC GLAZING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Enhanced UV-resistant laminated polycarbonate plastic glazing used for
windscreens and icon enclosure.
B.
Factory fabrication of windscreen panels and icon enclosure panels.
C.
Panel mounting hardware.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01 23 00 - Alternates.
B.
Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing.
C.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
D.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
E.
Section 10 14 00 - Signage and Identifying Devices.
F.
Section 13 13 00 - Platforms and Stations.
MEASUREMENT
A.
1.4
PAYMENT
A.
1.5
No separate measurement will be made for the work of this section.
No separate payment will be made for Polycarbonate Plastic Glazing. The
cost of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to the work described
in Section 13 13 00 Platforms and Stations.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI Z 97.1 - American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in
Buildings -Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
B.
ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Pendulum Impact
Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastics.
187
1.6
C.
ASTM D 4812 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Pendulum Impact
Resistance of Unnotched Specimens of Plastics.
D.
ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
E.
ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
F.
ASTM D 1929 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics.
G.
ASTM D 635 – Standard Test Method for Rate of Building and/or Extent and
Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
H.
ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
I.
CAN/ULC 102.2 – Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Coverings, and Miscellaneous Materials
and Assemblies.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data; including product
description, fabrication information, and compliance with specified
performance requirements.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings showing securement to
structure, design details, and similar data. Drawings and calculations to bare
stamp of Professional Engineer licensed in the State in which the project is
located.
D.
Submit product test reports from a qualified independent third party testing
agency indicating each type and class of panel system complies with the
project performance requirements, based on comprehensive testing of
current products. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if for
current manufacturer and indicative of products used on this Project.
1.
Test reports required are:
a.
Rate of Burning (ASTM D 635)
b.
Self-Ignition Temperature (ASTM D 1929)
c.
Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (ASTM E 84)
d.
Impact Strength (ASTM D 3763)
e.
Impact Strength (ASTM D 4812)
f.
Safety Glazing and Impact Strength (ANSI Z97.1-2004)
188
E.
Samples for Initial Selection:
1.
F.
Samples for Verification:
1.
Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data,
including care, repair and cleaning instructions. Include in Project closeout
documents.
H.
Maintenance supplies:
2.
1.8
Submit four (4), minimum 8-inch by 8-inch sample for each type and
color of polycarbonate plastic fabrication.
G.
1.
1.7
Submit four (4), minimum 8-inch by 8-inch samples. Indicate full
color.
Provide one (1) gallon of graffiti remover in sealed container(s) as
well as spray applicator.
Provide polishing components as recommended by manufacturer for
removal of scratches:
a.
Sanding
1)
Sanding disks minimum quantity, 25.
2)
Foam disk minimum quantity, 15.
b.
Rubbing Compound
1)
Compound, minimum 1 gallon.
2)
Compound buffing pad, minimum 5.
c.
Swirl Mark removal
1)
Polish, minimum 1 gallon.
2)
Polishing Pad, minimum 5.
d.
Final polish
1)
Ultrafine polish, minimum 1 gallon.
2)
Final Polishing Pad, minimum 5.
WINDSCREEN PRE-FABRICATION MEETING
A.
Convene one (1) week before starting work of this section.
B.
Attendance by Architect, Owner, General Contractor, Windscreen
Subcontractor, windscreen panel manufacturer (via phone) and any other
subcontractor involved in windscreen fabrication and installation.
MOCKUPS
A.
Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects.
189
1.9
B.
Build mockup of each type of windscreen.
C.
Build mockup of one (1) complete Icon including all four (4) sections.
D.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed work, once any
unsatisfactory issues have been addressed and mock up has been reviewed
by architect and owner.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer’s Qualifications
1.
1.10
1.11
Manufacturer must have documented training and qualification
program for fabrication and installation of Polycarbonate Plastic
Glazing.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver Polycarbonate Plastic Glazing, systems and specified items in
manufacturer’s standard protective masking.
B.
Store materials in a flat orientation in a dry place that is not exposed to
exterior elements.
C.
Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces.
D.
Before installing Polycarbonate Plastic Glazing, permit them to reach ambient
temperature.
E.
Do not deliver Polycarbonate Plastic Glazing, systems, components and
accessories to Project site until areas are ready for installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer’s Special Warranty on Polycarbonate Plastic Glazing:
Manufacturer’s standard form agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in
material or workmanship within the specified warranty period.
B.
Warranty Period: five (5) years from ship date.
C.
The warranty shall not deprive the owner of other rights or remedies the
Owner may have under provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in
addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.
190
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURER
A.
Manufacturer: 3form, Inc., Salt Lake City, Utah, USA / telephone (801) 6492500
B.
Substitutions: See Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedure.
MATERIALS
A.
Bases of Design Product: The design of the Polycarbonate Plastic Glazing is
based on 3form "Koda XT" produced from polycarbonate sheet.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Material: Engineered polycarbonate resin with UV stabilization on the
first and second surface of each panel.
Size: Custom sizes as shown drawings.
Thickness: 1/2 inch nominal.
Interlayer: Multiple layers of colored polycarbonate based films - see
color schedule.
Hi-res graphic interlayer:
a.
Locations: Upper and Lower Windscreens
b.
Artwork as furnished by owner
Finish:
a.
Surface 1: Sandstone
b.
Surface 2: Smooth/Patent
c.
Surface 3: Smooth/Patent
d.
Surface 4: Sandstone
e.
Exposed edges at windscreen panels: relieve edges as
recommended by panel manufacturer.
f.
Exposed edges at Icon; Chamfer and ease edges at locations
indicated on drawings.
Sheet Minimum Performance Attributes:
a.
Rate of Burning (ASTM D 635). Material must attain
CC1Rating for a nominal thickness of 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) and
greater.
b.
Self-Ignition Temperature (ASTM D 1929). Material must have
a Self-Ignition Temperature greater than 650°F.
c.
Flame Spread and Smoke developed testing (ASTM E 84).
Material must be able to meet a level of Class B (Flame spread
less than 75 and smoke less than 450) at thickness of 0.5 inch.
d.
Impact Strength. Minimum impact strength test as measured
by ASTM D 4812. No Failure at 60 ft lbf/in.
e.
Safety Glazing. Material must attain a Class A impact rating in
accordance with ANSI Z97.1-2004.
191
8.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate Polycarbonate Plastic Glazing to designs, sizes and
thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes, profiles
and other characteristics as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations for fabrication.
C.
Machining: Acceptable means of machining are listed below. Ensure that
material is not chipped or warped by machining operations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
E.
Sawing: Select equipment and blades suitable for type of cut required.
Drilling: Drills specifically designed for use with polycarbonate plastic
products.
Milling: Climb cut where possible.
Routing.
Tapping.
Forming: Form products to shapes indicated using the appropriate method
listed below. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.
1.
2.
2.4
Interlayer Materials: Compatible with polycarbonate and bonding
process to create a monolithic sheet of material when complete.
Cold Bending.
Hot Bending.
Laminating: Laminate to substrates indicated using adhesives and
techniques recommended by manufacturer.
PANEL MOUNTING HARDWARE
A.
Provide a complete systems of connectors and fasteners as shown on
drawings or specified herein.
1.
Hardware suitable for exterior installations:
a.
Stainless Steel Barrel Point Support attachment
1)
XT cap
(a)
1.5" diameter cap with 1.5" M10 threads
(b)
1.5" diameter cap with 1.8" M10 threads, at icon
bent plate location
2)
Delrin Shoulder Washer
3)
XT Barrel, size as indicated on drawings
(a)
XT 1.5" diameter barrel x 1" long
(b)
XT 1.5" diameter barrel x 2" long
(c)
XT 1.5" diameter barrel x 4.5" long
192
4)
5)
b.
2.5
ACCESSORIES
A.
Gaskets shall be as per manufacturer’s standards to meet performance
criteria.
B.
Fasteners shall be per manufacturer’s standards to meet performance
requirements.
C.
Blind Rivet Nuts: Stainless steel, round shank, flat head with underhead seal.
Open end to receive bolt.
1.
D.
Similar to Tubtara Blind Rivet nut with integral Plasticol sealing
material.
Sealants shall be per manufacturer's standards to meet performance
requirements.
1.
2.6
EPTFE Washer.
Additional washers, screws, gasketing material and
other anchors as recommended by manufacturer for a
complete system.
Channel attachment
1)
Windscreen Through bolt: M10 tamperproof head with
acorn nuts, shop paint heads and nuts to match
channel.
2)
Delrin bushing
3)
Compressible gasket material as recommended by the
manufacturer
Sealant: Momentive Performance Silicones, SilGlaze II SCS 2801,
Translucent
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape required for
application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with
surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaner: Type recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Fasteners: Use screws designed specifically for polycarbonate plastics.
193
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of
Polycarbonate Plastic Glazing will occur, with Installer present, for
compliance with manufacturer’s requirements. Verify that substrates and
conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with requirements
specified.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for the
installation of Polycarbonate Plastic Glazing.
B.
Manufacturer’s shop to fabricate items to the greatest degree possible.
C.
Utilize all fasteners recommended by manufacturer for type of installation
indicated. Material that is chipped, warped, hazed or discolored as a result of
installation or fabrication methods will be rejected.
D.
Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in
accordance with approved shop drawings and product data.
E.
Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended procedures.
F.
Provide gaskets between dissimilar materials as recommended by
manufacturer.
G.
Apply threadlocking tape at all thread points in Polycarbonate Plastic Glazing
hardware.
H.
Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's
requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation
instructions.
Perform sealant installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges,
and sags.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges.
Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these
temperature ranges.
Tool sealant joints concave. Remove and replace sealant in joints
improperly tooled.
194
3.3
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect surfaces from damage until date of substantial completion. Repair
work or replace damaged work, which cannot be repaired to Architect’s
satisfaction.
B.
Clean installed materials using manufacturer's specified cleaning products
and procedures.
C.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
D.
Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION
195
SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface preparation.
B.
Shop and Field application of paints and other coatings.
C.
Scope: Finish all exposed surfaces, unless fully factory-finished and unless
otherwise indicated, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
1.3
All Structural Steel specified in Sections 05 12 00, except as excluded
below.
Exposed electrical conduit, junction boxes, and other equipment.
All shop primed items.
All metal fabrications specified in Section 05 50 00, including railings
and benches except as excluded below.
Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials
and products having factory-applied primers are not considered
factory finished.
Items indicated to receive other finishes.
Items indicated to remain unfinished.
Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items,
unless otherwise indicated.
Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 23 00 - Alternates
B.
Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing
C.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications
D.
Section 13 13 00 - Platforms and Stations
E.
Color Schedule contained in Appendix A.
MEASUREMENT
A.
No separate measurement will be made for Painting and Coating.
196
1.4
PAYMENT
A.
1.5
1.6
No separate payment will be made for Painting and Coating. The cost of
meeting these requirements shall be incidental to the work described in
Section 13 13 00 Platforms and Stations.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and
Applications; 2012.
B.
SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society
for Protective Coatings; Fourth Edition.
C.
Master Painters Institute (MPI) Approved Product List, current edition
available at www.paintinfo.com, for specified MPI categories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Before ordering, provide data on all finishing products and
special coatings. Provide MSDS sheets on all materials used on the project.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Show wet and dry film build.
List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish
system and application.
Identify each material including fillers and primers by the
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
Submit certification by the manufacturer that products supplied
comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic
compounds (VOCs).
C.
Verification Samples: Two (2) samples, minimum size eight (8) inches
square, representing actual color and finish of each finish coating type, color,
and finish to be applied. Submit on representative samples of actual
materials. Submit a list of materials and applications for each coat of each
sample. Label each sample as to location and application.
D.
Manufacturer's
procedures.
E.
Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted
and coated surfaces.
Instructions:
197
Indicate
special
surface
preparation
F.
Maintenance Materials:
maintenance of project.
1.
2.
3.
1.7
1.9
1.10
See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional
provisions.
Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon of each color; store where directed.
Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's
label.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8
Furnish the following for Owner's use in
Primer and undercoat material produced by the same manufacturer as the
finish coats shall be provided for each type of coating, for single source
responsibility. Use only thinners recommended by the manufacturer and
only within recommended limits.
COORDINATION WITH WORK OF RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Coordinate work with Steel Fabricator
B.
All structural steel members and steel fabricated items to receive paint finish
are to be shop finished before delivery to the installation site. Field painting
is only acceptable adjacent to locations requiring field welding.
MOCK-UP
A.
See Section 01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements, for general
requirements for mock-up.
B.
Construct mock-up, one (1) completed shelter including all steel members to
receive paint.
C.
Locate where directed.
D.
Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
E.
Acceptable mock-up represents expected quality level of the remaining work.
EXTERIOR COLOR STUDY
A.
Assist the Architect and Owner in the final color selection by painting the
approved paint material on a portion of a typical shelter to include at least
two (2) front columns, two (2) back columns, a 4' section of beam, two (2)
rafters and associated rails and tabs. Locate where directed.
B.
Provide up to six (6) color samples.
198
C.
1.11
1.12
After final color selection, cover over the test samples with primer to
eliminate color bleed- through and recoat with final approved colors.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify
acceptability.
B.
Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot
number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup
requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
C.
Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45°F and a
maximum of 90°F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's
instructions.
D.
Establish and maintain storage area conditions for products of this section in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions until installation.
E.
Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with
solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction over project.
FIELD AND SHOP CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside
the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B.
Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results,
including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and
temperature limitations.
C.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative
humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product
manufacturer.
D.
Work shall be allowed to continue during inclement weather only if areas
and surfaces to be coated are enclosed and the temperature within the area
can be maintained within limits specified by the manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
E.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate
surface.
199
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the
same manufacturer; no exceptions.
B.
Substitutions: See Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedure.
PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A.
Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed
coating.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of
being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating,
with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or
curing free of streaks or sags.
Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the
substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and
intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with
final finish coat as base color.
Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire
project's work from a single production run.
Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings
unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's
product instructions.
B.
Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by
manufacturer of top coats; where the manufacturer offers options on
primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the
manufacturer.
C.
Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:
1.
2.
Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total
aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or
more benzene rings).
Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate,
cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl
phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate,
ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead,
mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene
200
chloride,
naphthalene,
toluene
trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.
2.3
applicable
code
for
surface
1,1,1-
D.
Flammability: Comply
characteristics.
E.
Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen
will be selected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line.
F.
Colors: As indicated in Color Schedule
burning
REFERENCED GLOSS LEVELS
A.
Some of the following Gloss Level references may be used in the Paint
Systems outlined below and are defined here for reference. Gloss units are
as measured at 60° from perpendicular, per ASTM D523.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
with
(methylbenzene),
Gloss Level 1 a traditional matte finish - flat: maximum 5 units.
Gloss Level 2 a high side sheen flat - a 'velvet-like' finish: maximum 10
units.
Gloss Level 3 a traditional 'eggshell-like' finish: 10-25 units.
Gloss Level 4 a 'satin: 20-35 units.
Gloss Level 5 a traditional semi-gloss: 35-70 units.
Gloss Level 6 a traditional gloss: 70-85 units.
Gloss Level 7 a high gloss: more than 85 units.
PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A.
All Exposed Steel including field welds: High-Performance, 3 Part System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Zinc-rich primer - base coat MPI #19, MPI #20:
a.
Catha-Coat 302H by AkzoNobel Devoe Coatings.
b.
Zinc Clad XI by Sherwin Williams.
c.
Applied 2.5 - 4 mils dry film thickness; 3.5 - 5.0 mils wet.
Polyamide Epoxy primer - intermediate coat: MPI #108:
a.
Bar-Rust 235 Epoxy by AkzoNobel Devoe Coatings.
b.
Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy by Sherwin Williams.
c.
Applied 3.0 - 5.0 mils dry film thickness; 4.0 - 6.0 wet, or
greater if recommended by manufacturer for even color.
Aliphatic Urethane - finish coat: MPI #72:
a.
Devthane 379 by AkzoNobel Devoe Coatings.
b.
Acrolon 218 HS by Sherwin Williams.
c.
Applied 2.0 - 3.0 mils dry film thickness; 3.2 - 4.8 wet.
d.
Gloss: MPI gloss level 6-7.
Finish Coat at the Accent Stick Cap and Icon Enclosure, Aliphatic
Urethane - finish coat: MPI #72:
201
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
Galvanized Steel: High-Performance, 2 Part System:
1.
2.
2.5
Devthane 379 by AkzoNobel Devoe Coatings.
Acrolon 218 HS by Sherwin Williams.
Applied 2.0 - 3.0 mils dry film thickness; 3.2 - 4.8 wet.
Gloss: MPI gloss level 7.
LRV: 95 or higher.
Color: See Color Schedule.
Polyamide Epoxy primer: MPI #108:
a.
Devran 205 High Build Epoxy by AkzoNobel Devoe Coatings.
b.
Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy by Sherwin Williams.
c.
Applied 3.0 - 5.0 mils dry film thickness; 4.0 - 6.0 wet, or
greater if recommended by manufacturer for even color.
Aliphatic Urethane finish coat: MPI #72:
a.
Devthane 379 by AkzoNobel Devoe Coatings.
b.
Acrolon 218 HS by Sherwin Williams.
c.
Applied 2.0 - 3.0 mils dry film thickness; 3.2 - 4.8 wet.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning
cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the
finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly
prepared.
B.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product
manufacturer.
C.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work.
Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.
D.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify
Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
E.
Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
F.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter.
Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below
maximums allowed by coating manufacturer.
202
G.
Immediately prior to coating application, examine surfaces to receive
coatings for surface imperfections and for contaminants which could impair
performance or appearance of coating, including but not limited to loose
primer, rust, scale, oil, grease, mildew, algae, or fungus, stains or marks,
cracks, indentations, or abrasions.
H.
Correct the above conditions and other conditions which could impair
performance or appearance of coatings in accordance with specified surface
preparation procedures before proceeding with coating application.
I.
Coordinating work:
1.
2.
3.2
Sections in which other coatings are provided shall be reviewed to
ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates.
Information on the characteristics of specified finish materials shall
be furnished to ensure compatible primers.
The Architect shall be notified of problems anticipated using the
coatings specified over substrates prime under other sections.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-10
unless noted otherwise.
B.
Shop prime structural steel members that will be painted. Do not prime
surfaces that will be field welded or stainless steel.
C.
Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
D.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
E.
Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates,
hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing
surfaces or finishing.
F.
Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
G.
Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of
tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow
surface to dry.
H.
Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils
and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
I.
Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC203
SP 2 (hand tool cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by
SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).
3.3
J.
Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease,
mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are
evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean
by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution,
ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint
entire surface; spot prime after repairs.
K.
Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove
loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches
inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.
APPLICATION
A.
All structural steel members and steel fabricated items to receive paint finish
are to be shop finished before delivery to the installation site. Field painting
is only acceptable adjacent to locations requiring field welding.
B.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry
before next coat is applied.
D.
Apply each coat to uniform appearance, free from orange peel, brush strokes,
and other imperfections resulting from application.
E.
Apply products so that edges between colors are sharp and consistent.
F.
Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified,
apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide.
G.
Sand metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
H.
Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and
particles just prior to applying next coat.
I.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons,
and fittings removed prior to finishing.
J.
Apply paint to exposed fasteners used to install the Work of Section 07 41 13
- Metal Roof Panels.
204
3.4
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed
metal containers, and remove daily from site.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
205
SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNS AND IDENTIFYING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
This section describes the fabrication and installation of exterior signage
scheduled in “Sign Schedule” article of this Section. The work includes
electrical, lighting and power devices contained within or upon signage,
such as lamps, wiring, sockets, etc.
B.
Design Requirements: Provide signage that complies with the Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines.
MEASUREMENT
A.
1.3
PAYMENT
A.
1.4
No separate measurement will be made for customer signs including the
fabrication and installation of exterior signage described in this section.
No separate payment will be made for fabrication and installation of exterior
signs. The cost of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to the
work described in section 13 13 00 platforms and stations.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of section
01 33 00, Submittals except as noted herein.
B.
Product Data:
1.
2.
C.
Submit manufacturer's product specifications, anchor details and
installation instructions for products used in sign fabrication,
including paint products, lighting and electrical devices.
Submit qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality
Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include list of completed projects identifying project name, address,
Designer and Owner.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Submit complete shop drawings for fabrication and installation of
signs and related work including plans, elevations and details of
components and attachments to other work. Indicate materials
and profiles of each member, fitting, joinery, finishes, fasteners,
anchorages and accessory items.
206
2.
3.
D.
Material and Finish: Submit samples of each sign component material
showing finishes, colors and surface textures. Component material
samples must be approved before completed product samples are
fabricated.
E.
Sign Layouts: Submit layout to architectural scale for each sign scheduled.
F.
Completed Product Samples: Upon approval of all material and finish
samples, submit full- size sample units of completed product for the
following sign types. Samples shall be retained by the Owner unless noted
otherwise.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.5
1.6
For structural elements include details of cuts, connections, camber,
holes and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS
symbols and show size, length and type of each weld.
Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for the
installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed in
work described in other sections.
Sign Type A:
Sign Type B1:
Sign Type B2:
Sign Type D1:
Sign Type D2:
Sign Type E:
Sign Type F:
Station ID, Icon - Completed logo
Station ID - Completed sign
Direction of Travel - Completed sign
Code of Conduct - Completed sign
Proof of Payment - Completed sign
See Something/Say Something - Completed
signSmoking - Completed sign
No
MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Include cleaning recommendations. Provide information on methods and
products for field paint repair and graffiti removal.
B.
Parts List: Provide Owner with list of lamps to stock for illuminated signs.
CODES, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS
A.
The completed installation shall conform to all applicable Federal, State and
local codes, ordinances and regulations.
B.
Obtain all necessary permits and inspections required by the governing
authorities having jurisdiction over this work. Include associated fees in
initial proposal.
C.
Furnish to the Architect a certificate of approval from the inspection
authority at the completion of the work prior to the application for final
payment.
207
D.
1.7
1.8
1.9
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding
operators in accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS)
"Standard Qualification Procedure".
B.
Uniformity of Manufacturers: For each sign form and graphic image
process indicated furnish products of a single manufacturer.
C.
Fabrication Observation: Notify Owner 15 days prior to 90 percent
completion of the shop fabrication, so that the work may be observed prior
to delivery to the job site.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Expansion and Contraction: Design, fabricate and install component parts
to provide for expansion and contraction of the material over a
temperature range of 100°F (83.3°C), without buckling, sealant joint failure,
glass breakage, undue stress on members and anchors, or other detrimental
effects.
B.
Fabrication Tolerances: Sign panels shall show no visual distortion when
viewed in installed position.
C.
Panel Alignment at Butt Joints: Sign panels shall align parallel and flat
without visible variation when viewed from the normal viewing distance.
D.
Installation Alignment: Signs will be reviewed by Owner for acceptance.
Criteria will include plumbness, trueness, alignments and relationships with
adjacent work.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
Where specified materials or methods exceed minimum standards allowed
by applicable codes, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of
shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to insure proper fitting of
work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Delivery of Materials: Deliver work to project site when adjacent finishes
are complete and ready for immediate installation.
208
B.
1.11
Handling Materials and Equipment: Handle finished product in careful
manner in order not to damage or mar surfaces of finished product or
adjacent finished surfaces.
OWNER PROVIDED ARTWORK
A.
Production ready artwork shall be provided where noted on drawings as
vector (outline) files saved in either EPS or Illustrator format. All fonts
(text) shall be converted to curves or outline.
B.
Image files will be provided as TIFF or JPG unless otherwise noted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS
A.
Steel: Provide steel in form indicated complying with the following
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) requirements:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Aluminum: Provide aluminum in the form indicated complying with the
following American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) requirements:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Tube: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36.
Sheet: ASTM A 240, Type 304.
Sheets: ASTM B 209, 5052-H32.
Extruded Bar and Shapes: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T6.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B429, Alloy 6063-T6.
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals which are corrosive or otherwise incompatible
with metals joined.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fastening devices between dissimilar materials shall be 300 Series
non- magnetic stainless steel.
Material: Galvanically compatible with adjacent materials.
Finish: Where exposed to view match adjacent material.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of metal work
components and for their attachment to other work except where
exposed fasteners are indicated on the drawings.
Provide socket flat-head machine screws or bolts for exposed
fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
209
B.
Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Type and alloy of filler metal and
electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded, complying
with applicable AWS specifications, and as required for color match,
strength and compatibility in the fabricated items.
C.
Adhesives:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Driver Stop Indicator:
1.
2.3
General: Provide low or no VOC adhesives.
Very High Bond (VHB) Adhesive: 3M Company, product as
recommended by manufacturer for type of use, materials and
fabrication; or equal.
Foam Tape: Double faced pressure sensitive foam tape, 3M
Company, product in width and thickness as recommended by
manufacturer for type of use, materials and fabrication; or equal.
Silicone: FS TT-S-001543B, Class A, silicone sealant #1200, General
Electric Company; or equal.
Epoxy: Epoxy shall be two-component thermosetting epoxy adhesive
with 100 percent solids content. Acceptable products include #NP428, Miracle Adhesives Corporation; Chemlok #304, Hughson
Chemical Division of Lord Corporation; or equal.
Contact Adhesive: Contact adhesive normally associated with high
pressure decorative laminates for both flat and curved surfaces.
General: Provide Surface Mounted Rumble Bar, 4” x 12”, white,
product #12501100. Traffic Supply Company Inc. www.tssco.com.
GRAPHIC COMPONENTS AND PROCESSES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
All graphics, including text, symbols and arrows shall be executed
in such a manner that all edges and corners are true and clean.
Type Sizes: As indicated on drawings for particular units.
Typefaces: All work to precisely replicate the typefaces as indicated
on drawings.
Typographic Spacing: Match letter, word and line spacing as
indicated on drawings for all text configurations.
Symbols and Arrows: Match artwork as indicated on the drawings.
Original Artwork: Original artwork provided by Owner shall not be
damaged in any way (writing, cutting, etc.) and shall be returned
upon successful completion and acceptance of the project.
210
B.
Pressure Sensitive Vinyl Graphics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Translucent White Acrylic:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Provide pressure sensitive vinyl messages installed at finished
surfaces in the sizes, mounting heights, letter spacing and alignment
indicated on drawings.
Sign messages shall be provided pre-spaced in type sizes, colors and
typeface as shown on the drawings and specified herein. All lettering
shall be executed in such a manner that all edges and corners of
letter forms are true, clean, photographically precise and accurately
reproduce the typeface. Messages shall be smooth and free of air
bubbles, open cuts, bulging and foreign matter between message and
application surface.
Material: 3-M vinyl sheeting; or equal.
Color:
a.
V-1: 3M 3630-156, Translucent Vivid Green
b.
V-2: 3M 7725-10, Opaque White
c.
V-3: 3M 7725-12, Opaque Black
Type and Finish: As indicated on drawings.
Construction: Precision cut in the thickness and sizes indicated on the
drawings. Edges shall be square to face of letter and free from cut
marks or other imperfections. Corners and kerfs shall be square, or
as indicated on the drawings.
Material: Translucent sign white, high gloss, cast virgin acrylic sheet,
50 percent light transmission.
Finish: As indicated on drawing.
Digitally Printed Vinyl
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Construction: Substrate to be premium white cast adhesive vinyl, 3M
180-AC or equal.
Printing: All pictorials to be printed on the Artcraft electronic image
device output at 8-color (CMYK and light cyan, light magenta, orange
and green).
Lamination: Premium clear, matte vinyl, 3M 8520 or equal.
Lamination to be performed with proper heat, speed and pressure to
ensure maximum adhesion.
Resolution: true 1440 x 1440 dpi.
Installation: Graphics to be installed by a certified installer to
preserve warranty.
Warranty: Minimum of seven (7) years against fading, cracking,
chipping and peeling for exterior use.
211
2.4
METAL FABRICATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Metal Protection:
1.
C.
Use materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as
required to produce strength and durability in finished product for
use intended. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop
drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type
of materials shown or specified for various components of work.
For exposed work fabricate true to line and level with accurate
angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Exposed edges shall
be square unless otherwise shown. Ease corners and edges where
exposed to public touch. Form bent-metal corners to smallest
radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
Provide metal work composed of metals of the forms and types
which comply with requirements of referenced standards and which
are free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the
finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, "oil canning", stains, discolorations or other
imperfections on finished units will not be accepted.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth,
using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners
of type shown or, if not shown, socket flat-head screws or bolts.
Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting
structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate
support for intended use.
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated
to receive finish hardware and similar items.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by
applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this
purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry,
protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous paint.
Welded Construction:
1.
2.
Select type of weld for best appearance. Use concealed and plug
welds as indicated on drawings.
Comply with American Welding Standards (AWS) Code for
procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in
correcting welding work. Select weld sizes, sequence and equipment
212
3.
4.
D.
Miscellaneous Trim and Hardware:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Provide shapes and sizes as required for profiles shown. Except as
otherwise noted, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates
and bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed
edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide
cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of
assembly and installation with other work.
Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors,
hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as
required for supporting of signage.
Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required.
Holes for Other Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
to limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Surface "bleed" of back
side welding on exposed surfaces will not be accepted.
Assemble and weld structural system by methods which will
produce true alignment of axes without warp. Grind butt welds
flush; dress all exposed welds, feather edges onto base material
and polish as required for smooth painted surfaces.
Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS
recommendations. All exposed welds shall be clean, consistent and
uniform in appearance. Grind and finish exposed welds smooth
and flush to match adjacent contours and finish. Remove loose
rust, mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits.
Provide holes required for securing other work to structural
system, and for the passage of other work through steel members,
as shown on the final shop drawings.
Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items
as shown to receive other work.
Drill holes 1/16 inch oversize for field alignment and fitting.
Cut, drill or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not
flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning.
Shop Assembly:
1.
2.
3.
Fabricate units to configurations indicated on reviewed shop
drawings.
Provide required text and artwork as indicated on reviewed shop
drawings.
Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for
shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly
and coordinated installation.
213
2.5
G.
Surface Preparation: After inspection and before finishing, clean metal
work to be painted. Clean metal by "wheel abrader" process or other
method to achieve results defined by Steel Structures Painting Council
(SSPC) for "SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning".
H.
Preparation for Shipping and Handling: Provide strippable protective
coating or wrapping.
METAL FINISHES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal
work prior to cleaning, finishing, surface treatment and application
of finishes.
Comply with National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and
application recommendations to match sheet finish specified above,
except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
Finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to
match the sheet finish. Finish free of tool or construction marks, or
dents.
Spray apply sound deadening mastic (with flame spread of 75 or
less) to concealed surfaces of formed metal and other areas of flat
sheets not laminated to backing as indicated on drawings.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
application of removable temporary protective covering prior to
shipment.
COATINGS FOR METAL
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Matthews Acrylic Polyurethane
(MAP), or equal.
B.
Recommended System:
1.
2.
3.
Aluminum: MAP, Ultra Low VOC product. Primers, catalysts and
reducers are to be per manufacturer’s recommendations. Match
colors and gloss as indicated.
Steel: MAP, Ultra Low VOC product. Primers, catalysts and reducers
are to be per manufacturers’ recommendations. Match colors and
gloss as indicated.
Clearcoat: Provide protective clearcoat over all painted surfaces. Use
Matthews Acrylic Polyurethane, MAP-LVC208 Ultra-low VOC Gloss
Clear.
214
C.
Field Repair: Provide system recommended by manufacturer for field repair
by untrained applicators employed by Owner.
D.
Application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Substrates to be cleaned and surface prepared as recommended by
paint manufacturer.
The number of coats and paint film thickness required is the same
regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats
until previous coat has flashed off as recommended by coating
manufacturer. Sand between coat applications where required to
produce an even, smooth surface in accordance with coating
manufacturer's directions.
Apply additional coats when undercoats or other conditions show
through final coat until the cured film is of uniform finish, color and
appearance.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Dry film thickness and application
procedures to be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Apply each material at not thinner than
manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry
film thickness of entire coating system as recommended by
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
Apply an even film, free of surface imperfections.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, gloss, texture
and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work not in compliance
with specified requirements.
Recommended System for sign posts and frames:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Acceptable Powder Coating Manufacturers and Products: CASPAX-7
or equal.
All steel parts shall be finished with CASPAX-7, or approved equal,
a tough, opaque, exterior use powder coating. Coatings containing
lead or epoxy are not acceptable.
Substrate preparation shall consist first of mechanical cleaning to
remove heavy mill scale, rust varnish’s grease, etc., then chemical
cleaning in accordance with TT C490C, Methods I and III.
After cleaning, the metal substrate shall receive a corrosion-inhibiting
iron phosphate coating in accordance with TT-C490C, Type II, before
application of the final color coat.
The coating powder shall be uniformly applied by electrostatic
method to a thickness of 4 - 5mm. Promptly after the application
of the powder, the coating shall be oven-cured at 100°F to
chemically bond the finish to the substrate and render the color
coated surface resistant to abrasion, impact, household chemicals,
weathering and rusting.
215
6.
F.
Color Schedule:
1.
2.
3.
2.7
The applicator shall test the finish of each lot for correct millage,
chemical resistance, hardness, and internal bond in accordance with
industry standard test methods. Records of this quality control
procedure shall be retained for two years. The CASPAX-7 color
shall be the manufacturer's standard or as selected by the owner's
representative and designated on the project plans and/or
specifications.
P-1: Light Gray; Match PPG The Voice of Color, 518-4 Flagstone.
P-2: Dark Gray; Match PPG The Voice of Color, 518-6 Knight’s Armor.
P-5: White; Matthews Acrylic Polyurethane MP41734 Divine Pleasure.
LED LIGHTING
A.
White Illumination
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Power supply
1.
C.
Temperature: 3000K
Manufacturer: Volt Lighting Group or equal
Product: M3K-RC-24V or equal
UL: outdoor use
Warranty: 4 years
CRI: 80+
As Required.
Acceptable LED Manufacturers:
1.
Volt Lighting Group
8319 SW Cirrus Drive
Beaverton, OR 97008
T: 800-789-3810
www.voltlightingroup.com
2.
GE Lighting Solutions Corporate Headquarters
1975 Noble Road Building 338E,
East Cleveland, OH 44112-6300 T: 1-888-694-3533
F: 216-266-2158
www.gelightingsolutions.com
216
3.
SloanLED - Corporate Office
5725 Olivas Park Drive
Ventura, California 93003 USA
T: 888.747.4533
F: 805.676.3206
www.sloanled.com
info@SloanLED.com
D.
Coordinate power load with contractor.
E.
Furnish and install all LEDs for initial installation of fixtures. All LEDs not in
working order at completion of installation shall be replaced with no added
cost to Owner.
F.
Testing: Upon completion of installation of sign light fixtures, demonstrate
capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct
malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance,
otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with re-testing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
Verify that mounting surfaces to receive signage are properly prepared.
Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages and setting drawings, diagrams,
templates, instructions and directions for installation of items having
integral anchors which are to be installed by others. Coordinate delivery of
such items to construction site.
B.
Protect mounting surfaces and adjacent areas against damage and
discoloration caused by work in this section.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate sign units and accessories where shown or scheduled, using
mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. Install sign units level, plumb and at the
height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in
appearance. Notify Owner of installation conflicts.
B.
Foam Tape Mounting: Use 3M product as specified for mounting signs to
smooth, non- porous surfaces as indicated on the drawings. Do not use this
217
method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. Position tape at back of sign
for optimum performance and hidden from view.
3.4
3.5
C.
Silicone Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive as specified to
attach sign units to irregular, porous or vinyl-covered surfaces as
indicated on the drawings. Use foam tape where recommended by the
sign manufacturer to hold the sign in place until the adhesive has fully
cured. Remove visible adhesive.
D.
Mechanical Fastener Mounting: Install signs securely to wall with fasteners
and anchoring devices as indicated on drawings and as specified.
E.
VHB Adhesive Mounting: Install signs with full sheet VHB adhesive where
indicated on the drawings. Trim adhesive flush to exposed edges of material
being installed.
F.
Bracket Mounted Units: Provide fittings and hardware as appropriate for
mounting signs from roof. Attach brackets and fittings securely to ceiling
with fasteners and anchoring devices as indicated on drawings.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes from damage during construction period, field handling and
installation by use of temporary protective coverings. Protect adjacent
surfaces from damage during field fabrication and installation. Remove
protective covering at time of substantial completion.
B.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that
no evidence remains of corrective work. Touch up any exposed fasteners
and connecting hardware to match color and finish of surrounding
surface. Touch up damaged surfaces carefully, using airbrush technique
where necessary. Return items which cannot be refinished in the field to
the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide
new units as required.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide final hook-up of illuminated signs and electrical devices.
B.
Test operation of signs and identifying devices and adjust as needed to
produce fully functioning units that comply with requirements.
C.
Verify loads with Contractor.
218
3.6
CLEANING
A.
3.7
Clean all exposed surfaces just prior to date of substantial completion in
accord with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. Protect units
from damage until acceptance.
SIGN SCHEDULE
A.
General
1.
Quantity and message per drawings and artwork.
END OF SECTION
219
SECTION 10 14 53 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 8-21 – Permanent
Signing, Section 9-28 – Signing Materials and Fabrication, and other sections referenced
therein, of the Standard Specifications, as amended herein.
8-21 PERMANENT SIGNING
PAYMENT
Section 8-21.5 is revised as follows:
(******)
Replace the Bid item “Permanent Signing, lump sum.” with the following Bid item:

10 14 53.01 Permanent Signing, Lump Sum.
Add the following:
Mast arm mounted street name signs at signalized intersections shall be included in the
lump sum contract price for the associated traffic signal system.
END OF SECTION
220
SECTION 12 93 00 SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Trash receptacles.
B.
Ash urns.
MEASUREMENT
A.
1.3
Site furnishings will be measured by the individual unit, installed and
accepted.
PAYMENT
A.
Payment will be made at the contact unit price under:
1.
2.
1.4
1.5
Payment Item
a.
12 93 00.01
Trash Receptacle
b.
Ash Urn
12 93 00.02
Payment Unit
EA
EA
The contract price paid for each item will be payment in full for
furnishing all labor, material, tools, equipment and incidentals, and
doing all work necessary to complete the work specified.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s specifications and descriptive
literature, installation instructions, and maintenance information.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate plans for each unit or groups of units, elevations
with model number, overall dimensions; construction, and anchorage
details.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide two (2) trash receptacles.
B.
Provide two (2) ash urns.
221
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Provide manufacturer’s warranty against defects in materials or
workmanship for ductile iron castings for a period of ten (10) years from
Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
TRASH RECEPTACLES
A.
Manufacturer:
1.
2.
B.
Product: Dispatch Litter and Recycling Receptacle by Forms+Surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Forms + Surfaces, 30 Pine Street, Pittsburgh, PA 15223. (800) 4510410. Web site www.forms-surfaces.com.
Substitutions: See Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedure.
Overall dimensions
a.
36-gallon receptacles: 43.0" high x 25.5" wide x 21.8" deep.
Configuration Option
a.
36-gallon, single-stream litter/recycling receptacle with one
(1) 36-gallon liner.
Materials:
a.
Receptacle frame and body: cast aluminum.
b.
Lid: cast aluminum.
c.
Hinge pins: stainless steel.
d.
Cam latch: stainless steel (provide recessed screwdriveroperated latch)
e.
Liners: black polyethylene, UL94HB fire rating.
Finishes:
a.
Receptacle frame and body: Powdercoat, see color schedule.
b.
Lid: Powdercoat, see color schedule.
Installation Options
a.
Surface mount: provide 1/2" diameter anchors, stainless steel
mounting screws and epoxy anchors with 3" minimum
embedment for concrete slab installation.
ASH URN
A.
Manufacturer
1.
2.
TimberForm Site furnishing, Columbia Cascade Company, (505) 2231157.
Substitutions: See Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedure.
222
B.
Product: Butt-Out Post by Timberform Site Furnishing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Overall Dimensions
a.
TBD
Configuration Option
a.
Cigarette extinguishing receptacle with locking removable butt
container
Materials:
a.
Receptacle frame and body: Aluminum.
Finishes:
a.
Powdercoat, color selected by Architect
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that mounting surfaces, preinstalled anchor bolts, or other mounting
devices are properly installed; and ready to receive site furnishing items.
B.
Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.
C.
Verify locations of site furnishings with Architect and Owner prior to
installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install site furnishings in accordance with approved shop drawings, and
manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Install plumb, and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products after Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
223
SECTION 12 93 01 SITE FURNISHINGS – 7TH STREET AT TURTLE PLACE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Description
This section specifies site furnishings which consist of furnishing all
materials, equipment, transportation, and performing all labor for
assembling, installing furniture components, and all related work.
1.2
GUARANTEE
A.
1.3
MEASUREMENT
A.
1.4
All workmanship and materials hereunder shall be guaranteed in writing for
one year from the date of final acceptance against defective workmanship
and materials. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining and
protecting site furniture from all damage (at no cost to Owner) until date of
final acceptance. This shall include damage caused by vandalism or adverse
weather conditions.
Site furnishings will be measured by the individual unit, installed and
accepted.
PAYMENT
A.
Accepted Site Furnishings will be paid for at the contract unit price.
B.
The contract price will be payment in full for furnishing all labor, materials,
tools, equipment and incidental, and doing all work necessary to complete
the work specified.
C.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item
12 93 01.01 Liter Receptacles
12 93 01.02 Benches
12 93 01.03 Bike Racks
12 93 01.04 Butt-Out Posts
12 93 01.05 Stationary Bollards
12 93 01.06 Removable Bollards
224
Pay Unit
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
LITTER RECEPTACLE (3 required) - Model Dispatch, 36gal single stream,
surface mounted, color aluminum; as manufactured by Forms + Surfaces (1800-451-0410),
B.
BENCH (2 required) - Model Rest, backed, aluminum finish, end arms, one
seat divider, surface mount, as manufactured by Forms + Surfaces (1-800451-0410),
C.
BIKE RACK - (2 required) - Model Ride, aluminum finish, surface mounted, as
manufactured by Forms + Surfaces (1-800-451-0410).
D.
BUTT-OUT POST - (4 required) - Custom Butt-Out Post, 2190-AR-P, steel post
surface mounted w matching base cover; color Tiger Drylac's 39/90000
Silver 1-Coat as manufactured by Columbia Cascade (1-800-547-1940)
E.
STATIONERY BOLLARDS - (13 required) Model Bollard 2190-P, powder
coated - color Tiger Drylac's 39/90000 Silver 1-Coat, surface mounted w
matching base cover, as manufactured by Columbia Cascade (1-800-5471940)
F.
REMOVABLE BOLLARDS - (2 required) Model Bollard 2190-R, powder
coated - color Tiger Drylac's 39/90000 Silver 1-Coat, as manufactured by
Columbia Cascade (1-800- 547-1940)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General - Assemble and install all products in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations, as modified or shown on the drawings,
and as approved by the Project Representative. Obtain approval from
Project Representative of layout location prior to installing.
B.
Site Furniture - Install all furniture complete in locations shown on plan per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A.
When the project is completed, the Project Representative will make an
inspection to determine acceptability.
END OF SECTION
225
SECTION 13 13 00 PLATFORMS AND STATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
2.
3.
B.
Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, construction of a
transit station with concrete paving, curbs, shelters, platform
amenities, substrate preparation, and all architectural, structural, and
electrical work, as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified
herein or any sections listed in Related Sections, paragraph 1.01.B. The
Sections noted below in Related Sections are only for reference and
may not include all Work required to perform work described. Limits
of station work are face of curb to back of platform and intersection of
sidewalk with station platform ramp at each end.
All items above shall be part of the lump sum item for the station
location noted below or the station location they are to be installed at
or near.
All manufactured and steel materials must comply with Buy America
requirements.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
01 23 00 - Alternates
01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedure
01 33 00 - Submittals
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures
01 78 24 - Operations and Maintenance Manuals
01 78 39 - Project Record Documents
03 11 00 - Concrete Forming
03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing
03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing
05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications
06 64 00 - Translucent Resin Panel System
07 41 13 - Metal Roof Panels
07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07 90 05 - Joint Sealers
08 84 00 - Polycarbonate Plastic Glazing
09 90 00 - Painting and Coating
10 14 00 - Signs and Identifying Devices
26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical
26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
226
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
C.
Measurement
1.
D.
26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
26 05 43 - Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems
26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems
26 24 16 - Lighting Control System Panelboards and Panelboards
26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
26 24 17 - Metered Service Pedestal
26 50 00 - Lighting
31 23 34 - Structure Excavation and Backfill
31 23 35 - Roadway Excavation and Embankment
31 34 19.16 - Geotextile Soil Reinforcement
32 11 23 - Crushed Surfacing
32 14 13 - Precast Concrete Unit Paving
33 10 00 - Water Systems
33 41 00 - Storm Drainage and Sanitary Sewer Piping
Appendix A - BRT Typical Shelter Color Schedule
No separate measurement will be made for the work described herein.
Payment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Accepted Platforms and Station for all stations, complete, will be paid
for at the Contract lump sum price for the various platforms and
stations as listed below.
The Contract price paid for each item will be payment in full for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and
doing all Work necessary to complete the Work specified.
Payment does not include traffic wiring and push button for pedestrian
crossing bollards.
Payment does not include landscape irrigation and planting work.
Payment does not include crosswalks outside station limits.
Payment does not include UHMW curb protection, paid for under
Section 06 51 13.11, UHMW Curb Protection.
Payment does not include Communications work unless otherwise
indicated in Division 27 Sections.
Payment does not include site furnishings paid for under Section 12 93
00, Site Furnishings and 12 93 01, Site Furnishings – 7th Street at
Turtle Place.
No separate payment will be made for gravel backfill for foundations.
Gravel backfill shall be considered incidental to the Contract prices
paid for the items of work in this Section.
No separate payment will be made for finish grading, backfilling and
compacting within the limits for station work. This work shall be
227
11.
considered incidental to the Contract prices paid for the items of work
in this Section.
Payment will be made under:
a.
13 1300.01 7th Street at Turtle Place Station, Complete LS
b.
13 1300.02 Washington and 12th Street Station, Complete LS
c.
13 1300.03 Broadway and 13th Street Station, Complete LS
d.
13 1300.04 Broadway and 15th Street Station, Complete LS
e.
13 1300.05 McLoughlin and Washington Street Station,
Complete LS
f.
13 1300.06 Marshall/Luepke Community Center Station Eastbound, Complete LS
g.
13 1300.07 Marshall/Luepke Community Center Station Westbound, Complete LS
h.
13 1300.08 Central Campus Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
i.
13 1300.09 Central Campus Station - Westbound, Complete LS
j.
13 1300.10 Gaiser Hall Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
k.
13 1300.11 Gaiser Hall Station - Westbound, Complete LS
l.
13 1300.12 Fourth Plain and Fort Vancouver Way Station Eastbound, Complete LS
m.
13 1300.13 Fort Vancouver Way and Fourth Plain Station Westbound, Complete LS
n.
13 1300.14 Grand Boulevard Station – Eastbound, Complete LS
o.
13 1300.15 Grand Boulevard Station – Westbound, Complete LS
p.
13 1300.16 Todd Road Station – Eastbound, Complete LS
q.
13 1300.17 Todd Road Station – Westbound, Complete LS
r.
13 1300.18 General Anderson Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
s.
13 1300.19 General Anderson Station - Westbound, Complete
LS
t.
13 1300.20 Stapleton Road Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
u.
13 1300.21 Stapleton Road Station - Westbound, Complete LS
v.
13 1300.22 57th Avenue Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
w.
13 1300.23 57th Avenue Station - Westbound, Complete LS
x.
13 1300.24 65th Avenue Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
y.
13 1300.25 65th Avenue Station - Westbound, Complete LS
z.
13 1300.26 Andresen Road Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
aa.
13 1300.27 Andresen Road Station - Westbound, Complete LS
bb.
13 1300.28 78th Avenue Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
cc.
13 1300.29 78th Avenue Station - Westbound, Complete LS
dd.
13 1300.30 86th Avenue Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
ee.
13 1300.31 86th Avenue Station - Westbound, Complete LS
ff.
13 1300.32 Thurston Way Station - Eastbound, Complete LS
gg.
13 1300.33 Thurston Way Station - Westbound, Complete LS
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
As indicated in the Related Sections listed in this Section, paragraph 1.01.B.
228
1.3
1.4
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01
33 00 Submittals, except as modified herein.
B.
As indicated in the Related Sections listed in this Section, paragraph 1.01.B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Quality control will be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 45
10 Quality Control Requirements, except as modified herein.
B.
As indicated in the Related Sections listed in this Section, paragraph 1.01.B.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
As indicated in the Related Sections listed in this Section, paragraph 1.01.B.
As indicated in the Contract Drawings and/or Related Sections listed in this
Section, paragraph 1.01.B.
OTHER PART 1, GENERAL SECTIONS
A.
As indicated in the Contract Drawings and/or Related Sections listed in this
Section paragraph 1.01.B.
1.8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1.9
MATERIALS
A.
1.10
As indicated in the Contract Drawings and/or Related Sections listed in this
Section, paragraph 1.01.B.
FABRICATION
A.
As indicated in the Contract Drawings and/or Related Sections listed in this
Section, paragraph 1.01.B.
1.11
PART 3 EXECUTION
1.12
PREPARATION
A.
As indicated in the Contract Drawings and/or Related Sections listed in this
Section, paragraph 1.01.B
229
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.3
As indicated in the Related Sections listed in this Section, paragraph 1.01.B
PROTECTION
A.
3.5
As indicated in the Related Sections listed in this Section, paragraph 1.01.B.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
3.4
As indicated in the Contract Drawings and/or Related Sections listed in this
Section, paragraph 1.01.B.
As indicated in the Related Sections listed in this Section, paragraph 1.01.B.
OTHER PART 3, EXECUTION SECTIONS
A.
As indicated in the Contract Drawings and/or Related Sections listed in this
Section, paragraph 1.01.B.
END OF SECTION
230
SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
The provisions of This Section, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to
all sections in Division 26.
C.
All Sections of Division 26, ELECTRICAL, are interrelated. When interpreting
any direction, material, and method specified in any section of Division 26,
consider it within the entirety of Work in Division 26.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes Design-Build work.
1.
2.
B.
The Division 26 Specifications and the accompanying Drawings are
complementary, and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called
for by both.
1.
2.
C.
1.3
The intent of Division 26 Specifications and Drawings is to provide a
complete and workable facility, with complete systems as required by
applicable codes, as indicated, and as specified.
Include all work specified in Division 26 and indicated on Drawings,
including appurtenances, connections, fasteners, and accessories
required to make a complete working system, whether indicated or
not indicated.
Items shown on the Drawings are not necessarily included in the
Specifications and vice versa.
In case of conflict, Specifications supersede Drawings.
Imperative language used in Division 26 Sections addresses the Contractor, as
specified in Division 1 Section, “Summary of Work”.
REFERENCES
A.
The latest adopted revisions of the publications listed below apply to these
Specifications as referenced:
231
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.4
International Building Code (IBC).
National Electrical Code (NEC).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA).
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Washington Administrative Code (WAC)
The publications are referred to in the text by acronym or initials in
parentheses above.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Ground Systems:
1.
2.
B.
System Identification:
1.
2.
C.
Provide complete ground systems indicated.
Include conduit system, transformer housings, switchboard frame, and
neutral bus, motors, and miscellaneous grounds required by Contract
Documents and by applicable codes.
Clearly identify all elements of the Project electrical system to indicate
the loads served, or the function of each item of equipment, connected
under this work.
Comply with requirements of Division 26 Section, “Identification for
Electrical Systems” and with applicable codes.
Drawings:
1.
The Drawings are diagrammatic: they do not show every offset, bend,
tee, or elbow which may be required to install work in the space
provided and avoid conflicts with other construction.
a.
Prior to installing work, take field dimensions, and note
conditions available for, installation.
b.
Follow the Drawings as closely as practical to do so, and install
additional bends, offsets, and elbows where required by
installation conditions.
1)
Additional offsets, bends, and other connectors are
subject to approval by Project Engineer.
2)
Install additional offsets, bends, and other connectors
without additional cost to Owner.
c.
The right to make any reasonable changes in outlet location
prior to roughing in is reserved to the Owner’s Representative.
232
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Luminaire Designations:
a.
Lower case letters adjacent to devices or luminaires indicate
switching arrangement or circuit grouping.
b.
Numbers adjacent to devices indicate circuit connection.
Circuits and Switching:
a.
Do not change branch circuiting and switching indicated; nor
combine homeruns, without Engineer’s prior approval.
b.
Do not combine or change feeder runs.
Circuit Conductors:
a.
Cross or hash marks on conduit runs indicate quantity of No. 12
copper branch circuit conductors, unless otherwise noted.
b.
Where such marks do not appear, provide quantity of circuit
conductors to the outlets shown to perform the control or circuiting
indicated.
c.
Include ground, travelers and switchlegs required by the circuiting
arrangement indicated.
d.
Provide a dedicated neutral conductor with each circuit, do not use
a shared neutral conductor between phases unless specifically
requested or directed.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with Division 1 Section, “Submittals”.
B.
Shop Drawings and Equipment Data:
1.
2.
C.
Installation Drawings:
1.
2.
D.
Combine electrical shop drawings and equipment data in Submittal
binders.
Include in Submittal binders:
a.
A complete index of materials and equipment required by
Specifications to be documented by submittals.
b.
Manufacturer’s detailed specifications and data sheets to fully
describe equipment furnished.
c.
All deviations from the Drawings and Specifications, noted on
the submittals. Failure to comply will automatically void any
implied approval for use of the equipment on this project.
Submit prior to starting installation.
Show all outlets, devices, terminal cabinets, conduits, wiring, and
connections required for the complete system described.
Record Drawings:
1.
Keep record drawings up to date as the work progresses.
233
2.
3.
4.
E.
Show all changes, deviations, addendum items, change orders,
corrections, and other variations from the Contract Drawings.
Keep record drawings at the jobsite and available for the Architect’s
review.
At the completion of the work, incorporate all deviations from the
installation drawings to indicate “as-built” conditions.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
As specified in Division 1 Section, “Closeout Procedures”.
Provide a separate manual or chapter for each system as follows:
a.
Low voltage distribution system.
b.
Emergency power system.
c.
Standby power system.
d.
Fire alarm system.
e.
Lighting system.
f.
Lighting control system.
Description of system.
Operating Sequence and Procedures:
a.
Step-by-step procedure for system start-up, including a prestart checklist.
1)
Refer to controls and indicators by nomenclature
consistent with that used on panels and in control
diagrams.
b.
Detailed instruction in proper sequence, for each mode of
operation (i.e., day-night, staging of equipment).
c.
Emergency Operation:
1)
If some functions of the equipment can be operated
while other functions are disabled, give instructions for
operations under those conditions.
2)
Include here only those alternate methods of operations
(from normal) which the operator can follow when
there is a partial failure or malfunctioning of
components or other unusual condition.
d.
Shutdown Procedure:
1)
Include instructions for stopping and securing the
equipment after operation.
2)
If a particular sequence is required, give step-by-step
instructions in that order.
Preventive Maintenance:
a.
Schedule for preventive maintenance.
1)
State the recommended frequency of performance of
each preventive maintenance task such as cleaning,
inspection, and scheduled overhauls.
b.
Cleaning: Provide instructions and schedules for all routine
cleaning and inspection with recommended lubricants.
234
c.
6.
7.
F.
Submittals Procedures:
1.
2.
1.6
Inspection: If periodic inspection of equipment is required for
operation, cleaning, or other reasons, indicate the items to be
inspected and give the inspection criteria.
d.
Provide instructions for lubrication and adjustments required
for preventive maintenance routines. Identify test points and
given values for each.
Manufacturers’ Brochures:
a.
Include manufacturers’ descriptive literature covering devices
and equipment used in the system, together with illustrations,
exploded views, and renewal parts lists.
b.
Edit manufacturers’ standard brochures so that the information
applying to the actual installed equipment is clearly defined.
Results of performance testing, as specified in Part 3 of This Section.
Review and recommendations by the Architect or Engineer are not to
be construed as change authorizations.
If discrepancies are discovered between the materials or equipment
submitted, and the Contract Documents, either prior to or after the
data is processed, the Contract Documents govern.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
All products and equipments shall not contain pentabrominated,
octabrominated, and decabrominated diphenyl ethers. Where
products or equipments within this specification contain these
banned substances, provide complying products and equipments from
approved manufacturers with equal performance characteristics.
Provide work and materials conforming to:
a.
Local and State codes
b.
Federal and State laws and regulations.
c.
Other applicable laws and regulations.
Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspection certificates
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Pay any other fees required by governing authorities for work of this
Division.
Install only electrical products listed by a recognized testing laboratory, or
approved in writing by the local inspection authority as required by
governing codes and ordinances.
235
1.7
SITE VISITATION
A.
1.8
The Contractor may visit the site prior to bidding and become familiar with
existing conditions and all other factors which may affect the execution of the
work. Coordination of installation of equipment with prior bid packages
previously issued shall be completed. Include all related costs in the initial
bid proposal. A pre-bid meeting and an opportunity for site visitation will be
provided.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Work of This Division with all other trades to ensure proper
installation of electrical equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Verify the physical dimension of each item of electrical equipment to fit the
available space. Contractor’s responsibility includes:
1.
2.
C.
Coordination of the equipment to fit into the available space.
Access routes through the construction.
Layout Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Review Drawings of other trades or crafts to avoid conflicts with
cabinets, counters, equipment, structural members, and other possible
impediments to electrical work.
Report potential conflicts to Architect prior to rough-in.
Proceed with rough-in following Architect’s directives to resolve
conflicts.
In general, the Architectural Drawings govern.
Equipment arrangement shown on Drawings is diagrammatic to
indicate general equipment sizing and spatial relationship. Contractor
shall include, as part of distribution equipment submittal, a scaled
floor plan which includes all equipment shown with their submitted
sizes. Include all feeder conduit routing, both above-ground and
underground, including termination points at equipment. Submit for
Engineer’s review prior to commencing work.
Provide additional wiring details at switchboards, motor control
centers, and other areas where work is of sufficient complexity to
warrant additional detailing for coordination.
Submit layout drawings for approval prior to commencing field
installation.
Where electrical connections are required for equipment provided as Work of
other Divisions, coordinate rough-in and wiring requirements for that
equipment with its supplier and installer prior to commencing work. Notify
236
Architect and Engineer of any discrepancies between the actual rough-in and
wiring requirements, and those identified on Drawings for resolution prior to
installation.
E.
Arrange raceways, wiring, and equipment to permit ready access to switches,
motors, and control components.
1.
F.
Coordinate electrical, telephone, and other utility services with the
appropriate serving utility.
1.
G.
No additional compensation will be allowed the Contractor for
connection fees or additional work or equipment required by the
serving utility, but not covered in the Drawings or Specifications.
Coordinate underground work with other contractors working on the site.
1.
2.
1.9
Doors and access panels shall be kept clear.
Coordinate particularly with contractors installing storm sewer,
sanitary sewer, water, and irrigation lines to avoid conflicts.
Common trenches may be used with other trades, providing
clearances required by codes and ordinances are maintained.
CHANGE ORDERS
A.
All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied with
a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials. At the Architect’s
request, Contractor’s estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals
shall be made available to the Architect. Labor shall be separated and
allocated for each item of work.
1.10 WARRANTY
A.
Provide a written warranty covering the work of this Division as required by
the General Conditions.
1.
B.
Incandescent lamps are excluded from this warranty.
Apparatus:
1.
2.
3.
Free of defects of material and workmanship and in accord with the
Contract Documents.
Built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for
which it was designed.
Operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration.
237
C.
Include in Contractor’s warranty for Work of Division 26 system damage
caused by failures of any system component.
1.11 MEASUREMENT
A.
No separate measurement will be made for Work described in Division 26, 27,
28 Sections, except where indicated otherwise.
1.12 PAYMENT
A.
No separate payment shall be made for Work in these Division 26, 27, 28
Sections, except where indicated otherwise. The cost of meeting these
requirements shall be incidental to the work described in Section 13 13 00
Platforms and Stations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Where specified materials or methods conflict with applicable codes, the more
stringent requirement applies.
B.
Provide apparatus built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the
efficiency for which it was designed.
C.
Ensure that entire electrical system operates at full capacity without
objectionable noise or vibration.
D.
Materials and Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
Use materials and equipment that are:
a.
New.
b.
Of quality meeting or exceeding specified standards.
c.
Free of faults and defects.
d.
Conforming to Contract Documents.
e.
Of size, make, type, and quality specified.
f.
Suitable for the installation indicated.
g.
Manufactured in accordance with NEMA, ANSI, U.L. or other
applicable standards.
h.
Otherwise as specified in Division 1 Section, “Product
Requirements”.
Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable, even
though specified by name.
Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished,
use products of the same manufacturer.
a.
Component parts of the entire system need not be products of
same manufacturer.
238
4.
Basis of Design:
a.
Equipment scheduled or specified by performance or model
number shall be considered the Basis of Design.
b.
If other equipment is provided in lieu of the Basis of Design
equipment, assume responsibility for all changes and costs
which may be necessary to accommodate this equipment,
including, but not limited to:
1)
Different sizes and locations for connections.
2)
Different dimensions.
3)
Different access requirements.
4)
Any other differences.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Provide a complete properly operating system for each item of
equipment specified.
Install materials in a neat and professional manner.
Comply with equipment manufacturer’s written instructions, the best
industry practices, and the Contract Documents.
Comply with latest published NECA Standard of Installation, and
provide competent supervision.
Clarification:
1.
2.
3.
Where there is a conflict among manufacturer’s instruction, best
practice, and the Documents, request clarification from the Architect
prior to rough-in.
Architect’s decision will be final.
Work installed without clarification shall be removed and corrected by
the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
C.
Existing concrete, block or brick walls are considered not accessible and may
require use of Surface Mounted Raceway (SMR) if existing concealed raceway
and device boxes are not available for reuse or do not meet the intent of the
design (i.e. proximity to egress path, point of use, etc.). Coordinate route and
installation where SMR is required with the Architect/Engineer prior to
rough-in. The contractor will be responsible for reinstalling SMR routed
without such prior approval to the Architects satisfaction.
D.
Existing stud walls (wood or metal) with or without blocking with plaster,
plasterboard or paneling finish are considered accessible with accessible
ceiling, attic, tunnel, or crawl space above, below, or adjacent. Remove, patch,
239
and repair finished surface as required to conceal rough-in for new device
locations. If it is determined that a specific instance will not permit
concealment of rough-in due to obstructions such as beams, headers, and
other structural elements prior approval before rough-in from the Architect
is required.
3.2
INSTALLATION IN RATED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Install intumescent material around ducts, conduits, and other electrical
elements penetrating rated construction.
B.
Comply with firestop materials manufacturer’s written instructions to
prevent spread of smoke or fire through sleeves or block-outs penetrating
rated fire barriers.
Provide firestop materials as follows:
C.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Capable of passing a 3-hour test per ASTM E-814 (UL 1479).
Consisting of material capable of expanding nominally 8 times when
exposed to temperatures of 250-350°F.
An alternate method utilizing intumescent materials in caulk or putty
may be used.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A.
Perform all necessary excavation and backfill for the installation of electrical
work in compliance with Division 31.
B.
For direct burial cable or non-metallic conduit, a minimum 3-inch cover of
sand or clean earth fill shall be placed all around the cable or conduit on a
leveled trench bottom. Lay all steel conduit on a smooth level trench bottom,
so that contact is made for its entire length. Water shall be removed from
trench while electrical conduit is being laid.
C.
Place backfill in layers not exceeding 8-inches deep and compact to 95 percent
of maximum density at optimum moisture to preclude settlement.
1.
2.
Interior: Bank sand or pea gravel.
Exterior: Excavated material with final 8-inches clean soil.
D.
Following backfilling, grade all trenches to the level of surrounding soil. All
excess soil shall be disposed of at the site as directed.
E.
Provide 6-inches wide vinyl tape marked "ELECTRICAL" in backfill, 12-inches
below finished grade, above all high voltage cable or conduit runs.
240
F.
3.4
Coordinate patching of all asphalt or concrete surfaces disturbed by this work
with General Contractor.
NOISE CONTROL
A.
Minimize transmission of noise between occupied spaces.
B.
Outlet Boxes:
1.
2.
C.
Conduit:
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.5
Route conduit along corridors or other “noncritical” space to minimize
penetrations through sound rated walls, or through non-sound-rated
partitions between occupied spaces.
Grout solid and airtight all penetrations through sound rated
partitions.
Use flexible connections or attachments between independent wall
structures.
a.
Do not rigidly connect (i.e., bridge) independent wall
structures.
Do not install contactors, transformers, starters, and similar noise-producing
devices on walls that are common to occupied spaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
E.
Do not install outlet boxes on opposite sides of partitions back to back.
Do not use straight through outlet boxes, except where indicated.
Where such devices are indicated to be mounted on walls common to
occupied spaces, use shock mounts, or otherwise isolate them to
prevent the transmission of noise to the occupied spaces.
Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers, and like equipment which are
found to be noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project
will be deemed defective and shall be replaced.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
Provide complete electrical connections for all items of equipment
requiring such connections, including incidental wiring, materials,
devices, and labor necessary for a finished working installation.
Verify the location and method for connecting to each item of
equipment prior to roughing- in.
Check the amperage, maximum overcurrent protection, voltage, phase
241
and similar attributes of each item of equipment before rough-in and
connection.
B.
Motor Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.6
Make motor connections for the proper direction of rotation.
Minimum Size Flex for Mechanical Equipment: 1/2-inch; except at
small control devices where 3/8-inch flex may be used.
Exposed Motor Wiring: Jacketed metallic flex with minimum 6-inches
slack loop.
Do not test run pump motors until liquid is in the system.
Control devices and wiring relating to the HVAC systems are furnished and
installed under Division 23; except for provisions or items indicated in
Division 26 Drawings and Specifications.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORT
A.
Minimum Support Capacity:
1.
B.
Provide fastening devices and supports for electrical equipment,
luminaires, panels, outlets, and cabinets capable of supporting not less
than four times the ultimate weight of the object or objects fastened to
or suspended from the building structure.
Luminaire Supports:
1.
2.
3.
Support luminaires from the building structure.
Use supports that provide proper alignment and leveling of luminaires.
Where permitted at exposed luminaires, install flexible connections neat and
straight, without excess slack, and attached to the support device.
C.
Support all junction boxes, pull boxes, or other conduit terminating housings
located above the suspended ceiling from the floor above, roof, or penthouse
floor structure to prevent sagging or swaying.
D.
Conduits:
1.
2.
Support suspended conduits 1-inch and larger from the overhead
structural system with metal ring or trapeze hangers and threaded
steel rod having a safety factor of four.
Conduits smaller than 1-inch installed in ceiling cavities, may be
supported on the mechanical system supports when available space
and support capacity has been coordinated with the subcontractor
installing the supports.
242
3.
E.
3.7
3.9
Powder actuated or similar shot-in fastening devices will not be permitted for
any electrical work except by special permission from the Architect.
ACCESS DOORS
A.
3.8
Anchor conduit installed in poured concrete to the steel reinforcing
with No. 14 black iron wire.
Location and size of access doors is Work of Division 26. Provide access doors
as code required for access to electrical equipment and boxes.
ALIGNMENT
A.
Install panels, cabinets, and equipment level and plumb, parallel with
structural building lines.
B.
Install distribution equipment and all electrical enclosures fitted neatly,
without gaps, openings, or distortion.
C.
Properly and neatly close all unused openings with approved devices.
D.
Fit surface panels, devices, and outlets with neat, appropriate, trims, plates, or
covers without overhanging edges, protruding corners, or raw edges.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
Restore to original condition new or existing work cut or damaged by
installation, testing, and removal of electrical Work.
Patch and finish spaces around conduits passing through floors and
walls to match the adjacent construction, including painting or other
finishes.
Clean up and remove all dirt and debris.
B.
Make additional required openings by drilling or cutting. Use of jackhammer
is prohibited.
C.
Fill holes that are cut oversize so that a tight fit is obtained around the objects
passing through.
1.
D.
In rated construction, provide a fire stopping material at the opening.
Obtain Architect’s permission and direction prior to piercing beams or
columns.
243
E.
Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, walks, and other permanent site
improvements, repair and refinish surfaces to condition existing prior to
commencement of work.
3.10 PROTECTION OF WORK
A.
Protect all electrical work and equipment installed under this Division against
damage by other trades, weather conditions, or any other causes.
1.
B.
Keep switchgear, transformers, panels, luminaires, and all electrical
equipment covered or closed to exclude dust, dirt, and splashes of plaster,
cement, paint, or other construction material spray.
1.
C.
Equipment not free of all such contamination is not acceptable.
Provide enclosures and trims in new condition, free of rust, scratches, and
other finish defects.
1.
3.11
Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition will be
rejected as defective.
If damaged, properly refinish in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE
A.
Maintain electrical service to all functioning portions of the building
throughout construction.
B.
Pre-arrange with Owner outages necessary for new construction.
1.
2.
C.
Maintain signal and communication systems and equipment in operation at all
times.
1.
D.
Apply for scheduled shut-downs minimum 4 weeks prior to time
needed and reconfirm a minimum of 72 hours prior to time needed.
Contractor is liable for any damages resulting from unscheduled
outages or for those not confined to the pre-arranged times. Damages
include costs incurred by the Owner and by the Owner’s tenants.
Outages of these systems shall be treated the same as electrical power
outages.
Maintain the existing telephone services within the facility during
construction.
244
3.12
DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Reuse of existing:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Existing concealed conduits in good condition may be reused for
installation of new wiring where available.
Existing undamaged, properly supported surface conduits may be
reused where surface conduits are called for, if the installation meets
all workmanship requirements of the Specifications.
Where new wiring is added or existing wiring disturbed in existing
branch circuit raceways, all existing wires shall be replaced with new.
Salvage and Disposal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.13
Remove or relocate all electrical wiring, equipment, luminaires, etc., as
may be encountered in removed or remodeled areas in the existing
construction affected by this work.
Disconnect electrical service to hard wired equipment scheduled for
removal under other Divisions of Work.
Wiring which serves usable existing outlets shall be restored and
routed clear of the construction or demolition.
Safely cut off and terminate all wiring to be abandoned and remove to
leave site clean.
Removed materials, not containing hazardous waste, not scheduled for
reuse shall become the property of the Contractor for removal from
the site, except for those items specifically indicated on the Demolition
Drawings for salvage or reuse.
Materials containing, or possibly containing, hazardous waste shall be
identified for removal and disposal by the Owner’s Hazardous Waste
Contractor.
Neatly store salvaged items at one location at the site where directed
by the Owner’s Representative.
Salvage properly operating circuit breakers from panels scheduled for
removal and use to replace faulty or inadequate breakers in existing
panels scheduled to remain.
COMPLETION AND TESTING
A.
General:
1. Comply with Division 1 Section, “Quality Control Requirements”.
245
B.
Upon completion, test systems to show that installed equipment operates as
designed and specified, free of faults and unintentional grounds.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Schedule system tests so that several occur on the same day.
Coordinate testing schedule with construction phasing.
Conduct tests in the presence of the Architect or its representative.
Notify Architect of tests 48 hours in advance.
C.
Engage a journeyman electrician with required tools to conduct equipment
tests. Arrange to have the equipment factory representative present for those
tests where the manufacturer’s warranty could be impacted by the absence
of a factory representative.
D.
Perform tests per the requirements of each of the following systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Low voltage distribution system.
Emergency power system.
Standby power system.
Fire alarm system.
Lighting system.
Lighting control system.
Provide a written record of performance tests and submit with operation and
maintenance data.
END OF SECTION
246
SECTION 26 0519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
The provisions of Division 26 Section, Common Work Results for Electrical
apply to this section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Copper conductors. Indicated sizes shall be considered minimum for
ampacities and voltage drop requirements.
Conductors for special systems shall be as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer except as noted.
Deliver conductors to the job site in cartons, protective covers, or on
reels.
Section 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 0533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems.
REFERENCED STANDARDS
A.
ASTM: American Society For Testing and Materials:
1.
2.
3.
B.
ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association:
1.
C.
ASTM B 3 – Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
ASTM B 8 – Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
Medium-Hard, or Soft.
ASTM B 33 – Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical
Purposes.
S-95-658 – Non-shielded 0-2 kV Cables
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers:
247
1.
D.
UL: Underwriters Laboratories:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
IEEE 383 – Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables, Field Splices, and
Connections.
UL 44 – Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables.
UL 83 – Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.
UL 1277 – Type TC Power and Control Tray Cable.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit product data for the following materials:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Submittals of the following materials shall consist only of a listing of the
manufacturer’s name and the applicable catalog numbers of the items to be
utilized.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Single conductor 600-volt power and control conductors.
Fire pump cable.
MC cable.
Connectors.
Branch circuit conductor splices.
Splices with compression fitting and heat-shrinkable insulator.
Submit cable test data per testing requirements of Part 3.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS – 600V
D.
Type:
1.
2.
E.
Copper: No. 12 AWG minimum size unless noted otherwise. No. 12
and No. 10, solid or stranded, No. 8 or larger, Class B concentric or
compressed stranded.
Aluminum is not permitted and shall not be utilized.
Insulation:
3.
4.
THHN/THWN-2 for conductors 6 AWG and smaller.
XHHW-2 for conductors 4 AWG and larger.
F.
Thru wiring in fluorescent luminaires shall be rated for 90°C minimum.
G.
Manufacturers: General, Essex, Southwire, or equivalent.
248
2.2
2.3
MC CABLE
A.
Sheath: Steel, of the interlocking metal type, continuous and close fitting. The
sheath shall not be considered a current carrying or grounding conductor.
B.
Conductors: Solid copper, of the same ampacity as the conduit/wire system
indicated for the specific location. Provide separate green insulated
grounding conductors in circuits where an isolated ground is called for.
CONNECTORS – 600V AND BELOW
A.
Branch Circuit Conductor Splices:
1.
Live spring type, Scotchlok, Ideal Wire Nut, Buchanan B-Cap, or 3M
Series 560 self- stripping type.
B.
Cable Splices: Compression tool applied sleeves, Kearney, Burndy, or
equivalent with 600V heat shrink insulation. Except where specifically
indicated on the plans, all proposed splice locations shall be submitted for
review by the Engineer.
C.
Terminator Lugs for Stranded Wire:
1.
2.
3.
10 AWG Wire and Smaller: Spade flared, tool applied.
8 AWG Wire and Larger: Compression tool applied, Burndy, Anderson,
or equivalent.
Setscrew type terminator lugs furnished as an integral part of
switches and circuit breakers will be acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
CONDUCTORS
A.
Pulling compounds may be used for pulling all conductors. Clean residue
from the conductors and raceway entrances after the pull is made.
B.
Pulleys or blocks shall be used for alignment of the conductors when pulling.
Pulling shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications regarding
pulling tensions, bending radii of the cable, and compounds.
C.
Make up and insulate wiring promptly after installation of conductors. Wire
shall not be pulled in until all bushings are installed and raceways
terminations are completed. Wire shall not be pulled into conduit embedded
in concrete until after the concrete is poured and forms are stripped.
249
D.
3.2
3.3
3.4
Provide a dedicated neutral conductor with each branch circuit, do not use a
shared neutral conductor between phases unless specifically requested or
directed.
MC CABLE
A.
MC cable is allowed only where concealed within wall or ceiling cavities.
B.
MC cable shall not be used for branch circuit homeruns to branch
panelboards. EMT or RMC conduit shall be utilized for all branch circuit
homeruns to branch panelboards.
CONNECTORS
A.
Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a tool applied
spade flared lug when terminating at a screw connection.
B.
All screw and bolt type connectors shall be made up tight and retightened
after an eight hour period.
C.
All tool applied compression connectors shall be applied per manufacturer’s
recommendations and physically checked for tightness.
COLOR CODING
A.
Secondary service, feeders, and branch circuit conductors shall be color
coded. Phase color code to be consistent at all feeder terminations, A-B-C leftto-right, A-B-C top-to-bottom, or A-B- C front-to-back. Color code shall be as
follows:
120/240 volt
480 volt
208Y/120 volt
Phase
480Y/277 volt
Black
A
Brown
Red
B
Orange
Blue
C
Yellow
White
Neutral
Gray*
Green
Ground**
Green
* or white with colored (other than green) tracer
**Ground for isolated ground receptacles shall be green with yellow tracer.
B.
Use solid color compound or solid color coating for No. 12 and No. 10 branch
circuit conductors and neutral sizes.
C.
Phase conductors No. 8 and larger color code using one of the following:
250
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Solid color compound or solid color coating.
Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified above.
Colored as specified using 3/4-inch wide tape. Apply tape in half
overlapping turns for a minimum of three inches for terminal points
and in junction boxes, pull boxes, troughs, manholes, and handholes.
Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to
cable stating size and insulation type.
D.
Switchlegs, travelers, etc., to be consistent with the phases to which
connected or a color distinctive from that listed.
E.
Color-coding of the flexible wiring system conductors and connectors shall be
the manufacturer’s standard.
F.
For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color-coding shall
conform to the existing wiring system.
FIELD TESTING
A.
All 600-volt rated conductors shall be tested by the Contractor for continuity.
Conductors 100A and over in size shall be meggered after installation and
prior to termination. Provide the megger, rated 1,000 volts d.c., and record
and maintain the results, in tabular form, clearly identifying each conductor
being tested.
1.
2.
Replace cables when test value is less than 15 megohms.
Cable test submittal shall include results, equipment used, and date.
END OF SECTION
251
SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
The provisions of Division 26 Section, Common Work Results for Electrical,
apply to this section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Provide complete ground systems as indicated. Include conduit
system, transformer housings, switchboard frame and neutral bus,
motors, and miscellaneous grounds required.
Provide 600 volt insulated main bonding jumper for utility company
connection between ground bus in switchgear lineup and ground
termination point or service ground in transformer vault as directed
by the utility.
Provide an insulated ground conductor in every conduit or raceway
containing power conductors.
Continue existing system as specified herein and shown on the
Drawings.
Related Sections include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Section 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 24 16 Lighting Control System Panelboards and
Panelboards.
Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices.
Section 26 29 00 Motor Controllers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GROUND CONDUCTORS
A.
Green insulated copper for use in conduits, raceways, and enclosures.
B.
Bare copper for ground grids and grounding electrode systems.
252
2.2
2.3
2.4
CONNECTORS
A.
Cast, set screw or bolted type.
B.
Form poured, exothermic welds.
C.
Grounding lugs where provided as standard manufacturer’s items on
equipment.
GROUND PADS
A.
Provide a ground pad at each location shown on the Drawings. Pad shall be
1000A rated copper bus nominally 1/4"x4"x12" long or as shown on the
plans.
B.
Provide 1/4-inch and 1/2-inch bolt holes per ANSI TIA/EIA 607 standards for
telecom ground bars.
C.
Mount ground pads with stand-off devices to provide a minimum of 1-1/2
inches free space behind pad for access to lug nuts and washers.
GROUND RODS
A.
Copperclad steel, 5/8"x10'-0" long ground rods. Where ground wells are
indicated, provide a 12-inch deep, 8-inch diameter precast concrete well with
flush lid for accessibility and inspection of welded connections, RCP Vaults
No. 12R12A with 12R12-t cover.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Sized in accordance with Article 250, Tables 250.66
and 250.122 of the National Electrical Code.
B.
Grounding Conductor Connectors: Made up tight and located for future
servicing and to insure low impedance.
C.
Ground the electrical system, the cold-water service, structural steel, and
transformers to the building ground grid.
D.
All Plug-in Receptacles: Bonded to the boxes, raceways, and grounding
conductor.
253
3.2
UFER GROUND
A.
3.3
3.4
EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide separate green insulated equipment ground conductor in all nonmetallic and flexible electrical raceways. Effectively ground all luminaires,
panels, controls, motors, disconnect switches, exterior lighting standards, and
noncurrent carrying metallic enclosures. Use bonding jumpers, grounding
bushings, lugs, buses, etc., for this purpose.
B.
Provide grounding bushings on all feeder conduit entrances to panels and
equipment enclosures and bond bushings to enclosures with minimum ten
(10) AWG conductor. Connect the equipment ground to the building system
ground. Use the same size equipment ground conductors as phase
conductors, up through ten (10) AWG.
GROUND BONDING CONNECTIONS
A.
3.5
Provide a concrete encased building grounding electrode where shown on the
Drawings. Grounding electrode shall consist of a minimum of 20 feet of No.
4/0 bare copper conductor cast into the bottom six (6) inches of an exterior
concrete foundation or footing.
Provide a ground bonding connections to all metal surfaces, fencing, shelters,
handrails, bollards and other metal site furnishings to the grounding system.
GROUND PADS
A.
Drill ground pads as necessary for attachment of all grounding conductors as
required.
B.
Utilize 2-hole lugs for terminating 4/0 AWG and larger ground conductors.
C.
Bond ground pads to adjacent structural steel with #4/0 bare copper cable,
using form poured exothermic welds.
END OF SECTION
254
SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
The provisions of Division 26 Section, Common Work Results for Electrical,
apply to this section.
SUMMARY
A.
This section describes supporting devices for electrical equipment, associated
conduit, and cable.
B.
Related Sections include:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Section 26 0533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 2416 Lighting Control System Panelboards and
Panelboards.
Section 26 5000 Lighting.
REFERENCED STANDARDS
A.
International Building Code (IBC).
B.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association
(SMACNA).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS
A.
Hangers: Kindorf B-905-2A channel, H-119-D washer, C105 strap, minimum
1/2-inch rod with ceiling flange, or equal.
B.
Pipe Straps: Two-hole galvanized or malleable iron.
C.
Support of Open Cabling: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling,
designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that
could damage cable.
255
1.
2.
3.
Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to
brackets.
Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.
Straps and other devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide all electrical equipment supports.
B.
Install vertical support members for equipment, straight and parallel to
building walls.
C.
Provide independent supports to structural member for electrical fixtures,
materials, or equipment installed in or on ceiling, walls, or in void spaces
and/or over furred or suspended ceilings.
D.
Do not use other trades’ fastening devices to support electrical equipment
materials or fixtures.
E.
Do not use supports and/or fastening devices to support other than one
particular item.
F.
Support conduits within 18 inches of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets, and
deflections.
G.
Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for the vertical and lateral
restraint of conduit, cable trays, bus ducts, and electrical equipment as
required by IBC Chapter 16 and the most recent version of the SMACNA
Seismic Restraint Manual for Seismic Hazard Level (SHL).
H.
Shop drawings of bracing systems shall be submitted to the Architect for
review and shall bear the seal of a professional engineer registered in the
State of Washington.
LUMINAIRES
A.
Light-Duty Ceiling Systems:
1.
2.
Attach No. 12 hanger wire from each corner of the luminaire to the
structure above.
Positively and securely attach luminaire within six (6) inches of each
corner to the suspended ceiling framing member by mechanical
means.
256
B.
Intermediate-Duty Ceiling Systems:
1.
Positively and securely attach luminaire within six (6) inches of each
corner to the suspended ceiling framing member by mechanical
means.
2.
Attach No. 12 hanger wire within three (3) inches of each corner of
each luminaire.
3.
Connect two (2) 12-gauge slack wires from the luminaire housing to
the structure above for luminaires weighing less than 56 pounds.
4.
Support luminaries weighing 56 pounds or more directly from the
structure above with approved hangers attached to each corner of the
luminaire.
C.
Heavy-Duty Ceiling Systems:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Positively and securely attach luminaire within six (6) inches of each
corner to the suspended ceiling framing member by mechanical
means.
Connect two 12-gauge slack wires from the luminaire housing to the
structure above for luminaires weighing less than 56 pounds.
Support luminaries weighing 56 pounds or more directly from the
structure above with approved hangers attached to each corner of the
luminaire.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
Pull and junction boxes installed within the cavity of a suspended ceiling that
is not a fire rated assembly may be attached to the suspended ceiling framing
members, provided the following criteria are met:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Installation complies with the ceiling system manufacturer’s
instructions.
Pull or junction box is not larger than 100 cubic inches.
The pull or junction box is supported to the main runner with two
fastening devices that are designed for framing member application
and positively attach or lock to the member.
The pull or junction box serves branch circuits and associated
equipment in the area.
The pull or junction box is within six (6) feet of the luminaires
supplied.
The framing members are not rotated more than 2° after installation.
Pull and junction boxes installed within the cavity of a suspended
ceiling may be attached to independent support wires, provided the
following criteria are met:
a.
Independent support wires are taut and connected at both
ends, one end to the ceiling framing member and the other to
the structure above.
b.
Pull or junction box is not larger than 100 cubic inches.
257
c.
d.
3.4
The pull or junction box is secured to the independent support
wires by two fastening devices that are designed for the
application.
Independent support wires in a fire-rated ceiling are
distinguishable by color, tagging or other effective means.
CABLES AND RACEWAY
A.
Cables and raceway installed within the cavity of a suspended ceiling may be
attached to independent support wires provided the following criteria are
met:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Independent support wires are taut and connected at both ends, one
end to the ceiling framing member and the other to the structure
above.
Raceways are not larger than one inch trade size and cables and
bundled cables are not larger than one inch diameter including
insulation.
Not more than three raceways or cables are supported by any
independent support wire and are supported within the top or
bottom 12 inches.
Cables for telecommunications, data processing, Class 2 powerlimited signaling systems, fiber optics, and other power limited
systems are securely fastened within 2 feet of each termination and at
intervals not to exceed 5 feet or per the manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
Raceways are secured at intervals required for the type of raceway
installed.
Cables and raceway are secured to independent support wires by
fastening devices and clips designed for the purpose.
Independent support wires are distinguishable by color, tagging, or
other effective means.
Cables and raceway installed within the cavity of a suspended ceiling may be
supported with trapezes constructed of steel rods and channels provided the
following criteria are met:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The size of the rods, channel, and fastening devices are suitable for the
anticipated weight.
The spacing of the trapezes meets that required for the type of
raceway installed.
Cables and raceway are secured to a trapeze by straps designed for
the purpose.
Cables and raceway do not support other raceway or cables.
An appropriately sized seismic bracing system is installed.
END OF SECTION
258
SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
The provisions of Division 26 Section, Common Work Results for Electrical,
apply to this section.
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Raceways and conduits of specified types for all electrical system wiring,
except where clearly indicated otherwise.
2. All fittings, boxes, hangers, and appurtenances required for the conduits and
raceways.
3. Size raceways and conduits as indicated. Where no size is indicated, conduit
may be the minimum code permitted size for the quantity of conductors
installed, based upon NEC tables for conductors with type THW insulation.
B. Related Sections include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Section 26 0519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
Section 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
METALLIC CONDUITS
A.
Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC): Smooth surfaced heavy wall mild steel tube of
uniform thickness and temper, reamed and threaded at each end and
protected inside and out with galvanizing, sherardizing, or equivalent
process. RMC shall comply with NEC Article 344.
B.
Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC): Smooth surface, intermediate wall mild
steel tube of uniform thickness and temper, reamed and threaded at each
end, and protected inside and out with galvanizing, sherardizing, or
equivalent process. IMC shall comply with NEC Article 342.
259
C.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Smooth surface, thin wall mild steel tube of
uniform thickness and temper, galvanized or sherardized on the outside, and
enameled on the interior. EMT shall comply with NEC Article 358.
D.
Flexible Conduits (Flex):
1.
2.
2.2
NON-METALLIC CONDUITS
A.
2.3
2.4
Flexible Metallic Conduit: Interlocking single strip steel construction,
galvanized inside and out after fabrication. Flex shall comply with
NEC Article 348.
Liquid Tight: Similar to flexible metallic conduit, except encased in a
liquid tight polyvinylchloride or equivalent outer jacket over the
flexible steel core, and shall comply with NEC Article 350.
Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Type II PVC Schedule 40, suitable for use with
90°C rated wire. Conduit shall conform to UL Standard 65l and carry
appropriate UL listing for above and below ground use.
WIREWAYS
A.
Troughs: Steel, painted, square in cross section, preformed knock-outs on
standard spacing, screw cover.
B.
Fittings: Tees, elbows, couplings as required for configuration shown on the
Drawings.
FITTINGS
A.
RMC and IMC:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Threaded Locknuts: Sealing type where used with NEMA 2, 3, 3R, 4
and 12 enclosures.
Threaded Bushings: 1-1/4-inch and larger, insulated, grounding type
as required under Section 26 05 26.
Threaded Couplings: Standard threaded of the same material and as
furnished with conduit supplied. Erickson type couplings may be used
where required to complete conduit runs larger than 1 inch.
EMT:
1.
2.
Connectors: Steel compression ring or steel set screw type for conduit
termination, with insulated throat, suitable for conditions used. Use
lay-in grounding type bushings where terminating grounding
conductors.
Couplings: Steel compression ring or steel set screw type, concrete
tight.
260
2.5
2.6
C.
Threadless: RMC and IMC couplings and box connectors may be steel
threadless, compression ring or set screw type for use with conduits 1 inch
and smaller where installed in poured concrete locations or where limited
working space makes threaded fittings impractical.
D.
Weatherproof Connectors: Threaded.
E.
Expansion Couplings: Equivalent to O.Z. type EX with jumper.
F.
Seal-Offs: With filler fiber, compound, and removable cover.
METALLIC BOXES
A.
Flush and Concealed Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel with screw ears
for device ring mounting, knock-out plugs, mounting holes, fixture studs if
required, RACO or equivalent.
B.
Surface Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel same as above for use on
ceilings; cast steel or aluminum with threaded hubs or bosses for use on
walls.
C.
Large Boxes: Boxes exceeding 4-11/16 inches square when required shall be
welded steel construction with screw cover and painted, steel gauge as
required by physical size, Hoffman, Circle AW or equivalent.
D.
Systems: Boxes for systems devices shall be as recommended by the systems
manufacturer, suitable for the equipment installed. Equip with grounding
lugs, brackets, device rings, etc., as required.
NON-METALLIC BOXES
A.
PVC, molded enclosures, threaded hubs.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Conceal all conduits in finished spaces. Concealed conduits shall run in a
direct line with long sweep bends and offsets. RMC and IMC embedded in
concrete below grade or in damp locations shall be made watertight by
painting the entire male thread with Rustoleum metal primer or equivalent
before assembly.
B.
Route exposed conduit parallel or at right angles to structural building lines
and neatly offset into boxes. Conduits attached directly to building surfaces
shall closely follow the surfaces. Conduit fittings shall be used to “saddle”
261
under beams. Drilling or notching of existing beams, trusses on structural
members shall be coordinated with Architect prior to commencing.
3.2
C.
RMC and IMC terminations at boxes, cabinets, and general wiring enclosures
shall be rigidly secured with double locknuts and bushings or approved
fittings. Conduit shall be screwed in and shall engage at least five (5) threads
in hub where conduit boxes with threaded hubs or bosses are used.
Insulating bushings shall be used for conduits 1-1/4-inches or larger.
D.
Keep conduit and raceways closed with suitable plugs or caps during
construction to prevent entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete, or foreign
objects. Raceways shall be clean and dry before installation of wire and at
the time of acceptance.
E.
Pack spaces around conduits with polyethylene backing rods and seal with
polyurethane caulking to prevent entrance of moisture where conduits are
installed in sleeves or block-outs penetrating moisture barriers.
CONDUIT
A.
RMC:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
IMC:
1.
2.
3.
C.
RMC may be used in all areas for all wiring systems.
RMC shall be installed for all exposed runs of medium voltage circuits
outside of the electrical rooms.
RMC shall be installed where subject to mechanical injury.
RMC shall be installed with threaded fittings made up tight.
IMC may be used for all medium voltage circuits where concealed or
where exposed in the electrical rooms.
IMC may also be used for all circuits rated 600V and less where not in
contact with earth or fill.
IMC shall be installed with threaded fittings made up tight.
EMT:
1.
2.
EMT may be used in all other dry protected locations for circuits rated
600V and less.
EMT, whether exposed or concealed, shall be securely supported and
fastened at intervals of nominally every 8 feet and within 24 inches of
each outlet, ell, fitting, panel, etc.
262
D.
Flex:
1.
2.
3.
E.
PVC:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
3.5
Type II Schedule 40 and 80 PVC may be used underground and in and
under interior slabs, poured concrete walls, and where scheduled or
noted on the Drawings.
Make connections with waterproof solvent cement.
Provide RMC at 60° and larger bends and where penetrating slabs.
RACEWAYS
A.
3.4
Flex shall be used for connections to vibration producing equipment
and where installation flexibility is required with a minimum 12
inches slack connection.
Limit flex length to 36 inches for exposed equipment connections and
72 inches in concealed ceiling and wall cavities.
PVC jacketed flex shall be used in wet locations, areas subject to
washdown, and exterior locations.
Surface metal wireways may be installed at locations to serve motor starters
or other control devices where required by a multitude of wiring
interconnections or physical layout.
FITTINGS
A.
Metallic raceways and conduits shall be assembled continuous and secured to
boxes, panels, etc., with appropriate fittings to maintain electrical continuity.
All conduit joints shall be cut square and reamed smooth with all fittings
drawn up tight.
B.
Crimp-on, tap-on, indenter type, malleable iron or cast set screw fittings shall
not be used.
BOXES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
Outlet boxes shall be of code required size to accommodate all wires,
fittings, and devices.
Provide multi-gang boxes as required to accept devices installed with
no more than one device per gang.
Equip all metallic boxes with grounding provisions.
263
B.
Size and Type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Pull Boxes
1.
2.
D.
Flush wall switch and receptacle outlets used with conduit systems
shall be 4 inches square, 1-1/2 inches or more deep, with one or twogang plaster ring, mounted vertically. Where three or more devices
are at one location, use one piece multiple gang tile box or gang box
with suitable device ring.
Wall bracket and ceiling surface mounted luminaire outlets shall be 4inch octagon 1-1/2 inches deep with 3/8-inch fixture stud where
required. Wall bracket outlets shall have single gang opening where
required to accommodate luminaire canopy. Provide larger boxes or
extension rings where quantity of wires installed requires more cubic
capacity.
Junction boxes installed in accessible ceiling or wall cavities or exposed
in utility areas shall be a minimum of 4 inches square, 1-1/2 inches
deep with appropriately marked blank cover.
Boxes for the special systems shall be suitable for the equipment
installed. Coordinate size and type with the system supplier.
Provide pull boxes where shown for installation of cable supports or
where required to limit the number of bends in any conduit to not
more than three 90° bends.
Use galvanized boxes of code-required size with removable covers
installed so that covers will be accessible after work is completed.
Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Boxes and outlets shall be mounted at nominal centerline heights
shown on the drawings.
Adjust heights in concrete masonry unit (CMU) walls to prevent
devices or finish plates from spanning masonry joints.
Recessed boxes shall be flush with finished surfaces or not more than
1/8-inch back and be level and plumb. Long screws with spacers or
shims for mounting devices will not be acceptable. No combustible
material shall be exposed to wiring at outlets.
Covers for flush mounted boxes in finished spaces shall extend a
minimum of 1/4-inch beyond the box edge to provide a finished
appearance. Finish edge of cover to match cover face.
Boxes installed attached to a stud in sheet rock walls shall be equipped
with opposite side box supports equivalent to Caddy #760. Install
drywall screw prior to finish taping. Methods used to attach boxes to
studs shall not cause projections on the face of the stud to prevent
full-length contact of sheet rock to the stud face.
264
3.6
PULL WIRES
A.
Install nylon pull lines in all empty conduits larger than 1 inch where routing
includes 25 feet or more in length or includes 180° or more in bends.
B.
Where conduits requiring pull lines are stubbed out and capped, coil a
minimum of 36 inches of pull line and tape at termination of conduit for easy
future access. Label pull lines as to conduit starting or terminations point
and intended future use.
END OF SECTION
265
SECTION 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
This section describes conduit, ducts, duct accessories, handholes, boxes and
manholes constructed and installed to form a complete underground
raceway system.
REFERENCED STANDARDS
A.
AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials.
B.
ACI: American Concrete Institute.
C.
ANSI: American National Standards Institute.
D.
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
E.
NEC: National Electrical Code.
F.
NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
G.
UL: Underwriters Laboratories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Submit descriptive details of the manufacturers’ proposed standard
product listings, including:
a.
Precast manholes and handholes.
b.
Precast manhole and handhole accessories, including covers
and frames.
c.
Precast concrete 28-day compressive strength data.
d.
Manhole and handhole cement certification.
e.
Duct bank cement certification.
f.
Duct spacers.
g.
Ducts and raceways.
h.
Conduit expansion/deflection fittings.
266
B.
Show drawings for manholes and handholes, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Design criteria signed by professional structural engineer licensed by
the State of Washington.
Reinforcing steel locations and concrete covers.
Layout of inserts, attachments, and openings.
Locations and types of joints.
Accessories, including covers, frames, and diamond plate doors where
applicable.
Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: show duct profiles and coordination with
other utilities and underground structures.
1.
2.
Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and
locations of expansion fittings.
Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional
engineer licensed by the State of Washington.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A.
Handholes and boxes shall be precast concrete, 4,000 psi strength at 28 days,
with reinforcing and galvanized checker plate traffic covers designed for
AASHTO loading of H-20. Wall thickness shall be 3 inches minimum.
B.
Precast units shall conform to ASTM C 478. Size, plan area and clear height
shall not be less than shown on the drawings and shall have concrete slab
bottoms with sumps.
C.
Pulling irons shall be 7/8-inch diameter hot-dip galvanized steel bar with
exposed triangular opening.
D.
Design:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Precast structures shall be designed in accordance with AASHTO
“Specification for Highway Bridges.” Concrete and reinforcing shall be
designed in accordance with ACI Code 318.
Tops and walls of structures shall be designed for AASHTO H-20
highway loading, with 30 percent loading added for impact.
Walls shall be designed to withstand all soil pressures, taking into
consideration the soil to be encountered and ground water level
present at the site.
Assume ground water level is at ground surface unless a lower water
table is indicated in the boring logs. Precast handhole pull boxes shall
be designed and constructed not to float.
267
2.2
E.
All structures shall be identified with manufacturer’s name embedded in, or
otherwise permanently attached to, an interior wall face.
F.
Covers for handholes and boxes shall be spring-assisted galvanized diamond
plate door with locking latch, and shall have 3-inch high markings in weld
bead, inscribed before galvanizing with the word, “ELECTRICAL,” Covers
shall also have identification such as “MH-PA-1.”
G.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Utility Vault Company, Hanson, Renton Concrete
Products, or equal.
DUCT LINES
A.
Size: Except where otherwise shown on the drawings, ducts and conduits
shall not be less than 4-inch trade size.
B.
Ducts (direct-buried):
1.
2.
C.
2.3
Factory-fabricated rigid PVC vertical and horizontal interlocking spacers,
sized for type and sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide
minimum of 3 inches separation between ducts while supporting ducts
during concreting or backfilling. Acceptable manufacturers: Carlon,
Orangeberg, or equal.
GROUND RODS
A.
2.5
Manufactured bends shall be not less than 36 inches in radius for conduits 4
inches in diameter or larger.
SPACERS
A.
2.4
Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Type II PVC Schedule 40, suitable for use
with 90°C rated wire. Conduit shall conform to UL Standard 651 and
carry appropriate UL listing for above- and below-ground use.
Rigid Metal Conduit: UL 6 galvanized rigid steel. Where metal conduit
is shown on the drawings or specified below, conduit shall have a
coating of 20 mil bonded PVC, or shall be coated with bituminous
asphaltic compound.
Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel, 3/4-inch diameter and 10-feet long.
GROUND WIRE
A.
Ground wire shall be stranded bare copper No. 6 AWG minimum.
268
2.6
CONDUIT EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS
A.
Conduit expansion/deflection fittings in embedded runs shall be rated for
indoor use, outdoor use, buried underground, or embedded in concrete in
non-hazardous areas.
B.
Fittings shall allow axial expansion or contraction up to 3/4 inch and angular
misalignment of the axes of the coupled runs in any direction to 30°. Inner
sleeves shall maintain constant inside diameter in any position and provide
smooth insulated wire way for protection of wire insulation.
C.
Fittings shall have a watertight flexible neoprene outer jacket and tinned
copper flexible braid grounding strap.
D.
Use with galvanized rigid steel conduit or PVC Schedule 40 conduit utilizing
rigid metal conduit nipples and rigid metal to PVC adapters.
E.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Crouse-Hinds, O-Z/Gendy, or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PRECAST MANHOLES AND HANDHOLE PULL BOXES
A.
Construction
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Units may be precast monolithically or may consist of assembled
sections.
Assembled sections shall have mating edges with tongue-and-groove
joints. Joints shall be designed to firmly interlock adjoining
components, and provide waterproof junctions. Joints shall be sealed
watertight using preformed plastic strips installed in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
Furnish lifting devices for proper handling of units.
Provide ground rod and sleeve in manhole floors.
Install sump with grate.
B.
Duct entries shall be a minimum of 14 inches above floor and below ceiling.
Cable supports, clamps, or racks shall be provided. Floor shall slope 2
percent in all directions to a sump. Sump shall be a minimum of 8 inches in
diameter.
C.
Install pulling irons or inserts for pulling eyes, inserts for cable racks, and
openings for conduit entry as required. Steel components other than
reinforced steel shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Manholes and
handhole pull boxes shall have concrete bottoms.
269
D.
3.2
Install drains in electrical manholes and handhole pull boxes with a minimum
4-inch pipe set in the bottom and terminated in a minimum of 1 cubic yard of
drain rock.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install on a level bed of well-tamped gravel or crushed stone, well-graded
from the 1-inch to 2-inch sieve.
1.
2.
3.
The top of frame and covers shall be flush with the finished surface of
pavements, and flush with finished grade in unpaved areas.
Set manholes and handholes plumb to limit the depth of standing
water to a maximum of 2 inches. Unless otherwise specified, manhole
covers shall be set at grade.
Construct a sufficient number of precast concrete and mortar courses
between top of manhole and manhole frame to reach the required
level. Grout the manhole frame to the chimney.
B.
Locate underground duct lines and manholes and handholes at the
approximate locations shown on the drawings with due consideration given
to the location of other utilities, grades, and paving.
C.
Provide windows for duct bank terminations and fill with concrete or nonshrink grout after duct placement.
D.
Provide pulling irons opposite each duct and conduit entrance. Pulling irons
shall be cast in the walls opposite all duct windows approximately 6 inches
above the top of the window.
E.
Ground Rods and Grounding:
1.
2.
F.
Rods shall protrude approximately 4 inches above the manhole floor.
In precast manholes, drive a ground rod into the earth through the
floor sleeve. After the manhole is set in place, fill the sleeve with
sealant to make a watertight seal.
Ground Wires:
1.
2.
3.
Install ground wires around the inside perimeter of the manhole and
anchor them to the walls.
Connect the wires to the ground rods by exothermic welding or
approved compression process to form solid metal joints.
Bond the ground wires to the exposed non-current-carrying metal
parts of racks, etc., in the manholes. Also bond the wires to duct bank
bare equipment grounding conductors.
270
3.3
3.4
TRENCHING
A.
Excavate trenches in accordance with Section 31 23 33, Trenching and
Backfilling.
B.
Work with extreme care near existing utilities to avoid damaging them. Cut
the trenches neatly and uniformly.
DUCT LINE INSTALLATIONS
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Duct line shall be in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the
drawings, and as specified.
Slope duct to drain toward manholes and away from building and
equipment entrances. Pitch shall be not less than four (4) inches in
100 feet. Curved sections in duct lines shall consist of long sweep
bends with a minimum radius of five (5) feet in the horizontal and
vertical directions unless noted otherwise. The use of manufactured
bends is limited to building entrances and stub-ups to equipment.
Underground conduit stub-ups to equipment inside buildings shall be
galvanized rigid steel and shall extend at least ten (10) feet outside the
building foundation. Stub-ups to equipment, mounted on outdoor
concrete slabs, shall be galvanized rigid steel and shall extend at least
f i v e ( 5) feet from edge of slab. Install insulated grounding
bushings on the terminations. Couple the steel conduits to the ducts
with suitable adapters, and encase with three (3) inches of concrete.
Upon completion of the duct bank installation, pull a standard flexible
mandrel through each duct. The mandrel shall be at least 12 inches
long, and shall have a diameter 1/2 inch less than the inside diameter
of the duct. After mandreling, pull a brush with stiff bristles through
each duct to remove the loosened particles. The diameter of the brush
shall be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the duct.
Seal the ducts and conduits at building entrances and at outdoor
equipment terminations with a suitable non-hardening compound.
Direct Burial Duct and Conduits:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install direct burial ducts and conduits only where shown on the
drawings.
Ducts and conduits shall be joined and terminated with fittings
recommended by the conduit manufacturer.
Tops of ducts and conduits shall be not less than 24 inches below
grade.
Do not kink the ducts or conduits.
271
5.
Place a continuous strip of utility warning tape approximately 12
inches above ducts or conduits before backfilling trenches.
END OF SECTION
272
SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
The provisions of Division 26 Section Common Work Results for Electrical,
apply to this section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes: Clearly and properly identify the complete electrical
system to indicate the loads served or the function of each item of equipment
connected under this scope of work.
B.
Related Sections include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Section 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 24 16 Lighting Control System Panelboards and
Panelboards.
Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices.
Section 26 50 00 Lighting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
LABELS
A.
Pre-printed: Permanent material pre-printed with black on white, with
adhesive backing, Brady, 3M or equivalent.
B.
Engraved Laminated Plastic: 3-ply laminated plastic, colors indicated herein,
with beveled edges, engraved letters and stainless steel screw attachment.
Nameplate length to suit engraving. Adhesive attachment is not acceptable.
C.
Clear Plastic Tape: Black (normal) or red (emergency or standby) 12 point
Helvetica medium text, clear adhesive backing, field printed with proper
equipment for device labeling. Brother P- Touch, Dyno-tape, Kroy, or equal.
D.
Wire Markers: White with black numbers, adhesive backed tape on dispenser
roll, Brady, 3M or equivalent.
273
E.
Feeder Conduit Marking: Provide one-piece snap-around vinyl feeder conduit
markers for feeder conduits. Provide custom label, black letters on orange
background indicating destination equipment, 1.25-inch high letters (min) –
Seton #M440 Series. Provide additional one-piece snap-around vinyl label,
black letters on orange background for voltage designation (i.e. 277/480V,
120/208V). Secure labels to conduits using plastic tie wrap – 2 per label.
F.
Marker Pen: Black permanent marker suitable for writing on metallic
surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Nameplate and text coloring:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Normal: Black nameplate with white lettering.
Emergency: Orange nameplate with black lettering.
Standby: Yellow nameplate with black lettering.
SWITCHGEAR, SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION PANELS, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
A.
Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplates for all main and feeder
protective devices indicating the function or the load served (e.g. ELEV-5,
PANEL 4HA, AHU-5, or SPARE) and the protective device trip rating (i.e.
175A). Text height: 3/8-inch.
B.
Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplate for all bussed spaces indicating
the maximum ampere rating of future breaker, switch or starter that may be
installed (e.g. SPACE (225A)). Text height: 3/8-inch.
C.
Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplate on the face of equipment
enclosure as follows:
1.
2.
D.
Line 1: Equipment identification (e.g. MDP, SDP, or MCC 4H). Text
height: 3/4-inch.
Line 2: Equipment voltage, phase and wire quantity (e.g. 480Y/277V,
3PH, 4W). Text height: 1/2-inch.
Provide additional engraved laminated plastic nameplate to indicate
upstream source and location of upstream source as follows:
1.
2.
Line 1: Upstream source equipment (e.g. FED FROM MDP). Text
height: 3/8-inch.
Line 2: Location of upstream source (e.g. MAIN ELEC ROOM 102).
Text height: 3/8-inch.
274
3.
3.3
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A.
Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplate on the face of the equipment
enclosure as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Line 1: Equipment identification (e.g. T-N2P). Text height: 3/4-inch.
Line 2: Equipment kVA rating, primary and secondary voltages (e.g.
150kVA, PRI: 480V, SEC: 208Y/120V). Text height: 1/2-inch.
Provide additional engraved laminated plastic nameplate to indicate
upstream source and location of upstream source as follows:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Confirm final room designations with Architect and Owner prior to
procurement of nameplates.
Line 1: Upstream source equipment (e.g. FED FROM MDP). Text
height: 3/8-inch.
Line 2: Location of upstream source (e.g. MAIN ELEC ROOM 102).
Text height: 3/8-inch
Confirm final room designations with Architect and Owner prior to
procurement of nameplates.
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A.
Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplate on the face of each panelboard
centered above the door as follows:
1.
2.
Line 1: Equipment identification (e.g. PANEL 4HA). Text height: 1/2inch.
Line 2: Equipment voltage, phase and wire quantity (e.g. 480Y/277V,
3PH, 4W). Text height: 3/8-inch.
B.
Indicate feeder source, feeder wire size, and feeder breaker or fuse size with
plastic tape labels on the inside of the panel door.
C.
Provide typewritten panel directories, with protective, clear transparent
covers, accurately accounting for every breaker installed including spares.
1.
2.
Schedules shall use the actual room designations assigned by name or
number near completion of the work and not the space designation on
the Drawings. Confirm final room designations with Architect and
Owner prior to completion of work.
Each load description shall include a room or area designation
whether indicated on the Drawings or not.
275
3.5
3.6
3.7
EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplate on the face of all disconnect
switches, motor starters, relays, contactors, etc. indicating equipment served
(e.g. AHU-1) and equipment load (e.g. 20HP). Provide additional engraved
laminated plastic nameplate indicating serving panel designation and circuit
number.
B.
Provide clear plastic tape label for all relays, contactors, time switches and
miscellaneous equipment provided under this Division of work indicating
equipment served.
FEEDER CONDUIT
A.
Provide feeder conduit marker for all electrical feeders.
B.
Markers shall be provided when exiting source equipment and located along
the entire conduit length 20ft on centers in exposed areas, above ceilings and
upon entering or leaving an area or room.
DEVICES
A.
3.8
3.9
Label each receptacle plate with preprinted clear plastic tape indicating
serving panel and circuit number (e.g. PANEL 2PA-5). Clean all oils, dirt and
any foreign materials from plate prior to label application. Receptacles
connected to a GFCI protected circuit downstream from the protecting device
shall be so labeled.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
A.
Label all pull boxes and junction boxes for systems with paint or marker pen
on box cover identifying system. Where box covers are exposed in finished
areas, label inside of cover. Covers shall be color labeled as follows:
480Y/277V wiring - orange; 208Y/120V wiring - black; fire alarm - red;
communications - green; security - blue.
B.
Label each end of pull wires left in empty conduits with tags or tape
indicating location of other end of wire.
SYSTEMS
A.
Complex control circuits may utilize any combination of colors with each
conductor identified throughout, using wraparound numbers or letters. Use
the number or letters shown where the Drawings or operation and
maintenance data indicate wiring identification.
276
B.
3.10
Label the fire alarm and communication equipment zones, controls,
indicators, etc., with machine printed labels or indicators appropriate for the
equipment installed as supplied or recommended by the equipment
manufacturer.
EXISTING EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide new nameplates and labels for existing distribution equipment in
accordance with panel descriptions shown on the Drawings. Provide new
labels for feeder devices where labels are non-existent, incorrect or confusing
on existing distribution panels affected by this work.
B.
Equip existing branch circuit panelboards scheduled to remain with new,
accurate, typed, circuit directories where circuiting changes are made.
END OF SECTION
277
SECTION 26 2416 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM PANELBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
The provisions of Division 26 Section Common Work Results for Electrical,
apply to this section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes:
1.
2.
Provide panelboards for branch circuit distribution as indicated.
Provide panelboards with built in lighting control features for branch
circuit distribution as indicated.
B. Related Sections include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Section 26 0519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
Section 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 0533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawings.
B.
Product data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Detailed component material list.
Voltage rating, amperage rating, bussing material, fault rating, wiring
lugs capacity, mounting method, physical size, exterior finish and
options.
Individual circuit breaker product data sheets.
Panel schedules; the panel schedules shall indicate circuit breakers in
the same orientation as the construction documents.
278
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Square-D, Square-D Powerlink, Siemens, Eaton Cutler Hammer , General
Electric
BRANCH PANELBOARDS
A.
Branch Circuit Panels: Bolt-on circuit breaker type fitted with metallic flush
lift latches and locks keyed alike. Deliver all panel keys to the Owner at
completion of the project.
B.
Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Fully rated at a value greater than the
maximum available short circuit current that can be expected at the
panelboard location in the electrical system. Series rating is not permitted.
C.
Cabinets:
1.
2.
3.
Cabinet rough-in boxes shall be code gauge steel, with dead front
covers.
Flush panels shall have flush doors with concealed hinges and
mounting clamps. Surface panels shall have metal face trims with no
sharp edges or corners. Surface panel cabinets shall be fabricated
without knockouts and finished to match face trim.
All panels shall have hinged trim fronts with captive screws that
provides full access to wiring compartment.
D.
Wiring Gutters: A minimum of 4-inches wide except where feeder conductors
enter where a minimum of 6-inches clear shall be provided. Feeder
conductors to enter directly in line with lug terminals wherever practicable.
Provide separate feeder studs for each feeder conductor compression lug.
E.
Bussing: Provide one continuous bus bar per phase. Provide copper or
electrical grade aluminum alloy sized as indicated on the drawings and in
accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current
carrying part to a maximum of 65°C above an ambient temperature of 40°C
maximum. Full size insulated neutral bars shall be included for panels
indicated to have a neutral. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches
shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices.
F.
Ground Bus: Provide in each panelboard. Ground bus shall:
1.
2.
Have the same rating as the neutral bus.
Contain a ground conductor terminal for each available circuit in the
panelboard.
279
3.
Have terminals sized for the branch circuit equipment grounding
conductors.
G.
Interiors: Main lug only unless otherwise indicated, with dead front shield
covering the bus, and bus connectors, with all mounting hardware and
bussing for all spaces indicated for future installation of devices. Interior
trim shall be of dead front construction. All unused mounting spaces shall be
covered with preformed knockouts.
H.
Main Circuit Breaker: Where indicated, equip panels indicated with main
circuit breakers sized as scheduled and mounted behind door at top of panel
for top entrance feeders, and bottom of panel for bottom entrance feeders.
Where main circuit breaker size is not indicated, ampere rating shall match
feeder ampacity or panelboard rating, whichever is less.
1.
2.
3.
I.
Molded case, thermal magnetic bolt-on type and sized as indicated on
the Drawings. Circuit breaker shall have an over-center, trip-free,
toggle mechanism that shall provide quick-make, quick-break contact
action. Indicate open, closed, or tripped by handle position, with
common internal trip crossbar to provide simultaneous tripping for all
poles.
Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip action with thermal and
magnetic trip elements in each pole. Each thermal element shall be
factory calibrated to operate in a 40°C ambient environment. Thermal
elements shall be ambient compensating above 40°C.
Provide with circuit breaker lock-off device to provide capability to be
locked in the open position.
Branch Circuit Breakers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Breakers shall be provided with amperage rating, and number of poles
as indicated in the Panelboard Schedules.
Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type.
Circuit breakers shall have an over-center toggle mechanism that shall
provide quick- make, quick-break contact action. Circuit breakers
shall have thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Two and
three pole circuit breakers shall have an internal common trip
crossbar to provide simultaneous tripping.
The exposed faceplates of all circuit breakers shall be flush with one
another.
Breakers shall have short circuit capacity rating to withstand the
maximum short circuit duty that can be expected at the breaker
location in the electrical system. Minimum short circuit rating for any
circuit breaker: 10,000 A.I.C. for 120V and 208V breakers, 14,000
A.I.C. for 277V and 480V breakers.
280
6.
7.
8.
2.3
Circuit breakers used for switching duty shall be UL listed for that
purpose and marked "SWD".
Circuit breakers serving heat trace circuits shall be ground fault
interrupter (GFI) type with 30 ma ground fault trip rating.
Provide circuit breaker lock-off device for each branch circuit breaker
J.
Provide shunt trips, alarms and auxiliary switches as shown on the Drawings.
K.
Proved Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) breakers as shown on the
Drawings or as required by Code.
BRANCH PANELBOARD WITH A BUILT-IN LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A.
Lighting Control System Branch Circuit Panels: Provide panelboard with built
is features to provide a standalone programmable lighting control system.
The following features shall be integrated in to the panelboard assembly:
Programmable control electronics for switching relay and monitoring the
status of the system, factory pre-wired cabinet, control transformer,
momentary action control switches, power supply, and controllable circuit
breakers.
B.
Relay Cabinets:
1.
Cabinets
a.
The cabinets shall be of a surface-mount type, built from coldrolled steel and include a hinged front panel complete with
lock and keys. The standard color shall be ASA 61 baked gray
enamel. All cabinets shall have a maximum depth of 101 mm
(4"), a maximum width of 508 mm (20"), a maximum height of
750 mm (29.5") for 24 relay cabinets and of 1250 mm (49.5")
for 64 relay cabinets. The relay cabinets shall be #14 gauge .
b.
The cabinets shall come equipped with steel plates and
removable wiring racks allowing connections of high voltage
conduits on top and/or sides and low voltage conduits on
either side.
c.
Relay cabinets shall be entirely factory assembled and wired
1)
Each cabinet shall contain:
a)
Plug-in or snap-mounted relays
b)
A control transformer
c)
Removable plates between low and high voltage
sources
d)
Control modules as specified herein
d.
Panel interior shall have the following pre-assembled and prewired:
1)
Suitable divider separating class1 and class 2
compartments.
281
2)
3)
4)
C.
Control transformer, UL/CSA approved for class 2
circuits.
Low voltage relays as required by switched circuits
shown on plans or schedules.
Control devices as required.
Relays
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
CSA and UL certified control relays shall be of a low voltage type,
activated and latched through an electric impulse until next coil
activation.
A single polarized action coil shall activate the relay contacts.
Nominal operating voltage shall be half-wave rectified 24 V ac.
Single pole relays shall be rated and UL listed for 120, 277 or 347 VAC
lighting loads at 20 amps rated to handle resistive, fluorescent, or
tungsten loads.
Double pole relays shall be rated and UL listed for 208, 240 or 480 VAC
lighting loads at 20 amps rated to handle resistive, fluorescent, or
tungsten loads.
The relay shall comprise a visible manual operation switch directly
activated by the armature. Furthermore, the switch shall provide a
way of manually activating H.I.D.- specified relays in an "ON/OFF"
position.
The relay shall not remain operational using the "ON/OFF" switch.
Using a polarized impulse, a single wire shall be used to activate the
relays. A negative impulse shall activate the relay to the "ON" position
and a positive impulse to the "OFF" position. The same wire shall
automatically provide information regarding the relay status to the
pilot lamps. The relays shall be designed to be din rail-mounted.
Relays shall be of a molded case, individually replaceable, polarized
puled type from Schneider Electric or an approved equivalent.
Lighting control relays shall be mechanically latching and shall come
complete with a manual ON/OFF switch. The mechanical switch shall
continuously display the true state of the relay’s internal contacts.
Relays requiring control power for manual operation and/or status
feedback are not acceptable.
Relay shall be contained in an individual molded casing and shall be
capable of containing a short circuit fault current of 14,000 amperes at
277V as determined at point of installation. Relays with exposed
electronic devices are not acceptable.
Relay shall be capable of controlling incandescent, fluorescent,
electronic ballast and MHID lighting loads.
Lighting control relays shall include captive, color-coded screw
terminals for both the line voltage and the low voltage connections.
282
D.
Transformer
1.
2.
3.
E.
The control transformer shall be of a low voltage type with a 120, 277
or 347 V, 60 Hz input, as per specifications.
The output shall support a capacity of 50 VA at 24 V and come
equipped with the proper safety devices.
Control transformer, UL/CSA approved for class 2 circuits space.
Modular Controller Interface
1.
General description
a.
Integral keypad and LCD front panel for local setup. Front panel
setup shall permit local input setup and creation of time
schedules without requiring separate PC-based software or
hand held devices on standalone series.
b.
Non-volatile memory to retain all setup and configurations.
c.
The modules shall accept signals given be the followings
features:
1)
Time clock.
2)
Motion sensor.
3)
Photo cell.
4)
Standard switch and low voltage switch with or without
indicator.
5)
The modules shall convert signals given by these devices
into polarized pulsed necessary to control low voltage
relays.
6)
The components of the controller shall be assembled on
printed epoxy-treated fiberglass circuit boards. based
on
microprocessor
technology
they
control
simultaneously up to relays.
7)
An auxiliary output on a connector shall also be available
to cascade modules in order to control more than 12
relays. Each slave module added will control an
additional 12 relays. There will be a delay of 1 second
between each slave module in order to limit rush
current.
8)
The modules will detect abnormal signal coming from
defect devices connected on its inputs. Then, when a
signal cycles on and off or a momentary contact stays
closed, the modules will ignore this information and
take no action. Also, if two different signals (on and off)
are given simultaneously to inputs, the modules will
give an off sequence only. Two commands are
considered simultaneous if they are seen within 100
micro seconds.
283
9)
F.
On power up, the user will be able to configure one of
the followings:
a)
No action.
b)
Off sweep on the outputs.
c)
On sweep on the outputs.
d)
On or off sweep corresponding to the last
command given by the module before the power
failure.
e)
The controller shall allow individual control of
relays through local switches.
f)
All connectors shall be robust and plug in type to
facilitate maintenance.
g)
The modules shall resist to harmonics and other
electrical noises that is on the building power.
Control Electronics Devices
1.
2.
3.
General description
a.
The automation panel shall be fully configurable by itself
without an entry keyboard or external computer.
Configuration (relay group assignment) is done through a
tactile feedback membrane switch. Furthermore, an audible
notification is activated every time a button is properly pushed
as on the SERPRC401 model.
Relay panels are to include the following control modules:
a.
Relay scanner module SERPRC401
b.
Switch module: SERPRC401
c.
Sequencer module Model SERPRC401
d.
BacNet interfacing module Model SERPBC601 (Option)
Main characteristics of the sequencer:
a.
Din rail mounted.
b.
24 volts ac supply.
c.
Operates up to 16 relays 2 wires per sequencer.
d.
Operates up to 32 relays with easy communication add-on.
e.
Up to 4 relay groups can be assigned. One relay can be part of
more than one group.
f.
Four entries for an individual group operation. Different
switches can be linked to these entries: dry contact or
polarized momentarily.
g.
Flick/Blink warning available for closing time.
h.
Time On Extension (2 hours) for lighting during off-hours.
i.
On operation only.
j.
Off operation only.
k.
The sequencer can detect 4 relay state: unplugged, open , close
and short circuit. Display is LED
284
G.
Configuration Software
1.
2.4
Configuration software shall be designed specifically for the lighting
control system and supported by the manufacturer. Software shall
support system communication configuration.
IDENTIFICATION
A. Branch circuit breakers shall be identified with individual circuit numbers
adjacent to each breaker with a typewritten card to identify the load controlled by
that breaker.
B. Contractor will be provided with complete schedules of all panelboards as
designed prior to start of construction. Schedules will include circuit breaker
arrangement, load schedules, and ratings for use in identification of circuits and
coordination.
C. Refer to Section 26 0553 Identification of Electrical Systems for additional
requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B.
Install panelboards plumb and level, located as shown on the Drawings up 6feet 6-inches to top unless noted otherwise.
C.
Area above panelboard shall be kept clear of all equipment foreign to the
electrical installation including piping, ductwork, supports, etc. Coordinate
installation with all other trades.
D.
Provide identification as specified in Section 26 0553 Identification of
Electrical Systems.
CUSTOMIZATION
A.
Manufacturer shall provide any custom hardware or communication devices
necessary to make the lighting control system perform as specified above.
B.
Define each relay load type and assign to required group/zone, input and/or
schedule.
285
3.3
3.4
SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
A.
Contractor is responsible for furnishing fully functional system including all
necessary programming, calibration, and operational interfaces to other
devices.
B.
Contractor shall meet with owner’s representative to identify desired
operation of the control system. At minimum, the lighting control system
shall meet the functional requirements of the applicable energy building code
for the location of the property.
C.
Contractor shall fully document the control operation of the system including
group/zone definitions, time schedules, input assignments, occupancy sensor
delays, light level settings, and any other special requirements. Full
documentation shall be made available to the owner’s rep and the
manufacturer no less than 14 days before planned start up.
START-UP
A.
Installing contractor shall provide factory-certified field service for site
inspection to assure proper system installation and operation.
1.
2.
3.5
Factory service technicians shall:
a.
Have certification demonstrating competency with associated
controls systems.
b.
Be certified by the manufacture on the system installation and
programming.
Upon visit, the technician will be responsible for performing the
following:
a.
Verify power feeds and load circuits are properly labeled
according to drawings.
b.
Verify connection and location of all external controls.
c.
Verify addressing of all network components in relation to
drawings.
d.
Verify equipment is properly operating in accordance with
approved drawings and sequence of operations.
e.
Verify operation of supplied interfaces with other equipment.
f.
Verify sensors are properly calibrated.
g.
Obtain sign-off on system functions.
INSTRUCTION
A.
Without additional expense to the Owner, competent authorized
representative personnel shall give instruction for the care, adjustment, and
operation of all parts of the system to the Owner’s representative who is to
have charge of the equipment.
286
3.6
B.
Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation
and shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical operation and
system maintenance.
C.
Furnish 16 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system at the
dates and times selected by the Owner.
D.
Installation, start-up, and maintenance assistance shall be available from the
manufacturer on an as-needed basis.
SPARE CONDUITS
A.
Install a spare 3/4-inch conduit from flush panels for each three single pole
breakers or spaces provided. Terminate conduits above accessible ceiling or
as directed.
END OF SECTION
287
SECTION 26 2417 METERED SERVICE PEDESTAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
The provisions of Division 26 Section Common Work Results for Electrical,
apply to this section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes: Provide service pedestal for branch circuit distribution
as indicated.
B.
Related Sections include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Section 26 0519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
Section 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 0533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 2416 Lighting Control System Panelboards and
Panelboards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawings.
B.
Product data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Detailed component material list.
Voltage rating, amperage rating, bussing material, fault rating, wiring
lugs capacity, mounting method, physical size, exterior finish and
options.
Individual circuit breaker product data sheets.
Panel schedules; the panel schedules shall indicate circuit breakers in
the same orientation as the construction documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Milbank, Circle AW or approved equal.
288
2.2
POWER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE ENCLOSURE
A.
Description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Provide a fully enclosed modular cabinet with the following basic
system components: main input conductor termination lugs,
separation barriers between the utility side and the panel/controls
side, service meter socket, main service disconnect breaker, output
distribution panelboard, output branch circuit breakers, lighting
control photocell, electronic
programmable lighting control
timeclock.
The complete power distribution service enclosure shall be service
disconnect rated.
The service metering section shall be separated from the rest of the
assembly and shall meet all requirements of the local service provider
utility.
The complete power distribution service enclosure shall be
preassembled and fully tested as a system prior to shipment.
Major System Components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Branch Circuit Panels: Bolt-on circuit breaker type fitted with metallic
flush lift latches and locks keyed alike. Deliver all panel keys to the
Owner at completion of the project.
Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Fully rated at a value greater
than the maximum available short circuit current that can be expected
at the panelboard location in the electrical system. Series rating is not
permitted.
Cabinets:
a.
Cabinet rough-in boxes shall be code gauge steel, with dead
front covers.
b.
Cabinets shall have flush doors with concealed hinges and
mounting clamps and a lockable operators handle.
c.
NEMA rated and painted for exterior use
d.
Interior panels shall have metal face trims with no sharp edges
or corners. Surface panel cabinets shall be fabricated without
knockouts and finished to match face trim.
e.
All panels shall have hinged trim fronts with captive screws
that provides full access to wiring compartment.
Wiring Gutters: A minimum of 4-inches wide except where feeder
conductors enter where a minimum of 6-inches clear shall be
provided. Feeder conductors to enter directly in line with lug
terminals wherever practicable. Provide separate feeder studs for
each feeder conductor compression lug.
Bussing: Provide one (1) continuous bus bar per phase. Provide
copper or electrical grade aluminum alloy sized as indicated on the
289
6.
7.
8.
9.
drawings and in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature
rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 65°C above an
ambient temperature of 40°C maximum. Full size insulated neutral
bars shall be included for panels indicated to have a neutral. Bus bar
taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for
sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices.
Ground Bus: Provide in each panelboard. Ground bus shall:
a.
Have the same rating as the neutral bus.
b.
Contain a ground conductor terminal for each available circuit
in the panelboard.
c.
Have terminals sized for the branch circuit equipment
grounding conductors.
Interiors: Main lug only unless otherwise indicated, with dead front
shield covering the bus, and bus connectors, with all mounting
hardware and bussing for all spaces indicated for future installation of
devices. Interior trim shall be of dead front construction. All unused
mounting spaces shall be covered with preformed knockouts.
Main Circuit Breaker: Where indicated, equip panels indicated with
main circuit breakers sized as scheduled where main circuit breaker
size is not indicated, ampere rating shall match feeder ampacity or
panelboard rating, whichever is less.
a.
Molded case, thermal magnetic bolt-on type and sized as
indicated on the Drawings. Circuit breaker shall have an
overcenter, trip-free, toggle mechanism that shall provide
quick-make, quick-break contact action. Indicate open, closed,
or tripped by handle position, with common internal trip
crossbar to provide simultaneous tripping for all poles.
b.
Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip action with
thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Each thermal
element shall be factory calibrated to operate in a 40°C
ambient environment. Thermal elements shall be ambient
compensating above 40°C.
c.
Provide with circuit breaker lock-off device to provide
capability to be locked in the open position.
Branch Circuit Breakers:
a.
Breakers shall be provided with amperage rating, and number
of poles as indicated in the Panelboard Schedules.
b.
Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type.
c.
Circuit breakers shall have an overcenter toggle mechanism
that shall provide quick-make, quick-break contact action.
Circuit breakers shall have thermal and magnetic trip elements
in each pole. Two and three pole circuit breakers shall have an
internal common trip crossbar to provide simultaneous
tripping.
d.
The exposed faceplates of all circuit breakers shall be flush with
one another.
290
e.
10.
11.
12.
2.3
Breakers shall have short circuit capacity rating to withstand
the maximum short circuit duty that can be expected at the
breaker location in the electrical system. Minimum short
circuit rating for any circuit breaker: 10,000 A.I.C. for 120V and
208V breakers, 14,000 A.I.C. for 240V, 277V and 480V breakers.
f.
Circuit breakers used for switching duty shall be UL listed for
that purpose and marked "SWD".
g.
Circuit breakers serving heat trace circuits shall be ground fault
interrupter (GFI) type with 30 ma ground fault trip rating.
h.
Provide circuit breaker lock-off device for each branch circuit
breaker
Proved Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) breakers as shown on
the Drawings or as required by Code.
Provide auxiliary switches, photocell, and electronic timer as shown on
the Drawings.
Programmable Timeclock Controller: The central controller shall be a
microcomputer pre-programmed for lighting control. It shall
incorporate a 365-day clock and provide minute-by-minute control of
the entire lighting system. The controller shall accept the lighting
control schedule through a simple keyboard. In addition to the
automatic schedule, any lighting circuit can be controlled manually
from the controller keyboard. The controller shall provide monitoring
of the system and display the ON/OFF state of each relay.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Branch circuit breakers shall be identified with individual circuit numbers
adjacent to each breaker with a typewritten card to identify the load
controlled by that breaker.
B.
Contractor will be provided with complete schedules of all panelboards as
designed prior to start of construction. Schedules will include circuit breaker
arrangement, load schedules, and ratings for use in identification of circuits
and coordination.
C.
Refer to Section 26 0553 Identification of Electrical Systems for additional
requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install power service enclosure in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
291
3.2
B.
Install power service enclosure plumb and level, located as shown on the
Drawings.
C.
Provide a concrete mounting pad for the power service enclosure and anchor
the service pedestal to the concrete pad.
D.
Coordinate with the serving power utility for incoming service conduit size
and power source, provide in accordance with the utility requirements.
E.
Provide identification as specified in Section 26 0553 Identification of
Electrical Systems.
SPARE CONDUITS
A.
Provide 50 percent spare 1 inch conduits from the metering pedestal interior,
underground and extend 12” past the metering pedestal concrete base.
END OF SECTION
292
SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
The provisions of Division 26 Section, Common Work Results for Electrical,
apply to this section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes: Wiring devices and plates for all outlet boxes shown.
B.
Related Sections include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Section 26 0519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
Section 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 0533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data.
B.
Shop drawings of the occupancy sensor locations shall be prepared by the
manufacturer in AutoCAD and submitted for review. The shop drawings shall
be coordinated with all other trades and identify actual device locations and
quantities within each space required to provide adequate sensing coverage
in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Identify mounting
configuration (i.e. ceiling or wall) and sensor technology proposed at each
location.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Wiring devices shall be extra heavy duty grade, with special devices as noted
on the Drawings. Should the Drawings indicate a device other than those
listed herein, such device shall be of same grade and manufacture as specified
below. Furnish a matching plug connector for all special purpose devices
that do not have the common 120 volt NEMA 5-20R configuration.
293
B.
2.2
All lighting switches and duplex receptacles installed shall have similar
appearance characteristics unless noted otherwise.
WALL SWITCHES
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Leviton, Arrow-Hart, Pass and Seymour.
B.
Line Voltage Switches: 20 amp rated, 277 volt, quiet type, extra heavy duty,
heavy duty nylon toggle handle, back and side wired with screw terminal
connections.
1.
As noted on the drawings provide:
a.
Pilot light switch: lighted clear toggle.
b.
Momentary Contact Switches: 15A, SPDT, center off.
c.
Key Switches: 20 ampere, 277V, back and side wired with screw
terminal connections.
C.
EPO pushbutton switch: Red mushroom head push-off, pull-on with
concentric guard, 2-1/4 inch diameter, non-illuminated, heavy duty operator.
Provide clear hinged louver to prevent accidental operation. Provide
laminated engraved nameplate attached with stainless steel screws
indicating “Emergency Power Off” and load served.
D.
E.
Except as noted herein, device exposed finish color shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Dimming Switches: architectural grad, line voltage, 20 amp rated,
single pole, slide-to-off type, slide up to brighten and down to dim,
decora style, wattage rating and lamp/ballast compatibility as
required. Provide 3-way type where shown on plan. Lutron Nova T,
Leviton SureSlide, or Hubbell.
Normal power: Gray or as selected by Architect.
Emergency power: Red.
Standby power: Red.
RECEPTACLES
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Leviton, Arrow-Hart, Pass and Seymour.
B.
Standard straight blade duplex receptacle: 3-wire, 2-pole with grounding,
extra heavy duty, 10 amp rated, NEMA 5-20R configuration, back and side
wired with screw terminal connections.
1. Provide hospital grade in patient care areas as required by NEC.
2. Provide tamper-resistant as noted on the drawings or NEC required.
3. Provide isolated ground as noted on the drawings or NEC required.
294
4. Provide surge suppression receptacles as noted on the drawings.
C.
Ground Fault Interrupting straight blade duplex receptacle: heavy duty, 3wire, 2 pole with grounding, self-testing, green “ON” LED to indicate power,
red “ON” LED to indicate ground fault condition, 20 amp rated, NEMA 5-20R
configuration, back and side wired with screw terminal connections.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Special Purpose Receptacles:
configurations.
E.
Except as noted herein, device exposed finish color shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
2.5
Provide hospital grade in patient care areas as required by NEC.
Provide tamper-resistant as noted on the drawings or where NEC
required.
Provide weather-resistant rating at exterior locations as required by
NEC.
As noted on Drawings with NEMA
Normal power: Gray or as selected by Architect.
Emergency power: Orange
Standby power: Red.
PLATES
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Leviton, Arrow-Hart, Pass and Seymour.
B.
Flush Finish Plates: 0.040" thick, type 302 stainless steel, brush finish.
C.
Surface Covers: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel, 1/2" raised industrial
type with openings appropriate for device installed.
D.
Weatherproof: Extra-Duty while in use covers, UL 514D listed, commercial
quality diecast aluminum construction, NEMA 3R rated, gasketed, built-in
padlock provisions, built-in cord strain relief provisions, gray powder-coated
finish, vertical mounting as required for application or other covers of similar
construction for other receptacle configurations.
E.
Identification: Identify receptacle plates with a pre-printed label indicating
serving panel and branch circuit number. Refer to 26 0553 Identification for
Electrical Systems.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Watt Stopper, Leviton, SensorSwitch, Hubbell or
Lutron. Watt Stopper series numbers are indentified herein to establish the
minimum level of quality for each product. Comparable products that meet
295
the requirements of the specification by other acceptable manufacturers
identified herein are acceptable.
B.
Wall-box Mounted: Passive infrared type, 180° coverage, automatic-on
operation, 3-wire type, daylight override, adjustable time-out, selectable
walk-through mode and override off switch. Single or dual relay type as
required or as shown on Drawings. Watt Stopper #PW series.
C.
Ceiling Mounted: 360° coverage, automatic-on operation, light-level sensing,
adjustable time-out, automatic sensing/adjustment for optimal time-out
delay setting, selectable walk- through mode, low- or line-voltage as shown
on Drawings or described herein, surface mounted, with power pack as
required, provide auxiliary contacts.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Combination passive infrared and ultrasonic/microphonic type: Watt
Stopper #DT-300 series.
Passive infrared type: Watt Stopper #CI-300 series.
Ultrasonic type: Watt Stopper #UT-300 series.
Ceiling/Wall Mounted: 180° coverage, automatic-on operation, light-level
sensing, adjustable time-out, automatic sensing/adjustment for optimal timeout delay setting, selectable walk-through mode, low-voltage with power
pack, surface mounted, provide auxiliary contacts.
1.
2.
Combination passive infrared and ultrasonic/microphonic type: Watt
stopper #DT-200 series.
Passive infrared type: Watt stopper #CX-100 series.
E.
Provide all ceiling mounted occupancy sensors with isolated normally open
and normally closed output contacts rated at 1A at 30VDC/VAC. Coordinate
interface requirements with HVAC contractor.
F.
Provide multiple contacts and/or power packs for occupancy sensors that:
1.
2.
Control both normal and emergency lighting and require separation of
branch circuit wiring systems. In case of occupancy sensor failure,
emergency lighting shall fail to the “on” state.
Control separate lighting control zones. Unless otherwise noted,
occupancy sensors are intended to control all light in a designated
zone or room. Contractor is responsible for providing the required
power packs to insure functionality of the system.
296
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Devices and finish plates to be installed plumb with building lines. Wall
mounted receptacles shall be installed vertically at centerline height shown
on the Drawings.
B.
Finish plates and devices are not to be installed until final painting is
complete. Scratched or splattered finish plates and devices will not be
accepted.
C.
Switches, receptacles and/or other devices ganged into a common enclosure
shall be provided with a separation barrier between devices where the
combined circuit voltages within the enclosure exceeds 300 volts.
D.
Provide GFCI receptacles as shown on the drawings or as NEC required.
Provide a GFCI type duplex receptacle in each required location, do not subfeed normal receptacles downstream of the GFCI receptacle to obtain the
GFCI rating.
E.
Provide receptacles with GFCI, tamperproof, weather-resistant or hospital
grade ratings as shown on the drawings, appropriate for the installation or
required by NEC.
CORD CAPS
A.
3.3
3.4
All special plugs provided with the receptacles shall be given to the Owner in
their cartons with a letter stating the date and the Owner’s representative
that received the materials.
COORDINATION
A.
The Electrical Drawings indicate the approximate location of all devices.
Refer to Architectural elevations, sections and details for exact locations.
B.
Coordinate with equipment installer the locations and methods of connection
to devices mounted in cabinets, counters, work benches, service pedestals
and similar equipment.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
Line voltage occupancy sensors shall be provided when installed in
inaccessible ceiling system, except when auxiliary contacts are required, in
which case a low voltage occupancy sensor shall be provided. For installation
of low voltage occupancy sensors in inaccessible ceiling systems, coordinate
297
power pack locations with Architect prior to installation and provide access
panels as required.
3.5
B.
Low voltage occupancy sensors shall be provided when installed in accessible
ceiling systems.
C.
Sensor locations identified on Drawings are diagrammatic and are meant to
indicate only that occupancy sensing within a given space is required. Locate
sensors to provide maximum coverage of the room, to operate as someone
enters the room, and to avoid false operation due to persons outside the
room passing an open door.
D.
Provide additional sensing heads as necessary or per manufacturer’s
recommendation to achieve complete coverage of each room.
E.
Set sensitivity as required to provide small movement coverage throughout
the room without extending coverage beyond the room.
F.
System performance testing shall be done with the sensor timing set to the
minimum time delay available. Once complete coverage of a given room has
been demonstrated, set the delay to 15 minutes.
G.
Upon Completion of installation and prior to turning space over to Owner,
Contractor shall reset occupancy sensor automatic self-adjustment settings
to insure proper time delay self- adjustment for Owner occupant schedule
and room use.
H.
Allow for up to 24 hours of call-back sensor adjustments to be made by the
contractor or occupancy sensor manufacturer qualified installer for up to six
months after the owner has taken occupancy of the space.
TESTING
A.
Receptacles shall be tested for line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to
ground faults. Correct any defective wiring.
END OF SECTION
298
SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
The provisions of Division 26 Section, Common Work Results for Electrical,
apply to this section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
General Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Provide all lighting outlets indicated on the Drawings with a luminaire
of the type designated and appropriate for the location.
Where a luminaire type designation has been omitted and cannot be
determined by the Contractor, request a clarification from the
Architect in writing and provide a suitable luminaire type as directed.
Coordinate installation of luminaires with the ceiling installation and
all other trades to provide a total system that is neat and orderly in
appearance.
Luminaires located in fire rated assemblies shall be rated for use in
such assemblies or shall have the assembly maintained by the installer
through the use of appropriate construction techniques to maintain
the assembly rating. It is the responsibility of the contractor to
maintain the assembly rating and provide all required components
during construction. Coordinate luminaires impacted with division 1
and life safety documents.
Install all remote ballasts in enclosures as required by luminaire
specified. Locate remote ballasts as shown on drawings; where no
location is shown, provide recommendation for approval prior to
commencing field installation. Remote mounted ballasts shall be
located within the distance limitations specified by the ballast
manufacturer.
Coordinate voltage requirements to each luminaire as indicated on
drawings.
Contractor is responsible for verifying all luminaires carry a valid UL
or ELT listing.
All luminaires shall be procured through a distributor located within
200 miles of the project site with a valid business license in the state
the project is located.
299
9.
10.
B.
Related Sections include:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Upon request of the architect, engineer or owner, provide all back-up
pricing in a unit cost breakdown per luminaire. Back-up pricing shall
include distributor net pricing, contractor net pricing, final owner
pricing and all mark-ups and discounts (lot price or all-or-none)
associated with the luminaires.
Lighting related change orders shall include all back-up pricing noted
above for review by the engineer and lighting designer.
Section 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The lighting design for this project was based on luminaire types and
manufacturers as specified.
B.
Specified manufacturers are approved to bid on products where specified.
Inclusion of manufacturer and product series does not relieve specified
manufacturer from providing product as described in luminaire schedule;
modifications to standard product, if required, shall be included with initial
bid.
C.
Items noted “or equivalent” do not require prior approval but shall be
included with the shop drawing submittal.
D.
Other “Or Approved” Manufacturers and Products: Submit Substitution
Request prior to bid, complying with requirements of C-TRAN’s Procurement
Documents and General Conditions. Approval shall be determined by review
of the following luminaire characteristics where applicable. Lack of pertinent
data on any characteristic shall constitute justification for rejection of the
submittal.
1.
2.
Performance
a.
Distribution.
b.
Utilization.
c.
Average brightness/maximum brightness.
d.
Spacing to mounting height ratio.
e.
Visual comfort probability.
Construction
a.
Engineering.
b.
Workmanship.
c.
Rigidity.
300
d.
Permanence of materials and finishes.
301
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Installation Ease
a.
Captive parts and captive hardware.
b.
Provision for leveling.
c.
Through-wiring ease.
Maintenance
a.
Relamping ease.
b.
Ease of replacement of ballast and lamp sockets.
Appearance
a.
Architectural integration.
b.
Light tightness.
c.
Neat, trim styling.
d.
Conformance with design intent.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 26 0500 Common Work
Results for Electrical:
1.
Shop Drawings, to include:
a.
Product Data. Provide manufacturer’s published product data
information.
b.
Luminaire dimensions on a fully dimensioned line drawing.
c.
Lamp information.
d.
Lamp socket information.
e.
Ballast information using ballast manufacturers published
product data information. Multiple ballasts may be submitted
for single luminaire if compatible with ballast specification
included in contract documents. Include certification of lamp
and ballast compatibility for all submitted ballasts.
f.
Mounting details including clips, canopies, supports, and
methods for attachment to structure.
g.
U.L. Labeling information.
h.
Photometric Reports consisting of:
1)
Candlepower distribution curves: Provide five plane
candlepower distribution data at no more than 5°
vertical angle increments.
2)
Coefficient of utilization table.
3)
Zonal lumen summary including overall luminaire
efficiency.
4)
Luminaire luminance: Provide measured maximum
brightness data for luminaires with reflectors and
average brightness data for luminaires with refractors.
5)
Spacing to mounting height ratio. If parallel and
perpendicular ratios differ, provide data on each plane.
6)
VCP calculations (where applicable): For general office
302
2.
lighting luminaires, provide typical VCP calculations for
ceiling heights between 9' and 12' at 1' increments, for
room sizes 20'x20' and 30'x30'.
i.
Special requirements of the specification.
Operation and maintenance data. Prepare two copies of a Lighting
Systems Maintenance Manual consisting of the following in a hardcover binder for review. After review, Architect will deliver one copy
to Owner.
a.
One complete set of final submittals of actual product installed,
including product data and shop drawings. Include product
data for actual ballast installed where applicable.
b.
List of lamps used in Project, cross-referenced to fixture types,
with specific manufacturer’s names and ordering codes.
c.
Relamping instructions for lamps that require special
precautions (tungsten halogen, metal halide, etc.).
d.
Lighting fixture cleaning instruction, including chemicals to be
used or avoided.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Luminaires new and complete with mounting accessories, junction boxes,
trims and lamps.
B.
Luminaire assemblies U.L. listed.
C.
Luminaires U.L. listed appropriate to mounting conditions and application.
D.
Each luminaire family type (downlights, parabolics, etc.) supplied by only one
manufacturer.
E.
Recessed luminaires installed in fire rated ceilings and using a fire rated
protective cover shall be thermally protected for this application and shall
carry a fire rated listing.
F.
Luminaires installed under canopies, roofs or open areas and similar damp or
wet locations shall be UL listed and labeled as suitable for damp or wet
locations.
303
2.2
LENSES
A.
Prismatic Acrylic:
1.
B.
Opal acrylic:
1.
2.
C.
2.3
2.4
12"x24" and Larger: Extruded of clear virgin acrylic plastic, 0.125"
minimum overall thickness, 0.100” nominal unpenetrated thickness,
Pattern 12 with flat sided female prisms running at 45° off panel axis
unless otherwise specified in the luminaire schedule. Concave prisms
are not acceptable.
Extruded or injection molded of virgin acrylic plastic, 0.080" minimum
overall thickness.
As specified in the Luminaire Schedule.
Opal acrylic overlay: High transmittance type, extruded of virgin acrylic
plastic, 0.040” overall thickness, with minimum 80 percent light
transmittance.
REFLECTOR CONES
A.
Spun of uniform gauge aluminum, free of spinning marks or other defects.
B.
Shall have an integral trim flange.
C.
Color and finish as specified in Luminaire Schedule.
D.
All reflectors shall be of the Alzak® process, and shall be of the low iridescent
type.
E.
All luminaires using Alzak® reflector cones shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer unless directed otherwise in Luminaire Schedule.
LAMPS
A.
Lamp each luminaire with the suitable lamp cataloged for the specific
luminaire type and as indicated as manufactured by General Electric, Philips,
OSRAM/Sylvania, Venture, Ushio (MR only), EYE (MR only), or approved, or
as specifically indicated in the Luminaire Schedule, or as specified herein.
B.
Incandescent: Inside frosted, 130 volt rated except where otherwise
specified. Reflector (R) flood lamps are not acceptable.
C.
Tungsten Halogen Incandescent:
304
1.
2.
D.
Line voltage:
a.
Inside white coated, 120 volt rated except where otherwise
specified, BT-15 envelope, medium base. Philips Halogena or
approved.
b.
Provide medium base PAR lamps for luminaires designed and
cataloged for such lamps unless specified otherwise, 125-130
volt rated. Refer to Luminaire Schedule for size, wattage and
beam spread. Lamps with diodes are not acceptable.
c.
Tubular tungsten halogen to be of wattage as listed in
Luminaire Schedule and of the proper type for the luminaire.
Low Voltage: Of wattage, voltage, beam spread, base style and type
indicated in Luminaire Schedule.
Fluorescent:
1.
2.
Linear Fluorescent:
a.
T-8 Super System: lamps shall be bi-pin type, Tri-Phosphor with
Color Rendering Index (CRI) exceeding 85, Correlated Color
Temperature (CCT) of to match building standard with a
minimum initial lumen output of not less than 3100 lumens
when operated on a reference ballast with a ballast factor of
1.0. Rated lamp life of not less than 30,000 hours when
operated at 3 hours per start. Osram Sylvania XPS, Philips
Advantage or General Electric. A ballast compatible with the
lamp as a system is required as specified in ballast section.
b.
T-5 lamps shall be bi-pin type, Tri-Phosphor with Color
Rendering Index (CRI) exceeding 82, Correlated Color
Temperature (CCT) of to match building standard or as
indicated in the Luminaire Schedule.
c.
T-12 lamps shall not be used.
d.
Provide low mercury (maximum 6 milligrams for standard 48
inch lamp) TCLP- compliant (Toxicity Characteristic Leaching
Procedure) lamps for all luminaires.
Compact Fluorescent:
a.
Of wattage and configuration indicated in Luminaire Schedule,
Tri-Phosphor with Color Rendering Index (CRI) exceeding 81,
Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) of to match building
standard or as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule.
b.
Amalgam technology to be used wherever at least one
manufacturer supplies the specified lamp with that technology.
c.
Lamps shall be single ended four-pin plug-in base where
available.
d.
Self-ballasted lamps shall not be provided unless specifically
indicated in the Luminaire Schedule.
305
3.
E.
2.5
All fluorescent lamps shall be of the same manufacturer and phosphor
coating unless specifically identified in the Luminaire Schedule.
Special types as indicated in Luminaire Schedule.
LAMP SOCKETS
A.
Of configuration and design to accept standard lamp bases.
B.
Linear Fluorescent:
1.
2.
C.
Compact Fluorescent:
1.
2.
2.6
T-8: Polycarbonate medium bi-pin rotary lock type, with T12
inhibitor, copper or brass contacts. Straight-in type lampholders are
not acceptable.
T-5: Polycarbonate medium bi-pin rotary lock type, copper or brass
contacts.
Long twin-tube lamps: Polycarbonate plug-in type with metallic lamp
retention spring. Listed for both vertical and horizontal mounting
orientation. Provide auxiliary lamp support clip.
Compact lamps: Polycarbonate plug-in type with metallic lamp
retention spring, 4-pin type, starter-free. Twist-lock lamp holders are
not acceptable unless specified in the Luminaire Schedule.
BALLASTS
A.
Linear Fluorescent:
1.
Non-Dimming Electronic T-8 Super System: Ballasts shall meet the
requirements of UL 935 and shall bear the appropriate UL label.
Tandem wiring between luminaires may be used to minimize the
number of ballasts while accomplishing the switching requirements
shown on the drawings. Advance, OSRAM/Sylvania, General Electric,
or approved. Ballasts shall have the following electrical
characteristics:
a.
Series wired, Programmed Rapid Start circuitry.
b.
High frequency operation, >40kHz.
c.
Withstand input power line transients as defined in ANSI
C62.41. The ballasts shall tolerate a line voltage variation of
±10 percent.
d.
The power factor shall be 98 percent or higher.
306
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The lamp crest factor shall measure 1.7 or less for program
rapid start ballasts and 1.85 or less for instant start ballasts.
f.
The average Ballast Factor shall not exceed .75 under ANSI
C82.2 conditions or as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule.
g.
A two lamp ballast, when operating two Super System lamps as
specified in the lamp section, shall consume 51 watts maximum
with a total system efficacy of not less than 95 lumens per watt.
h.
Total harmonic distortion of the input current to the electronic
ballast shall not exceed 10 percent of the input current and
comply with FCC rules and regulations Part 18 concerning the
generation of both EMF (electromagnetic interference) and RFI
(radio frequency interference).
i.
Class “A” sound rated and UL Class “P” thermally protected.
The ballast shall be provided with an internal fuse to protect
the electrical power supply from internal component failure.
The ballast shall also be short-circuit protected in the event of
miswiring.
10 percent Dimming Electronic: Ballasts shall meet all the
specifications for non-dimming electronic ballasts. Tandem wiring
between luminaires shall not be used. Must be compatible with
dimmers specified under Section 26 27 26. Ballast shall start lamp at
any preset light output setting. Dimming control shall be by 0-10V
control circuit with a positive line voltage On/Off. Lutron TVE,
OSRAM/Sylvania Pho-Dim, Advance MarkVII or approved to provide
continuous, flicker free square law dimming from 100 percent output
to 10 percent output.
1 percent Dimming Electronic: Dimming electronic ballasts shall meet
all the specifications for non-dimming electronic ballasts. Tandem
wiring between luminaires shall not be used. Must be compatible with
dimmers specified under Section 26 27 26. Ballast shall start lamp at
any preset light output setting. Dimming control shall be by line
voltage control with a positive line voltage On/Off. Lutron Hi-Lume
approved to provide continuous, flicker free square law dimming
from 100 percent output to 1 percent output.
Magnetic Ballasts: Provide magnetic ballasts only where specifically
indicated in Luminaire Schedule. High power factor, rapid start,
energy efficient, full light output premium type or special types as
required by the luminaires and lamps specified, C.B.M. and UL labeled
class “P”, Advance Kool Koil Mark III, or equal. All ballasts shall be
fused with in line fuse located behind ballast compartment cover.
Ballasts shall be warranted against defects in materials and
workmanship for three years. The warranty shall include either a $10
replacement labor allowance or complete replacement including labor
by an agent of the manufacturer.
307
6.
B.
Compact Fluorescent:
1.
2.
C.
Ballasts shall operate a maximum of two lamps. Four lamp ballasts
shall not be provided.
Non-Dimming Electronic: Ballasts shall meet the requirements of UL
935, ANSI C82.11 and shall bear the appropriate UL label. Ballast shall
be suitable for lamp type(s) specified. Tandem wiring between
luminaires shall not be used. Ballast shall employ integral end-of- life
shutdown circuit with auto-reset to remove power from the lamp
when the ballast senses lamp failure. Advance, OSRAM/Sylvania,
Universal Lighting Technologies, or approved. Ballasts shall have the
following electrical characteristics:
a.
Series wired, Program Rapid Start circuitry.
b.
High frequency operation, >50kHz.
c.
The power factor shall be 98 percent or higher.
d.
The lamp crest factor shall measure 1.5 or less.
e.
The average Ballast Factor (BF) shall be a minimum of 98
percent.
f.
Total harmonic distortion of the input current to the electronic
ballast shall not exceed 10 percent of the input current and
comply with FCC rules and regulations Part 18 concerning the
generation of both EMF (electromagnetic interference) and RFI
(radio frequency interference).
g.
Minimum starting temperature of 0°F ambient. Maximum
operating temperature of 120°F ambient.
h.
Class “A” sound rated and UL Class “P” thermally protected.
5 percent Dimming Electronic: Ballasts shall meet all the
specifications for non-dimming electronic ballasts. Tandem wiring
between luminaires shall not be used. Must be compatible with
dimmers specified under section 26 27 26. Dimming control shall be
by line voltage control circuit with a positive line voltage On/Off.
Lutron Hi-Lume, Lutron Tu- Wire, Advance MarkX, or approved to
provide continuous, flicker free dimming from 100 percent output to 5
percent output.
High Pressure Sodium:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ballasts shall bear the appropriate UL label.
Ballast shall be designed for proper lamp/ballast ANSI S-series
designation suitable for lamp type specified.
Tandem wiring between luminaires shall not be used.
Constant Wattage Autotransformer (CWA): Ballast shall be provided
with fully wired, integral dry-film type capacitor and potted igniter.
Advance, Holophane, Universal Lighting Technologies, or approved.
308
5.
2.7
Ballasts shall have the following electrical characteristics:
a.
The ballasts shall tolerate an input voltage variation of ±10
percent with output (lamp) voltage within trapezoidal limits of
lamp operating voltage over lamp life.
b.
The power factor shall be 90 percent or higher.
c.
The lamp crest factor shall measure 1.6 or less.
d.
The average Ballast Factor shall be 100 percent under ANSI
C82.2 conditions.
e.
Minimum starting temperature of -40°F ambient.
Special types as indicated in Luminaire Schedule.
D.
All dimming ballasts controlled by a common controller shall be provided by
the same manufacturer.
E.
Ballasts used in enclosed and gasketed luminaires listed for use in wet
locations shall be of Type 1 construction.
F.
Ballasts shall be rated for the expected ambient temperature in which they
are installed. All exterior installed ballasts shall be rated to start the lamps at
0°F.
G.
Systems using tandem wired luminaires shall be labeled accordingly. Label
shall be in the lamp compartment of each luminaire and identify the function
of that luminaire. Label shall not be visible from room.
H.
Ballast housing shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections applied
thereto.
I.
Remote mounted ballasts shall be not be located beyond the distance
limitations specified by the ballast manufacturer.
FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY BALLASTS
A.
Emergency ballasts shall consist of a high-temperature, replaceable
maintenance-free nickel cadmium battery, integral charger, and electronic
circuitry enclosed in single compact case. A solid-state charging indicator
light to monitor the charger and battery, a double-pole test switch, and
installation hardware shall be provided.
B.
Emergency ballast shall operate lamps for a minimum of 90 minutes in the
emergency mode. Lumen output at end of 90 minutes shall be 60 percent of
initial lumen output per UL924.
C.
Emergency ballasts shall be UL listed for installation either inside or on top of
the luminaire and be warranted for a full five years from date of installation.
309
2.8
2.9
D.
Emergency ballast shall be installed and wired by the luminaire manufacturer
unless specified for field installation in the Luminaire Schedule.
E.
Emergency ballast shall be wired as either Nightlight (always on) or
switchable (with power failure sensing feed) as shown on the drawings.
F.
Emergency ballast shall be mounted in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation requirements.
G.
Initial lumen output (minimum) shall be the full lamp lumen output.
FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES
A.
Sheet metal housings: Minimum 22 gauge cold-rolled steel, with welded
joints. Exposed weld marks and seams filled and ground smooth.
B.
Door Frames for lensed luminaires: White painted, flat aluminum with
mitered corners, rotary cam latches to hinge from either side.
C.
Finish: Baked white dry polyester powder, unless otherwise specified, with a
minimum average reflectance of 85 percent on all exposed and light
reflecting surfaces. Steel components shall be prepared for finishing with a 5step zinc phosphating process prior to painting.
D.
Luminaires used as air-handling registers for HVAC systems shall meet the
requirements of NFPA 90A.
LINEAR FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES
A.
Extruded Aluminum Housing: One piece housing of AA 6063 T5 extruded
aluminum with 0.14 minimum thickness smooth and free of tooling lines in
one uninterrupted section of 1 foot to 24 foot with the cross sectional
dimensions as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. Section lengths shall be
as shown on the drawings and shall be such that the luminaire shall be able to
be transported into and out of the installation location after final construction
without any building demolition being required.
B.
Steel Housing: 20 gauge (0.7mm or 0.027”) minimum, free of dents,
scratches, or other defects. Exposed weld marks, joints and seams shall be
filled and sanded smooth before finishing. All edges shall be cleaned and
dressed to remove sharp edges or burrs. Section lengths shall be as shown
on the drawings comprised of 1 foot to 12 foot lengths.
310
C.
End Plates: Die cast end plates shall be mechanically attached without
exposed fasteners. End caps shall be minimum 0.125" thick.
D.
Where housing sections are joined together to form a continuous row, an
internal alignment spline shall be provided.
E.
Finish:
1.
All exposed aluminum surfaces shall be treated with an acid wash and
clear water rinse prior to painting. The luminaire shall then be
electrostatically painted or powder coated and oven baked in the color
indicated in the Luminaire Schedule.
F.
Lens: Mechanically secured from within the housing. Lens shall have interior
linear prisms with smooth exterior.
G.
Louvers and Reflectors:
1.
2.
H.
White Reflectors shall be steel or aluminum, minimum 22 gauge, with
hard baked white enamel finish with minimum 85 percent reflectance.
Alzak reflectors shall be low iridescent semi-specular or as indicated
in the Luminaire Schedule, Alzak® or Coilzak® with minimum
reflectance of 90 percent.
Suspension:
1.
2.
Suspension Devices, type as specified in the Luminaire Schedule:
a.
Aircraft Cable: Stainless steel type - 3/32” nominal diameter,
stranded, with positive pressure, field adjustable clamp at
fixture connection.
b.
Rigid Pendant: ½” nominal diameter or as specifically shown
on drawings. Supplied by fixture manufacturer when available
as standard product. At fixture end of stems, provide
earthquake type swivel fitting to permit 45° swing in any
direction away from vertical. Flat canopy to permit splice
inspection after installation.
c.
Chain hangers: Length to suit fixture mounting height if shown
or as field conditions dictate. Use two heavy duty chains with
“S” hooks at each suspension point. Length to suit mounting
height as shown on Drawings.
d.
Suspension system must permit ±13mm (1/2”) minimum
vertical adjustment after installation.
Supports:
a.
Provide internal safety cable from fixture body to stud in outlet
box.
311
312
b.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.10
Carry fixture weight to structure and provide horizontal
bracing from suspension points to ceiling framing to prevent
sideways shifting. Provide diagonal seismic restraint wires per
code.
Feed Point:
a.
Flat-plate canopy to cover outlet box, with holes for support
cable and power cord, concealed fasteners to permit splice
inspection after installation.
b.
At the electrified connection provide straight cord feed. Where
emergency feed is required, a separate feed point shall be
provided.
c.
Power cord: white multi-conductor cord, parallel to support
cable (aircraft cable); within pendant (rigid pendant); or
flexible conduit (chain hanger).
d.
Where emergency feed is required, a separate feed point shall
be provided.
Non-feed Points:
a.
13mm (1/2”) o.d. polished chrome end sleeve, inside threaded
1/4”-20, with 50mm (2”) diameter. Flat white plate to cover
hole in ceiling. Top of cable with ball swaged on end, to fit
inside sleeve.
b.
Contractor to provide support above ceiling as required.
Suspension method shall allow adjustment to be made in hanging
length to allow for variance in ceiling height.
All exposed paintable suspension components shall have the same
finish and color as the luminaire housing.
COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES
A.
Dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as
recommended by the luminaire manufacturer or as specified.
B.
Luminaire shall be designed and manufactured specifically for lamp type and
configuration provided.
Recessed: Equip with through wire junction box. Box, ballast and replaceable
components shall be accessible from the ceiling opening of the luminaire.
C.
D.
Adjustable Lamp Mechanisms: To have aiming stops which can be
permanently set to position lamp vertically and rotationally.
E.
Finish: All visible surfaces to be of color and texture as directed in Luminaire
Schedule. All concealed interior and exterior luminaire surfaces to be matte
black.
313
2.11
2.12
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LUMINAIRES
A.
Dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as
recommended by the luminaire manufacturer or as specified.
B.
Adjustable Lamp Mechanisms: To have aiming stops which can be
permanently set to position lamp vertically and rotationally.
C.
Finish: All visible surfaces to be of color and texture as directed in Luminaire
Schedule. All concealed interior and exterior luminaire surfaces to be matte
black.
D.
Suspension means shall be as indicated in Luminaire Schedule.
E.
Finish: All visible surfaces to be of color and texture as directed in Luminaire
Schedule. All concealed interior and exterior luminaire surfaces to be matte
black.
LED LUMINAIRES
A.
Dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as
recommended by the luminaire manufacturer or as specified.
B.
Recessed luminaires: Must be rated for use in recessed applications. If
required by the owner or design team, the manufacturer must produce test
data proving the product is rated for use in recessed applications.
C.
CRI: luminaires shall have a minimum Color Rendering Index (CRI) of 80 or
higher.
D.
Color temperature shall be per the luminaire schedule. The color temperature
shall not exceed a +/- tolerance of greater than 2 McAdam Elipses. Over the
life of the luminaire.
E.
Adjustable Lamp Mechanisms: To have aiming stops which can be
permanently set to position
F.
Lamp vertically and rotationally.
G.
Power Supply
1.
Integral:
a.
Rated for use with the LED array specified. Warranty array and
driver as an assembly. Five (5) year full replacement, nonprorated warranty is required on all electronic components.
314
2.
Remote:
a.
Rated for use with the LED array specified. Warranty array and
driver as an assembly. Five (5) year full replacement, nonprorated warranty is required on all electronic components.
H.
Finish: All visible surfaces to be of color and texture as directed in Luminaire
Schedule. All concealed interior and exterior luminaire surfaces to be matte
black or as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer.
I.
Testing: LED luminaires must meet the IES LM-79-08 and LM 80-08 testing
requirements. The manufacturer shall provide verification of testing
compliance upon request of the design team, contractor or owner.
J.
Disposal and replacement: The LED manufacturer is responsible for the
disposal of expired LED arrays and heat sinks. The fixture must be clearly
labeled with return information, disposal procedures and manufacturer
disposal contact information. All shipping will be paid for by the owner.
1.
2.
The manufacturer is required to inform the owner of new power
requirements and/or lumen output values if new replacement
components prior to shipping replacement parts.
Disposal and replacement information will be labeled inside the
luminaire and in the project operation and maintenance manuals
along with all O&M requirements listed in Division 1 of the
specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Installation shall meet the general requirements of NFPA 70, National Electric
Code.
B.
Mounting heights specified on drawings:
1.
2.
C.
Wall mounted luminaires: shall be to centerline of luminaire.
Pendant mounted luminaires: shall be to bottom of luminaire unless
specifically identified in the Luminaire Schedule or on drawings.
Support:
1.
The luminaires shall be supported by separate means from the
building structure and not from the ceiling system, ductwork, piping
or other systems.
315
2.
D.
3.2
3.3
The final decision as to adequacy of support and alignment will be
given by the Architect.
Level luminaires, align in straight lines, and locate as shown on the
architectural elevations and reflected ceiling plan.
E.
Manufacturer's labels or monograms shall not be visible after luminaire is
installed, but must be included for future reference.
F.
When lamping tungsten halogen luminaires use silk gloves to insert lamps.
G.
Tungsten halogen luminaires shall not be energized during construction to
prevent dust build up on lamp, socket and lamp chamber. Lamping shall
occur as last stage of construction.
H.
Recessed luminaires shall have trims which fit neatly and tightly to the
surfaces in which they are installed without light leaks or gaps. Where
necessary, install heat resistant non-rubber gaskets to prevent light leaks or
moisture from entering between luminaires trim and the surface to which
they are mounted.
COORDINATION OF WORK
A.
The Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans shall take preference as to the exact
placement of the luminaires in the ceiling.
B.
Determine ceiling types in each area and provide suitable accessories and
mounting frames where required for recessed luminaires. Luminaire catalog
numbers do not necessarily denote specific mounting accessories for type of
ceiling in which a luminaire may be installed.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Leave luminaires clean at the time of acceptance of the work. If luminaires
are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the work, the Contractor
shall clean them at no additional cost. Protective plastic wrap is to be
removed from parabolic luminaires just prior to owner acceptance.
B.
Provide fixtures with new lamps all operating at time of final acceptance.
Exception: For fluorescent dimming fixtures, provide minimum 100
hour/maximum 200 hour, continuously lit lamps or per ballast
manufacturer’s recommendations.
C.
Where incandescent lamps are used for construction lighting, the lamps shall
be replaced with new lamps just prior to occupancy by the owner.
316
317
D.
Provide to owner at time of project handoff 10 percent (minimum 4 items)
extra stock of each unique HID and fluorescent lamp type used on the project.
END OF SECTION
318
SECTION 26 56 19 ROADWAY LIGHTING
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 8-20 –
Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation Systems, and Electrical,
Section 9-29 – Illumination, Signal, and Electrical, and other sections referenced therein,
of the Standard Specifications, as amended herein.
ILLUMINATION, TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS, INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION
SYSTEMS, AND ELECTRICAL
8-20
MATERIALS
Standard Junction Box
Section 9-29.2(1) is supplemented with the following:
(February 1, 2007 COV)
Grounding
A ground rod shall be installed in each junction box that carries 110 volts or more.
(February 1, 2007 COV)
Modified Type 2 Junction Box
The modified Type 2 junction box shall be a QuaziteR Composolite Standard Box
Part Number PG2436BA18 with a QuaziteR Composolite Non-Locking Cover Part
Number PG2436WA00 or an approved equal. The junction box extension shall be
a QuaziteR Composite Extension Part Number PG2436EA08 or an approved equal.
The junction box, cover and extension shall be the same manufacturer’s product for
each installation, including an approved equal.
Standard Duty Junction Boxes
Section 9-29.2(1)A is supplemented with the following:
(January 7, 2013)
Concrete Junction Boxes
Both the slip-resistant lid and slip-resistant frame shall be treated with Mebac#1 as
manufactured by IKG industries, or SlipNOT Grade 3-coarse as manufactured by
W.S. Molnar Co. Where the exposed portion of the frame is ½ inch wide or less the
slip-resistant treatment may be omitted on that portion of the frame. The slipresistant lid shall be identified with permanent marking on the underside
indicating the type of surface treatment (“M1” for Mebac#1; or “S3” for SlipNOT
Grade 3-coarse) and the year manufactured. The permanent marking shall be
1/8 inch line thickness formed with a stainless steel weld bead.
319
Standard Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes
Section 9-29.2(2)A is supplemented with the following:
(January 7, 2013)
Both the slip-resistant lid and slip-resistant frame shall be treated with Mebac#1 as
manufactured by IKG industries, or SlipNOT Grade 3-coarse as manufactured by
W.S. Molnar Co. Where the exposed portion of the frame is ½ inch wide or less the
slip-resistant treatment may be omitted on that portion of the frame. The slipresistant lid shall be identified with permanent marking on the underside
indicating the type of surface treatment (“M1” for Mebac#1; or “S3” for SlipNOT
Grade 3-coarse) and the year manufactured. The permanent marking shall be 1/8
inch line thickness formed with a stainless steel weld bead.
Cover Markings
The second paragraph of Section 9-29.2(4) is revised to read as follows:
(February 1, 2007 COV)
Junction boxes shall be marked or embossed for use in accordance with the
Plans and the following schedule:
System Type
Lighting
Legend
STREET/LIGHTING
The inscription on all boxes used for the same function shall be consistent
throughout the project.
Cobra Head Luminaires
Section 9-29.10(1) is supplemented with the following:
(*****)
HPS cobra head luminaires shall be Lumec Schreder HBS Series E-18. The lamps
shall be of the wattage indicated in the Plans.
LED cobra head luminaires shall be either of the following LEOTEK ECobra-head
LED Street Lights, as indicated in the Plans:
•
•
EC3-10M-MV-NW-2-GY-700
EC7-20M-MV-NW-3-YY-530
The photo eye shall be ALR 20-90NPS.
320
PAYMENT
Section 8-21.5 is revised as follows:
(******)
Replace the Bid item “Illumination System, lump sum.” with the following Bid item:

26 56 19.01 Illumination System, lump sum.
END OF SECTION
321
SECTION 27 09 00 ITS CONDUIT SYSTEM
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 8-20 –
Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation Systems, and Electrical,
Section 9-29 – Illumination, Signal, and Electrical, and other sections referenced therein,
of the Standard Specifications, as amended herein.
ILLUMINATION, TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS, INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION
SYSTEMS, AND ELECTRICAL
8-20
MATERIALS
Cover Markings
The second paragraph of Section 9-29.2(4) is revised to read as follows:
(February 1, 2007 COV)
Junction boxes shall be marked or embossed for use in accordance with the
Plans and the following schedule:
System Type
Fiber Optic Communications
Legend
COMMUNICATIONS
The inscription on all boxes used for the same function shall be consistent
throughout the project.
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Conduit
Section 8-20.3(5) is revised to read as follows:
(June 1, 2010 COV)
A 12 gauge stranded tracer wire shall be installed in all empty conduits and all
conduits with fiber optic cable where fiber optic cable is being installed regardless
of whether the conduit is existing or new. A mule tape pull line shall be installed in
each conduit.
MEASUREMENT
Section 8-20.4 is supplemented with the following:
(******)
No unit of measure shall apply to the lump sum price for ITS Conduit System.
322
PAYMENT
Section 8-20.5 is supplemented with the following:
(******)
Add the following Bid item:

27 09 00.01 ITS Conduit System, lump sum.
The item ITS Conduit System includes furnishing and installing the complete conduit
system, modifying existing systems, or both, as described above and as shown in the Plans,
and herein specified, including excavation, backfilling, conduit, restoring facilities
destroyed or damaged during construction, salvaging existing materials, and for making
all required tests. For placing the conduit in accordance with the above provisions,
payment shall include all excavation, jacking, boring or drilling required, backfilling of
any voids around casing, conduits, pits, or trenches. All additional materials and labor not
shown in the plans, called for herein, or as directed by the Engineer that are required to
complete this work shall be included in the lump sum price.
END OF SECTION
323
SECTION 27 27 00 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK WIRING SYSTEMS
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 8-20 –
Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation Systems, and Electrical,
Section 9-29 – Illumination, Signal, and Electrical, and other sections referenced therein, of
the Standard Specifications, as amended herein.
ILLUMINATION, TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS, INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION
SYSTEMS, AND ELECTRICAL
8-20
MATERIALS
Section 9-29 is supplemented with the following materials:
Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The fiber optic field splices shall be enclosed in splice closures which shall be
complete with outer closure, splice organizer trays, brackets, clips, cable ties, seals
and sealant, as needed. The splice closure shall be suitable for a direct burial or
pull box application. Manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be supplied to the
Engineer prior to the installation of any splice closures. Location of the splice
closures shall be where a splice is required as shown on the Plans, designated by
the Engineer, or described in the Special Provisions.
The fiber optic splice closure shall be suitable for a temperature range of 0°C to 40°C.
The size of the closure shall allow all the fibers of the largest fiber optic cable to be
spliced to a second cable of the same size, plus 12 additional fibers. The closure
shall be not more than 22” in length and not more than 9” in diameter. One splice
closure shall fit into the fiber optic splice vault and shall leave sufficient space
for routing of the fiber optic communication cables, without exceeding the
minimum bending radius of any cable. The closures shall be designed to
accommodate butt splicing. The splice closure shall conform to the following
specifications:








Non-filled thermoplastic case
Rodent proof, water proof, re-enterable and moisture proof
Expandable from 2 cables per end to 8 cables per end by using adapter plates
Cable entry ports shall accommodate 10 mm to 25 mm diameter cables
Multiple grounding straps
Accommodate up to 8 splice trays
Suitable for "butt" or "through" cable entry configurations
Place no stress on finished splices within the splice trays
All materials in the closures shall be non-reactive and shall not support galvanic
cell action. The outer closure shall be compatible with the other closure
components, splice trays, and cables.
324
The end plate shall consist of two sections and shall have capacity for two fiber optic
trunk cables and 2 fiber optic branch cables.
The outer closure shall protect the splices from mechanical damage, shall provide
strain relief for the cable, and shall be resistant to salt corrosion.
The outer closure shall be waterproof, re-enterable and shall be sealed with a
gasket. The outer closure shall be flash-tested to manufacture recommended
pressure.
The inner closure shall be of metallic construction. The inner closure shall be
compatible with the outer closure and the splice trays and shall allow access to
and removal of individual splice trays. The splice trays shall be compatible with
the inner closure and shall be constructed of rigid plastic or metal.
Adequate splice trays shall be provided to splice all fibers of the largest fiber
optic cable, plus 12 fibers. Each splice shall be individually mounted and
mechanically protected in the splice tray.
Splice Tray
Splice trays must accommodate a minimum of 12 fusion splices and must allow for
a minimum bend radius of 2-inches. Splice trays shall be of the same
manufacturer as the splice closure or fiber distribution unit.
Managed Ethernet Edge Switch
The managed Ethernet switch (Edge Switches) shall be environmentally hardened
and intended for industrial applications. The Edge Switch shall be RuggedCom model
RS900G-HI-D-2SC10-XX.
Fiber Optic Cable and Patch Cords
General
The cable used for cable assemblies, pigtails, and patch cords shall be made of
fiber meeting the performance requirements of the fiber optic cable being
connected.
All connectors shall be factory installed. Field connections shall be limited
to splicing of adjoining cable ends and/or cables to pigtails.
Patch Cords
The Contractor shall furnish and install single-mode fiber optic patch cords
with LC/UPC or SC/UPC single mode style of connectors as indicated on
the Plans or in these Special Provisions.
Contractor shall confirm equipment configurations prior to ordering and
installing patch cords. Patch cords shall meet the following requirements:
325











3 mm jacket (outside diameter)
125 µm diameter cladding
8.3 µm (+/- .3 µm) core
Maximum factory measured insertion loss of 0.5 dB per EIA/TIA 455-171;
Less than 0.2 dB loss per EIA/TIA-455-1B, 300 cycles, 1.1 lbs. (0.5 kg);
Aramid yarn strength member; Rugged 0.12 inch (3 mm) (approximate)
PVC sheathing;
Minimum bend radius </= 3.0" (76 mm) following installation, </= 6.0"
(152 mm) during installation;
Fully connectorized patch cords and pigtail assemblies shall have a
minimum return loss of -50dB.
Comply with NEC requirements for indoor cable when used indoors
Rated by the manufacturer for use in outdoor field cabinets
Minimum 6 foot length
Single-mode patch cords shall have a yellow color on the body and/or boot
that renders them easily identifiable. Provide strain relief for jumper cables
at both ends and elsewhere as needed. Adhere to manufacturer
recommended installation and minimum bend radius requirements.
Pigtails
The Contractor shall furnish and install single mode fiber pigtails with
SC/UPC single mode style of connectors as indicated on the Plans or in these
Special Provisions.
Contractor shall confirm equipment configurations prior to ordering and
installing pigtails. Pigtails shall meet the following requirements:





900 µm coating (outside diameter)
125 µm diameter cladding
8.3 µm (+/- .3 µm) core
Maximum factory measured insertion loss of 0.5 dB per EIA/TIA 455-171
Minimum bend radius </= 1.2" (30 mm)
Connector shall be factory installed and meet the specifications listed
under Connectors.
Connectors
Connectors shall be factory installed and shall be 1.25 mm LC/UPC or 2.5
mm SC/UPC connector ferrule type with Zirconia Ceramic material and an
UPC (Ultra Physical Contact) pre-radiused tip. Connector type to use will
be as identified in the Plans. The minimum operating temperature range
shall be -40°C to + 75°C. Insertion loss shall not exceed 0.5 dB (bi directional
sum) for all single-mode connectors. Reflectance on all single-mode
connectors shall be at least -50 dB.
326
Splices
The fiber optic cable splices shall be the fusion type and shall not exceed
0.1 dB loss per splice (bi-directional average).
Category 6a Outdoor Ethernet Cable
The Category 6a cable furnished for installation outdoors shall be rated for outdoor
use and suitable for installation in a duct. Field terminate with RJ45 shielded
connectors and strain relief boots on both ends of the cable. The cable shall meet or
exceed the following requirements:
TIA/EIA 568C.2 Category 6a
Shielded twisted pair with 4 pair 24 AWG solid wire with drain wire
Operating temperature range: -30°F to +165°F
Suitable for use with 10G Base-L
Outer jacket: UV and abrasion resistant black polyethylene
Waterproof gel to prevent moisture migration






Category 6 Ethernet Cable
The Category 6 patch cable furnished for installation in equipment cabinets. Cable
shall be factory terminated with RJ45 connectors and strain relief boots on both
ends. The cable shall meet or exceed the following requirements:




TIA/EIA 568C.2 Category 6
Unshielded twisted pair with 4 pair 24 AWG wire
Operating temperature range: -30°F to +165°F
Suitable for use with 10G Base-L
Fiber Optic Cable
Section 9-29.3(1) is supplemented with the following:
(******)
All fiber optic cable shall be single-mode loose tube, suitable for the type of
installation indicated in the Plans and in the Special Provisions, and comply
with recommendations published in the International Telecommunication Union
(ITU) Telecommunication Standardization Sector of ITU (ITU- T).
The Contractor shall provide manufacturer's certification that the fiber optic
cable complies with ITU-T G.652B attributes.
Fiber optic cable(s) shall be able to withstand bending to a minimum radius of
10 times the cable outer diameter without tensile load applied and 20 times the
cable outer diameter with maximum load applied (during installation only),
without damage to the cable components or degradation of the optical fiber
performance.
327
The optical fibers shall be contained within loose buffer tubes. The loose
buffer tubes shall be stranded around an all dielectric central member in a
Reverse Oscillation Lay with Aramid yarn as the primary strength member and
a polyethylene sheath for overall protection. Each buffer tube shall contain
twelve (12) fibers except six fiber branch cable. Fiber counts are shown in the
Plans.
All glass shall be from the same manufacturer. The manufacture shall be ISO
9001 certified. The glass used shall be compatible with the existing single-mode
fiber optic cable used by the City.
All fibers in the buffer tube shall be factory attenuation tested at 1310nm and
1550nm. Fibers shall be usable and shall be sufficiently free of surface
imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical, and
environmental requirements of these Specifications. The attenuation of each
fiber shall be provided with each cable reel.
The central member shall be a glass reinforced plastic rod with similar
expansion and contraction characteristics as the optical fibers. A linear overcoat
of Low Density Polyethylene shall be applied to the central member of the
main trunk fiber cable to achieve the optimum diameter to provide the
proper spacing between buffer tubes during stranding.
Fillers may be included in the cable to lend symmetry to the cable cross-section
where needed. Filler rods shall be solid medium or high-density polyethylene.
The diameter of filler rods shall be the same as the outer diameter of the buffer
tubes.
Completed buffer tubes shall be stranded around the over-coated central
member using stranding methods, lay lengths and positioning such that the
cable shall meet mechanical, environmental and performance specifications. A
polyester binding shall be applied over the stranded buffer tubes to hold
them in place. Binders shall be applied with sufficient tension to secure the
buffer tubes to the central member without crushing the buffer tubes. The
binders shall be non-hygroscopic, non-wicking (or rendered so by the flooding
compound), and dialectic with low shrinkage.
Tensile strength shall be provided by high tensile strength Aramid yarns and
fiberglass that shall be helically stranded evenly around the cable core.
The outer jacket or sheath shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name, the
words “Fiber Optic Cable”, date of manufacture, and sequential foot markers.
The markings shall be repeated approximately every foot. The actual length of
the cable shall be within ± 1 percent of the length marking. The marking shall
328
be in a contrasting color to the cable jacket. The height of the marking shall be
approximately 3 mm (1/8 in.).
The completed cable shall be packaged for shipment on reels wrapped in
weather and temperature resistant covering. Both ends of the cable shall be
sealed to prevent the ingress of moisture.
Each end of the cable shall be securely fastened to the reel to prevent the cable
from coming loose during transit. Ten feet of cable length on each end of the
cable shall be accessible for testing.
Each cable reel shall have a durable weatherproof label or tag showing the
manufacturer's name, the cable type, the actual length of cable on the reel, the
Contractor's name, the contract number, and the reel number. A shipping record
shall also be included in a weatherproof envelope showing the above
information and also include the date of manufacture, cable characteristics (size,
attenuation, bandwidth, etc.), factory test results, cable identification number and
any other pertinent information.
Cables supplied with factory terminations on one end of the cable shall be
packaged for shipment in a manner that includes sufficient protection of the
connectors and splices during shipping and loading/unloading.
Fiber Optic Cable Warning Devices and Labeling
Add Section 9-29.3(1)B:
(******)
Fiber optic warning tags shall be attached to the fiber optic cable using UVresistant cable ties. Fiber optic warning tags shall be used in all pull boxes,
cable vaults and cabinets. The Contractor shall note the cable fiber count and
direction of the fiber optic cable on the warning tag using permanent marker.
Fiber Optic Cable Lubricant
The fiber optic cable lubricant shall meet or exceed the following requirements:



Compatible with the cable jacket
Non-combustible
Water-based leaving little or no residue
1RU 3-Plate Fiber Distribution Unit (FDU)
The FDU shall be mountable within a standard 19” rack. The FDU shall be a Bejed,
Inc. BJ-1961 or an approved equal. The FDU shall have the following properties:


Capacity to terminate a minimum of 36 fibers.
Capacity to accommodate three (3) coupler plates
329


Include coupler plate(s), each with twelve (12) factory terminated SC
connectors as shown. Contractor shall verify compatibility of coupler plates
with factory terminated fiber connectors prior to purchasing.
Include blank plates for all slots not occupied by coupler plates.
4RU 12-Plate Fiber Distribution Unit (FDU)
The FDU shall be mountable within a standard 19” rack. The FDU shall be a Bejed,
Inc. BJ-2118 or an approved equal. The FDU shall have the following properties:




Capacity to terminate a minimum of 144 fibers.
Capacity to accommodate twelve (12) coupler plates
Include coupler plate(s), each with twelve (12) factory terminated SC
connectors as shown. Contractor shall verify compatibility of coupler plates
with factory terminated fiber connectors prior to purchasing.
Include blank plates for all slots not occupied by coupler plates.
Fiber Optic Communication Patch Panels
Provide and install Fiber Optic Communication Patch Panels as shown. FCPPs shall
have 12 factory terminated SC/UPC style connectors within a single integrated and
sealed housing connected to a factory installed cable whip with bare fiber ends
suitable for fusion splicing. Fiber tail length shall be field verified by the Contractor.
Twelve fiber Fiber Optic Communication Patch Panels shall be Fiber Connections
Inc GatorPatch SC model G620J012FRBY-Z, Corning Zeux SC model ZP-00-58-12EBZDIX-X, or approved equal.
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
(******)
Fiber Optic Communications System
All existing traffic signal interconnect conduits and cables (copper or fiber optic)
shall be protected during construction activities except when actively moving fiber
from existing to new communications equipment. Due to the importance of
maintaining these communications, any damages to these cables and conduits
caused by the contractor or any of its affiliates shall be reported within 2 hours to
operations center dispatch at (360) 696-8177 and repaired within 48 hours unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. If this repair cannot be completed in the allotted
time, work will be done by the City, or its designee, and all costs, including any
overhead costs will be invoiced to the contractor.
330
Fiber Optic Communication Equipment
General
(******)
Fiber optic communications equipment shall be installed per the Plans.
Installation shall include all indicated equipment as well as all power
connections, mounting hardware, fiber distribution units, coupler plates, and
communications patch cables necessary to provide a complete and operational
communications over fiber optic pathways.
Provide the Ethernet edge switch to the City for configuration prior to installing
the switch in the cabinet.
Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The Contractor shall install the fiber optic splice closure in the splice vaults as
indicated in the plans and at any location where fibers are spliced outside of a
cabinet or building. The fiber optic splice closure shall be securely fastened or
bolted to a wall within the splice vault using standard hardware.
The Contractor shall provide all mounting hardware required to securely mount the
closures to the splice vault.
Within splice vaults, the fiber splice closure shall be mounted horizontally in a
manner that allows the cables to enter at the end of the closure.
The unprotected fibers exposed for splicing within the closure shall be protected
from mechanical damage using the fiber support tube or tubes and shall be
secured within the fiber splice closure. Upon completion of the splices, the splice
trays shall be secured to the inner closure.
The Contractor shall verify the quality of each splice prior to sealing the splice
closure. The splice closure shall not be sealed until link testing is performed and
is approved by the Engineer.
The closure shall be sealed using a procedure recommended by the manufacturer
that will provide a waterproof environment for the splices.
Care shall be taken at the cable entry points to ensure a tight salt resistant and
waterproof seal is made which will not leak upon aging. It is acceptable to have
multiple patch cords enter the fiber splice closure through one hole as long as all
spaces between the cables are adequately sealed.
331
Fiber Optic Cables, Patch Cords, Pigtails
Distribution involves connecting the fibers to the active electronic components.
The distribution equipment consists of FDUs with connector panels, couplers,
splice trays, fiber optic patch cords and cable assemblies with connectors. The
distribution interconnect package shall be assembled and tested by a company
who is regularly engaged in the assembly of these packages. All distribution
components shall be products of manufacturers, who are regularly engaged in the
production of these components, and the respective manufacturers shall have
quality assurance programs.
Branch cables shall terminate in each traffic signal controller cabinet in a fiber
distribution unit mounted inside the traffic signal controller cabinet. For
terminating the branch cables, fiber optic pigtails with factory installed SC/UPC
connectors shall be spliced to each of the branch cables. Refer to the Plans for
splicing and termination requirements.
Fiber Optic Strand and Patch Cord Labeling
Permanent labels shall be used to identify fibers and patch cords at each termination
point. The labels shall consist of white colored heat shrink wraps with identification
based on the schematic shown in the Plans.
Fiber Optic Communication Cable
General
The Contractor shall provide and install single-mode loose tube fiber optic cable
with the specified number of single-mode optical fibers, suitable for the
application identified in the project Plans. The single-mode optical fibers shall
satisfy the mechanical and performance specifications requirements set forth in
Sections 9-29.3(1) and 9-29.3(1)A of the Standard Specification and these Special
Provisions.
All installed fiber optic cables shall be continuous in length. No splices or
terminations will be accepted except for as shown on the Plans or as approved by
the Engineer. At no time will splicing be allowed within underground conduits.
Installation procedures and technical support information shall be furnished at
the time of delivery. Installation procedures shall be in conformance with the
procedures specified by the cable manufacturer for the specific cable being installed.
All cable installation work shall be carried out in accordance and consistent with
the highest standards of quality and craftsmanship in the communication
industry with regard to the electrical and mechanical integrity of the connections;
the finished appearance of the installation; as well as the accuracy and
completeness of the documentation.
332
The Contractor shall make a physical survey of the project site for the purpose of
establishing the exact cable routing and cutting lengths prior to commencement of
any fiber optic work.
During cable installation, the bend radius shall be maintained at a minimum of
twenty times the outside diameter of the cable. After installation, the bend radius
shall be maintained at a minimum of ten times the outside diameter of the cable.
Branch cables shall terminate in each traffic signal controller cabinet in a fiber
distribution unit (FDU) mounted inside the traffic signal controller cabinet. Fibers
from the branch cable shall be spliced to factory connectorized fiber optic pigtails
within the FDU.
During installation, the Contractor shall keep a log that notes the lineal foot
marking on the cable at every junction box
Codes and Standards
Material, equipment and installation shall meet all applicable portions of the NEC
and NESC (latest versions).
Quality Assurance
Products utilized shall be serialized and the manufacturer’s quality assurance
organization shall maintain configuration and modification status management
traceable to serial number.
The Contractor shall inspect all material delivered to the construction site to
validate that it is of new manufacture, is free from visible damage, and good
workmanship has been utilized. Verify that the product is the correct model and
configuration as approved by the Engineer and as purchased by the Contractor.
Replace any defective and/or non-conforming equipment installed at Contractor’s
cost. Poor workmanship will be cause for rejection of the material delivered and
installed by the contractor. (Poor Workmanship is as defined by the Society of
Quality Assurance.).
Material Submittals
Within a minimum of 30 calendar days prior to the anticipated construction,
provide all documentation, pertaining to the materials and method of execution
proposed to satisfy the requirements of this section. The Engineer's approval is
required prior to the committing of any materials or the commencement of any
work.
The Engineer will either approve or disapprove each submitted item within 10
working days of submittal subject to the completeness of the contractor's
submittal. Actual elapsed time for the Engineer's review is dependent upon the
completeness and appropriateness of the documentation being submitted. Any
deficiencies in the Contractor's submittals shall require additional time for
333
approval. Any delays caused by such deficiencies shall not be grounds for extension
of project consideration dates.
A submittal shall be submitted for each type of fiber optic cable, fiber optic cable
assembly and construction item included in the bid list, described in the special
provisions and shown in the Plans. All submittals shall have detailed information
that prove each particular item meets every aspect of the requirements listed for
that item in the Special Provisions or the Plans.
The Engineer's approval of any submitted documentation shall in no way relieve
the Contractor from compliance with the safety and performance requirements as
specified herein.
In addition, keep on the job site one set of project plans showing any work that
has been constructed or located differently than shown. Upon completion of the
work and prior to acceptance of the project, this “As-Built” set of plans shall be
certified by the Contractor, delivered to the Engineer.
Installation
General
Supervision of the materials and installation requirements, as specified herein,
shall be provided to insure a complete operating communication system. All test
results and installations shall be certified and submitted to the Engineer prior to
final acceptance and payment.
Installation procedures and technical support information shall be furnished at
the time of delivery. Installation procedures shall be in conformance with the
procedures specified by the cable manufacturer for the specific cable being
installed. The contractor shall submit the manufacturer’s recommended
procedures for pulling fiber optic cable at least 20 working days prior to
installing cable. Mechanical aids may be used provided that a tension measuring
device, and a breakaway swivel are placed in tension to the end of the cable. The
tension in the cable shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended pulling
tension.
The cable grips for installing the fiber optic cable shall have a ball bearing swivel to
prevent the cable from twisting during installation.
Fiber optic cable shall be installed using a cable pulling lubricant recommended by
the fiber optic cable and/or the innerduct manufacturer, and a pull tape
conforming to the provisions described under "conduit". Contractor’s personnel
shall be stationed at each splice vault and pull box through which the cable is to
be pulled to lubricate and prevent kinking or other damage.
334
Any mid-span access splice or FDU termination shall involve only those fibers being
spliced as shown in the Plans. Cable splices shall be located in splice closures,
installed in splice vaults shown in the Plans. A minimum of 50 feet of slack shall be
provided for each fiber optic cable at each splice vault. Slack shall be divided equally
on each side of the fiber optic splice closure.
Unless shown or provided otherwise, only fiber optic cable shall be installed in each
innerduct. Pulling a separate fiber optic cable into a spare duct to replace damaged
fiber will not be allowed.
Required Qualifications for Installers
Individuals performing fiber optic terminations and splices shall possess a
current Fiber Optics Installer or Fiber Optics Technician Certification recognized
by the Electronics Technicians Association (ETA) or a current Fiber Optics for ITS
Design Technician Level II certificate from the International Municipal Signal
Association (IMSA). Submit a copy of the certification to the Engineer for approval
prior to performing any work.
The fiber optic cable installation shall be supervised by an individual who possesses a
current Fiber Optic Technician Outside Plant (FOT-OSP) certification that is
designed for those installing outside plant single-mode fiber optic networks. The
certification shall be recognized by the Electronics Technicians Association (ETA).
The individual with the certification shall be present whenever the fiber optic cable
is being installed. Submit a copy of the certification to the Engineer for approval
prior to performing any work.
The forms provided in the bid documents shall be completed for all fiber optic cable
installations. The forms shall be submitted within ten (10) days following the bid
opening. Firms and/or individuals that do not meet the requirements identified
on the forms shall not be permitted to do the work indicated. When a firm or
individual is not approved to do work on the fiber optic installation, a re-submittal
of the forms for new firms and/or individuals shall be made within 15 working days
following the written notice of rejection.
The Contractor shall provide on the forms in the bid documents information on
the supervision of the fiber optic cable installation as well as overall supervision
of all work necessary to ensure a complete operational system when the
construction is completed. The Contractor shall provide evidence that the firm
and related personnel has the minimum qualifications required.
The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a schedule and sequence of work
for the communications system installation including the sequence and method to
be used for the fiber optic cable installation.
335
The contractor’s submittal shall include the identity of the individual who will
supervise the fiber optic cable installation and name of the firm that will install
the fiber optic cable. Said submittal shall include a description of the material;
components, equipment and related information to identify what will be
furnished and installed by the Contractor. The submittal shall be provided on
forms that can be obtained from the Engineer.
Changes in the information submitted on the forms will not be permitted, except as
approved by the Engineer. All requested changes shall be writing to the Engineer
and shall be provided with a justification for the proposed change.
Quality Workmanship
All cable installation work shall be carried out in accordance and consistent with
the highest standards of quality and craftsmanship in the communication
industry with regard to the electrical and mechanical integrity of the connections;
the finished appearance of the installation; as well as the accuracy and
completeness of the documentation.
Fiber Optic Cable Protection During Installation
Care shall be exercised during cable pulls through conduit bends and looping in
junction boxes.
Jacket damage will require a new cable run. Repair of cable jacket will not be
permitted.
A cable feeder guide shall be used between the cable reel and the face of the
duct and conduit to protect the cable and guide it off the reel and into the duct.
The cable shall be carefully inspected for jacket defects as it is removed from the
reel. If defects are noticed, the pulling operation shall be stopped immediately and
the Engineer notified.
Precautions shall be taken during installation to prevent the cable from being
kinked or crushed.
A pulling eye shall be attached to the cable end and be used to pull the cable
through the duct and conduit system.
Dynamometers or break away pulling swings shall be used to ensure the pullingline tension does not exceed the installation tension values specified by the cable
manufacturer. The mechanical stress placed upon the cable during installation shall
not be such that the cable is twisted and stretched.
The pulling of the cable shall be hand-assisted at each hand hole or junction box.
The cable shall not be crushed, kinked or forced around a sharp corner. Sufficient
slack shall be left at each end of the cable to allow proper cable termination.
336
Additional slack of two (2) turns of cable shall be left at each junction box except
those that are Type 1 or 2 sizes. At each junction box and at each cabinet the cable
shall be visibly marked as follows:
“CAUTION - FIBER OPTIC CABLE”
The maximum length of cable pulling tensions shall not exceed the cable
manufacturer’s recommendations. Additional cable shall be neatly coiled in
vaults, junction boxes, and cabinets as indicated in the Plans.
Only fibers within a buffer tube that are designated for splicing shall be accessed,
spliced, and secured neatly within the splice tray. The remaining fibers in the buffer
tube that are not designated for splicing shall be secured neatly within the splice
tray and not cut. Removal of the buffer tube to access the fibers shall be
accomplished using equipment specifically designed for buffer tube removal
without damaging the individual coated fibers.
Splicing
Field splices shall be done in splice vaults or cabinets, as shown. All splices made in
splice vaults shall be secured in splice trays, housed in a splice closure. All splices in
cabinets shall be secured in splice trays housed in FDUs.
Unless otherwise specified, fiber splices shall be the fusion type. All splices shall be
protected with a metal reinforced thermal shrink sleeve.
The individual fibers shall be looped one full turn within the splice tray to avoid
micro bending. A 2-inch minimum bend radius shall be maintained during
installation and after final assembly in the optical fiber splice tray. Each bare fiber
shall be individually restrained in a splice tray. The optical fibers in buffer tubes and
the placement of the bare optical fibers in the splice tray shall be such that there is
no discernable tensile force on the optical fiber.
Fiber Optic Cable Termination
Fiber optic cable terminations shall be factory prepared. No field terminations will be
allowed.
Restoration of Existing Cable and Wires
At locations where the Contractor must remove existing conductors to install the
new fiber cable, the Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the existing cable
and wiring is reconnected exactly as found or as specified in the plans and is left
fully functional after new cables are installed. The Contractor shall conduct tests, in
the presence of the Engineer, to record the operational condition of existing wires
and cables prior to removal.
337
Fiber Optic Testing
General
Modems and Ethernet switches shall not be installed with connection to the
controllers until all fiber optic tests have been completed, all fiber test
documentation has been approved by the Engineer, and the system is prepared for
operational status.
Fiber Optic Cable Testing Procedure
OTDR testing shall be done at the following points in the system construction
and shall include each/all individual fibers within the cable unless specified
otherwise:






Existing fiber to be used with this project
At the factory
At cable delivery to the Contractor (test performed one direction at 1550nm)
Prior to new cable installation (existing fiber optic cable trunk line, test
performed at 1310 and 1550nm bi-directionally)
Following new cable installation prior to termination and splicing (test
performed one direction at 1550 nm)
End to End following installation of all splices, patch cords, pigtails,
connectors and termination devices (test performed at 1310 and 1550nm bidirectionally for fiber runs terminated on both ends and one direction for
fibers terminated on one end)
The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation and
materials necessary to perform all testing. The Engineer shall be notified five (5)
working days prior to all field tests. The notification shall include the exact
location or portion of the system to be tested.
Documentation of all test results shall be provided to the Engineer within five (5)
working days after the test involved. The Engineer will not accept any fiber optic
testing work for payment until all fiber optic test documentation has been
completed by the contractor and approved by the Engineer.
Prior to arrival of the cable, the Contractor shall provide detailed test procedures
for all field testing. The procedures shall include the tests involved and how the
tests are to be conducted.
Existing Fiber Testing
Existing fiber optic cables shall be tested and documented prior to completing
any modification work including cutting, terminating, splicing, or moving cables.
Test fiber optic existing strands that will have work performed on with an OTDR
at 1310 and 1550nm bi-directionally. Document existing end points, length,
continuity, and anomalies. Copies of traces and test results shall be submitted to
338
the Engineer. Existing fiber optic cables and strands that require testing are
documented in the Fiber Optic Testing Report which is available from the
Engineer.
Factory Testing
Verification of the fiber specifications as listed in the Fiber Characteristics Table
shall be supplied by the manufacturer with the appropriate documentation. After
cabling, before shipment but while on the shipping reel, 100 percent of all fibers
shall be tested for attenuation. Copies of the results shall be (1) maintained on file
by the manufacturer with a file identification number for a minimum of 7 years,
(2) attached to the cable reel in a waterproof pouch, and (3) submitted to the
Contractor and to the Engineer.
At Cable Delivery to Contractor
At delivery of the cable to the Contractor, the Contractor shall perform OTDR
testing at 1550nm in one direction on 100 percent of all fibers to ensure fiber
continuity.
Test results shall be recorded, dated, compared and filed with the previous copies
of these tests. The Contractor shall record all test results on the cable verification
form provided at the end of this section. Copies of traces and test results shall be
submitted to the Engineer. If the OTDR test results are unsatisfactory, the fiber
optic cable shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. The new cable shall
then be tested to demonstrate acceptability. Copies of the test results shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
Attenuation tests shall be performed with an OTDR capable of recording and
displaying anomalies of 0.02 dB as a minimum.
The OTDR shall have a printer capable of producing a verifying test trace with fiber
identification.
After New Cable Installation
After the fiber optic cable has been pulled but before breakout and termination,
100 percent of all the fibers shall be tested with an OTDR for attenuation. Test
results shall be recorded, dated, compared and filed with the previous copies of
these tests. The Contractor shall record all test results on the cable verification
form provided at the end of this section. Copies of traces and test results shall be
submitted to the Engineer. If the OTDR test results are unsatisfactory, the fiber
optic cable shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. The new cable shall then
be tested to demonstrate acceptability. Copies of the test results shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
339
Attenuation tests shall be performed with an OTDR capable of recording and
displaying anomalies of 0.02 dB as a minimum. Single-mode fibers shall be tested
at 1310 nm and 1550 nm. Attenuation readings for each direction shall be
recorded on the cable verification form provided at the end of this section.
The OTDR shall have a printer capable of producing a verifying test trace with fiber
identification.
Outdoor Splices
Before outdoor splices are enclosed within sealed splice closures, all splices shall be
tested with an OTDR at 1310 nm and at 1550 nm. Splice losses shall be measured
and recorded by the splicing equipment (using LSA). This measurement shall not
be used in lieu of OTDR testing of the fiber at 1310nm and 1550nm. The
Contractor shall record all test results on the cable verification form provided at
the end of this section. Measurement results shall be recorded, dated, validated
by the OTDR trace printout and filed with the records of the respective cable
runs. Copies of traces and test results shall be submitted to the Engineer. If the
OTDR test results are unsatisfactory, the splice shall be unacceptable. The
unsatisfactory splice shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. The new splice
shall then be tested to demonstrate acceptability. Copies of the test results shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
System Verification at Completion
OTDR Testing
Once the passive cabling system has been installed and is ready for activation, 100
percent of the fiber links shall be tested with the OTDR for attenuation at 1310nm
and 1550 nm. A hard copy printout and an electronic copy of the traces and test
results along with a licensed copy of the associated software shall be submitted to
the Engineer. If the OTDR test results are unsatisfactory the link shall be replaced
at the Contractor's expense. The new link shall then be tested to demonstrate
acceptability. Copies of the test results shall be submitted to the Engineer.
A 1000-meter dead zone box shall be inserted between the OTDR and the
connectorized fiber span.
The OTDR test results shall be plotted at a scale of at most 1 dB per division on the
vertical scale. It shall have a dynamic range of at least 30dB at 1310nm and
distance measurement accuracy of ± 0.01 percent.
Optical links shall be designated in the test results by indicating the label identifier
on each drop cable and by identifying the field cabinet at which light was launched.
The OTDR trace results shall automatically mark the physical location of each
splice or connector. The notation shall be clear and understandable.
340
The OTDR shall be of a manufacturer recommended by the cable supplier. The
OTDR operator shall hold a current operators certificate for the equipment used.
This certificate shall represent no less than eight (8) hours of training from the
equipment manufacture. This certificate shall be presented to the Engineer at the
start of testing.
The OTDR test results shall include the following information and measurements:









OTDR trace (as described above)
Total measured length of the optical link
Total attenuation of the optical link
Attenuation per kilometer or kilo foot
Mean attenuation of each splice in the optical link under test
Wavelength of the measurement
Location of the test and fiber being tested
Name of the technician performing the test
Date tests performed
Power Meter and Light Source
At the conclusion of the final OTDR testing, 100 percent of all fibers shall be tested
end to end with a power meter and light source, in accordance with EIA Optical Test
Procedure 171 and in the same wavelengths specified for the OTDR tests. These
tests shall be conducted in both directions. Test results shall be recorded, compared
and proven to be within the design link loss budgets, and filed with the other
recordings of the same links. Test results shall be submitted to the Engineer.
The power meter/light source test results shall be printed in an Excel table that lists
each fiber tested and provides the results of both wavelength measurements and
the measurement taken from each end of the fiber run. The table shall include the
following:





Total attenuation of the optical link at 1310 and 1550nm from each end of the
fiber run
Wavelength of the measurement
Location of the power meter and light source for each test performed
Name of the technician performing the test
Date tests performed
The end to end total attenuation shall not exceed the sum of the maximum allowable
attenuation for the component cable segments, splices, and typical loss for
connectors. If any fiber in a cable exceeds the allowable loss, the Contractor shall
take corrective measures to bring the cable’s total attenuation below the
allowable limit, including replacement of the cable at the Contractor’s expense.
341
Test Failures
If during any of these system verification tests, the results prove to be unsatisfactory,
the fiber optic cable will not be accepted. The unsatisfactory segments of cable shall
be replaced with a new segment of cable at the Contractor's expense. The new
segment of cable shall undergo the same testing procedure to determine
acceptability. Copies of the test results shall be submitted to the Engineer. The
removal and replacement of a segment of cable shall be interpreted as the removal
and replacement of a single contiguous length of cable connecting two splices, two
connectors, or a splice and a connector. The removal of only the small section
containing the failure and therefore introducing new unplanned splices will not be
allowed.
Test Documentation
The results of system link insertion loss testing shall be recorded along with the test
date, name of person performing the test, and the brand name, model number
and serial number of the equipment used during the test.
As-Built Records
The Contractor shall provide the City with a cable route diagram indicating the
actual cable route and “”meter marks”” for all intersections, directional change
points in the cable routing, and all termination points. The Contractor shall
record these points during cable installation. Cable system “”as-built”” drawings
showing the exact cable route shall be provided by the Contractor to the City.
Information such as the location of slack cable and its quantity shall also be recorded
in the cable route diagram.
At all vaults and cabinets where fiber optic splicing, terminations, or patching work
is performed: verify existing splices, terminations, and patches and document on
Agency-provided as-built record drawings.
Implementation Quality
The optical fiber transmission media and related hardware shall be implemented in a
manner that is consistent with industry standards, modern telecommunications
and electronic design principles, and compatible with requirements for efficient
system maintenance.
The Contractor’s equipment, materials, and installation procedures shall conform to
all applicable codes and accepted industry standards and practices.
Fiber Testing
General
The fiber will not be accepted until the testing of the fiber is completed and the
fiber satisfactory passes the testing as defined herein.
342
Test Failures
If the link loss measured from the power meter and light source exceeds the
calculated link loss, the fiber optic link will not be accepted.
The contractor shall replace the unsatisfactory segments of cable, splices and/or
connectors that were installed as part of the project at no additional cost to the City.
A complete Power Meter and Light Source Test and Cable Verification Worksheet
will be required to be completed by the Testing Contractor for any repaired
segments to determine acceptability. Submit copies of the test results to the
Engineer.
Allowed Losses.
Allowed loss per km of fiber: 0.4 dB/km @ 1310nm; 0.3 dB/km @ 1550nm
Allowed link loss per fusion splice: 0.1 dB (bi-directional average)
Allowed link loss per individual connector: 0.375 dB
Allowed link loss per connector pair: 0.75 dB
Communications Subsystem Testing – After Installation
(******)
Subsystem testing shall include testing the communications between traffic signal
controllers and shall include the Ethernet edge switches, Ethernet hub switch, and
related connections as directed herein or as directed by the Engineer. A “ping”
test shall be conducted to demonstrate that all components (edge switch, traffic
signal controller, splices, terminations, patch cords, fiber distribution units, and
fiber optic cable) are compatible and make a complete and operational
communications network. The Contractor shall record and deliver the results of
the “ping” test to the engineer for approval; this record may be a screen capture
of the actual test with text added to indicate the test locations (see end of this
section for an example of the record). The Contractor shall coordinate with the City
of Vancouver for IP addressing of the traffic signal controllers, and Ethernet
switches. The Contractor shall submit a testing schedule for review and approval a
minimum of two weeks prior to any testing. No testing shall be conducted until
approval has been received from the Engineer.
The Contractor may submit an alternative test plan. This plan is to be
summarized in writing and provided to the project Engineer for review and
approval a minimum of two weeks prior to any testing. No testing shall be conducted
until approval has been received from the Engineer.
343
Other Systems
Install materials and equipment as shown on the plans, according to these
specifications, and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Contractor
shall install the following systems:




Ticket Vending Machine System - Install ticket vending machine and
associated equipment.
Ticket Validator - Install ticket validator and associated equipment.
Transit Arrival Information Sign - Install transit arrival information sign and
associated equipment.
CCTV Camera – Install CCTV camera and associated equipment.
Ticket Vending Machines, Ticket Validators, Transit Arrival Information Signs, and
CCTV Cameras will be furnished by others for installation by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall furnish and install all associated equipment required for the
installation of the systems listed above. Major components include wiring,
foundations, and mounting hardware.
Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the vendor regarding the
installation of the systems listed above.
Planned Disruptions and System Restoration
The Contractor shall schedule the work and predetermine the affected system(s),
extent, start time, and duration of planned disruptions. The Contractor shall notify
the Agency at least seven (7) days in advance of any planned disruption. Planned
disruptions of the fiber optic communications systems shall be scheduled between
the hours of 8:30 a.m. and 2 p.m. Failure of the Contractor to restore disrupted
fiber optic communications prior to 2 p .m. will constitute an unplanned
disruption, and the "Restoration Procedure" below will apply.
Any unplanned disruptions determined by the Engineer to be caused by the actions
of the Contractor or the Contractor's representative(s) shall be corrected by the
Contractor at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.
Upon the occurrence of an unplanned disruption and subsequent notification by
the Engineer, the Contractor shall immediately stop all other work in progress, in
accordance with Section 1 08.6, and shall expend all efforts to restore the disrupted
system(s) or correct the problem causing the disruption. The Contractor will not be
granted an extension of time for delays caused by the repair of disrupted systems.
Unplanned disruptions shall result in the assessment of liquidated damages in
accordance with the subsection Liquidated Damages of Section 1-08
PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS.
344
MEASUREMENT
Section 8-20.4 is supplemented with the following:
(******)
No unit of measure shall apply to the lump sum prices for communication
equipment, fiber optic communication cable testing, ticket vending machine
system installation, ticket validator installation, and transit arrival information sign
installation.
Fiber optic cable will be measured by the linear foot of completed installation
measured along the surface of the cable route between junction boxes, poles and
termination points. Measurement will include cable coiled in junction boxes and
termination points.
Approved fiber optic splices will be measured per each for each fiber strand spliced.
PAYMENT
Section 8-20.5 is supplemented with the following:
(******)
Add the following Bid items:









27 27 00.01 Communication Equipment, lump sum.
27 27 00.02 Loose Tube Fiber Optic Cable, per linear foot.
27 27 00.03 Fiber Optic Communication Cable Splicing, per each.
27 27 00.04 Fiber Optic Splice Closure, per each.
27 27 00.05 Fiber Optic Communication Cable Testing, lump sum.
27 27 00.06 Ticket Vending Machine System Installation, lump sum.
27 27 00.07 Ticket Validator Installation, lump sum.
27 27 00.08 Transit Arrival Information Sign Installation, lump sum.
27 27 00.09 CCTV Camera Installation, lump sum.
The item Communications Equipment consists of managed and environmentally
hardened Ethernet Edge switches, fiber distribution units, CAT6 cables and any
incidentals necessary to provide a complete and operational communications
subsystem.
The item Loose Tube Fiber Optic Cable shall include furnishing and installing fiber
optic cable in new and existing conduits as shown in the plans and includes all
labor and hardware necessary for the installation.
The item Fiber Optic Communications Cable Splicing shall include fiber optic splices
as shown in the plans. No fiber splices other than those shown in the Plans or
approved by the Engineer will be allowed. Should new or existing fiber optic
cable become damaged due to construction activities, complete cable segment
345
replacement will be required (at the Contractors expense), unless at the
discretion of the Engineer and at the Contractors expense, splicing is deemed
acceptable.
The item Fiber Optic Splice Closure shall include furnishing and installing fiber optic
splice closures.
The item Fiber Optic Communication Cable Testing shall include all labor,
equipment, materials and incidentals necessary to perform fiber optic system
testing as indicated in these special provisions. All additional materials and labor not
shown in the plans, called for herein, or as directed by the Engineer that are
required to complete the testing shall be included in the lump sum price.
The items Ticket Vending Machine System Installation, Ticket Validator
Installation, Transit Arrival Information Sign Installation, and CCTV Camera
Installation shall include installing equipment furnished by others, and furnishing
and installing any additional materials required to complete the installation.
Major components include wiring, foundations, and mounting hardware. All
additional materials and labor not shown in the plans, called for herein, or as
directed by the Engineer that are required to complete this work shall be included
in the lump sum price.
346
Form for FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Identify below the name and address of the firm which will install the fiber optic cable.
Name of Firm:
Address of Firm:
Telephone of Firm:
______________________________
B. List below any qualifications and two (2) or more years of experience in fiber optic
cable installations of the firm identified in A above.
IF ADDITIONAL SPACE IS NEEDED, USE THE REVERSE SIDE
347
Form for FIBER OPTIC CABLE SUPERVISION
C. Identify below the name and address of the firm which will supervise the installation of
the fiber optic cable along with the name of the person who will supervise the cable
installation.
Name of person who will supervise the cable installation:
Name of Firm:
Address of Firm:
Telephone of Firm:
______________________________
D. List below the qualifications and two or more years of experience in the supervision of
fiber optic cable installations of the firm and person identified in C above.
IF ADDITIONAL SPACE IS NEEDED, USE THE REVERSE SIDE
348
Cable Verification Worksheet
Contract No.
Contractor:
Operator:
Date:
Link Number:
Fiber Number:
Test Wavelength (Circle one):
Expected Location of fiber ends:
1310 1550
End 1:
End 2:
OTDR
Test
Results:
Forward Loss:
Reverse Loss: [(1A+1B)/2]
Average Loss:
dB
dB
dB
1A
1B
1C
Power Meter and Light Source Test Results:
Forward Loss:
Reverse Loss:
Average Loss [(2A + 2B)/2]:
dB
dB
dB
2A
2B
2C
km
dB
3A
3B
3C
dB
4B
4C
Calculated Fiber Loss
Length of the link (from OTDR):
Allowed loss per km of fiber:
Total Allowed Loss due to the fiber (3A * 3B):
Calculated Splice Loss Number
of Splices in the Link: Allowed
Link Loss per Splice:
0.4 dB/km
4A
0.10 dB
Total Allowed Loss due to Splices (4A * 4B):
Calculated Link Loss Connector
Loss:
Total Link Loss (5A + 3C + 4C):
0.9 dB
dB
5A
5B
Cable Verification:
Compare Power Meter Average Loss to Calculated
Link Loss
dB
6A
(2C - 5B):
If the value of 6A is greater than zero, the link has
failed the Test. See Test Failures in 00995.42 d4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------To Be Completed by Agency:
Engineer's Signature:
Cable Link Accepted:
349
Example of “Ping” Test Output
END OF SECTION
350
SECTION 31 15 00 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND ROADSIDE CLEANUP (SECTION 2-01)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 201, Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup, and other sections referenced
therein, of the Standard Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
D.
01 56 39 – Vegetation Protection and Restoration
31 23 35 – Roadway Excavation and Embankment
Measurement
1.
2.
E.
The Work in this Section consists of removing and disposing of
trees, snags, stumps, shrubs, brush, down timber, vines, and other
vegetative growth or debris, and the trimming and shaping of trees
within the areas defined on the Contract Plans or as specified herein.
Also includes stripping of organic material prior to construction of
improvements.
“Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup” will be measured by
surface area of vegetation removed within the excavation limits. No
separate measurement will be made for stump removals as shown in
the contract plans.
“Tree Removal” will be measured by the unit quantity of trees removed
larger than 2-inch diameter and includes necessary materials,
equipment, and labor to fell the tree, mulch or otherwise dispose of the
tree, haul of refuse and any associated disposal fees. Removal of trees
smaller than 2-inches in diameter shall be considered incidental to
“Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup.” Removal of stumps is
incidental to “Clearing, Grubbing, and `Roadside Cleanup.”
Payment
1.
2.
Accepted clearing, grubbing and roadside cleanup will be paid for at
the Contract unit price for "Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside
Cleanup."
The Contract price paid for each item will be payment in full for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and
doing all Work necessary to complete the Work specified.
351
3.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item
31 15 00.01
31 15 00.02
Pay Unit
Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup AC
Tree Removal
EA
END OF SECTION
352
SECTION 31 23 33 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING (SECTION 7-08)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 7-08 –
General Pipe Installation Requirements, and other sections referenced therein,
of the Standard Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
01 57 13 - Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control
32 12 20 - Hot Mix Asphalt
33 41 00 – Storm Drainage and Sanitary Sewer Piping
33 44 19 – Stormwater Treatment Structures
33 49 00 – Storm Drainage Structures
Measurement
1.
E.
The work in this Section includes all Trench Excavation, leveling,
backfilling, compaction, and other earth moving work required as
shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
No measurement will be made for trench excavation and backfill,
including pipe bedding, pipe zone material, trench backfill, excavation,
and compaction.
Payment
1.
2.
Trench Excavation and Backfill (Granular) is incidental to the price of
installing pipe, manholes and other sewer structures.
There shall be no separate payment for Pipe Bedding for sewer pipe as
these items are considered incidental to the related Bid Item.
END OF SECTION
353
SECTION 31 23 34 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL (SECTION 2-09)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 2-09 –
Structural Excavation, and other sections referenced therein, of the Standard
Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
C.
This Work consists of structure excavation and backfill associated with
the construction of unit masonry walls and concrete platform
foundations.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
01 33 00 - Submittals
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
02 41 20 - Removal of Structures and Obstructions
03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
13 13 00 - Platforms and Stations
31 15 00 - Clearing, Grubbing and Roadside Cleanup
31 23 35 – Roadway Excavation and Embankment
D.
Measurement
1.
Shoring, Cribbing, Excavation Support Systems, etc.
a.
No separate measurement will be made for this Work.
Structure Excavation and Disposal
a.
Structure Excavation will be measured by the cubic yard in
its original position. The lower limit shall be the bottoms of
footings of any structure. The upper limits shall be the ground
surface before starting excavation. Horizontal limits shall be
within vertical plane parallel to and 1 foot outside of the neat
lines of the structures as shown on the plans.
Gravel Backfill for Foundations
a.
No separate measurement will be made for this Work.
Gravel Backfill for Walls
a.
No separate measurement will be made for this Work.
Unauthorized Excavation
a.
No measurement will be made of excavations below the
elevations established for the bottoms of the footings, nor for
any other unauthorized excavations. Backfill, seal, or
otherwise repair such unauthorized excavations with concrete
2.
3.
4.
5.
354
6.
7.
E.
or other Material acceptable to the Resident Engineer at no
expense to the Owner.
Water removed from excavations and water used in compaction or
other items of Work will not be measured as a pay quantity.
No separate measurement will be made for granular structure backfill,
or structure backfill associated with unit masonry walls and concrete
platform foundations.
Payment
1.
2.
3.
4.
No separate payment will be made for the shoring, cribbing, or
excavation support systems. Full compensation for meeting the
requirements of this Section shall be considered as included in the
Contract unit price paid for the various items of Work and no
additional payment will be made.
No separate payment will be made for gravel backfill for foundations.
Backfill shall be considered included in the Contract price paid for
stations as defined in Section 13 13 00, Platforms and Stations.
No separate payment will be made for gravel backfill for walls
which shall be considered incidental to the Contract price paid for wall
construction as described in Section 32 32 13, Cast-in-Place Concrete
Retaining Walls.
The accepted structure excavation and disposal measured as specified
above will be paid at the unit contract price. The Contract unit price
will be payment in full for furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment and incidentals, and doing all work necessary to complete
the excavation, as specified.
Pay Item
31 23 34.01
31 23 34.02
Structural Excavation (Stations)
Structural Excavation (Retaining Walls)
Pay Unit
CY
CY
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR FOUNDATIONS
A.
Section 9-03.12(1) is amended as follows:
Delete 9-03.12(1)A and 9-03.12(1) B and replace with the following:
Gravel backfill for foundations shall conform to the requirements of
Section 9- 03.9(3), crushed surfacing base course for the gradations as
indicated on the plans.
355
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
A.
3.2
3.3
After excavation but before beginning formwork construction the Contractor
shall notify the Project Engineer that excavation is complete. The Project
Engineer will order a review of the soil conditions by the Owner’s
geotechnical engineer to verify that the strength of the existing soil meets or
exceeds the value assumed in footing design. Upon such verification the
Engineer will allow formwork construction and placing of reinforcement.
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL BELOW ELEVATIONS SHOWN
A.
Soft, unstable or unsuitable Material below footing or base of structure,
including bedding, if any, shall be excavated to elevations as directed. Measure
and payment of over excavation shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 35
Roadway Excavation and Embankment, as defined for foundation stabilization.
B.
The Contractor shall submit a proposed plan for this effort for Project
Engineer's review before the start of Work.
BACKFILLING
A.
Preparation, placement, and compaction of backfill shall conform to Section
31 23 35 Roadway Excavation and Embankment, if it is part of an
embankment or is to support a structure.
B.
Backfill shall not be placed so as to cause unbalanced loading on the
concrete until the concrete has been in place 14 days and until test cylinders
show the concrete strength to be 100 percent of design strength according to
Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C.
Backfill shall be placed so as not to damage the concrete footings, drain pipes,
and other permanent Work. Backfill shall not be jetted or puddled unless
approved in writing. Large lateral or wedging compaction forces shall be
prevented from occurring directly against the concrete.
D.
Excess Materials shall be properly disposed.
E.
Walls shall be backfilled with granular wall backfill to the upper limits shown
or as directed and as follows:
1.
Backfill required at the front face of retaining walls shall be placed
before backfilling behind the wall.
356
3.4
QUALITY CONTROL/TESTING
A.
Quality assurance/quality control shall be made in accordance with the
requirements of Section 01 45 10 Quality Control Requirements.
1.
2.
B.
In-place soil compaction test shall be performed by the Contractor and
be subject to monitoring by the Resident Engineer.
Laboratory tests on material shall be performed by Contractor’s
laboratory.
The Contractor shall perform:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
At least one (1) Soil Procter test per ASTM D1557 per soil type per
structure if underlying soil is disturbed.
A minimum of two (2) Field Density tests shall be performed by nuclear
densometer per ASTM D2922 once per 1,000 tons placed, or a
minimum of two (2) tests per each structure backfilled.
Tests to determine gradation and the material moisture/density curve
per AASHTO T11 and T27. One test shall be performed on each
material submitted for use as Granular Wall Backfill or Granular
Structural Backfill.
One (1) plasticity test, per AASHTO T90, on each material submitted
for use as Granular Structural Backfill.
Moisture content of the backfill shall be tested per ASTM D2216 or
D3017 once per 1,000 tons placed or a minimum of two (2) tests per
each structure backfilled.
END OF SECTION
357
SECTION 31 23 35 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT (SECTION 2-03)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 2-03 –
Roadway Excavation and Embankment, and other sections referenced therein,
of the Standard Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
2.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
D.
The work in this Section includes all grading, leveling, ditching,
backfilling, excavation, embankment construction, and other earth
moving work required as shown on the Contract Drawings and as
specified herein.
Trenching and Backfilling per Section 31 23 33.
01 27 00 - Measurement
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
01 57 10 - Watering
01 57 13 - Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control
13 13 00 - Platforms and Stations
31 15 00 - Clearing, Grubbing and Roadside Cleanup
31 34 19.16 - Geotextile Soil Reinforcement
32 11 23 – Crushed Surfacing
32 12 20 – Hot Mix Asphalt
32 13 74 - Cement Concrete Pavement
32 16 14 - Concrete Curbs and Gutters
32 16 15 – Cement Concrete Driveway Entrances
32 16 16 – Cement Concrete Sidewalks
Measurement
1.
2.
Roadway Excavation will be measured in its original position by cubic
yard to the neat line measure shown on the Contract Plans. The
excavation quantity is an estimate only. It is the bidder's
responsibility to determine the actual quantities required. Excavation,
haul, and disposal includes removal of asphalt, concrete, and soil
materials from the project site within the construction limits, unless
otherwise measured and paid by another specification item.
Saw cut Pavement will be measured by the linear foot.
358
3.
4.
5.
E.
Removal of concrete pavement, asphalt pavement, and concrete
sidewalk will be measured by the square yard. Removal of concrete
curb will be measured by the linear foot.
The following items will not be measured:
a.
Reclaiming from stockpile.
b.
Transporting material from stockpiles to points of placement.
c.
Preparation of in-situ subgrade under roadway and busway
areas including over-excavation, backfill, and compaction
resulting from contractor choice to work in wet weather
conditions
d.
Preparation of in-situ subgrade under curbs, walks and
driveways including removal of soil and replacement with
aggregate base course.
Foundation Stabilization Material will be measured by the cubic yard of
stabilization material placed as determined by field cross section
survey of unstable areas prior to and after excavation, then computed
using the average end method to determine the cross sections or other
method approved by the Project Engineer. No separate measurement
will be made for excavation of the area to receive the stabilization
material.
Payment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The accepted Roadway Excavation work, measured as specified above,
will be paid for at the contract unit price. The Contract unit price
will be payment in full for furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment and incidentals, and doing all work necessary to complete
the excavation, as specified.
No separate payment will be made for backfilling or embankment
constructed using materials excavated on the site.
The accepted cubic yards of foundation stabilization material,
measured as specified above, will be paid for at the contract unit
price per in-place cubic yard. The Contract unit price will be full
payment for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and
incidentals, and doing all work necessary to complete the subgrade
stabilization, as specified. Payment will include the cost of all backfill
materials. Excavation and disposal of unsuitable material is considered
incidental to subgrade stabilization and no separate or additional
payment will be made.
Payment for geotextile fabric shall be covered in Section 31 34 19.16
Geotextile Soil Reinforcement.
Payment for finish grading, backfilling and compacting within the
limits for station platforms as defined in Section 13 13 00 Platforms
and Stations, will be included in the lump sum contract amount for
each station platform as listed in that Section.
Payment will be made under:
359
Pay Item
1.2
Pay Unit
31 23 35.01
Saw Cut Pavement
LF
31 23 35.02
Remove Curb
LF
31 23 35.03
Remove Sidewalk
SY
31 23 35.04
Remove Asphalt Concrete Pavement
SY
31 23 35.05
Remove PCC Pavement
SY
31 23 35.06
Roadway Excavation Incl. Haul
CY
31 23 35.07
Foundation Stabilization Material (Allowance)
CY
REFERENCES
Sponsor
Number Subject
ASTM
ASTM
D422
D2922
ASTM
D3017
ASTM
D698
ASTM
WAC
D2216
296-155,
Particle-Size Analysis of Soils
Test for Density of Soil and Rock in Place by the Nuclear
Density Method
Water Content of Soil and Rock in place by the Nuclear
Method
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using
Standard Effort (Standard Proctor)
Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soil
Part N Safety Standards for Construction Work,
Excavation, Trenching, and Shoring
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXCAVATION
A.
General
1.
Unless otherwise specifically provided, excavation or excavation and
backfill includes all excavating, removing, hauling and depositing,
including but not limited to, existing pavements, walks, driveways,
surfacing, slabs, curbs, gutters and similar cement concrete structures,
bituminous materials, all rock or gravel road surfacing materials,
abandoned sewers, and other pipes and conduits, logs, piling, footings
foundations, vaults and chambers, when such materials are within
the limits of excavation.
360
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Excavation shall be unclassified and shall include the removal of all
material of whatever nature, regardless of the manner in which they
are removed, to the lines and elevations shown or required unless
described elsewhere in this specification. Excavation may be
performed beyond the limit lines shown to suit construction
methods, subject to approval of the Project Engineer.
Grading tolerances for roadway and busway subgrade surfaces shall be
plus 0.04 feet or minus 0.10 feet. The subgrade shall be free of ruts,
humps, depressions or other irregularities prior to placing base course.
Asphalt pavement that is removed shall be considered a waste
material and becomes the property of the Contractor at the place of
origin and shall be disposed of by the Contractor in conformance with
all laws, regulations, and rules legally imposed on such activities.
The Contractor is encouraged to separate asphalt pavement and provide
to sites for use in recycled asphalt pavement preparation.
Concrete pavement that is removed shall be considered a waste
material and becomes the property of the Contractor at the place of
origin and shall be disposed of by the Contractor in conformance with
all laws, regulations, and rules legally imposed on such activities.
The Contractor is encouraged to separate concrete pavement and
provide to sites for use in embankment or crushed for use as recycled
concrete aggregate.
Where areas have been over excavated, the lines and grades shown,
within the specified tolerances, shall be reestablished with approved
material.
Removal of asphaltic concrete pavement shall extend to the limits as
shown on the Contract Plans. All exposed edges to have clean vertical
cuts either by saw cut or approved carbide wheel cutters. The Project
Engineer must approve removal beyond these limits.
Replacement of pavement removal beyond the contract limits shall not
be paid for, and shall be completed at the Contractor's expense.
Removal of concrete pavement shall be completed by sawcutting, if
necessary, to the limits shown on the Contract Drawings and
jackhammering to a size needed for excavation and removal.
Make a vertical full depth saw cut between any existing pavement,
sidewalk, curb, or gutter that is to remain and the portion to be
removed. For portland cement concrete pavement removal, a
second vertical full depth relief saw cut offset 12 to 18 inches from
and parallel to the initial saw cut is also required, unless the
Engineer approves otherwise. For removal of bituminous pavement,
asphalt planing equipment may be used in lieu of sawcutting
provided that a clean vertical edge remains.
361
B.
Roadway Subgrade Preparation in Excavation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Soil shall be removed to the design subgrade elevation. Excavation
shall be performed as described below for undisturbed native
subgrades.
Undisturbed subgrade preparation shall be performed with
equipment utilizing a smooth bucket, and shall be performed in a
manner that prevents disturbance of the cut subgrade.
Geotextile fabric (“subgrade/stabilization”) shall not be placed on the
subgrade unless otherwise directed by the Project Engineer or shown
on the Plans. When geotextile fabric is installed, it will be installed in
accordance with Section 31 34 19.16 Geotextile Soil Reinforcement.
Aggregate base material shall be placed by end dumping on the
geotextile fabric, or undisturbed subgrade, and pushing the aggregate
base material ahead of the equipment to prevent subgrade disturbance.
Undisturbed subgrade shall be observed and approved by the Project
Engineer prior to placement of aggregate base material. The
Contractor shall allow the Project Engineer time to make
observations and identify soft spots within the subgrade by visual
inspection. Upon direction of the Project Engineer, soft spots
encountered shall be excavated and backfilled with subgrade
stabilization material.
Compaction shall be accomplished utilizing non-vibratory, kneading
compaction equipment, e.g., rubber tired or sheepsfoot roller, unless
otherwise approved.
Undisturbed subgrade that has been disturbed by the Contractor’s
activities or weather, after approval by the Project Engineer, and
prior to placement of the aggregate base materials, shall be repaired at
the Contractor’s expense. No cost of repairs will be at Owner’s expense.
END OF SECTION
362
SECTION 31 34 19.16 GEOTEXTILE SOIL REINFORCEMENT (SECTION 2-12)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 2-12 –
Construction Geosynthetic, and other sections referenced therein, of the
Standard Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
01 33 00 - Submittals
01 57 13 - Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control
31 23 35 – Roadway Excavation and Embankment
32 12 20 – Hot Mix Asphalt
Measurement
1.
2.
3.
E.
This Section specifies the furnishing and placing of woven
geotextile fabric at locations shown on the Contract Plans and as
specified herein.
Geotextile fabric will be measured by the square yard installed and
accepted. Measurement will be to the neat lines shown on the Contract
Plans or as otherwise approved by the Project Engineer.
Geogrid Reinforcement will be measured by the square yard installed
and accepted. Measurement will be to the neat lines shown on the
Contract Plans or as otherwise approved by the Project Engineer.
No separate measurement will be made for geotextile fabric used in
silt fences, which is incidental to other contract items.
Payment
1.
2.
3.
The Contract unit price will be payment in full for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and doing all Work
necessary to complete the Work specified.
The Contract unit price will not be subject to price variations. The
Contract unit price stated will be valid for actual quantities placed and
accepted.
Payment will be made at the Contract unit price under:
363
Pay Item
Pay Unit
31 34 19.01
Geotextile Fabric
SY
31 34 19.02
Geogrid
SY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Geogrid:
1.
Geogrid shall be:
a.
Triax TX5
b.
Tensar BX1200
c.
Project Engineer approved equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GEOGRID
A.
Install Geogrid per manufacturer’s instructions
B.
Unroll Geogrid in the longitudinal direction of the lane(s) being constructed.
C.
Minimum overlap for Geogrid is 24 inches.
END OF SECTION
364
SECTION 32 01 31 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY (SECTION 1-07.16)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 107.16 – Protection and Restoration, and other sections referenced therein, of
Property of the Standard Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
2.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
D.
01 33 00 - Submittals
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
Measurement
1.
E.
This Section specifies the restoration of existing site improvements
disturbed or removed from private properties to facilitate construction
within the limits shown on the plans. Damage to private property
outside the designated limits, unless approved by the Engineer, shall be
restored to original or better condition at no cost to the Owner.
The Contractor shall be responsible for securing all necessary and
applicable permits, certificates, licenses, and approvals as required for
the performance of this work and shall be responsible for the payment
of all associated fees.
No separate measurement will be made for the work in this Section.
Payment
1.
Payment for the work in this Section shall be made on a lump sum
basis for each segment of the project.
Pay Item
32 01 31.01
1.2
Site Restoration
Pay Unit
LS
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33
00 Submittals, except as modified herein:
1.
A copy of all applicable permits necessary prior to beginning work.
365
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
1.
The contractor shall restore to like condition abutting property
affected by construction. This includes, but is not limited to,
landscape repair both incidental and the result of grading,
restoration of irrigation to operable condition, driveway or walk repair,
fence repair.
2.
Anticipated limits for driveway and walkway reconstruction on private
property are shown on the Plans. Temporary Construction Easements,
as shown on the Plans have been acquired by the Owner to include this
work.
END OF SECTION
366
SECTION 32 11 23 CRUSHED SURFACING (SECTION 4-04)
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 4-04 – Ballast and
Crushed Surfacing, and other sections referenced therein, of the Standard Specifications as
amended herein.
2-06 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
2-06.3 Construction Requirements
2-06.3(1) Subgrade For Surfacing
Section 2-06.3(1) is supplemented with the following:
(March 13, 1995)
The subgrade shall be trimmed with an automatically controlled
machine.
4-04.5 Payment
Section 4-04.5 is revised to read:
Payment will be made in accordance with 1-04.1, for each of the following Bid items:
32 11 23.01 Crushed Surfacing Top Course (or Base Course) – Roadway per cubic
yard
32 11 23.02 Crushed Surfacing Top Course (or Base Course) – Concrete Bus Pad per
cubic yard
END OF SECTION
367
SECTION 32 12 20 HOT MIX ASPHALT (SECTION 5-04)
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 5-04 – Hot Mix
Asphalt and other sections referenced therein, of the Standard Specifications as amended
herein.
5-04.2 Materials
Section 5-04.2 is revised to read:
(January 6, 2014)
Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections:
Asphalt Binder
Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
Anti-Stripping Additive
Warm Mix Asphalt Additive
Aggregates
Recycled Asphalt Pavement
Mineral Filler
Recycled Material
9-02.1(4)
9-02.1(6)
9-02.4
9-02.5
9-03.8
9-03.8(3)B
9-03.8(5)
9-03.21
Asphalt paving shall be HMA Class ½” with asphalt binder grade PG 70-22.
The Contract documents may establish that the various mineral materials required for the
manufacture of HMA will be furnished in whole or in part by the Contracting Agency. If the
documents do not establish the furnishing of any of these mineral materials by the
Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall be required to furnish such materials in the
amounts required for the designated mix. Mineral materials include coarse and fine
aggregates, and mineral filler.
The Contractor may choose to utilize recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) or reclaimed asphalt
shingles (RAS) in the production of HMA. The RAP may be from pavements removed under
the Contract, if any, or pavement material from an existing stockpile. The RAS may be from
reclaimed shingles.
If greater than 20 percent of the total weight of HMA is RAP or any amount of RAS is utilized
in the production of HMA, the Contractor shall sample and test the RAP and RAS during
stockpile construction in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 308 for the
determination of the asphalt binder content and WSDOT FOP for WAQTC/AASHTO T 27/T
11 for the gradation of the aggregates. The RAP shall be sampled and tested at a frequency
of one sample for every 1,000 tons produced and not less than ten samples per project. The
RAS shall be sampled and tested at a frequency of one sample for every 100 tons produced
and not less than ten samples per project. The asphalt content and gradation test data shall
be reported to the Contracting Agency prior to or when submitting the mix design. If
utilized, the amount of RAS shall not exceed 5-percent of the total weight of the HMA. The
368
Contractor shall include the RAP and RAS as part of the mix design as defined in these
Specifications.
The grade of asphalt binder shall be as required by the Contract. Blending of asphalt binder
from different sources is not permitted. For HMA with either a RAP percentage greater than
20 percent of the total weight or any amount of RAS the actual grade of the final blended
asphalt binder (after inclusion of RAP, RAS, new asphalt binder and recycling agent) shall
not exceed the grade of asphalt binder required by the Contract and comply with the
requirements of Section 9-02.1(4). The actual grade of the new binder and the final blended
asphalt binder shall be verified in accordance with AASHTO R 29 and reported to the
Contracting Agency when submitting the mix design for evaluation.
The Contractor may use warm mix asphalt (WMA) processes in the production of HMA with
a RAP percentage of 20 percent of the total weight or less. WMA processes shall not be used
in the production of HMA with a RAP percentage greater than 20 percent of the total weight
or any amount of RAS. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the process
that is proposed and how it will be used in the manufacture of HMA.
When the Contracting Agency provides aggregates or provides a source for the production
of aggregates, the Contract Provisions will establish the approximate percentage of asphalt
binder required in the mixture for each class of HMA.
Production of aggregates shall comply with the requirements of Section 3-01.
Preparation of stockpile site, the stockpiling of aggregates, and the removal of aggregates
from stockpiles shall comply with the requirements of Section 3-02.
Section 5-04.2 is supplemented with the following:
(January 3, 2011) ESAL's
The number of ESAL's for the design and acceptance of the HMA for Fourth Plain
Boulevard shall be 10,000,000.
The number of ESAL's for the design and acceptance of the HMA for Fort Vancouver
Way shall be 7,000,000.
The number of ESAL's for the design and acceptance of the HMA for all other streets
on the BRT alignment shall be 10,000,000.
Asphalt Material, General
Section 9-02.1 is supplemented with the following:
(August 4, 2014)
The recycling agent used to rejuvenate the recovered asphalt binder from
recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) and reclaimed asphalt shingles (RAS) shall
meet the specifications in Table 1:
369
Table 1
RA 1
Test
Viscosity @ 140°F
cSt
Test Methods Min.
ASTM D 2170
or D
2171,
AASHTO T
201 or T 202
50
Flashpoint COC, °F
ASTM D 92,
AASHTO T 48
Saturates, Wt.
percent
Specific Gravity
Tests on Residue
from RTFO
ASTM D 2007
ASTM D 70
or 1298
AASHTO T
228
ASTM D 2872
AASHTO T
240
RA 5
Max.
Min.
150
400
200
RA 25
Max.
800
400
30
Report
Min.
1000
4000
400
30
Report
Max.
30
Report
Viscosity Ratio1
3
3
Mass Change ±
4
4
percent
@
1 Viscosity Ratio = RTFO Viscosity 140°F, cSt Original Viscosity @ 140°F, cSt
3
4
Performance Graded Asphalt Binder (PGAB)
Section 9-02.1(4) is supplemented with the following:
(January 6, 2014)
For HMA with either a RAP percentage greater than 20 percent of the total
weight or any amount of RAS the following shall apply: the new asphalt
binder, recycling agent and recovered asphalt (RAP and/or RAS) when
blended in the proportions of the mix design shall meet the PGAB
requirements of AASHTO M 320 Table 1 for the grade of asphalt binder
specified by the Contract.
HMA Test Requirements
Section 9-03.8(2) after the first paragraph is revised to read:
370
(March 3, 2014)
The mix design shall produce HMA mixtures when combined with RFP, RAS,
coarse and fine aggregate within the limits set forth in Section 9-03.8(6) and
mixed in the laboratory with the designated grade of asphalt binder, using
the Superpave gyratory compactor in accordance with WSDOT FOT for
AASHTO T 312, and at the required gyrations for N initial, N design, and N
maximum with the following properties:
The mix criteria VMA and VFA only apply to HMA accepted by statistical
evaluation.
The mix criteria for Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing and Indirect Tensile
Strength of Bituminous Materials do not apply to HMA accepted by
commercial evaluation.
When material is being produced and stockpiled for use on a specific contract
or for a future contract, the uncompacted void content, fracture, and sand
equivalent requirements shall apply at the time of stockpiling. When material
is used from a stockpile that has not been tested as provided above, the
371
Specifications for uncompacted void content, fracture, and sand equivalent
shall apply at the time of its introduction to the cold feed of the mixing plant.
Gradation – Recycled Asphalt Pavement and Mineral Aggregate
Section 9-03.8(3)B is supplemented with the following:
(August 6, 2012)
For HMA with a RAP percentage greater than 20 percent of the total weight
the RAP shall be processed to ensure that 100 percent of the material passes a
sieve twice the size of the maximum aggregate size for the class of mix to be
produced.
When RAS is used in the production of HMA the RAS shall be milled, crushed
or processed to ensure that 100 percent of the material passes the ½ inch
sieve. Extraneous materials in RAS such as metals, glass, rubber, soil, brick,
tars, paper, wood and plastic shall not exceed 2.0 percent by mass as
determined on material retained on the No. 4 sieve.
General Requirements
Section 9-03.21(1) is supplemented with the following:
(August 2, 2012)
Reclaimed asphalt shingles samples shall contain less than the maximum
percentage of asbestos fibers based on testing procedures and frequencies
established in conjunction with the specifying jurisdiction and state or
federal environmental regulatory agencies.
5-04.3 Construction Requirements
Section 5-04.3(1) HMA Mixing Plant
Section 5-04.3(1) is supplemented with the following
(November 12, 2012)
6.
Equipment for Processing RAP and RAS. When producing HMA for mix
designs with greater than 20 percent of the total weight RAP or any amount
of RAS the HMA plant shall be equipped with screens or a lump breaker to
eliminate oversize RAP/RAS particles from entering the pug mill or drum
mixer.
5-04.3(7) Preparation of Aggregates
Section 5-04.3(7) is revised to read:
(August 6, 2012)
The aggregates, RAP and RAS shall be stockpiled according to the
requirements of Section 3-02. Sufficient storage space shall be provided for
each size of aggregate, RAP and RAS. The Contractor may uniformly blend fine
372
aggregate or RAP with the RAS as a method of preventing the agglomeration
of RAS particles. The aggregates, RAP and RAS shall be removed from
stockpile(s) in a manner to ensure a minimum of segregation when being
moved to the HMA plant for processing into the final mixture. Different
aggregate sizes shall be kept separated until they have been delivered to the
HMA plant.
General
Section 5-04.3(7)A1 is supplemented with the following:
(August 4, 2014)
For mix designs with greater than 20 percent of the total weight RAP or any
amount of RAS the Contractor shall develop a mix design including RAP, RAS,
recycling agent and new asphalt binder. The mix design aggregate structure,
RAP, RAS, recycling agent and new asphalt binder content shall be
determined in accordance with Materials Manual WSDOT Standard Operating
Procedure No. 732 and meet the requirements of Sections 9-03.8(2) and 903.8(6). The total quantity of asphalt binder contributed from the RAP and
RAS shall not exceed 40 percent of the total asphalt binder content of the
HMA. Once the RAP and RAS stockpiles have been constructed the Contractor
shall extract, recover and test the asphalt residue from the RAP and RAS
stockpiles to determine the percent of recycling agent and/or grade of new
asphalt binder needed to meet the grade of asphalt binder required by the
contract. The asphalt extraction testing shall be performed in accordance with
AASHTO T 164 or ASTM D 2172 using reagent grade trichloroethylene. The
asphalt recovery shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO R 59, or
ASTM D 1856. The recovered asphalt residue shall be tested in accordance
with AASHTO R 29 to determine the asphalt binder grade in accordance with
Section 9-02.1(4). Once the recovered asphalt binder grade is determined
the percent of recycling agent and/or grade of new asphalt binder shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM D 4887. The final blend of recycling
agent, recovered and new asphalt shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO
R 29 to confirm that it meets the grade of asphalt binder required by the
contract in accordance with Section 9-02.1(4). All recovered and blended
asphalt binder test data shall be reported to the Contracting Agency prior to
or when submitting the mix design for evaluation.
The following two sentences are inserted after the first sentence in Section 504.3(7)A1:
(March 3, 2014)
For HMA of the same class, asphalt binder grade and number of gyrations the
Contractor may submit a maximum of two mix designs in a calendar year. If
the Contracting Agency’s evaluation of a mix design does not meet contract
requirements, such mix design will not count toward the maximum of two per
calendar year.
373
Statistical or Nonstatistical Evaluation
Section 5-04.3(7)A2 is revised to read:
(March 3, 2014)
Mix designs shall be submitted to the Project Engineer on WSDOT Form 350042. For a mix design that was originally developed for another WSDOT
contract, the Contractor shall also submit WSDOT Form 350-041 and include
all changes to the job mix formula that have been approved on other
contracts.
The Contractor shall have the option to submit a mix design either with or
without test data for Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing and Indirect Tensile
Strength of Bituminous Materials as follows:
For a mix design that the Contractor provides Hamburg WheelTrack Testing and Indirect Tensile Strength of Bituminous
Materials test results the Contractor shall include the test data file
generated by the wheel-tracking device with the mix design
submittal.
2. For each mix design, including mix designs that are resubmitted,
that does not include the test data for Hamburg Wheel-Track
Testing and Indirect Tensile Strength of Bituminous Materials the
Contracting Agency will deduct $2,500 from any monies due or that
may come due the Contractor under the Contract.
1.
For mix designs with 20 percent or less total weight RAP and no RAS, the
Contractor shall submit representative samples of the mineral materials that
are to be used in the HMA production. The Contracting Agency will use these
samples to evaluate the mix design and determine the anti-strip
requirements, if any, in accordance with Section
9-03.8(2). Evaluation of HMA mix designs proposed by the Contractor that
include 20 percent or less total weight RAP and no RAS will be completed
without the inclusion of the RAP; therefore, submittal of RAP samples is not
required. If the Contracting Agency’s evaluation of a mix does not meet the
requirements of Section 9-03.8(2) for Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing and
Indirect Tensile Strength of Bituminous Materials the Contractor shall
develop and submit a new mix design.
Mix designs with greater than 20 percent of the total weight RAP or any
amount of RAS shall be submitted to the Project Engineer for evaluation. The
Contractor shall submit representative samples of the mineral materials, RAP,
RAS and 100 grams of recovered asphalt residue from the RAP and RAS that
are to be used in the HMA production. The Contracting Agency will use the
recovered asphalt residue samples to conduct testing of the final blended
asphalt binder in accordance with Section 9- 02.1(4). The Contracting Agency
will use the mineral aggregate, RAP and RAS to evaluate the mix design and
374
determine the anti-strip requirements, if any, in accordance with Section 903(8)2. The mix design will be rejected if the results of testing by the
Contracting Agency of the final blended asphalt binder fails to meet the
requirements of Section 9-02.1(4) or the mix design including RAP and/or
RAS fails to meet the AASHTO T 324 (Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing) or
ASTM D 6931 (Indirect Tensile Strength) requirements of Section 9-03.8(2)
or is not within the tolerances in Section 9-03.8(7).
A mix design evaluation report will be provided within 25 calendar days after
a mix design submittal has been received in the State Materials Laboratory in
Tumwater. No paving shall begin prior to issuance of the mix design
evaluation report or reference mix design evaluation report for that year.
Commercial Evaluation
Section 5-04.3(7)A3 is supplemented with the following:
(January 6, 2014)
Mix designs for HMA with greater than 20 percent of the total weight RAP or
any amount of RAS may be evaluated for acceptance in accordance with
Section 5- 04.3(7)A2.
5-04.3(8) Mixing
Section 5-04.3(8) is supplemented with the following:
(January 6, 2014)
The following requirements shall apply to mix designs with greater than 20
percent of the total weight RAP or any amount of RAS:
After the required amounts of mineral materials, RAP, RAS, new asphalt
binder and asphalt rejuvenator have been introduced into the mixer the HMA
shall be mixed until a complete and uniform coating of the particles and a
thorough distribution of the asphalt binder throughout the mineral materials,
RAP and RAS is ensured.
When discharged, the temperature of the HMA shall not exceed the optimum
mixing temperature by more than 25°F as shown on the mix design
evaluation report or as approved by the Engineer. Storing or holding of the
HMA in approved storage facilities will be permitted during the daily
operation but in no event shall the HMA be held for more than 24 hours. HMA
held for more than 24 hours after mixing shall be rejected. Rejected HMA shall
be disposed of by the Contractor at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
The storage facility shall have an accessible device located at the top of the
cone or about the third point. The device shall indicate the amount of
material in storage. No HMA shall be accepted from the storage facility when
the HMA in storage is below the top of the cone of the storage facility, except
as the storage facility is being emptied at the end of the working shift.
375
Recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) and reclaimed asphalt shingles (RAS)
utilized in the production of HMA shall be sized prior to entering the mixer so
that a uniform and thoroughly mixed HMA is produced. If there is evidence of
the RAP or RAS not breaking down during the heating and mixing of the HMA,
the Contractor shall immediately suspend production of HMA until changes
have been approved by the Project Engineer.
Acceptance Sampling and Testing - HMA Mixture
Test Section – HMA Mixtures
The first sentence of Section 5-04.3(8)A7 is revised to read:
(March 3, 2014)
For each class of HMA accepted by statistical evaluation, the Contractor may
request a test section to determine whether the mixture meets the
requirements of Section 9- 03.8(2) excluding Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing
and Indirect Tensile Strength of Bituminous Materials and Section 9-03.8(6).
Section 5-04.3(8)A7 is supplemented with the following:
(January 6, 2014)
The following requirements shall apply to mix designs with greater than 20
percent RAP by weight or RAS:
For each class of HMA accepted by statistical evaluation, the Contractor shall
construct a test section to determine whether the mixture meets the
requirements of Sections 9-03.8(2) and 9-03.8(6). The test section shall be
constructed at the beginning of paving and will be at least 600 tons and a
maximum of 1,000 tons or as approved by the Project Engineer. No further
wearing or leveling HMA will be paved on any of the four calendar days
following the construction of the test section. The mixture in the test section
will be evaluated as a lot with a minimum of three sublots required. If more
than one test section is required, each test section shall be a separate lot.
For a test section to be acceptable the pay factor (PF) for gradation, asphalt
binder and Va shall be 0.95 or greater for each constituent and the remaining
test requirements in Section 9-03.8(2) (dust/asphalt ratio, sand equivalent,
uncompacted void and fracture) shall conform to the requirements of that
section. When the pay factor for any item is less than 0.95 the Contractor
shall make adjustments to the mixture in accordance with Section 9-03.8(7)
and construct a new test section. The Project Engineer may waive the
requirement for the construction of a new test section.
376
5-04.3(10) Compaction
5-04.3(10)B Control General
The last sentence in the fourth paragraph in Section 5-04.3(10)B1 is revised to read:
(August 3, 2009)
HMA that is used for preleveling shall be compacted with a pneumatic tire
roller unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Section 5-04.3(10)B1 is supplemented with the following:
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the cores taken to calibrate
each nuclear density gauge used and for all costs for the coring including
costs for all other Work associated with the coring (e.g., traffic control,
testing, etc.).
5-04.3(12) Joints
Section 5-04.3(12) is supplemented with the following:
(January 5, 2004)
The HMA overlay shall be feathered to produce a smooth riding connection to
the existing pavement.
HMA utilized in the construction of the feathered connections shall be
modified by eliminating the coarse aggregate from the mix at the Contractor's
plant or the commercial source or by raking the joint on the roadway, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
5-04.13 Surface Smoothness
The second sentence of Section 5-04.3(13) is revised to read:
(January 5, 2004)
The completed surface of the wearing course shall not vary more than 1/4
inch from the lower edge of a 10-foot straightedge placed on the surface
parallel to centerline.
5-04.3(14) Planing Bituminous Pavement
Section 5-04.3(14) is supplemented with the following:
(January 5, 2004)
The Contractor shall perform the planing operations no more than three (3)
calendar days ahead of the time the planed area is to be paved with HMA,
unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer in writing.
377
(August 3, 2009) Beveled Edge Planing
A beveled edge shall be constructed in areas that will not be paved during the
same work shift.
The Contractor shall use a beveled cutter on the mandrel of the planing
equipment, or other approved method(s), to eliminate the vertical edge(s).
The beveled edge(s) shall be constructed at a 4:1 slope.
5-04.4 Measurement
Section 5-04.4 is revised to read:
HMA CL 0.5” PG 70-22 will be measured by the ton in accordance with Section 01 27 00,
Measurement, with no deduction being made for the weight of asphalt binder, mineral filler, or
any other component of the mixture. If the Contractor elects to remove and replace mix as
allowed by Section5-04.3(11), the material removed will not be measured.
No separate measurement will be made for roadway cores taken to calibrate each nuclear
density gauge used.
No separate measurement will be made for liquid asphalt used in the accepted asphalt concrete
or tack coat. No separate measurement will be made for saw cutting, tack coat and aggregate
filler course as required.
No measurement will be made for “Cold Mix” use.
5-04.5 Payment
Section 5-04.5 is revised to read:
Payment will be made in accordance with 1-04.1, for each of the following Bid items:
32 12 20.01 HMAC CL 0.5” PG 70-22 (Base Course) per ton
32 12 20.02 HMAC CL 0.5” PG 70-22 (Wearing Course) per ton
32 12 20.03 Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment, by calculation.
“Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment” will be calculated and paid for as described in
Section 5-04.5(1).
32 12 20.04 Compaction Price Adjustment, by calculation.
“Compaction Price Adjustment” will be calculated and paid for as described in
Section 5-04.5(1).
32 12 20.05 Cyclic Density Price Adjustment, by calculation.
“Cyclic Density Price Adjustment” will be calculated and paid for as described in
Section 5-04.3(10)B2.
No separate payment shall be made for “Cold Mix”, liquid asphalt, sawcutting, tack coat
and aggregate filler as required to complete the Work.
378
No separate payment shall be made for roadway cores taken to calibrate each nuclear
density gauge used including Contractor’s costs for all other Work associated with
the coring (e.g., traffic control). The cost of this work shall be incidental to the
pavement placement work of this Section.
The Contract price paid for each item will be payment in full for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and doing all Work necessary to complete
the Work specified.
Sections 5-04.5(1), 5-04.5(1)A, and 5-04.5(1)B of the Standard Specifications remain
part of the Contract.
5-04.5 Payment
Section 5-04.5 is supplemented with the following:
(August 5, 2013)
Asphalt Cost Price Adjustment
The Contracting Agency will make an Asphalt Cost Price Adjustment, either a credit
or a payment, for qualifying changes in the reference cost of asphalt binder. The
adjustment will be applied to partial payments made according to Section 1-09.9 for
the following bid items when they are included in the proposal:
32 12 20.01 HMA Cl. 0.5” PG 70-22 (Base Course).
32 12 20.02 HMA Cl. 0.5” PG 70-22 (Wearing Course).
The adjustment is not a guarantee of full compensation for changes in the cost of
asphalt binder. The Contracting Agency does not guarantee that asphalt binder will
be available at the reference cost.
WSDOT will establish the asphalt binder reference cost twice each month and post
the information on the WSDOT Web site at:
http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/Business/Construction/EscalationClauses.htm
The reference cost will be determined using posted prices furnished by Poten and
Partners, Inc. If the selected price source ceases to be available for any reason, then
the Contracting Agency will select a substitute price source to establish the
reference cost.
The base cost established for this contract is the reference cost posted on the Agency
Web site for the period immediately preceding the bid opening date.
Adjustments will be based on the most current reference cost for Western
Washington or Eastern Washington as posted on the Agency Web site, depending on
where the work is performed. For work completed after all authorized working days
379
are used, the adjustment will be based on the posted reference cost during which
contract time was exhausted. The adjustment will be calculated as follows:
No adjustment will be made if the reference cost is within 5 percent of the base cost.
If the reference cost is greater than or equal to 105 percent of the base cost, then
Adjustment = (Current Reference Cost – (1.05 x Base Cost)) x (Q x 0.056).
If the reference cost is less than or equal to 95 percent of the base cost, then
Adjustment = (Current Reference Cost – (0.95 x Base Cost)) x (Q x 0.056).
Where Q = total tons of all classes of HMA paid in the current month’s progress
payment.
32 12 20.06 Asphalt Cost Price Adjustment, by calculation.
“Asphalt Cost Price Adjustment” will be calculated and paid for as described in this
section. For the purpose of providing a common proposal for all bidders, the
Contracting Agency has entered an amount in the proposal to become a part of the
total bid by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
380
SECTION 32 13 74 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT (SECTION 5-05)
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 5-05 – Cement
Concrete Pavement and, other sections referenced therein, of the Standard Specifications, as
amended herein.
5-05.1 Description
Section 5-05.1 is supplemented with the following
This Section specifies the construction of cement concrete pavement and bus approach slabs,
with or without reinforcement, on a prepared subgrade or base coarse as shown on the
Contract Plans or as directed by the Project Engineer.
5-05.3 Construction Requirements
5-05.3(3)E Smoothness Testing Equipment
Section 5-05.3(3)E content and title is deleted in its entirety:
5-05.3(12) Surface Smoothness
Section 5-05.3(12) is revised to read:
Pavement smoothness will be measured with a 10-foot straight edge
no later than 5:00 p.m. of the day following the placing of the
concrete. A 10-foot straightedge will be placed parallel to the
centerline so as to bridge any depressions and touch all high spots.
Should the surface vary more than Ya inch from the lower edge of the
straightedge, the high portion shall be reduced by the Contractor to
the Ya inch tolerance by abrasive means at no expense to the
Contracting Agency. It is further provided that if reduction of high
portions of the surface involves breaking, dislodging, or other
disturbance of the aggregates, such cutting will not be permitted
until the pavement has achieved its design strength. If in the
opinion of the Engineer irregularities cannot be satisfactorily
removed by such methods, the Contractor shall remove and replace
the pavement at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
Smoothness perpendicular to the centerline will be measured with a
10-foot straightedge across all lanes with the same cross slope,
including shoulders when composed of cement concrete pavement.
The overlapping 10-foot straightedge measurement shall be
discontinued at a point 6 inches from the most extreme outside
edge of the finished cement concrete pavement. The transverse
slope of the finished pavement shall be uniform to a degree such
that no variations greater than 0.25 inch are present when tested with
a 10-foot long straightedge laid in a direction perpendicular to the
381
centerline. Any areas that are in excess of this specified tolerance
shall be corrected by abrasive means.
5-05.3(17) Opening to Traffic
Section 5-05.3(17) is revised to read:
(August 5, 2013)
Maturity Testing for Concrete Pavement
The pavement shall not be opened to traffic until the maturity-strength
relationship demonstrates the pavement has a minimum compressive strength of
2,500 psi and approval of the Project Engineer. The pavement shall be cleaned prior
to opening to traffic.
The Contractor shall establish a Maturity Value on the approved concrete mix
through the use of a testing program following the WSDOT test procedure for
estimating concrete strength.
The Contractor shall establish the strength maturity relationship at least 14
calendar days prior to the production pours. The Contractor shall notify the
Project Engineer seven ( 7) days prior to performing the Strength Maturity
Relationship as to the time, date and location where the Strength Maturity
Relationship will be performed. The Contractor shall allow WSDOT the opportunity
to place maturity loggers in the test cylinders in order to calibrate the WSDOT
maturity meter. Referenced Strength Maturity Relationships from previous mix
designs shall not be allowed. A Strength Maturity Relationship shall be developed
for each mix used on the project.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the maturity
logger/sensors within the concrete pavement pour area. For panel replacements
performed under Section 5-01, place a minimum of four loggers/sensors at two
different locations. Two (2) in one ( 1 ) of the first few panel replacements and
two in the last panel replacement of the day, each day. For continuous concrete
paving operations performed under Section 5-05, place a minimum of four ( 4 )
loggers/sensors, two (2) at the beginning and two (2) at the end of the concrete
pour, each day. The Contractor shall maintain the integrity of the logger/sensors
and wires during concrete pouring, finishing and curing operations or until the
maturity information is no longer needed.
The Contractor shall perform the Quality Control Procedure to Verify the
Strength-Maturity Relationship on days 1 and 2 of concrete placement as indicated in
the test procedure.
The Contractor shall develop a Quality Control Plan based on the StrengthMaturity Relationship to monitor and provide remedial action to ensure the
concrete meets design strengths.
382
Any alteration in mix proportions or source or type of any material, in excess of
those tolerable by batching variability shall require the development of a new
strength-maturity relationship prior to its use at the Contractors time and
expense. Alterations include a change in type, source, or proportion of cement,
fly ash, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, or admixtures. A change in water-tocementitious material ratio greater than 5.0 percent requires the development of
a new strength-maturity relationship.
Maturity Method Test Procedure
This test method provides a procedure for estimating concrete strength by
means of the maturity method. The maturity method is based on strength gain as a
function of temperature and time. This method is a modification of ASTM
C1074-98 covering the procedures for estimating concrete strength by means of
the maturity method.
The maturity method consists of three steps:
•
•
•
Develop strength-maturity relationship
Estimate in-place strength
Verify strength-maturity relationship.
The Nurse-Saul “temperature-time factor (TTF)” maturity index shall be used in this
test method, with a datum temperature of 0 oC (32 oF).
Apparatus
•
•
•
•
•
If the maturity meter has input capability for datum temperature, verify
that the proper value of the datum temperature has been selected prior to
each use.
Intellirock maturity system (or approved equivalent). This system shall
include the logger/sensor, handheld reader, and software.
The data obtained from the maturity meter shall be unalterable and uninterruptible.
The same brand and type of maturity meters shall be used in the field as
those used to develop and verify the strength-maturity relationship.
Logger/sensor wire grade shall be larger than or equal to 20 awg.
383
Contractors Procedure to Develop Strength-Maturity Relationship
Step
Action
1
For every concrete design that will be evaluated by the maturity
method, prepare a minimum of 21 cylinders in accordance with FOP
for AASHTO T 23. Additional cylinders should be cast to avoid having
to repeat the procedure. The mixture proportions and constituents of
the concrete shall be the same as those of the job concrete whose
strength will be estimated using this practice. The minimum size of
each batch shall be approximately 3 m3 (4 yd3).
2
Fresh concrete testing for each batch shall include concrete placement
temperature, slump, and air content in accordance with FOP for
AASHTO T 309, FOP for AASHTO T 119, and FOP for AASHTO T 152.
3
Embed loggers/sensors in at least two cylinders. Loggers/sensors
shall be placed 2-4 inches from any surface. Activate the
loggers/sensors.
Cure the cylinders in accordance with FOP for AASHTO T 23.
Perform compression strength tests in accordance with FOP for
AASHTO T 22 to target 2,500 psi for opening to traffic. In targeting
the opening to traffic requirement and to properly characterize and
validate the maturity calibration curve at least three of target
cylinder breaks must be broken prior to 2,500 psi. Test three
cylinders at each age and compute the average strength. The
cylinders with loggers/sensors may be tested if additional cylinders
are needed.
4
5
6
If a cylinder is obviously defective (for example, out of round, not
square, damaged due to handling), the cylinder shall be discarded. If
an individual cylinder strength is greater than 10 percent outside the
average of three cylinders, the cylinder can be considered defective
and be discarded. When two of the three cylinders are defective, a
new batch must be evaluated unless additional acceptable cylinders
are available.
At each test age, record the individual and average values of maturity
and strength for each batch on a permanent data sheet.
384
Step
7
Action
Plot the average strengths as a function of the average maturity
values, with data points shown. Using a computer spreadsheet
program such as Microsoft Excel, calculate a point-to-point
interpolation through the data. The resulting curve is the strengthmaturity relationship to be used for estimating the strength of the
concrete mixture placed in the field.
When developing the strength-maturity relationship, the spreadsheet
software allows the Contractor to develop the corresponding
maturity equation, which defines the strength-maturity relationship.
The Engineer should carefully examine the data for “outliers”, faulty
cylinder breaks, or faulty maturity readings. The Engineer should use
judgment to determine if certain points should be discarded, or
retested, or whether the entire strength-maturity relationship should
be regenerated.
Contractors Procedure to Estimate In-Place Strength
1
Step
Action
Prior to or at the time of concrete placement, install loggers/sensors
at the frequency specified. Loggers/sensors shall be placed a
minimum of 2 ft. from a panel edge 4 to 5 inches from the panel
surface. Loggers/sensors may be tied to reinforcing steel, but should
not be in direct contact with the reinforcing steel or formwork.
2
As soon as practical after concrete placement, connect and activate
the maturity meter(s).
3
The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer, prior to the opening the
pavement to traffic, encrypted data files (with software to read the
files) of the maturity data from the loggers/sensors. Data shall be
provided until the maturity is at a value that is equal to or greater
than the required strength for that concrete mixture, as determined
by the strength-maturity relationship. Additionally data shall be
provided on a record log.
385
Contractors Quality Control Procedure to Verify Strength-Maturity Relationship
Step
1
2
Action
At the specified verification interval make a three cylinders in
accordance with FOP for AASHTO T 23.
Embed a logger/sensor in one cylinder. Loggers/sensors shall be
placed 2-4 inches from any surface. Activate the logger/sensor as
soon as possible.
3
4
Cure the cylinders in accordance with FOP for AASHTO T 23.
Perform compression strength tests on all three of the cylinders
in accordance with FOP for AASHTO T 22 to verify strength and
time to reach 2,500 psi for opening to traffic. Compute the
average strength of the cylinders. If a cylinder is obviously
defective (for example, out of round, not square, damaged due to
handling), the cylinder shall be discarded. If any individual
cylinder strength is greater than 10 percent outside the average
of three cylinders, that cylinder will be considered defective and
be discarded. When two of the three cylinders are defective, the
verification procedure will have to be repeated starting at step 1.
5
Record on a permanent data sheet the maturity value at the time
of compression testing and individual and average strengths
established from the cylinder breaks. Also record the predicted
strength based on the strength-maturity relationship established
for that particular concrete design, and the percent difference
between average and predicted values. The strength maturity
relationship is verified when the predicted strength established
from the average strength maturity relationship and the cylinder
breaks are within 10 percent. A copy of the data sheet and an
encrypted f i l e for the maturity data shall be provided to the
Engineer on a daily basis.
5-05.4 Measurement
Section 5-05.4 is revised to read:
Cement Concrete Pavement will be measured by the cubic yard for the completed pavement.
The volume will be determined from measurements taken as listed below.
1. The width measurement will be the width of the pavement shown on the typical
cross-section in the Plans, additional widening where called for, or as otherwise
specified in writing by the Engineer.
2. The length will be measured along the center of each Roadway or ramp.
386
3. The depth will be determined from the prepared aggregate surface as measured
in the field. The depth utilized to calculate the volume shall not exceed the Plan
depth plus 0.04 feet.
The volume of the pavement section shall equal the measured length × width × field
measured depth.
No measurement will be made for dowel bars or joints.
Concrete for curbs, will be measured under Section 32 16 14, Concrete Curbs and Gutters.
Concrete for driveways will be measured under Section 32 16 15, Cement Concrete Driveway
Entrances.
Concrete for sidewalks and islands will be measured under Section 32 16 16, Cement Concrete
Sidewalks.
5-05.5 Payment
Section 5-05.5 is revised to read:
Payment will be made in accordance with 1-04.1, for each of the following Bid items:
32 13 74.01 Concrete Cement Pavement (Dowelled) 12" Thickness by the cubic
yard.
32 13 74.02 Concrete Cement Pavement (Dowelled) 11" Thickness by the cubic
yard.
The Contract Price will be payment in full for furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the Work as specified.
No separate payment will be made for dowel bars or joints required to complete the
work.
No payment will be made under this Section for concrete associated with curbs,
sidewalk, islands or driveways, the cost of those items being included in Section 32 16
14 Concrete Curbs and Gutters, 32 16 15 Cement Concrete Driveway Entrances, and
32 16 16 Cement Concrete Sidewalks.
END OF SECTION
387
SECTION 32 14 13 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Precast Concrete unit pavers with detectable warning.
B.
Precast Concrete unit pavers with linear detectable warning.
C.
Precast Concrete unit pavers with engraved bike symbol inlay.
D.
Precast Concrete unit pavers with engraved ADA symbol inlay.
E.
Mortar setting bed and mortar joints.
F.
Control and Expansion joints.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast in Place Concrete
B.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers
MEASUREMENT
A.
1.4
PAYMENT
A.
1.5
No separate measurement will be made for Precast Concrete Unit Paving.
No separate payment will be made for Precast Concrete Unit Paving. The cost
of meeting these requirements shall be incidental to the work described in
Section 13 13 00 - Platforms and Stations.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide characteristics of paver unit, dimensions, and special
shapes.
C.
Samples, detectable and engraved pavers: Submit two samples of each paver
type, illustrating style, size, color range and surface texture of units being
provided.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate substrate requirements and
installation methods.
388
1.6
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide five (5) percent of total order of each precast detectable paver size
and color. (confirm exact quantity desired with owner prior to delivery)
B.
Provide three (3) custom, precast paver with bike symbol inlay.
C.
Provide three (3) custom, precast paver with ADA symbol inlay.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Concrete paver manufacturer qualifications:
1.
2.
Products shall be produced by a single manufacturer unless otherwise
specified.
The paver manufacturer shall demonstrate, either by proven field
performance or a laboratory freeze-thaw test, that the paving units
have adequate durability if they are to be subjected to a freeze-thaw
environment.
a.
Satisfactory field performance is indicated when units similar in
composition and made with the same manufacturing process as
those to be supplied to the purchaser, do not exhibit
objectionable deterioration after at least three (3) years.
b.
The units used as the basis for proven field performance shall
have been exposed to the same general type of environment,
temperature range and traffic volume as is contemplated for
the units supplied to the purchaser.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Precast Concrete Unit Pavers with detectable warning and engraved symbols:
The design is based on the following product: Wausau Tile ADA Compliant
pavers and Engraved Pavers. Wausau, WI 1 (800) 388-8728.
B.
Substitutions: See Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedures.
MATERIALS
A.
Precast Concrete Unit Pavers with Detectable Warning, Type 1 and Type 2
(mortar set):
1.
2.
3.
Compressive Strength: 8000 psi average, with minimum of 7200 psi.
Absorption: 5 percent average, with maximum of 7 percent.
Size: 12" x 12" nominal.
389
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Precast Concrete Unit Pavers with Linear Detectable Warning, Type 3 (mortar
set):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Compressive Strength: 8000 psi average, with minimum of 7200 psi.
Absorption: 5 percent average, with maximum of 7 percent.
Size: 12" x 12" nominal.
Thickness: 2 inches.
Edges: Chamfered.
Design: ADA Symbol as shown on drawings, epoxy filled.
Color: See drawings and Color Schedule.
Mortar and grout: Mortar and grout as recommended by detectable paver
manufacturer. Bedding and grouting mortars shall be weather, frost, shock,
and chemical resistant and shall meet the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Compressive Strength: 8000 psi average, with minimum of 7200 psi.
Absorption: 5 percent average, with maximum of 7 percent.
Size: 12" x 12" nominal.
Thickness: 2 inches.
Edges: Chamfered.
Design: Bike Symbol as shown on drawings, epoxy filled.
Color: See drawings and Color Schedule.
Precast Concrete Paver with Engraved ADA symbol, Type 5 (mortar set):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Compressive Strength: 8000 psi average, with minimum of 7200 psi.
Absorption: 5 percent average, with maximum of 7 percent.
Size: 12" x 12" nominal.
Thickness: 2 inches.
Edges: Chamfered.
Style: Tactile Warning Pattern.
Color: See drawings and Color Schedule.
Precast Concrete Unit Paver with engraved bike symbol, Type 4 (mortar set):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Thickness: 2 inches.
Edges: Chamfered.
Style: ADA-2 Truncated Dome.
Color: See drawings and Color Schedule.
Compressive Strength: Mortar shall be 3000 psi minimum.
Paver bond strength shall be 500 psi minimum.
Water absorption shall be 4.0 percent maximum.
Cleaning Agents: Suitable for conditions of use and approved by paver
manufacturer. Muriatic or other Acid Type cleaning agents not permitted.
390
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate is level or to correct gradient, smooth, capable of
supporting pavers and imposed loads, and ready to receive work of this
Section.
B.
Verify gradients and elevations of substrate are correct.
INSTALLATION OF SOLID PAVER UNITS
A.
Precast Concrete Unit Pavers (mortar set)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
3.3
Do not install cracked, broken, or chipped Pavers.
Set units flush with adjacent walkway surfaces.
Place half units or special shaped units at edges and interruptions.
Machine saw partial units.
Place paver units in pattern shown on Drawings, from straight
reference line.
Maintain uniform joint width of 3/8 inch between pavers, and at
abutting vertical surfaces and protrusions. To accommodate grout,
rake out joints 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep.
Fill joints with grout. Pack and work into voids. Neatly tool surface to
slightly concave joint. Joints to be flush with adjacent pavers and
concrete.
Form control and expansion joints as detailed, with sealant and
backing rod in lieu of pointing mortar. Form control joints 3/8 inch
wide. Form expansion joints 3/8 inch wide, penetrating through
pavers into concrete base.
Provide expansion joints where unit pavers abut vertical structures
and where shown on drawings.
Form full depth expansion joints directly above joints in structural
base and where indicated on drawings.
Joints shall be grouted as soon as possible after initial set of mortar
bed. Grout shall be forced into joints, struck flush and tooled slightly
concave. Grout spillage shall be removed from face of paver as work
progresses.
Grout shall be cured by maintaining in damp condition for seven (7)
days, except as otherwise recommended by grout manufacturer.
ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
True to plane within 0.25 inch per ten (10) feet non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum0.0625 inch height variation between pavers.
391
C.
3.4
3.5
Individual pavers shall not vary more than 1/16" from level across width of
paver.
CLEANING AND REPAIRING
A.
Remove Stains from exposed surfaces.
B.
Unless otherwise approved, clean Pavers before installing adjacent finish
materials.
C.
Delay cleaning until Pavers are dry.
D.
Mask or otherwise protect adjacent Vegetation and other Materials
damageable by Cleaning Agents.
E.
Prior to applying fluid Cleaning Agents, saturate Pavers with clean Water.
F.
Remove Cleaning Agents from Pavers following cleaning.
G.
Follow Manufacturer's instructions for applying and removing Cleaning
Agents.
H.
Included Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when
directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work
of this Section.
I.
Remove Debris from Project Site upon work completion or sooner, if
directed.
PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK
A.
Protect work specified herein against damage and discoloration.
B.
Do not permit traffic for 48 hours after paver placement.
END OF SECTION
392
SECTION 32 16 14 CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS (SECTIONS 8-04)
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 8-04 – Curbs, Gutters,
and Spillways, and other sections referenced therein, of the Standard Specifications, as
amended herein.
References to “the Standard Plans” in Section 8-04, and other sections reference therein, of
the Standard Specifications shall be revised to refer to the Plans.
8-04.4 Measurement
Section 8-04.4 is revised to read:
All curbs and gutters will be measured by the linear foot along the line and slope of the
completed curbs and gutters, including bends. Measurement of cement concrete curb
and cement concrete curb and gutter, when constructed across driveways or sidewalk
ramps, will include the width of the driveway or sidewalk ramp
No separate measurement will be made for expansion joints, sealant, weepholes,
curb drain pipe, scoring, keyways, reinforcing bars, dowels, welded wire fabric, or
finishing.
No separate measurement will be made for crushed surfacing for work in this
section. Base will be considered incidental to work.
No measurement will be made for curbs occurring within the payment limits of the
transit station platforms.
8-04.5 Payment
Section 8-04.5 is revised to read:
Payment will be made in accordance with 1-04.1, for each of the following Bid items:
32 16 14.01 Concrete Curb (Type E-1), by the linear foot.
32 16 14.02 Concrete Curb and Gutter (Type A-1), by the linear foot.
32 16 14.03 Concrete Curb – Extra Tall, by the linear foot.
No separate payment will be made for jointing, scoring, keyways, sealant,
weepholes, reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric or finishing curbs unless specifically
provided in other Sections. The cost of meeting the requirements will be incidental to
other Contract prices.
No separate payment will be made for curbs, including special shaped BRT curbs,
ramps or sidewalks occurring within the payment limits of the platforms. The cost of
meeting the requirements shall be incidental to the work described in Section 13 13
00 Platforms and Stations.
393
The Contract price paid for each item will be payment in full for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and doing all Work necessary to
complete the Work specified.
END OF SECTION
394
SECTION 32 16 15 CEMENT CONCRETE DRIVEWAY ENTRANCES (SECTIONS 8-06)
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 8-06 – Cement
Concrete Driveway Entrances, and other sections referenced therein, of the Standard
Specifications, as amended herein.
References to “the Standard Plans” in Section 8-06, and other sections reference therein, of
the Standard Specifications shall be revised to refer to the Plans.
8-06.2 Materials
Section 8-06.2, is supplemented with the following:
Reinforcing Steel
9-07
8-06.3 Materials
Section 8-06.2, is supplemented with the following:
Reinforcing steel, as shown in the Major Commercial Driveway detail included in the
Plans, shall be installed in accordance with Section 6-02.3(24).
8-06.4 Measurement
Section 8-06.4 is revised to read:
Cement concrete driveway entrances will be measured by the square yard of finished surface
No separate measurement will be made for expansion joints, sealant, scoring, keyways,
reinforcing bars, dowels, welded wire fabric, or finishing.
No separate measurement will be made for crushed surfacing for work in this section.
Base will be considered incidental to work.
Reconstruction of asphalt concrete and gravel driveways will be measured as specified in
Sections 32 12 20, Hot Mix Asphalt and 32 11 23, Crushed Surfacing, respectively.
8-06.5 Payment
Section 8-06.5 is revised to read:
Payment will be made in accordance with 1-04.1, for each of the following Bid items:
32 16 15.01 Concrete Driveway - Commercial, per square yard
No separate payment will be made for jointing, scoring, keyways, sealant, reinforcing bars,
welded wire fabric or finishing driveways unless specifically provided in other Sections. The
cost of meeting the requirements will be incidental to other Contract prices.
395
No separate payment will be made for crushed surfacing for driveways. Base course will
be considered incidental to concrete sidewalk and driveway work.
The Contract price paid for each item will be payment in full for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and doing all Work necessary to complete the
Work specified.
END OF SECTION
396
SECTION 32 16 16 CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALKS (SECTIONS 8-14)
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 8-14 – Cement
Concrete Sidewalks, and other sections referenced therein, of the Standard Specifications as
amended herein.
References to “the Standard Plans” in Section 8-04, and other sections reference therein, of
the Standard Specifications shall be revised to refer to the Plans.
8-14.4 Measurement
Section 8-14.4 is revised to read:
Cement concrete sidewalks will be measured by the square yard of finished surface.
Pedestrian Area Treatments at Turtle Place will be measured by the square yard of finished
surface.
No separate measurement will be made for sidewalk ramps or tactile warning integral to
ramp. These areas will be measured as sidewalk.
No separate measurement will be made for expansion joints, sealant, weepholes, curb drain
pipe, scoring, keyways, reinforcing bars, dowels, welded wire fabric, or finishing.
No separate measurement will be made for crushed surfacing for work in this section.
Base will be considered incidental to work.
No measurement will be made for sidewalks or ramps occurring within the payment limits of
the transit station platforms.
No measurement will be made for brick inlay at 12th and Washington. All work to install the
brick inlay including block-out, mortar bed, brick setting, and grouting are incidental to
measured sidewalk area under Cement Concrete Sidewalk – 12th and Washington.
8-14.5 Payment
Section 8-14.5 is revised to read:
Payment will be made in accordance with 1-04.1, for each of the following Bid items:
32 16 16.01 Cement Concrete Sidewalk per square yard
32 16 16.02 Cement Concrete Sidewalk – Turtle Place, per square yard
32 16 16.03 Cement Concrete Sidewalk – 12th and Washington, per square yard
Concrete sidewalks, including sidewalk ramps will be paid for at the Contract unit price for
various types of sidewalk constructed.
Payment for Cement Concrete Sidewalk – Turtle Place will be at the Contract unit price
shown, including concrete banding and reinforcement, as shown in the Plans.
397
Payment for Cement Concrete Sidewalk – 12th and Washington will be at the Contract unit
price shown, including brick, as shown in the Plans.
No separate payment will be made for jointing, scoring, keyways, sealant, weepholes,
reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, or finishing sidewalks unless specifically provided in
other Sections. The cost of meeting the requirements will be incidental to other Contract
prices.
No separate payment will be made for crushed surfacing under sidewalks and reinforced
sidewalks. Base course will be considered incidental to concrete sidewalk work.
No separate payment will be made for curbs, including special shaped BRT curbs, or
sidewalks occurring within the payment limits of the platforms. The cost of meeting the
requirements shall be incidental to the work described in Section 13 13 00 Platforms and
Stations.
The Contract price paid for each item will be payment in full for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and doing all Work necessary to complete the
Work specified.
END OF SECTION
398
SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKING
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 8-22 –
Pavement Marking, Section 9-34 – Pavement Marking Material, and other sections
referenced therein, of the Standard Specifications, as amended herein.
8-22 PAVEMENT MARKINGS DESCRIPTION
Section 8-22.1 is supplemented with the following:
(******)
In addition to the City of Vancouver Standard Drawings, Pavement markings shall
meet the following requirements listed herein. If any discrepancy is found
between the Standard Drawings and the Standard Specification, the Standard
Drawings shall govern.
Pavement markings identified in the Plans as “Turn Lane Line, 8” White” shall
meet all of the requirements for Wide Line except as noted on COV Standard
Drawing T29-44.
Pavement markings identified in the Plans as “Bike Lane Line, 8” White” shall
meet all of the requirements for Wide Line.
Pavement markings identified in the Plans as “Double Yellow Center Line Markings,
4” Yellow” shall meet all of the requirements for Double Yellow Center Line
except as noted on COV Standard Drawing T29-48.
Pavement markings identified in the Plans as “Lane Line, 4” White” shall meet all of
the requirements for Plastic Line except as noted on COV Standard Drawing T29-44.
Pavement markings identified in the Plans as “Left Turn Lane Marking” shall meet all
of the requirements for Traffic Arrow except as noted on COV Standard Drawing
T29-53.
Pavement markings identified in the Plans as “Bike Lane Marking” shall meet all of
the requirements for Bicycle Lane Symbol except as noted on COV Standard Drawing
T29-43.
Pavement markings identified in the Plans as “Crosswalk Marking” shall meet all of
the requirements for “Plastic Crosswalk Line” except as noted on COV Standard
Drawing T29-40.
Pavement markings identified in the Plans as “Stop Bar” shall meet all of the
requirements for “Plastic Stop Line” except as noted on COV Standard Drawing T2941.
399
Removal of existing pavement markings and raised pavement markers that are in
conflict with the new pavement markings shall be included under the respective
installation Bid Item.
PAYMENT
Section 8-22.5 is revised to read as follows:
(******)
Payment will be made in accordance with 1-04.1, for each of the following Bid items:











32 17 23.01 Paint Line, per linear foot.
32 17 23.02 Plastic Line, per linear foot.
32 17 23.03 Painted Wide Lane Line, per linear foot.
32 17 23.04 Plastic Stop Line, per linear foot.
32 17 23.05 Plastic Crosswalk Line, per square foot.
32 17 23.06 Plastic Crosshatch Marking, per linear foot.
32 17 23.07 Plastic Traffic Arrow, per each.
32 17 23.08 Plastic Traffic Letter, per each.
32 17 23.09 Plastic Bicycle Lane Symbol, per each.
32 17 23.10 Removing Plastic Line, per square foot.
32 17 23.11 Removing Plastic Traffic Marking, per each.
The unit Contract price for the aforementioned Bid items shall be full payment for all costs to
perform the Work as described in Section 8-22.
END OF SECTION
400
SECTION 32 31 13 SITE FENCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
01 33 00 – Submittals
01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures
01 78 24 –Operations and Maintenance Manuals
02 41 20 – Removal of Structures and Obstructions
03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical
26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
32 13 74 – Cement Concrete Pavement
Measurement
1.
2.
D.
Furnishing and installing permanent fencing.
Galvanized steel chain-link fabric.
Galvanized steel framework for fence.
Concrete foundation for posts.
Fence shall be measured by the lineal foot along the fence alignment
shown in the Contract Plans.
No measurement will be made for barbed wire, foundations, posts or
other hardware required to complete the work.
Payment
1.
2.
3.
The Contract Price will be payment in full for furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the
Work as specified.
No separate payment will be made for barbed wire, foundations, posts
or hardware required to complete the work.
Payment will be made at the contract price for the following items
(units):
Pay Item
4.
32 31 13.01
Pay Unit
Fencing
401
LF
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
Sponsor
Number
Subject
ASTM
A 123
ASTM
A 153
ASTM
A 392
ASTM
A 641
ASTM
A 702
ASTM
A 824
ASTM
F 1043
ASTM
F 1083
AASHTO
M 133
Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings On
Iron and Steel Products
Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
Steel Hardware
Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence
Fabric
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire ASTM F567
Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence
Specification for Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot
Wrought ASTM F 626 Specification for Fence Fittings
Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension
Wire for Use With Chain Link Fence
Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on
Steel Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated
(Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures
Specification for Preservatives and Pressure Treatment
Processes for Timber
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
1.5
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced.
CLFMI: Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The Manufacturer shall supply a Fencing System complete with all hardware,
posts, rails, unions, and accessories necessary for a complete and
aesthetically balanced installation.
B.
Design Requirements: Fencing system, foundation and installation shall be
engineered to withstand 90 mph wind load.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section
01 33 00 Submittals, except as modified herein.
402
B.
Indicate compliance of all products and materials with Buy America
requirements.
C.
Product Data: Material descriptions, manufacturer's data, Specifications,
installation instructions, construction details, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for the following:
1.
2.
D.
Shop Drawings: Show locations of fence, posts, hardware, and accessories.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
Details of fabrication and installation.
Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of
components.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of anchorage,
attachment, and bracing.
Complete Materials list and detailed fabrication drawings for
frames including structural calculations as required.
E.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of chain-link fences certifying
that products furnished comply with requirements.
F.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"
Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses
of architects and owners, and other information specified.
G.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of
chain-link fence and gate grounding and bonding with performance
requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Fence posts, rails, and fittings.
Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments.
Source Limitations for Chain-Link Fences: Obtain each grade, finish, type, and
variety of component for chain-link fences from one source with resources
to provide chain-link fences and gates of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties. Comply with Industry Standards and manufacture a
complete system produced by a single manufacturer including necessary
fittings and fastenings.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to
requirements indicated:
403
1.
2.
B.
1.8
Notify Project Engineer not less than two ( 2 ) days in advance of
proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Project Engineer’s
written permission.
Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences shown
on Contract Plans in relation to property survey and existing structures.
Verify dimensions by field measurements.
DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A.
Deliver fence materials, posts, and accessories to project site, completely
prefinished. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to
ensure that no damages occurred during shipping. Materials shall be handled
and stored properly to protect against damage and theft.
B.
Handle fence components to protect finish coating from any scuffs,
abrasion or other damage during unloading and installation. Excessive
damage to factory applied coatings will be cause for rejection
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CHAIN-LINK FABRIC FOR FENCE
A.
Steel Chain-Link Fabric: Height indicated on Contract Plans. Provide fabric in
one-piece widths. Comply with CLFMI's "Product Manual" and with
requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Mesh and Wire Size: 2-inch diamond mesh, 0.148-inch diameter,
helically wound and woven to height indicated on Contract Drawings.
Galvanized Steel Wire: Zinc-Coated Fabric, ASTM A 392, with zinc
coating applied to steel wire after weaving according to ASTM A
817, Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) with the following minimum
coating weight:
a.
Class 2: Not less than 2 oz./sq. ft. of uncoated wire surface.
Coat selvage ends of fabric that is metallic coated during the weaving
process with manufacturer's standard clear protective coating.
Selvage:
1.
Fence: Knuckled at both selvages, top and bottom.
404
2.2
INDUSTRIAL FRAMING FOR FENCE
A.
Round Steel Pipe: ASTM F 669, standard weight, Schedule 40, hot dipped
galvanized steel pipe complying with ASTM F 1083. Comply with ASTM F
1043, Material Design Group IA, external and internal coating Type A,
consisting of not less than 2.0-oz./sq. ft. zinc; and the following strength and
stiffness requirements:
1.
B.
Roll-Formed Steel Shapes: C-sections or other shape, produced from
structural steel. Comply with ASTM F 1043, Material Design Group II, with
minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi; and the following coating and
strength and stiffness requirements:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
End, Corner, and Pull Posts: As required to match existing chainlink fence assemblies:
a.
Schedule 40 pipe, 2.875-inch outside diameter; 5.79 pounds
per linear foot.
b.
Roll-formed steel, 3-1/2 inches, 4.847 pounds per linear foot,
ASTM A 570, Grade 45.
Coating: Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 4.0-oz./sq. ft.
zinc coating per ASTM A 653/A 653M.
Line Posts: Roll-formed steel, 1.875-inch by 1.625-inch C-section; 2.64
pounds per linear foot, ASTM A 570, Grade 45.
Top and Brace Rails: Roll-formed steel, 1.625-inch by 1.25-inch Csection; 1.35 pounds per linear foot, ASTM A 570, Grade 45.
a.
Furnish in manufacturer’s longest lengths with 14 gauge steel
expansion- type couplings at least 7-inches long at each joint.
b.
Fabricate with positive means for centering coupling.
c.
Fabricate with means for secure attachment of top rail to each
corner, pull, and end post.
TENSION WIRE
A.
General: Provide horizontal tension wire extended along bottom of fence
fabric.
B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch-diameter, marcelled tension wire
complying with ASTM A 824 and the following:
1.
Coating: Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) by the hot-dip process,
with the following minimum coating weight:
a.
Matching chain-link fabric coating weight.
405
2.4
FENCE FITTINGS
A.
General: Provide fittings for a complete fence installation, including special
fittings for corners. Provide all items necessary to complete fence system.
Comply with ASTM F 626. Galvanize each ferrous metal item in accordance
with ASTM A 153 and finish to match framing.
B.
Post and Line Caps: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel, wrought iron,
malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized cast iron. Provide weathertight closure
cap for each post, with openings to permit through passage of top rail.
Provide one cap for each post except where barbed wire supporting arms are
indicated.
Rail and Brace Ends: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel or hot-dip galvanized
cast iron. Provide rail ends or other means for attaching rails securely to each
gate, corner, pull, and end post.
C.
D.
Rail Fittings: Provide the following:
1.
2.
Top Rail Sleeves: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel or round steel
tubing. Not less than 6 inches long.
Rail Clamps: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel. Provide line and corner
boulevard clamps for connecting rails in the fence line to line posts.
E.
Tension and Brace Bands: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel, spaced not over
15-inches on center to secure tension (stretcher) bars to end, corner, pull,
and gate posts.
F.
Tension wire shall be galvanized seven gage coiled spring wire. Finish shall
match fabric.
G.
Tension (Stretcher) Bars: Hot-dip galvanized steel, one piece, length equal to
full height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post,
and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into
post. Provide tension (stretcher) bars where chain link fabric meets terminal
posts.
1.
H.
Minimum Cross-section: 3/16-inch by 3/4-inch.
Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: Provide the following types according to
ASTM F 626:
1.
Standard Round Wire Ties: Hot-dip galvanized steel for attaching
chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, complying with the
following:
a.
0.148-inch-diameter (or 9 gauge) wire; galvanized coating
thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric.
406
b.
c.
I.
2.5
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A.
2.6
2.7
Double wrap 13 gauge for rails and braces.
Hog ring ties of 11 gauge for attachment of fabric to tension
wires.
d.
Wire clips shall be 9 gauge.
Pipe Sleeves: For posts set into concrete, provide preset hot-dip galvanized
steel pipe sleeves complying with ASTM A 53, not less than 6 inches long
with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch more than outside dimension
of post, and flat steel plate forming bottom closure.
Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A.
Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide
grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
B.
Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with
potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and
grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from
water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof
coating and that is recommended in writing by manufacturer for exterior
applications of Fence Grounding.
FENCE GROUNDING
A.
General: Grounding is specified in Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding
for Electrical systems. If there is any apparent discrepancy between
grounding and bonding materials and procedures specified in this Section
and in Section 26 05 26, comply with Section 26 05 26.
B.
Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for
No. 4 AWG and larger.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Material Above Finished Grade: Copper.
Material On or Below Finished Grade: Copper.
Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch wide, woven of No. 30
AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.
Connectors and Ground Rods: Listed in UL 467.
1.
2.
Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic welded type.
Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.
a.
Size: 5/8 inch by 96 inches
407
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other
conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
C.
Ensure property lines and legal boundaries of Work are clearly established.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Do not begin installation before final grading is completed, unless
otherwise permitted by Project Engineer.
Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed
intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of
utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and
property monuments.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567,
Manufacturer’s instruction, and more stringent requirements specified.
B.
Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and
spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil.
C.
Post Setting: Hand-excavate holes for post foundations in firm, undisturbed
or compacted soil. Set posts in concrete footing. Protect portion of posts
aboveground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts and
vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Using mechanical devices to set line
posts per ASTM F 567 is not permitted. Verify that posts are set plumb,
aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during
placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.
1.
2.
3.
Dimensions and Profile: As indicated on Contract Plans.
Exposed Concrete Footings: Extend concrete 2 inches above grade,
smooth, and shape to shed water.
Concealed Concrete Footings: Stop footings below grade as indicated
on Contract Drawings to allow covering with surface material.
408
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Posts Set into Concrete in Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and
anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been
inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, and finished
sloped to drain water away from post.
Retain subparagraph above or below if posts are set into concrete.
Delete both if no posts are set into concrete.
Posts Set into Concrete in Voids: Form or core drill holes not less
than five (5) inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post.
Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space
between post and concrete with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout,
mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to drain
water away from post.
CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION
A.
Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567
and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal alignment or vertical
alignment of 30° or more.
B.
Line Posts:
1.
2.
Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet on center.
Space line posts uniformly to match on center dimension of
existing chain-link fences assemblies.
C.
Post Bracing Assemblies: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining
plumb position and alignment of fencing. Install braces at end and gate posts
and at both sides of corner and pull posts. Locate horizontal braces at
locations duplicating horizontal braces, if any, on existing chain-link fence
assemblies. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper
tension.
D.
Concrete set terminal, line and gate posts.
1.
2.
E.
Drill holes for posts in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Holes
shall have the minimum diameters shown on the Contract
Drawings. Excavate hole depths approximately 3" lower than the
post bottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 36" below the
surface.
Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation.
Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during
placement and finishing operations.
409
F.
Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position
and alignment of fencing. Install by weaving through fabric and tying to
each post with not less than 6 gauge galvanized wire, or by securing the wire
to fabric. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with
0.120-inch-diameter (11 gauge) hog rings of same material and finish as
fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches on center Install tension wire
in locations indicated before stretching fabric.
1.
2.
Top Tension Wire: Install tension wire through post cap loops.
Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom
of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same gage and type of
wire.
G.
Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and
alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending
to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts
or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion
couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer.
H.
Intermediate Rails: Install in one piece as indicated on Contract
Drawings or, if not indicated, to match existing chain-link fence
assemblies. Span between posts, using fittings, special offset fittings, and
accessories.
I.
Bottom Rails: Install, spanning between posts, using fittings and accessories.
J.
Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to secure side of enclosing framework.
Leave 2 inches between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless
otherwise indicated and 2 inches between top selvage and overhead
structure. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to
framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.
K.
Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric at 4 inches on center and
secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not
more than 15 inches on center.
L.
Tie Wires: Use U-shaped tie wires, conforming to the diameter of pipe to
which attached, installed with clasping pipe and fabric firmly attached
with ends twisted at least two full turns. Use wire of proper length to
firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at one end to chainlink fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180°, and attach other
end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize
hazard to individuals and clothing.
1.
Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches on center and to
braces 24 inches on center.
410
3.5
M.
Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage [or hardware] bolts
on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score
threads to prevent removal of nuts.
N.
Clean up debris and unused material, and remove from the site.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
A.
3.6
Grounding and Bonding for metal fences, gates, and operating systems is
specified in Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical systems.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Ground-Resistance Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing
agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B.
Ground-Resistance Tests: Subject completed grounding system to a megger
test at each grounding location. Measure ground resistance not less than two
(2) full days after last trace of precipitation, without soil having been
moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural
ground resistance. Perform tests by two-point method according to IEEE 81.
C.
Desired Maximum Grounding Resistance Value: 25 ohms.
D.
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds desired
value, notify Resident Engineer promptly. Include recommendations to
reduce ground resistance and proposal to accomplish recommended work.
E.
Report: Prepare test reports, certified by testing agency, of ground resistance
at each test location. Include observations of weather and other
phenomena that may affect test results.
END OF SECTION
411
SECTION 32 32 13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE RETAINING WALLS (SECTION 6-11)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 6-11 –
Reinforced Concrete Walls, and other sections referenced therein, of the
Standard Specifications as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
1.2
1.3
The Work in this Section consists of constructing reinforced concrete
retaining walls, including the Turtle Place Seat Wall, to the lines,
grades, and dimensions shown in the Plans. The Work includes
preparing foundation soil, furnishing and installing aggregate base,
constructing reinforced cast-in-place concrete, and backfilling to the
grades shown in the Plans.
Section 31 23 34 – Structure Excavation and Backfill
Section 32 11 23 – Crushed Surfacing
MEASUREMENT
A.
Reinforced concrete retaining walls will be measured by the cubic yard
installed and accepted to the neat line measure as shown in the Plans.
B.
No separate measurement will be made for steel reinforcing used in the
accepted reinforced concrete retaining wall volume.
PAYMENT
A.
Cast-in-place concrete retaining wall will be paid for at the Contract unit price
as listed below.
B.
The Contract price paid will be payment in full for furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and doing all Work necessary to
complete the Work specified.
412
C.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item
32 32 13.01
32 32 13.02
32 32 13.03
Pay Unit
Cast-In-Place Concrete Retaining Wall
Turtle Place Seat Wall
Turtle Place Planter Curb
CY
CY
CY
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.
B.
All concrete for Cast-In-Place Concrete Retaining Walls shall be Class
4000 unless otherwise shown in the Plans.
Aggregate Base
1.
Aggregate for aggregate base shall be crushed 1.50” – 0 or 1” – 0
dense graded aggregate complying with Section 9-03.9(3) of the
Standard Specifications unless otherwise shown in the Plans.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Cast-In-Place Concrete Retaining Wall.
1. Cast-In-Place Concrete Retaining Wall shall be constructed per section 611.3 of the Standard Specifications.
END OF SECTION
413
SECTION 32 84 23 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
B.
This section specifies irrigation system installation which consists of
furnishing all materials, equipment, transportation, and performing
all labor for layout, trenching, water source connection, system
installation, backfilling, related work, and drafting of as-built
drawings in AutoCAD format.
Additional Requirements: Repair settling around heads, valve boxes and
backfill trenches during warranty period and include complete restoration
of damaged plantings, paving, and other improvements.
1.2 WARRANTY
A.
All workmanship and materials hereunder shall be under warranty in
writing for one (1) year, from the date of final acceptance, against defective
workmanship and materials. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining
system and protecting it from all damage (at no cost to Owner) until date of
final acceptance. This shall include damage caused by vandalism or adverse
weather conditions.
1.3 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Irrigation system shall be installed by a licensed and bonded landscape or
irrigation contracting firm that specializes in the installation of irrigation
systems for commercial and public works projects (See Submittals).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit license for irrigation contracting.
B.
Submit to Project Representative, two copies of a complete list of all
materials proposed for use on this project, within 90 days of Notice to
Proceed. For each item, list name of manufacturer, trade name, and model
number. Submit catalog data, specifications, brochures, or other data giving
complete information about each item proposed for use. If proposed other
than as drawn or specified, Project Representative will determine the
equality of the material, equipment, or method, and the Project
Representative's decision will be final.
414
C.
See Final Submittals in Part 3, Execution.
1.5 DAMAGES
A.
Any structures or facilities damaged due to work of this project shall be
restored equal or better to their original condition at Contractor's expense
and to the satisfaction of owner and Project Representative.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by leaks or breaks in
pipe furnished or installed in this contract for one year after date of final
acceptance.
1.6 WATER POINT OF CONNECTION
A.
See civil drawings and specifications for irrigation water connection.
1.7 MEASUREMENT
A.
Measurement will be lump sum.
1.8 PAYMENT
A.
Accepted underground irrigation will be paid for as a contract lump sum for
"Underground Irrigation".
B.
The Contract price will be payment in full for furnishing all labor, materials,
tools, equipment and incidental, and doing all work necessary to complete
the work specified.
C.
Payment will be under:
Pay Items
32 84 23.01 Irrigation System
Pay Unit
LS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.
PVC Pipe and Fittings:
1.
PVC pipe (Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic): PVC 1120, Type 1, normal
impact, I.P.S., N.S.F approved. Schedule 40 pipe conforming to ASTM
D-1784-69, ASTM D- 1785, PS22-70. All pipes shall be new, defect
free, and continuously and permanently marked with the
manufacturer’s name or trademark, size, schedule, and type of pipe.
Minimum 200 PSI rated and with SDR 21 walls.
415
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PVC pipe fittings: PVC 1120, Schedule 40 Type 1, normal impact,
I.P.S., N.S.F. approved; meeting requirements of ASTM D-2466.
PVC Solvent Cement: Weld-On 721 meeting N.S.F. approval for Type I
and II PVC through 6-inch and meeting requirements of ASTM D2564.
PVC cleaner and primer: Weld-On P-68 or P-70 or meeting
requirements of ASTM F-656, purple color. One-step glue with builtin primer is not acceptable.
PVC sleeves: Schedule 40; size as shown on drawings.
PVC pipe up to and including 4 inches shall be solvent weld.
B.
Irrigation Heads: See Irrigation Key on drawings.
C.
Valves and Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Automatic Control Valves: See valve schedule on drawings. Supply
PVC unions on both sides of valves.
Drain Valves: domestic manufactured, brass gate valve; size as shown
on drawings.
Quick-coupling Valves: Rainbird model 5NP Non-potable.
Standard Valve boxes for drain valves, quick coupling valves, mainline
stubs, and control wire splices – 21 inches L by 16 inches W by 121/4 inches H with locking top and/or 6 inch extensions as needed to
meet finish grade, install filter fabric under and around all valve
boxes, place a complete box at the valve:
a.
Carson #1419-12 with #1419-4B bold down tee lid, color
black. Supply and install tamper resistant drilled spanner
machine screw, large diameter truss head, stainless steel,
3/18 inch thread size, 2 inch length size, McMaster-Carr part
#94135A632. Supply two (2) drilled spanner drivers for
project along with final submittals, McMaster-Carr part
#94062A119.
Jumbo 12-inch valve boxes for 1 inch and 1-1/2 inch automatic
control valves, 25-3/4 inches L by 19-3/16 inches W by 12 inches H
with locking top and/or 6 inch extensions as needed to meet finish
grade, install filter fabric under and around all valve boxes, place a
complete box at the valve:
a.
Carson #1220-12 with #1220-4B bolt down tee lid, color black.
Supply and install tamper resistant drilled spanner machine
screw, large diameter truss head, stainless steel, 3/18 inch
thread size, 2 inch length size, McMaster-Carr part #
94135A632. Supply two (2) drilled spanner drivers for project
along with final submittals, McMaster-Carr part
#94062A119.
Super Jumbo 15 inch valve boxes for 2 inch and larger automatic
control valves – 32-3/4 inches L by 23-15/16 inches W by 15 inches H
416
7.
with locking top and/or 6 inch extensions as needed to meet finish
grade, install filter fabric under and around all valve boxes, place a
complete box at the valve:
a.
Carson #1324-15 with #1324-4B bold down tee lid, color
black. Supply and install tamper resistant drilled spanner
machine screw, large diameter truss head, stainless steel,
3/18 inch thread size, 3 inch length size, McMaster-Carr part
#94135A632. Supply two (2) drilled spanner drivers for
project along with final submittals, McMaster-Carr part
#94062A119.
Paver Blocks under Valve Boxes: 8 inches by 2 inches by 16 inches,
flat, solid, precast concrete paver.
D.
Irrigation Controller: See drawings for controller model and remote control
remote.
E.
Other Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Keys:
a.
Two (2) keys for each locking irrigation controller door.
b.
Two (2) Rainbird 2049 Cover Keys for locking quick coupling
valve cap.
c.
Two (2) Rainbird 55K-1 Valve Keys and two SH-1 Hose
Swivels for quick coupling valves.
Low Voltage Control Wire: Color-coded direct burial cable, solid
copper, type UF, UL listed for direct burial in ground. Use white for
common wire, red for control wires, and black for spares. Size of wire
shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation, but in
no case smaller than single strand number 14 gauge.
Electrical Connectors: 3M DBY (all wire connections and splices to be
placed in a box).
Pipe backfill material: Imported riverbank sand.
Drain rock: 1-1/2 inch round drain rock; no fines.
Detector Tape: 2 inch wide blue metallic tape with permanent
“Caution, Buried water line below.” Allen Systems or Lineguard.
Permanent Water-proof Number Tags for Control Wires in Valve
Boxes: Rainbird Valve ID Tags, IVD series pre-printed serialized tags,
color yellow.
Swing joints quick coupler valves: Rainbird TSJ Series Swing Joints,
size to match irrigation head inlet.
Swing Pipe: Rainbird SPX-Flex kink resistant Swing Pipe.
Stake for Quick Coupler: 11/2”x11/2”x24” Aluminum L stake, secure
with stainless steel worm gear clamps.
Backflow Preventer: See Civil Plans for required backflow device.
417
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A.
Call Utilities Underground Location Center 1-800-424-5555 and follow
specification requirements to identify and protect existing utilities.
B.
Inspection: Do not allow any work to be covered or enclosed until it has been
inspected, pressure tested, and approved by the owner and Project Owner. If
the contractor does not comply, Project Representative reserves the right to
require the contractor to unearth, dig up, or otherwise expose the work, at
contractor’s own expense.
C.
Installation of all materials and equipment shall be in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s written specifications and recommendations and with local
and state codes whether indicated on drawings or not.
D.
Layout: Stake irrigation system with colored flags according to schematic
design shown on plans before beginning construction and obtain approval of
layout from Project Owner. Location of pipe, sprinkler heads, valves, and
other equipment shall be as shown on plans and shall be size and type
indicated. No changes shall be made without prior approval of by Project
Owner. Minor changes may be necessary to conform to ground conditions. If
the contractor does not comply, Project Representative reserves the right to
require the contractor to relocate the equipment at contractor’s own
expense.
E.
Disruption of Services: Permission to shut off any water lines must be
obtained in writing from the Owner’s Representative who will make the
necessary arrangements. Disruptions shall be kept to a minimum.
F.
Environmental Conditions: In freezing weather, no solvent welding of PVC
pipe will be permitted. In rainy weather, solvent welt PVC pipe only under
cover.
3.2 TRENCHING
A.
Minimum coverage depth to top of pipe:
1.
2.
B.
Lateral pipe in planting areas and under concrete walks – 12 inches.
Mainlines in planting areas and under concrete walks – 18 inches.
Strip usable topsoil prior to trenching and keep separate from subsoil and in
a condition similar to that existing before excavation.
418
C.
Over-excavate trenches to accommodate the required depth of sand and the
pipe diameter. Remove and dispose of off-site subsoil from trench. Do not
mix subsoil into topsoil. Backfill trench bottom with the specified sand.
D.
Cover mainline on all sides with 6 inches of specified sand. Cover laterals on
sides and bottom of pipe with 2 inches specified sand, top with 4 inches
sand. Maintain a minimum of three inches between pipes and underground
concrete, tree roots, or rocks.
E.
Backfill in the cool part of the day to minimize expansion and contraction of
PVC pipe.
F.
Maintain minimum 2 inch space between adjacent lateral pipes in same
trench and 5 inch space between mainlines and other pipes.
G.
Remove and dispose of legally off-site all lumber, rubbish, rocks, crushed
rock, and construction debris from trenches. Pipe shall have firm, uniform
bearing for the entire length of each pipe line to prevent uneven settlement.
Wedging or blocking of pipe is not permitted.
H.
Flushing: Before backfilling trenches, all pipe shall be flushed clear and clean
of all dirt and foreign material (See Flushing and Testing).
I.
After pipe has been tested and inspected to the satisfaction of the Project
Owner and the owner, backfill trench in layers not over 6 inches thick and
compact each layer. Fill to finish grade with required topsoil in planting
areas as specified. If trenching is not in area of new planting, restore surface
to equal or better condition.
J.
Any materials or equipment damaged or destroyed while backfilling shall be
repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
3.3 PIPE
A.
Exercise care in handling and storing plastic pipe and fittings. Store under
cover before using. Transport in a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow
the length of the pipe to lay flat to prevent full bending or concentrated
external load at any point. Any section of pipe dented or damaged shall be
discarded.
B.
Remove all foreign matter and dirt from inside of pipe before lowering into
trench.
C.
Install pipe per manufacturer’s specification and do not exceed velocity of 5
f.p.s. at the target maximum flow rate. Use specified primer and cement on
all glue joints. Use Teflon tape on all threaded joints.
419
D.
Install detector tape 6 inches below finish grade above PVC mainline and
lateral pipes.
E.
Provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the
manufacturer.
F.
Cut pipe ends square. Remove all burrs.
G.
For non-standard angles and bends, install double fittings (such as two ells,
or one ell and one tee) to avoid stressing the pipe or fittings. The maximum
radius for solvent weld pipe is 200 times the pipe inside diameter. Bending
of pipe shall not occur until pipe has cured minimum 24 hours. Use two
people to glue pipe over 2-1/2 inches. Do not bend mainline pipe, do not
move mainline pipe or fill with water for 24 hours.
H.
Wrap PVC pipe threaded joints with a minimum five (5) wraps of Teflon
tape.
I.
Install all mainline stubs and extra wires in locations shown on drawings in
standard size valve boxes with extensions as necessary to meet finish grade
3.4 CONTROL VALVES
A.
Install automatic control and gate valves in jumbo or super jumbo valve
boxes complete with extension(s), and other equipment and as detailed.
B.
Install control valves in shrub areas when feasible between large shrubs out
of ground covers and lawn.
C.
Lid of valve box shall be set 1/2 inch above finish grade.
3.5 QUICK-COUPLING VALVES
A.
Install quick-coupling valve next to or inside point of connection vault for
compressor air blow-out. Install in round valve box if outside of vault.
Secure as shown on drawings.
B.
Install all other coupling valves where shown on drawings in round valve box
as shown in details. Secure as shown in details.
C.
Install valve tight so that valve does not rotate when key is inserted and
removed.
D.
Install valves inside valve boxes at height to allow valve key to access and
operate valve.
420
3.6 DRAIN VALVES
A.
Contractor shall be responsible for establishing the locations of drain valves
during installation and to insure complete gravity drainage of all mainlines
and laterals. All drains shall be installed with 2 inch sleeving and locking
lid.(see details). Record locations on field drawings for incorporation with
as-built drawings.
3.7 IRRIGATION HEADS
A.
Install irrigation heads of types, sizes, and coverage called for in Irrigation
Head Key at locations shown on drawings. Minor changes in head location
may be necessary to achieve head-to-head triple coverage at no additional
expense to Owner; notify Project Owner and Owner for approval prior to
making any changes. Document all changes on project site as-built drawings
as they occur.
B.
Schedule the installation of all sprinkler heads after final grades are
established and proper compaction has taken place.
C.
Locate heads adjacent to planters, mow-strips, walks, pavement, and curbs
with a minimum 1 inch clearance between head and hard surface.
3.8 IRRIGATION SLEEVES
A.
Install PVC sleeves under all pavement, wall and curbs prior to placing
asphalt or concrete for passage of irrigation piping and control wiring under
pavement or gravel surfacing as shown on the drawings. Extend sleeves
beyond edge of paving minimum equal to sleeve depth plus minimum 6
inches. Solvent weld all joints. See 3.2 Trenching for pipe depths.
Temporarily tape ends closed to keep soil out of sleeves.
B.
All control and communication wire under pavement shall be placed in
sleeves.
C.
Place a 14-gauge blue trace wire above entire length of sleeves. Trace wire is
to remain permanently below grade.
D.
Temporarily stake both ends of sleeve with a capped, vertical PVC pipe, 12
inch minimum above grade and 18 minimum below existing grade. Mark
“Irrig. Sleeve” with waterproof ink. Wrap ends of trace wire around PVC
stake.
E.
Backfill sleeves with 4 inch sand layer before backfilling with soil or other
sub-grade materials required for paving.
421
F.
Remove stakes after sleeves are recorded on as-built drawings and after
mainline, lateral pipes, and control wiring are installed and inspected.
3.9 CONTROL WIRING
A.
Lay in trench under mainline or lateral lines when practical. Minimum depth
18 inches. Place in sleeve when passing underneath pavement.
B.
Make all splices moisture proof using specified electrical connectors. Splices
shall only be in valves boxes. Bundle wires together and wrap with
electrical tape at 5 foot intervals. Provide 36 inches of coiled slack at
connection to control valves. Provide one foot of slack between all splices in
a series of “S” curves in trenches. Provide expansion coils ever 100 feet for
runs more than 100 feet in length.
C.
Clearly mark ends of all wiring according to valve number with a permanent
waterproof number tag. Locate one tag at each control valve inside the valve
box and one tag per wire in the controller.
D.
Provide one (1) black spare wire to farthest zone in each direction from
controller and along each branch off main mainline. Clearly mark as “spare”
inside controller. Provide 36 inches of coiled slack and install in standard
valve box.
E.
Install separate common wires for each controller if system contains more
than one (1) controller.
F.
Sharp bends or kinks in the wiring shall not be permitted. Wires shall be
unreeled in place alongside or in trench and shall be carefully placed along
bottom of trench. Wire shall not be unreeled and pulled into trench from
one end. No wires are to be placed in thrust blocks.
3.10 IRRIGATION CONTROLLER
A.
Install complete at location indicated on drawings. Verify location with
Project Representative prior to installing. Wire zone numbers on drawings to
correspond to valve and station numbers.
B.
Comply with National Electrical Code, state and local codes, and to
satisfaction of Owner.
C.
Conduit to controller shall be sized to properly accommodate all wires and
leave ample room for future wires.
422
3.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTER (see Civil Plans)
A.
Backflow preventer to be installed as specified and shown on civil drawings.
B.
Provide all necessary test reports and required information to State and local
municipalities.
3.12 FLUSHING AND TESTING
A.
Thoroughly flush all piping before testing and installation of irrigation heads
and before backfilling.
B.
The contractor shall not allow or cause any work to be covered before it has
been inspected and approved. Work covered before approval shall be
uncovered at contractor’s expense.
C.
No testing shall be done until the last solvent welded joint has had 24 hours
to set and cure.
D.
Before testing, fill pipe with water and expel all air from pipes.
E.
In system with concrete thrust blocks, the test shall not be made until at least
five (5) days have passed after all concrete thrust blocks are installed. If
higher early strength cement is used in the concrete thrust block, the test
shall not be made until at least two (2) days have elapsed.
F.
Test lateral piping for leaks by flushing the lateral pipe with flex tubing
attached at each head location. Test mainline piping for leaks with a
pressure pump. Minimum pressure test on mainline, valves, joints, and
fittings shall be 100 PSI without losing more than three psi for a period of
one hour. Contractor shall first perform test for himself and tighten any
leaks or defects. Contractor shall then notify Project Representative 24
hours in advance and complete another test in the presence of the Project
Representative for approval. All testing shall be done with a certified
pressure gauge supplied by the Contractor. Submit written certification of
the gauges’ accuracy prior to testing, otherwise, test will not be observed or
approved.
G.
Contractor shall adjust and balance irrigation system to provide uniform
head-to-head coverage. Change or adjust heads and nozzles as required to
provide uniform head-to- head coverage. Upon completion of all systems
and coverage test performed by and for Contractor, notify Project
Representative 24 hours in advance and perform another coverage test in
the presence of the Project Representative for his approval.
423
H.
Where inspected work does not comply with specified requirements or if
pressure test fails, replace rejected work until re-inspected by the Project
Representative and found to be acceptable.
3.13 CLEAN UP
A.
Upon completion of work, clean up all boxes, wrappings, excess materials,
and other rubbish resulting from this work and leave premises in a clean and
neat condition.
3.14 FINAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Contractor shall maintain at project site a clean copy of drawings for
recording all changes as project progresses. All changes shall be recorded in
red on drawings within 24 hours of occurrence. Submit as-built drawings
within two weeks after substantial completion.
B.
Photocopy Irrigation Valve Schedule from As-built Drawing (with any
revisions noted). Laminate both sides with plastic. Submit to Owner.
C.
Provide keys, equipment operating instructions, parts lists, service manuals,
specification sheets, warranty information, winterization instructions,
precipitation rates per hours, and circuit operating time for each zone.
Punch and place all materials in a 3-ring binder (two (2) copies required).
Submit to Project Owner for review and approval. Deliver to Owner after
Project Representative’s approval.
D.
The Contractor shall conduct a training and orientation session covering the
operation, adjustment, and maintenance of the irrigation system. Contractor
shall be responsible for one full winterization and one spring activation of
the sprinkler system including backflow test and any repairs and shall
conduct these operations as part of the Owner’s training and orientation
procedures.
E.
As-built Drawing
1.
As-built drawing to show:
a.
Any configuration of the mainline “plumbing” sleeves, valves,
valves schedule, valve GPM, head placement, and other major
equipment that deviates from the plan.
b.
A dimension off a hardscape, fixed object, or property line of
the mainline every 100 feet.
c.
Any configuration of the laterals “plumbing” that deviates from
the plan.
d.
Actual location of any wires that are not in the mainline trench.
e.
Actual location of splice boxes, gate valves, and manual drains.
424
f.
g.
Indicate Contractor’s company name, phone number, contact
person, and date prepared.
Contractor shall produce As-built Drawing in AutoCAD format
from construction drawings provided by the Project
Representative. Submit electronic As-built Drawings and an
electronic file to Project Representative for review and
approval.
END OF SECTION
425
SECTION 32 92 23 SODDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
This section specifies Sodded Lawns which consists of all materials,
equipment, transportation, and performing all labor for soil
preparation, planting amendments, sodded lawn installation,
maintenance, and related work.
B.
Comply with governing regulations applicable to landscape materials.
C.
Substitutions shall not be made without prior approval of Project
Representative. If specified landscape material is not obtainable at time of
required planting submittal, submit proof of non-availability and proposed
substitution. See Submittals this Section.
D.
Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the
site become available. Working within the seasonal limitation for each kind
of landscape work required.
1.2 WARRANTY
A.
All workmanship and materials hereunder shall be under warranty, until the
date of final acceptance, against defective workmanship and materials.
Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining and protecting sodded
lawns from all damage (at no cost to owner) until date of final acceptance.
This shall include damage caused by vandalism or adverse weather
conditions.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Requirements: Do not place, spread, or roll fill materials
during unfavorable weather conditions. When work is interrupted by
adverse weather conditions, do not resume fill operations until moisture
content and density of fill are satisfactory.
B.
Protection of sub-grade: Do not allow equipment to pump or rut sub-grade,
stripped areas, footing excavations or other areas prepared for the project.
Protect sub-grades, fills and excavation areas from surface waters flowing
into the work areas.
426
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Within 90 days from Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
Submit product specifications, samples, vendors certified analysis
and warranties of non-toxicity for humus amendment, lime, grass
sod, and fertilizers.
2.
Submit delivery tickets during construction for humus amendment.
1.5 MEASUREMENT
A.
Measurement will be lump sum.
1.6 PAYMENT
A.
Accepted sodding will be paid for as a contract lump sum for "Sodding".
B.
The Contract price will be payment in full for furnishing all labor, materials,
tools, equipment and incidental, and doing all work necessary to complete
the work specified.
C.
Payment will be under:
Pay Items
32 93 23.01 Sodding
Pay Unit
LS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Topsoil: Imported Topsoil - See Section 32 93 43 Tree Shrub Planting.
B.
Compost Amendment: See Planting Plans and details for required depths
and quantities. See Section 32 93 43 Tree Shrub Planting for compost
requirements.
C.
Fertilizer Type A: Nature Safe 5-6-6 Starter Organic Fertilizer, fine grade,
100 percent natural and organic fertilizer as certified and approved organic
through the Organic Materials Review Institute (OMRI), containing no
manure or sewage sludges, as manufactured by Nature Safe and distributed
by Simplot Partners, Portland, OR (503) 262-0475.
D.
Fertilizer Type B: Nature Safe 10-2-8 Organic Fertilizer, coarse grade, 100
percent natural and organic fertilizer as certified and approved organic
427
through the Organic Materials Review Institute (OMRI), containing no
manure or sewage sludges, as manufactured by Nature Safe and distributed
by Simplot Partners, Portland, OR (503) 262-0475.
E.
Lawn Sod: J.B. Natural Signature Perennial Ryegrass Sod, as available from
J.B. Instant Lawn (503) 581-7823 or approved equal. Provide data showing
location of extraction.
F.
Post-emergent Herbicide: Roundup® agricultural post-emergent nonselective herbicide, as manufactured by Monsanto Company.
G.
Lime: pelletized Dolomitic lime.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF LAWN AREA
A.
Prior to beginning work, spray all weeds and existing grasses in areas to be
sodded with post-emergent herbicide.
B.
Existing debris shall be excavated and disposed of legally off-site, as needed
to place indicated volumes of amendments. All construction debris, crushed
rock, weeds, contaminated subsoil, concrete, and other extraneous materials
shall be removed and disposed of prior to placement of any amendments.
Volume of extracted material shall be replaced with salvaged on-site topsoil
or organic amendment mix as needed.
C.
Sub-grade Preparation: Scarify and loosen sodded lawn areas existing soils
to a depth o f 8 inches, removing extraneous material 2 inches and larger
rocks, roots, crushed rock, construction debris, etc. Grade smooth, free of
lumps and provide positive drainage at 2 percent minimum.
D.
Graded areas shall have 6 inch minimum depth of topsoil.
3.2 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLING SOD LAWNS
A.
Sod installation and soil preparation of new lawns is required in areas
shown on plan. Apply compost (3” depth) and lime at 50 lbs/1,000 square
feet. Thoroughly incorporate amendments into existing soil of lawn areas to
a total depth of 8 inches. Remove stones over 3/4 inch in any dimension and
crushed rock, sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter. Limit
preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation.
B.
Finish Grading: Grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with a loose
uniformly fine texture. Finish grade of lawn shall be 1/2 inch below
adjacent pavement or curbs. Provide for positive drainage (two (2) percent
428
minimum unless shown otherwise on grading plan) from all areas toward
inlets and drainage structures. Provide smooth transitions between slopes
of different gradients and direction.
C.
Leveling Rolling: Drag with flexible tine harrow (or approved equipment) to
remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grades. Roll
areas (minimum roller weight 10 lbs/square inch) in two (2) directions.
D.
Repeat rolling procedures and drag lightly to establish a smooth uniform
compacted surface free of rocks and other extraneous matter.
E.
Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly
and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a
muddy soil condition.
F.
Restore sod bed areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise
disturbed after fine grading and prior to planting.
3.3 SODDING NEW LAWNS
A.
Notify Project Owner for inspection and acceptance of sod bed prior to
planting.
B.
Do not use sod which is dried out, moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or
storage.
C.
Install sod so that joints are offset in a running bond brick pattern. Abut
adjoining pieces of sod so that no gaps exist. Cut sod with a sharp knife; do
not tear sod apart. Roll sod with a lawn roller in two directions to ensure
uniform contact with soil.
D.
Establish clean, straight edges to lawn areas by edging and/or hand removal
of grass and weeds.
E.
Apply fertilizer Type A at the rate of 20 lbs per 1,000 square feet (1 lbs
nitrogen/1,000 square feet); thoroughly water.
3.4 MAINTENANCE
A.
Fertilize lawns at end of 30 days with Type B Fertilizer at the rate of 10 lbs
per 1,000 square feet (1 lbs nitrogen/1,000 square feet).
B.
Establish clean, straight edges to lawn areas by hand removal of grass and
weeds.
429
C.
Maintenance of the sodded lawn shall commence after preliminary
inspection and approval of installation and continue for a period of three
years. Maintenance shall consist of mowing, broad leaf weed removal and all
work necessary to establish a stand of grass satisfactory to the Project
Representative. See Section 32 93 43 Tree Shrub Planting for additional
maintenance requirements and payment.
D.
Re-grade and reinstall sod as necessary to establish a smooth surface with
positive drainage (two (2) percent minimum unless shown otherwise on
grading plan) from all areas toward inlets and drainage structures; smooth
transitions between slopes of different gradients and direction; and growth
of uniform color and density, free of eroded or bare areas.
E.
Mow lawn areas to a height of two (2) inches weekly after lawn has reached
a height of three (3) inches.
F.
All grass clippings shall be collected and removed off-site legally.
G.
Install and maintain adequate temporary fencing to protect against
trespassing and damage for the duration of the maintenance period.
H.
Edge and trim every other week.
I.
Maintain adequate water on lawn areas to establish approved stand of grass.
3.5 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A.
When the project is completed, including maintenance, the Project
Representative and Owner will make an inspection to determine
acceptability.
B.
Where inspected landscape work does not comply with the requirements,
replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by the Project Owner and found to be acceptable.
END OF SECTION
430
SECTION 32 93 43 TREE, SHRUB PLANTING (LANDSCAPE PLANTING)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Description
This section specifies Tree and Shrub Planting (including rain garden swales)
which consists of all materials, equipment, transportation, and performing
all labor for soil preparation, topsoil, planting amendments, plants, bark
mulch installation, maintenance, and related work.
1.2
1.3
B.
Comply with governing regulations applicable to landscape materials.
C.
Substitutions shall not be made without prior approval of Project
Representative. If specified landscape material is not obtainable at time of
required planting submittal, submit proof of non-availability and proposed
substitution. All plant materials shall be secured with full payment within 60
days from time of award of contract to general contractor. See Submittals
this Section.
WARRANTY
A.
All workmanship and materials hereunder shall be under warranty in
writing for one year, from the date of final acceptance, against defective
workmanship and materials. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining
and protecting trees, shrubs, and ground cover from all damage (at no cost
to owner) until date of final acceptance. This shall include damage caused
by vandalism or adverse weather conditions.
B.
Remove and replace trees, shrubs, and ground cover found to be missing,
dead, or in unhealthy condition during and at the end of warranty period. All
replacement work shall be made within 14 days after receiving notification,
weather permitting. In the event the Contractor does not make repairs
accordingly, the Owner, without further notice, may provide materials and
labor to make such repairs at the expense of the Contractor. Furnish and
install replacement plants which comply with drawings and specifications.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Requirements: Do not place, spread, or roll fill materials
during unfavorable weather conditions. When work is interrupted by
adverse weather conditions, do not resume fill operations until moisture
431
content and density of fill are satisfactory. Proceed with and complete the
landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available. Working
within the seasonal limitation for each kind of landscape work required.
B.
1.4
DAMAGES
A.
1.5
Protection of sub-grade: Do not allow equipment to pump or rut sub-grade,
stripped areas, footing excavations or other areas prepared for the project.
Protect sub-grades, fills and excavation areas from surface waters flowing
into the work areas.
Any structures or facilities damaged due to work of this project shall be
restored equal or better to their original condition at Contractor's expense
and to the satisfaction of Project Representative and Owner.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Within 60 days from award of contract to general contractor, submit:
Submit Purchase Orders indicating “Paid in Full” for all plant materials
written by nurseries verifying source, botanical name, size, method of
production (i.e. balled and burlapped or container), quality and quantity
specified. Provide data showing location of extraction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Plant materials shall be secured at this time to avoid availability
issues. Purchase Orders without full payment and Order
Conformations written by plant brokers will be rejected.
Submit product specifications, samples, vendors certified analysis and
warranties of non-toxicity for humus amendment, fertilizers,
mycorrhizal inoculum, and erosion control bark mulch.
Submit Purchase Order indicating “Paid in Full” and original product
label from packaging for mycorrhizal inoculum as proof of purchase.
Submit delivery tickets during construction for Compost Amendment,
Humus.
Imported Topsoil Sample and Analysis: One (1) minimum lab sample
and analysis required proving topsoil meets definition required by
section 2.1 A. below. Provide a minimum of one sample with
accompanying soil test report per 250 cubic yards of material
required.
a.
Submit source, sample and testing laboratory analysis and
recommendations specific to this project.
b.
For each lab sample, take sub-samples from 12 random spots
throughout source stockpile. Thoroughly mix the 12 subsamples together in a clean plastic bucket before sending the
sample to the testing lab.
c.
Graphical soil analysis at time of submittal is required and
shall include at a minimum:
432
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
1.6
Organic Matter percent dry weight using loss on
ignition analysis method.
Nutrient levels by parts per million, including nitrogen,
phosphorus, potassium, magnesium, calcium, sulfur,
boron, copper, iron, manganese, zinc, and sodium.
PH and Buffer PH Level.
USDA textural classification ( percent clay, percent silt,
percent sand).
Particle Size Sieve Analysis including the following
gradient of mineral content: Gravel (sieve #8 +), Very
Coarse Sand (#10 - #16), Coarse Sand (#18 - #30),
Medium Sand (#35 - #50), Fine Sand (#60 - #140),
Very Fine Sand (#170 - #270), Silt (0.05mm 0.002mm), Clay (<0.002mm).
Harmful toxins to plant life.
Recommendations for supplemental additions to soil
based on requirements of horticultural plants.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packaged materials shall be delivered in original unopened containers
showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Materials shall be
protected from damage and deterioration during delivery and while stored
at the site.
B.
Deliver freshly dug trees, shrubs and ground covers. Deliver in containers or
with firmly wrapped root balls. Plants shall not be bent or bind-tied in such
a manner as to damage bark, break branches, or alter the natural shape.
C.
Plant materials shall be irrigated just prior to shipping. Plant materials shall
be shipped to the site in covered trailers or with a woven shade tarp
covering all plants. Protect all plants from wind and other damage during
transportation. Any evidence of damage during transport will result in
rejected plant material. Plants will be rejected if they are dropped suddenly.
Balled and burlapped plant materials shall be handled by the rootball in a
manner that does not deform the shape of the rootball. Trees shall not be
handled by the trunk.
D.
Deliver trees, shrubs, and ground covers after preparation for planting has
been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6
hours after delivery, protect planting materials as follows:
1.
2.
Set planting materials in the shade and protect from weather and
mechanical damage.
Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss,
composted mulch, or other acceptable material.
433
3.
1.7
1.8
Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of
planting. Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with
fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems
in a moist condition.
MEASUREMENT
A.
"Tree, Shrub Planting” will be measured by lump sum.
B.
Landscape Maintenance will be measured by monthly progress payments for
a total of 36 months.
PAYMENT
A.
Accepted Tree, Shrub Planting will be paid for as a contract lump sum for
"Tree, Shrub Planting".
B.
Accepted Tree, Shrub Maintenance will be paid for monthly as a contract
lump sum for "Tree, Shrub Planting” Maintenance.
C.
The Contract price will be payment in full for furnishing all labor, materials,
tools, equipment and incidental, and doing all work necessary to complete
the work specified.
D.
Payment will be under:
Pay Items:
Pay Unit:
32 93 43.01 Tree, Shrub Planting
LS
32 93 43.02 Tree, Shrub Maintenance
per month for 36 months total
32 93 43.03 Raingarden / Water Quality Planting
LS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Imported Topsoil: Topsoil found in a depth of not more than 12 inches and
meeting the following requirements. Provide lab analysis confirming that
topsoil meets all requirements and is suitable for the germination of seeds
and the support of vegetative growth. See Planting Plans for required
quantities.
1.
2.
Satisfactory topsoil shall be friable sandy loam texture per USDA
classification.
Approximate sand component particle size distribution shall not be
dominated by any particular size and meet the following: Gravel (<5
percent), Very Coarse Sand (10-25 percent), Coarse Sand (10-25
434
3.
4.
5.
B.
percent), Medium Sand (10-25 percent), Fine Sand (5-20 percent),
Very Fine Sand (0-20 percent).
Contain 3 percent minimum (by dry weight) organic matter as
determined by loss or ignition analysis.
PH value shall be between 6.0 and 7.0.
Shall be free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, construction debris,
crushed rock, concrete tool & truck wash-down waste, objects 1” and
over in diameter, weeds and weed seeds, roots and other
objectionable material.
Plant Materials
1.
2.
Name and variety: Provide plant materials true to name and variety
established by American Joint Committee on Horticultural
Nomenclature "Standardized Plant Names," Second Edition, 1942.
General:
a.
Provide unless otherwise specified, trees, shrubs, and other
plants that comply with the recommendations and
requirements of ANSI Z60.1- 2004, "American Standard for
Nursery Stock" and as further specified. No cold storage
plants.
b.
Sizes: provide trees and shrubs of the sizes shown or specified
and in healthy condition, showing no physical damage due to
stress, insects or disease and in appropriate form and high
quality growing condition.
c.
Plant materials with synthetic burlap will not be accepted.
d.
Plants shall not have cuts over 3/4 inch diameter that has not
completely healed over. Leader shall be intact on all plants.
e.
Potted and container stock plants shall have been grown in the
containers for a minimum of six (6) months and a maximum of
two (2) years. Rootballs shall fill the containers but show no
evidence of being root bound.
f.
Plants shall not be picked up or moved by stems or branches
but shall be lifted and handled from the container sides.
g.
The Project Owner reserves the right to inspect plant materials
for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size and
quality. A minimum of 30 percent of the plant inventory shall
be labeled with name, variety and source. Produce upon
request, sales receipts for all nursery stock and certificates of
inspection from Federal, State and other authorities. Plants not
meeting standards or not grown under similar climatic
conditions of the project will be rejected. Rejected plants shall
be marked and removed immediately from the site. Contractor
shall replace rejected plant materials at no additional cost to
Owner.
435
h.
C.
Plant materials grown in fabric containers or root control bags
require approval of the Project Owner as being acceptable as
equals to balled and burlapped materials.
Tree Quality – as typical for the species/cultivar, trees shall be healthy and
vigorous, as indicated by an inspection of the crown, trunk, and roots shall
find the following characteristics:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Trees shall be relatively free of pests (insects, pathogens, nematodes
or other injurious organisms).
Crown Form: The form or shape of the crown is typical for a young
specimen of the species/cultivar. The crown is not significantly
deformed by wind, pruning practices, pests or other factors.
Central Leader: Trees shall have a single, relatively straight central
leader and tapered trunk, free of co-dominant stems and vigorous,
upright branches that compete with the central leader. If the original
leader has been headed, a new leader at least 1/2 the diameter of the
original leader shall be present. Trees with leaders topped or headed
within the last year shall be rejected.
Leaves: The size, color and appearance of leaves are typical for the
time of year and stage of growth of the species/cultivar. Leaves are
not stunted, misshapen, tattered, discolored (chlorotic or necrotic) or
otherwise atypical.
Branches: Shoot growth (length and diameter) throughout the crown
is typical for the age / size of the species/cultivar. Trees do not have
dead, diseased, broken, distorted or other serious branch injuries.
Main Branches (scaffolds): Branches should be distributed radially
around and vertically along the trunk, forming a generally
symmetrical crown typical for the species. Main branches, for the
most part, shall be well spaced.
Branch diameter shall be no greater than 2/3 the diameter of the
trunk, measured 1 inch above the branch.
The attachment of scaffold branches shall be free of included bark.
Trunk: The tree trunk shall be fairly straight, vertical and free of
wounds (except properly–made pruning cuts), sunburned areas,
conks (fungal fruiting bodies), wood cracks, bleeding areas, signs of
boring insects, galls, cankers/lesions and girdling ties.
Trunk diameter and taper shall be sufficient so that the tree will
remain vertical without the support of a nursery stake.
Tree height and trunk diameter are typical for the age,
species/cultivar and container size.
Roots: The root system shall be free of injury from biotic (insects,
pathogens, etc.) and abiotic agents (herbicide toxicity, salt injury,
excess irrigation, etc.). Root distribution shall be uniform throughout
the soil mix or growth media and growth is typical for the
species/cultivar.
436
13
14
15
16
D.
The trunk, root collar (root crown) and large roots shall be free of
circling and/or kinked roots. Soil removal near the root collar may be
necessary to inspect for circling and/or kinked roots.
The tree shall be well rooted in the soil mix. When the container, wire
basket or burlap is removed, the rootball shall remain intact. When
the rootball is carefully lifted, both the trunk and root system shall
move as one.
The top most roots shall be no more than 1 inch below rootball
surface.
The rootball periphery shall be free of large circling and bottom–
matted roots. The acceptable diameter of circling peripheral roots
depends on species and size of rootball. Trunk flare or root collar
shall be visible.
Compost: Required quantity shown on drawings. Acceptable products are
the following:
1.
Rexius Eugene Produced Aerated Static Pile Compost, moderate
species richness diversity index of 5.0 or greater as tested by BBC
Labs (480) 967-5931, ratio of aerobic microorganisms to anaerobic
micro-organisms of 10:1 or greater, soluble salts (Ecs) 5.0 ds/m or
less, free of weed seeds, herbicides including Clopyralid, pesticides
and other toxins, free of all animal manures, free of wood fibers
containing paint or other chemical treating substance, US Composting
Council Seal of Testing Assurance; as available from Rexius (503)
635-5865, or approved equal.
E.
Erosion Control Bark Mulch: Regular fine grind dark fir bark, 5/8” minus size,
free from noxious weed seed, herbicides, insecticides, and all foreign
material harmful to plant life; submit sample for approval.
F.
Stakes: Pointed fir tree stakes, 2 inches x 2 inches x 8 feet size; Chain lock
tree ties, 1 inch wide size. Provide miscellaneous hardware, wire, and
accessories as shown on details.
G.
Fertilizer: Nature Safe 10-2-8 All Season Organic Fertilizer with 1.8 percent
Calcium, 3 percent Sulfur and 60 percent Amino Acids, coarse grade, 100
percent natural & organic fertilizer as certified and approved organic
through the Organic Materials Review Institute (OMRI), containing no
manure or sewage sludges, as manufactured by Nature Safe and distributed
by Simplot Partners, Portland, OR, (503) 262-0475..
H.
Pre-emergent Herbicide: Ronstar G selective pre-emergent herbicide, as
manufactured by Bayer Environmental Science.
437
I.
Post-emergent Herbicide: Roundup agricultural post-emergent non-selective
herbicide, as manufactured by Monsanto Company.
J.
Mycorrhizal Inoculum: Required quantity shown on drawings. (Note: 1
pound = 48 Tablespoons) MycoApply Micronized Endo / EctoMycorrhizal
Powder Inoculum, blended spores of 3 endomycorrhizal (100,000 per lb.)
and 5 ectomycorrhizal (110 million per lb.) fungi species, particle size less
than 300 microns, as manufactured and as available from Mycorrhizal
Applications Inc. (541) 476-3985.
K.
Erosion Control Fabric: Anti-wash / GeoJute 48 inch width jute yarn netting
as manufactured by Belton Industries; available from CSI Geosynthetics
(800) 426-7976.
L.
Erosion Control Fabric Wood Stakes: 12 inch notched fir stakes; available
from CSI Geosynthetics (800) 426-7976.
M.
Root Barriers: TYPAR Bio-Barrier Root Control System - 29” width.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
TREE, SHRUB AND GROUND COVER PLANTINGS
A.
Preparation of planting areas for trees, shrubs and ground covers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Prepare planting areas as shown in planting details to extent of areas
not indicated on plans.
Prior to beginning work in planting areas, spray all weeds and grass
with post-emergent herbicide according to manufacturer's
recommendations. This shall be in addition to post-emergent
herbicide spraying prior to rough grading. All applications will
include a waiting period of ten (10) days before commencement of
excavation, cut, or fill in the target area. All applications shall be done
by a commercial pesticide applicator possessing a current up to date
license with the proper endorsements for the application(s) done.
Existing soil and debris shall be excavated and disposed of on-site as
directed, as needed to place indicated volumes of amendments. All
construction debris, crushed rock, weeds, contaminated subsoil,
concrete, and other extraneous materials shall be removed and
disposed of prior to placement of any topsoil, amendments, mulch
and planting. Volume of extracted material shall be replaced with onsite salvaged topsoil or additional organic amendment mix as needed.
Sub-grade Preparation: Scarify area in two directions opposite to
each other to establish the following conditions to a 12 inch depth.
Relieve compaction below 75 percent maximum density at optimum
moisture content. Establish a free draining soil. Remove crushed rock
438
5.
B.
Preparation of planting area
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Install required depth of imported topsoil as shown on plans. Before
mixing, clean topsoil of extraneous materials and other materials
harmful or toxic to plant growth.
Apply amendments including 4” depth of compost and prepare as
required on details.
Thoroughly incorporate amendments into topsoil of planting areas to
a total minimum depth of ten (10) inches. Remove stones over one
(1) inch in any dimension and crushed rock, sticks, roots, rubbish and
other extraneous matter.
Install rain garden swale soil mix as shown on civil plans.
Excavation for trees, shrubs and groundcovers
1.
D.
and stones to (2) inches and greater in any dimension, roots,
extraneous material, construction debris, etc. Break apart soil masses
greater than five (5) inches in any dimension. Do not scarify within
dripline of existing trees to be retained. Grade smooth, free of lumps
and provide positive drainage at two (2) percent minimum.
If weed growth has occurred, spray post-emergent herbicide and wait
for kill. Herbicides shall be applied only by licensed applicator or
operator.
Excavate planting holes as shown on details with 45° side slopes and
with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to provide proper
drainage. Set aside prepared topsoil and discard subsoil legally offsite. Install root barriers per manufacturers’ recommendations.
Planting trees, shrubs and groundcovers
1.
2.
3.
4.
Layout of Planting: All location and staking shall be the responsibility
of the contractor, subject to the approval of the Project Owner before
planting each item. The method of marking (i.e. stakes, ribbons, lath,
etc.) shall be approved by the Project Owner.
Verify that trees or shrubs show no evidence of circling roots. Slice
rootballs with three evenly spaced vertical cuts from the top to the
bottom of each rootball and to a depth of 1” making sure no circling
roots are present.
Install trees, shrubs, and groundcovers as required on details in
locations and spacing shown on drawings. Work soil around roots to
eliminate air pockets and water thoroughly after planting. Plant the
LIDA swale as shown on plans.
Apply fertilizer at the rate of 10 lbs. per 1000 S.F. (1 lbs. nitrogen/
1,000 S.F.); thoroughly water.
439
5.
6.
7.
8.
Install mycorrhizal powder inoculum directly and evenly on top of
rootball at the following rates. Call Project Owner 24 hours in
advance to verify installation before turning on irrigation. After
inspection and acceptance by Project Owner, thoroughly water
powder into rootball.
a.
Shrubs and Ground Covers: One (1) Tablespoon per plant
b.
Trees: Three (3) Tablespoons per tree
Apply pre-emergent herbicide for all areas. Install below mulch at the
rate of 4.5 lbs. per 1,000 s.f. according to manufacturer's
recommendations. Do not apply to wet foliage or under conditions in
which granules will collect on leaves. Immediately wash granules off
all foliage with at least 1/2 inch irrigation. Do not mix into soil or
disturb mulch after application. If mulch becomes disturbed, reapply
pre-emergent herbicide to compromised area.
Do not top, head back or tip prune any plants. Prune, thin, and shape
trees and shrubs only for damaged or crossing branches in
accordance with standard horticultural practices.
Mulch all existing tree, shrub and ground cover areas with erosion
control bark mulch as shown on Planting Plan. Do not place bark
mulch within 6 inches of trunk or stems. Rake smooth and level.
Finish grade of bark mulch shall be one (1) inch below adjacent
pavement.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EROSION CONTROL FABRIC
A.
Install erosion control fabric per manufacturer’s specifications in areas
shown on plan with the following provisions:
1.
2.
B.
Overlap edges minimum of six (6) inches
Stake with specified wood stakes min. of 18 inches on center.
Install plants through fabric by pulling apart yarn (do not cut fabric). Dig
holes and prepare per requirements above and as shown on drawings and
details.
3.3 MAINTENANCE
A.
Store materials and equipment where directed. Keep pavements clean and
work areas in an orderly condition.
B.
Plant establishment period of three (3) calendar years required for all
Landscape Plantings installed on this project. Work shall include
maintenance visits and monthly reports. Maintenance shall include:
1.
Minimum 120 maintenance visits (November thru February at 2 per
month; March through October at 4 per month).
440
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Thirty Six (36) monthly reports.
Submit weed control plan for approval.
All work necessary to ensure vigorous and healthy growth of all
installed plant materials by watering, spraying, pruning, tightening
and repairing of tree stakes, and resetting plants to proper grades or
vertical position as required.
Removal and disposal of foreign, dead, or rejected plant material
legally off-site and the replacement of all unsatisfactory plant
material installed under this contract.
Maintaining a weed-free condition by spraying and/or cultivating
planting areas weekly and disposing of dead weeds legally off-site.
Generating and distributing electronically a detailed monthly site
report that records date, time, weather, work performed, health and
vigor of plant materials, outstanding conditions with suggestive
corrective measures, and digital photos to capture site progress.
Joint inspections with Owner’s representative. Nine (9) required.
Correction of all unsatisfactory conditions within ten (10) day period
upon written notice. Failure to comply shall constitute justification
by Owner to take corrective steps and to deduct all costs from monies
due to Contractor.
Warranty Plant Replacement:
1.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing replacement plants
for all plant material rejected through the first year of plant
establishment. All rejected plant material shall be replaced at the
dates approved by the Project Owner. All replacement plants shall be
of the same species and quality as the plants they replace.
3.4 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A.
When the project is completed, including maintenance, the Project
Representative will make an inspection to determine acceptability.
B.
Where inspected landscape work does not comply with the requirements,
replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until re-inspected
by the Project Representative and found to be acceptable.
END OF SECTION
441
SECTION 33 01 00 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with all applicable
sections of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
2.
C.
Measurement
1.
D.
This Work consists of maintenance and support of existing utilities.
All existing utilities shall be maintained and adequately supported until
they are abandoned or relocated.
No measurement will be made for this Work.
Payment
No separate payment will be made for maintenance and support of
existing utilities. This Work will be considered incidental to other
Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS –Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
When known, the proposed location of relocated utilities are shown on the
Plans. The Contractor shall field verify that relocations have taken place and
the new location of the facility prior to beginning work in the area. Existing
facilities to be abandoned will be in service until the utility owner has
completed all connections to the new, relocated facility. Any utility that is in
service must be protected from damage. If a facility that is planned to be
abandoned is damaged before it can be permanently removed from service, the
Contractor shall make, or pay the utility owner to make, any repairs necessary
to maintain the facility.
B.
The Contractor shall arrange with the owners and operators of the respective
utility systems to mark the location and, if necessary or prudent, to expose the
existing utilities prior to construction of the facilities included in this Contract.
442
The utility shall be responsible for any advance excavation, though the Project
Engineer reserves the right to request the Contractor to perform this work on
a change order basis.
3.2
C.
Except for facilities to be relocated by the owning utilities as part of this
project, the existing utilities within the work area, whether shown on the
Plans or not, shall not be disturbed.
D.
If major utilities, such as sewer, water, storm, gas, power, cable TV and
telephone, not shown on the Plans are encountered while excavating, the
Contractor shall stop excavation, and immediately advise the Project Engineer
and the affected utility.
E.
Minor underground utility service lines, such as, sanitary sewer, gas and water
services, side sewers, house or yard drains, electric services, or telephone
services, shall be maintained, relocated, rerouted, removed, and restored by
the Contractor, during the execution of the Work. These adjustments
necessary for the progress of the work, and for Contractor's convenience, shall
be performed with the least possible interference to such services. In no case
shall the interference of such service lines be considered for extra
compensation. The Contractor, at no cost to the Owner shall pay all costs thus
incurred.
NOTIFICATION OF UTILITIES AND AGENCIES
A.
The Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the Project Engineer for
closing or partial closing of any street. The Contractor shall give at least two
(2) working days advance notice of such closure to all agencies providing
emergency services, including but not limited to, police, fire and ambulance
services. Notification shall include, but not be limited to the time of
commencement and completion of Work, names of streets or location of alleys
to be closed, or partially closed, schedule of operations and routes of detours
where applicable.
B.
When performing work in streets and easements, whether inside or outside
the project limits, the Contractor shall notify all of the affected utilities and
local agencies about the operations. Notification serves as a means to
coordinate and expedite the Work as to cause the least amount of conflict and
interference between the Work and operations of other agencies.
C.
The location of existing utilities shall be field verified by the Contractor prior to
construction. The Contractor shall notify the Project Engineer prior to
proceeding with construction when utility locations differ from those shown
on the Plans.
443
3.3
D.
The right is reserved to the City of Vancouver, and the owners of utilities, or
their authorized agents, to enter upon the street right-of-way for the purpose
of making changes as are necessary for the rearrangement of their facilities or
for making necessary connections or repairs. The Contractor shall cooperate
with forces engaged in this Work and shall conduct his operations in such a
manner to avoid any unnecessary delay or hindrance to the Work being
performed by other forces.
E.
Contact City of Vancouver Public Works two (2) weeks prior to excavation for
safety meeting.
UTILITIES AND EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS
A.
Operation of water valves and hydrants by unauthorized personnel is strictly
prohibited. Obtain hydrant permits and/or written permission from the City
of Vancouver Public Works water department and pay required fees, prior to
using water hydrants.
B.
The Contractor shall provide for the flow of sewers, drains, or water courses
interrupted during the progress of the Work, and restore such drains or water
courses as approved by the Project Engineer, at no additional cost to the City
of Vancouver or the Owner.
C.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs for the repair of any and all
damage to any utility, whether previously known or disclosed during the
Work, as may be caused by the Work. Maintain in place, utilities not shown on
the drawings, to be relocated or altered by others. If the Contractor requires
temporary relocation, for his convenience or because of the method of
construction or as a result of site conditions, the Contractor shall bear all costs
for said temporary relocation. Maintain utilities that are relocated by others in
their relocated positions in order to avoid interference with improvements
that cross the Contract Work.
D.
The Contractor shall make excavations and borings ahead of Work (“pot
holes”) as necessary, to determine the exact location of interfering utilities or
underground structures. When this is not feasible or practical or the need for
such work was not foreseen, such utility owners or the Owner shall have the
right to enter upon the right-or-way and upon any structure therein for the
purpose of making new installations, changes or repairs. Conduct operations
so as to provide the time needed for such work to be accomplished during the
progress of the improvement, at no additional cost to the Owner.
444
E.
The Contractor shall prohibit vehicles and/or construction equipment from
traveling over electrical conduits and other pipes that are located less than
6-inches below bottom of the excavation grade per plan (includes concrete
encased conduits).
END OF SECTION
445
SECTION 33 05 13.14 ADJUSTMENT OF INCIDENTAL STRUCTURES (SECTION 7-05)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section
7-05.3(1) – Adjusting Manholes and Catch Basins to Grade, and other
sections referenced therein, of the Standard Specifications, as amended
herein.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
C.
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
02 41 20 - Removal of Structures and Obstructions
33 49 00 – Storm Drainage Structures
Measurement
1.
Section 7-05.4 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended with the
following:
a.
The structures requiring adjustment will be measured by the
unit for the type of structure and method of adjustment in
accordance to the following schedule:
1)
Adjusting manholes - minor (rings only)
2)
Adjusting manholes - major
3)
Adjusting inlets
4)
Adjusting utility to grade
b.
Items a and b refer to manholes, sumps and like structures
designed to permit human entry and working space inside and
to confine and control the flow of pipe-conveyed liquids. These
structures are collectively referred to as manholes.
c.
Item a applies to manholes regardless of composition, design,
type or depth that may be adjusted by adding or deleting grade
rings above the cone or top slab.
d.
Item b refers to precast or monolithic concrete or brick
manholes which, in having their tops adjusted have necessarily
had their entire existing domes destroyed and new domes
constructed, or had their entire existing top slabs destroyed
and new slabs constructed, or precast manholes which have
adjustments made below the cone or otherwise required the
cone to be removed and reset.
e.
Item c refers to adjustment of existing catch basins, curb inlets,
and other structures used to collect stormwater.
f.
Item d refers to monument, valve, and meter boxes, and
utility vaults requiring adjustment to finished grade.
Measurement will be by each.
446
g.
D.
There will be no separate measurement for abandoning pipe
in place or removal of existing pipe
Payment
1.
Section 7-05.5 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended with
the following:
a.
The Contract Price will be payment in full for furnishing all
labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary
to complete the Work as specified.
b.
There will be no separate payment for abandoning pipe in place
or removal of existing pipe. These are considered incidental to
other Work under this contract.
c.
No separate payment shall be made for the adjustment of
structures constructed under this Contract.
d.
No separate payment shall be made for excavation, backfill,
concrete work, paving or other site restoration associated
with the adjustment of any utilities to grade as defined in this
Section.
e.
Utilities to be adjusted by others are indicated as such on
the Contract Drawings. There will be no separate payment for
these utilities.
f.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item
1.2
Pay Unit
33 05 13.01
Adjust Utility Structure
EA
33 05 13.02
Adjust Manholes - Minor
EA
33 05 13.03
Adjust Manholes – Major
EA
33 05 13.04
Adjust Inlet
EA
QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality control shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section
01 45 10 Quality Control Requirements, except as modified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Materials to be used in the adjustment of incidental structures shall be
either materials salvaged from the existing installation and brought to a
condition suitable for reuse or new materials conforming to the requirements
of other applicable sections of these specifications.
447
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
ADJUSTING UTILITIES TO GRADE
A.
Adjustment of catch basins and inlets
1.
When Adjusting catch basins and inlets to final grade, either new
or existing, provisions shall be made to drain pavement surfaces by
drilling at least one 1” diameter hole in the basin at the existing grade
level. The hole shall be protected with sediment control measures to
prevent sediment from entering the catch basin. Patch the hole(s) with
non-shrink grout upon completion of paving operations.
END OF SECTION
448
SECTION 33 10 00 WATER SYSTEMS (7-09, 7-12, 7-14 and 7-15)
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Description
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
C.
01 33 00 – Submittals
03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
31 23 33 – Trenching and Backfilling
Measurement
1.
D.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with 7-09
Water Mains, 7-12 – Valves for Water Mains, 7-14 – Hydrants, and
Sections 7-15 – Service Connections, and other sections referenced
therein, of the Standard Specifications, as amended herein.
This Work shall consist of the construction of water system that
include: Water supply lines, service lines, valves, meters, hydrants,
backflow prevention and other incidental items necessary for the
rerouting of an existing waterline and installation of a new irrigation
service connection. All work shall conform to applicable sections of the
current Washington State Plumbing Code, AWWA Standards, and the
City of Vancouver standards.
Section 7-09.4 of the Standard Specifications shall be replaced with
the following:
a.
Measurement for payment of pipe for water mains will be
by the linear foot of pipe laid and tested and shall be
measured along the pipe through fittings, valves, and
couplings.
b.
Measurement of new hydrant assembly, resetting existing
hydrants, moving existing hydrants, and reconnecting existing
hydrants will be made per each.
c.
Measurement of relocation of existing water meters, and/or
service connections will be made per each.
Payment
1.
Section 7-09.5 of the Standard Specifications shall be replaced with
the following:
449
a.
b.
The Contract Price will be payment in full for furnishing all
labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary
to complete the Work as specified.
Payment will be made at the contract unit price for the
following items:
Pay Item
33 10 00.01 Ductile Iron Pipe for Water Line 6 In. Diam.
33 10 00.02 Ductile Iron Pipe for Water Line 10 In. Diam.
33 10 00.03 Ductile Iron Pipe for Water Line 12 In. Diam.
33 10 00.04 Relocate Existing Hydrant Assembly
33 10 00.05 Relocate Existing Service Connection
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Pay Unit
LF
LF
LF
EA
EA
The unit contract price per linear foot for each size of Ductile
Iron Pipe for Water Line shall be full pay for all Work to
complete the installation of the water main, including but not
limited to, trench excavation, bedding, laying and jointing
pipe and fittings, backfilling, concrete thrust blocking, testing,
disinfecting the pipeline, flushing, dechlorination of water
used for flushing, and cleanup.
No separate payment will be made for clearing and grubbing,
removal of existing street improvements, furnishing, and
installing sand cushion, protection of existing utilities and
services, trench excavation and backfill, shoring, bedding the
pipe, and compacting the backfill. These items shall all be
considered as incidental to the Work of constructing the
water main, and all costs thereof shall be included in the
payment as specified in Section 7-09.5.
The unit Contract price per each for the valve assemblies
specified shall be full pay for all Work to furnish and install
the valve complete in place on the water line, including
trenching, jointing, blocking of valve, painting, disinfecting,
hydrostatic testing, valve box, and marker post.
The unit Contract price per each for “Relocate Existing
Hydrant Assembly” shall be full pay for all Work to furnish
and install fire hydrant assemblies, including all costs for
auxiliary gate valve, shackles, tie rods, concrete blocks, gravel,
and painting required for the complete installation or
relocation of the hydrant assembly as specified, except the
pipe connecting the hydrant to the main will be paid for as
specified in Section 7-09.5.
The unit Contract price per each for “Relocate Existing
Service Connection” shall be full pay for all Work to install the
service connection, including but not limited to, excavating,
tapping the main, termination of the existing connection,
laying and jointing the pipe and fittings and
450
h.
1.2
appurtenances, water meter relocation, new water meter
valve box, backfilling, testing, flushing, and disinfection of the
new service connection.
See Section 2.02 for installation of water meters.
REFERENCES
Sponsor
Number
Subject
City of Vancouver Municipal Code Section 14.04
City of Vancouver Water General Requirements
City of Vancouver Standard Water Line Details
AWWA
C104
Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
AWWA
C105
Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for
Water and Other Liquids
AWWA
C153
Ductile-Iron Compact fittings 3" through 48", for Water
and Other Liquids
AWWA
C509
AWWA
C110
Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3" through 48", for
Water and Other Liquids
AWWA
C111
Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings
AWWA
C151
Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water and
Other Liquids
AWWA
C510
Double Check Valve Backflow Prevention Assembly
AWWA
C600
Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their
Appurtenances
AWWA
C651
Disinfecting Water Mains
ASTM
B88
Seamless Copper Tube
ASTM
A536
Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM
D 1785
Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe
AWWA
M11
Steel Pipe – A Guide for Design and Installation
AWWA
C900 DR18 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, Class 150
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33
00, Submittals, except as modified herein.
B.
Manufacturer’s data shall be submitted on all items of proposed work,
including pipe, fittings, vault, appurtenances, and valves.
C.
Submittals may be reviewed by the respective water agency to ensure
compliance with agency standards, as described herein.
451
D.
Manufacturer’s installation instructions including joint makeup shall be
submitted.
E.
Test records for field disinfection and field hydrostatic tests shall be
submitted.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Ductile Iron Piping and Fittings
1.
B.
Ductile iron piping and fittings shall meet the requirements of the City
of Vancouver as stated in the City of Vancouver Municipal Water
General Requirements and as follows.
a.
Ductile iron pipe material shall conform to ASTM 536. Pipe
shall be centrifugally cast, conforming to AWWA C 151,
pressure class 350, and shall be cement mortar lined and seal
coated, conforming to AWWA C 104. Pipe joints shall be
mechanical, flanged or push-on type. Furnish gaskets and joint
lubricant conforming to AWWA C 111, suitable for designated
pipe joint, size and pressure rating. Use ductile iron pipe
conforming to AWWA C 151, pressure class 350 on all main
line pipe 3- inch through 16-inch.
b.
Use ductile iron, mechanical fittings conforming to AWWA C
153 for all lines up to 16-inch diameter. Pipe fittings and
specials used with cast and ductile iron pipe shall conform to
AWWA C 110. Class 250 cast iron fittings and Class 350 ductile
iron fittings shall be cement mortar lined and seal coated
(inside) as specified for pipe herein above. Other joints that
may be specified are mechanical, flanged and various locking
devices.
Water Main Line Valves
1.
Water Main Line Valves to be:
MAIN SIZE
TYPE
3-Inch to 10-Inch
Gate Valve with resilient seat,
NRS
SPECIFICATION
AWWA C 509
12-Inch and Larger Butterfly, rubber gasketed
AWWA C 504
2.
Gate valves shall meet the requirements of the City of Vancouver
Water General Requirements and as follows.
452
3.
C.
Water Service Lines
1.
2.2
Use cast iron body resilient seat gate valves, mechanical joint ends for
valve sizes from 2-inch through 10-inch, with O-ring seals
conforming to AWWA C 509. Gate valves, mechanical joint ends, shall
open counter-clockwise with a 2-inch square operating nut.
Service lines to be 1–inch Type K copper (AWWA C 800) unless
otherwise noted.
WATER METER
A.
The water meter shall be provided by and installed by the City of Vancouver,
in a meter box provided by and installed by the Contractor. The meter box
shall be pursuant to City of Vancouver Design Standards and as indicated on
the contract plans.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND VALVES
A.
Excavation and backfill shall be as specified in Section 31 23 33 – Trenching
and Backfilling.
B.
Pipe, joints, and fittings shall be installed in accordance with appropriate
water district standards, AWWA C 600, manufacturer’s installation
instructions, and as shown on the contract plans. When specifications
conflict, the most stringent standard shall apply. Bedding shall be shaped to
support the bottom quadrant of each length of pipe except as necessary for
making joints.
C.
Maintain 36-inches of cover over water main lines, measured from existing
or proposed finished grade. If approved by the Project Engineer, cover may
be reduced to 30-inches where crossing the curb line of newly constructed
streets.
D.
Use granular backfill material above the water line pipe zone in all areas
which are or are planned to be paved, and elsewhere as noted or directed.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
General
1.
All pipe and fittings shall be hydrostatically tested as specified herein.
The Contractor shall furnish all pumps, piping, pressure gauges,
water, and other items required to perform the tests. The length of
453
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
sections to be tested shall be as approved by the Project Engineer.
The Project Engineer and the City of Vancouver shall be notified at
least three (3) days in advance of each test.
Tests shall be conducted after the trench has been partially backfilled
with joints left exposed for inspection. Concrete thrust blocks shall
have been in place at least five (5) days before the tests are
conducted. Remaining backfill shall not be placed until pipe has
successfully passed the specified test.
Pipe to be tested shall be flushed immediately prior to filling for the
hydrostatic test.
All defective pipe, joints, and fittings shall be repaired or replaced and
tests repeated until the entire pipe line passes the specified test.
A two (2) year warranty for workmanship and materials shall be
provided on all water systems work following acceptance by the City
of Vancouver.
Hydrostatic Test
1.
Hydrostatic testing shall conform to the requirements of the City of
Vancouver Water General Requirements and as follows:
a.
All piping, joints, and fittings shall be tested at 150 percent of
the design pressure for two (2) hours. Thrust blocking for any
reach of pipe shall be allowed a minimum of three (3) days
cure time prior to pressure testing.
b.
The pipe shall be slowly filled with water, all air expelled, and
allowed to stand for 24 hours. The specified pressure shall be
applied and maintained by continuous pumping, if necessary,
for the entire test period. The test pressure shall be calculated
for the point of lowest elevation, or as specified by the City of
Vancouver. The pump suction shall be in a barrel or similar
device, or metered so that the quantity water required to
maintain the test pressure may be measured accurately.
c.
Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water necessary to
hold the specified test pressure for the duration of the test
period. The pipe installation will not be accepted if the
leakage is greater than the number of gallons each hour as
determined by the following formula:
L=
ND(P)1/2 / 7,400
In the above formula:
L=
N=
D=
P=
Allowable leakage, in gallons each hour
Number of joints in the length of pipe tested
Nominal diameter of pipe, in inches
Average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per
square inch
454
3.3
DISINFECTION
A.
General
1.
B.
Flushing
1.
C.
Pipelines intended to carry potable water shall be sterilized before
placing in service. Sterilizing procedures shall conform to AWWA
C651 as hereinafter modified or expanded and the requirements of
the City of Vancouver Water General Requirements.
Before disinfection, flush all foreign matter from the pipeline. Provide
hoses, temporary pipes, and ditches, as required, to dispose of
flushing water without damage to adjacent properties. Flushing
velocities shall be at least 2.5 fps.
Disinfection Mixture
1.
Unless otherwise required by the City of Vancouver, disinfection
mixture shall be a chlorine-water solution having a free chlorine
residual of 50 ppm. The sterilizing mixture shall be prepared by
injecting sodium hypochlorite and water mixture (12 percent) into
the pipeline at a measured rate while fresh water is allowed to flow
through the pipeline at a measured rate so that the chlorine-water
solution is of the specified strength
END OF SECTION
455
SECTION 33 41 00 STORM DRAINAGE AND SANITARY SEWER PIPING (SECTIONS 7-01, 7-04,
7-08, 7-17, 7-18 and 7-19)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Sections 7-01
– Drains, 7-04 – Storm Sewers, 7-08 General Pipe Installation Requirements, 717 – Sanitary Sewers, 7-18, Side Sewers, 7-19 – Sewer Cleanouts, and other
sections referenced therein, of the Standard Specifications, as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
D.
The Work in this Section consists of constructing storm and sanitary
sewer systems, and inspection of sanitary sewer laterals as shown on
the Contract Plans and as specified herein.
01 33 00 - Submittals
01 45 10 – Quality Control Requirements
01 57 13 – Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control
03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing
03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling
31 23 35 – Roadway Excavation and Embankment
31 34 19.16 - Geotextile Soil Reinforcement
33 01 00 – Operation and Maintenance of Utilities
33 05 13.14 - Adjustment of Incidental Structures
33 49 00 – Storm Drainage Structures
Measurement
1.
Sections 7-01.4, 7-04.4, 7-17.4, 7-18.5 and 7-19.4 of the Standard
Specifications shall be replaced with the following:
No measurement shall be made for work related to TV
a.
inspection or dye testing of sanitary sewer laterals as
required on the Contract Plans to determine their existing
conditions.
Storm and sanitary sewer pipe of various types will be measured
b.
by the linear foot to the nearest foot. Measurement will be made
along the axis of the pipe from center to center of manholes,
inlets, or to the ends of pipe, as applicable.
456
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
E.
No measurement will be made for trench excavation, backfill
(granular) pipe bedding, or surface restoration.
No measurement will be made for gravel backfill around
underdrains or drainage geotextile.
No measurement will be made for sewer appurtenances
including couplings, tees, wyes, adapters, elbows, bands,
crosses, reducers, seals, and joint materials.
No measurement will be made for acceptance testing and
inspection including but not limited to hydrostatic testing, air
pressure testing, joint testing, deflection testing, and TV
inspection necessary as specified herein or required by the
Engineer.
Cleanouts will be measured per each, complete, in place.
No measurement will be made for connection of new storm or
sanitary sewer piping to existing storm or sanitary sewer piping.
Cutting into and connection to an existing stormwater or
sanitary structure (Manhole, Inlet or Catch Basin) will be
measured per each, complete. Measurement will be
irrespective of the size of the existing structure or the size of
the cut.
No measurement will be made for connection of new storm or
sanitary sewer piping to new storm or sanitary sewer structures.
Payment
1.
Sections 7-01.5, 7-04.5, 7-17.5, 7-18.5 and 7-19.5 of the Standard
Specifications shall be replaced with the following:
a.
The Contract Price will be payment in full for furnishing all
labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary
to complete the Work as specified.
b.
Payment for TV inspection or dye testing of existing sanitary
sewer lateral conditions shall be incidental to the contract
work and no provision for payment will be made.
c.
The accepted length of storm or sanitary sewer pipe,
measured as specified above, will be paid for at the applicable
contract price per linear foot.
d.
Connection of new storm or sanitary sewer piping to
existing storm or sanitary sewer structures as specified
above, will be paid for at the applicable contract price per
each.
e.
Connection of new storm or sanitary sewer piping to
existing storm or sanitary sewer piping are incidental to the
price of pipe.
f.
Trench excavation, backfill (granular), pipe bedding, drainage
geotextile and surface restoration are incidental to the price
of pipe and structures.
457
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Payment for the above listed items will be payment in full for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and
incidentals, and doing all work necessary to complete the
work, as specified.
Storm drainage pipe installed at a vertical slope in excess of 25
percent (1:4) will require concrete pipe anchors placed in
conformance to the Drawings and details. Pipe anchors will be
considered incidental to the pipe installation and no provision
for payment will be made.
All sewer appurtenances including couplings, tees, wyes,
adapters, elbows, bands, crosses, reducers, seals, and joint
materials shall be considered incidental to the price per
linear foot of pipe and no additional payment will be made.
Acceptance testing and inspection including but not limited to
hydrostatic testing, air pressure testing, joint testing,
deflection testing, and TV inspection necessary as specified
herein or required by the Engineer shall be considered
incidental to the price per linear foot of pipe and no
additional payment will be made.
Connection of new storm or sanitary sewer piping to new
storm or sanitary sewer structures shall be considered
incidental to the price per linear foot of pipe and per each for
the structures and no additional payment will be made.
Payment will be made at the contract unit price for the
following items:
Pay Item
33 41 00.01
Drain Pipe, 6"
33 41 00.02
Underdrain Pipe, 6"
LF
33 41 00.03
Storm Drain Pipe, 8"
LF
33 41 00.04
Storm Drain Pipe, 10"
LF
33 41 00.05
Storm Drain Pipe, 12"
LF
33 41 00.06
Cleanouts
EA
33 41 00.07
Connect to Existing Storm Drainage
Structure
EA
33 41 00.08
Sanitary Sewer Pipe, 4”
LF
33 41 00.09
Sanitary Sewer Pipe, 6”
LF
33 41 00.10
Sanitary Sewer Pipe, 8”
LF
458
Pay Unit
LF
1.02 REFERENCES
Sponsor
ASTM
(AASHTO
ASTM
(AASHTO
ASTM
(AASHTO
ASTM
(AASHTO
ASTM
(ASSHTO
AASHTO
Number
C14
M86)
A27
M103)
A48
M105)
A 23
M111)
C76
M170)
M198
ASTM
C444
ASTM
A663
ASTM
A746
(AASHTO
M227)
ASTM
C655
(AASHTO
M242)
ASTM
D113
Fed.Spec.SS-S-00210
ASTM
F480
ASTM
F679
ASTM
F714
AASHTO
M294
AASHTO
ASTM
M252
F794
ASTM
D2729
ASTM
D3034
ASTM
D3350
ASTM
F1248
Subject
Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain,
and Culvert Pipe
Steel Castings, Carbon, for General
Application
Gray Iron Castings
Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
Reinforced Concrete Culvert,
Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe
Using Flexible Watertight Gaskets
Standard Specification for Perforated Concrete Pipe
Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant
Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe
Quality, Mechanical Properties
Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load
Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
Ductility of Bituminous Materials
Sealing Compound, Performed Plastic, for Expansion
Joints and Pipe Joints
Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Well Casing
Pipe and Couplings Made in Standard Dimension
Rations (SDR), SCH 40 and SCH 80.
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Large- Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings
Standard Specifications for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe
Based on Outside Diameter
Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene
Pipe, 12 – 60”
Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Tubing
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings
Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings
Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings
Material
Determination of Environmental Stress Crack
Resistance (ESCR) of Polyethylene Pipe
459
ASTM
F2736
ASTM
F2764
Standard Specification for 6 to 30 in. Polypropylene
(PP) Corrugated Single Wall Pipe and Double Wall Pipe
Standard Specification for 30 to 60 in. Polypropylene
(PP) Triple Wall Pipe and Fittings for Non-Pressure
Sanitary Sewer Applications
460
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33
00 Submittals.
B.
Pre-construction video inspections of the sanitary sewer lateral conditions
shall require three copies of the following (1 to the City of Vancouver, 1 to
C-TRAN, and 1 to the property owner):
1.
2.
C.
Product data shall be submitted for the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Clear video of the pipe interior conditions from the edge of right-of-way
to the sewer main connection, with narration of the inspection.
Paper report of the sewer lateral conditions.
Piping materials to be used on the project, including pipe, fittings,
joining materials, pipe gaskets, couplings and other piping
appurtenances.
Quality Control submittals per Section 01 45 10, Quality Control
Requirements.
Testing and TV Inspection Plan.
QUALITY CONTROL/TESTING
A.
Prior to construction, the Contractor shall conduct video inspections of the
sanitary sewer laterals as shown on the Contract Plans. C-TRAN shall be
notified 45 days prior to construction if access to private property is
necessary for video inspection or dye testing.
B.
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s data indicating proposed
products meet the specifications herein or shall perform the test when
manufacturer certification is not available. Data demonstrating compliance
shall be submitted 30 days prior to commencing work.
C.
After installation, but before backfilling of the trench, the Contractor shall test
the system for leakage by discharging water into all or selected catch basins,
overflow drains, and inlets as directed.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General
1.
Unless noted elsewhere in the project documents, pipe materials shall
conform to one (1) of the following:
461
Pipe Type/Size
Pipe
Cover*
<12” Storm Drain Pipe
<12” Storm Drain Pipe
12” – 60” Storm Drain Pipe
12” – 60” Storm Drain Pipe
12” – 84” Storm Drain Pipe
12” – 84” Storm Drain Pipe
12” – 84” Storm Drain Pipe
<12” Sanitary Sewer Pipe
<12” Sanitary Sewer Pipe
12” – 60” Sanitary Sewer Pipe
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
0’ – 2’
2’ – 25’
2’ – 25’
2’ – 25’
1.5’ – 14’
1.0’ – 21’
0.5’ – 26’
0’ – 2’
2’ – 25’
2’ – 25’
Allowable Pipe Material
Ductile Iron, ASTM A746-03
CPE, AASHTO M252, Type S
CPE, AASHTO M294, Type S
CPP,ASTM 2736/ASTMF2764
RCP, Cl. III, AASHTO M170
RCP, Cl. IV, AASHTO M170
RCP, Cl. V, AASHTO M170
Ductile Iron, ASTM A746-03
PVC, ASTM D 3034 SDR 35
CPP,ASTM 2736/ASTMF2764
*Pipe cover is from outside diameter of the pipe to the bottom of
pavement, not including any asphalt or concrete paving above the base
courses. Outside of trafficked areas pipe materials may have less than
the required cover with approval of the Project Engineer. If the pipe
conditions do not meet the above table requirements for pipe size or
cover, notify Project Engineer.
Gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding shall conform to Section 903.12(3) of the Standard Specifications, and all applicable sections
referenced therein, except as amended herein.
Gravel backfill for drains shall conform to Section 9-03.12(4) of the
Standard Specifications, and all applicable sections referenced therein,
except as amended herein.
Gravel backfill for drywells shall conform to Section 9-03.12(5) of the
Standard Specifications, and all applicable sections referenced therein,
except as amended herein.
Unless otherwise noted or approved, all storm drain pipe shall be PVC
as specified below.
Drain pipe shall conform to Section 9-05.1 of the Standard
Specifications, and all applicable sections referenced therein, except as
amended herein.
Underdrain pipe shall conform to Section 9-05.2 of the Standard
Specifications, and all applicable sections referenced therein, except as
amended herein.
Concrete storm sewer pipe shall conform to Section 9-05.7 of the
Standard Specifications, and all applicable sections referenced therein,
except as amended herein.
PVC sewer and storm drain pipe shall conform to Section 9-05.12 of the
Standard Specifications, and all applicable sections referenced therein,
except as amended herein.
Ductile Iron sewer and storm drain pipe shall conform to Section 905.13 of the Standard Specifications, and all applicable sections
referenced therein, except as amended herein.
462
11.
12.
13.
B.
Reinforced Concrete Pipe
1.
C.
Corrugated Polyethylene storm drain pipe shall conform to Section 905.20 of the Standard Specifications, and all applicable sections
referenced therein, except as amended herein.
Polypropylene storm drain pipe shall conform to Section 9-05.24 of the
Standard Specifications, and all applicable sections referenced therein,
except as amended herein.
Drainage geotextile shall be moderate survivability class C and shall
conform to Section 9-33.1 of the Standard Specifications, and all
applicable sections referenced therein, except as amended herein.
Reinforced concrete pipe and special sections shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C76 (AASHTO M170) except as follows:
a.
Where rubber gasket joints are used, modify the design of the
ends of pipe sections according to AASHTO M198 to
accommodate rubber gaskets.
b.
Special sections such as elbows, wyes, tees, crosses, bends, and
reducers shall be as shown, specified, or directed. In the
absence of any design or specifications, the special sections shall
be of the design recommended by the manufacturer for the
intended use. Generally the special sections shall conform to the
requirements specified for the pipe with which it is to be used.
Special sections with components shall be from tested and
approved lots. Production dates shall be available for such
sections.
c.
Indent the markets required by ASTM C76 (AASHTO M170) in
the outside surface of each section of pipe.
d.
Reinforced concrete pipe having the same D-load strengths as
those specified to be furnished under ASTM C76 (AASHTO
M170) may be furnished according to ASTM C655 (AASHTO
M242).
e.
The basis of acceptance for pipe, manufactured according to
ASTM C76 (AASHTO M170), and ASTM C655 (AASHTO
M242) shall be loading bearing tests, material tests, and
inspection of manufactured pipe for visual defects and
imperfections, unless other basis are approved.
PVC Storm and Sanitary Pipe and Fittings
1.
PVC Storm and Sanitary pipe and fittings shall conform to following
requirements.
a.
4-Inch to 15-Inch Diameter: ASTM D3034, SDR 35.
b.
Fittings shall be of the same material as the pipe. PVC pipe and
fittings shall have gasketed joints conforming to ASTM D3212
and F477 and be installed in accordance with ASTM D2321.
463
c.
D.
Underdrain Pipe
1.
E.
Minimum cover for all pipe shall be as shown in the table in
Section 2.01.A.1. Notify Engineer in advance of placement of any
areas where these cover requirements are not being met based
on elevations shown on the plans.
Underdrain pipe shall be slotted PVC, Schedule 40 pipe meeting the
following requirements:
a.
Slots to be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe, at a
minimum interval of 0.25 inches, minimum of four (4) rows.
b.
Slot width to be between 0.04 – 0.08 inches, minimum one (1)
inch long.
c.
Pipe and joints to meet ASTM F480 standard specifications.
Cement Mortar and Nonshrink Grout
1.
Cement mortar and nonshrink grout shall conform to the applicable
requirements of Section 33 49 00 – Manholes, Inlets, and Sewer
Structures.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1
PIPE
A.
Earthwork
1.
B.
Excavation, bedding, and backfill shall conform to the requirements of
Section 31 23 33 – Trenching and Backfilling.
Installation
1.
2.
Pipe laying shall begin at the downstream end of the pipe line. Interior
surfaces of pipes shall be kept clean during placing. Pipe ends shall be
blocked to prevent drain rock from entering the pipes. The lower
segment of the pipe shall be in contact with the shaped bedding
throughout its full length. Bell or groove ends of rigid pipe and outside
circumferential laps of flexible pipe shall be placed facing upstream.
Flexible pipe shall be placed with longitudinal laps or seams at the sides.
The lower segment of the pipe shall be in contact with the shaped
bedding throughout the full length of the pipe.
All field joints made in the joining of sections of pipe to form culverts
and sewers, and to connect to structures and special sections, shall be
closely fitted, tight, and shall provide a smooth and uniform surface.
The joints shall secure and hold adjoining sections to each other and
shall fasten securely to adjoining structures and special sections.
464
3.
4.
5.
3.2
Perforated pipe shall be placed with the perforations facing down. The
pipe shall be inspected prior to lowering into the trench and cleaned of
any material that may plug the perforations of the pipe. Defective,
damaged or unsatisfactory pipes and accessories shall be replaced at no
cost to the Owner.
Pipe sections shall be securely fastened together with couplings, fittings,
or bands as specified by the manufacturer for the type of pipe used.
Upgrade ends of all drain pipe shall be capped with approved plugs.
After pipe is laid and joined, prior to backfilling, the installation will be
inspected. Any pipe found out of alignment, unduly settled or damaged
shall be taken up and re-laid or replaced.
VIDEO INSPECTIONS OF EXISTING SANITARY SEWER LATERALS
A.
Sequence of Inspections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
As early as possible, the Contractor shall inspect the sanitary sewer
laterals in question and notify C-TRAN if access to private property is
necessary at the locations shown for TV inspection or dye testing of
existing sanitary laterals.
C-TRAN will apply for a right-of-entry from the property owner prior to
the Contractor proceeding.
After entry is obtained, video inspection or dye testing shall be
conducted as shown on the Contract Plans and the results shall be
provided as described in Article 1.03(B) Submittals.
If the video testing shows the sewer lateral to be in acceptable condition,
as determined by the City of Vancouver, work can proceed as shown on
the Contract Plans.
If the video testing reveals damage to the lateral within the right-of-way
or other repair needs, C-TRAN shall be notified for coordination of
repair work with the property owner, prior to work proceeding.
END OF SECTION
465
SECTION 33 44 19 STORMWATER TREATMENT STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Sections
7-05 – Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins and Drywells, and other sections
referenced therein, of the Standard Specifications, as amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
D.
This Section covers the Work necessary for construction of
mechanical treatment inlets and catch basins as shown in the
Contract Plans.
01 29 76 - Measurement and Payment
01 33 00 - Submittals
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
01 57 13 - Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control
03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement
03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling
31 34 19.16 - Geotextile Soil Reinforcement
33 01 00 - Operation and Maintenance of Utilities
33 49 00 - Storm Drainage Structures
33 49 23 - Bioretention Basins
Measurement
1.
Section 7-05.4 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended to
include the following:
a.
Mechanical treatment curb inlets will be measured per each,
complete, in place, for each specified water quality flowrate.
b.
There will be no separate measurement for excavation,
backfill, concrete work, curb inlet frame, facility piping
within the unit or other appurtenances associated with the
mechanical treatment curb inlets.
c.
The Contract Price will be payment in full for furnishing all
labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to
complete the Work as specified.
466
E.
Payment
1.
Section 7-05.5 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended to
include the following:
a.
The Contract Price will be payment in full for furnishing all
labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary
to complete the Work as specified.
b.
The accepted quantities of work performed under this Section
will be paid for at the Contract unit price, per unit of
measurement, for the following items:
Pay Item
33 44 19.01
Pay Unit
Mechanical Treatment Curb Inlet, WQF= 0.024 CFS
EA
33 44 19.02
Mechanical Treatment Curb Inlet, WQF= 0.056 CFS
2.
1.2
There will be no separate payment for excavation, backfill, concrete
work, curb inlet frame, facility piping within the unit or other
appurtenances associated with the mechanical treatment curb inlets.
SUBMITTALS
A.
The following shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of
Section 01 33 00 Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
EA
Manufacturer’s data sheets for mechanical treatment inlet catch
basins provided, including information regarding all system
appurtenances.
Details of precast concrete components.
Design flow rates, including design treatment flow rates and peak
bypass flow rates.
Operation and maintenance manuals for all provided equipment.
Listing of any special equipment required to operate and maintain
the provided equipment. A list of manufacturer recommended
spare parts for the equipment, including current pricing
information.
A listing of a minimum of five (5) locations where the equipment
is currently installed and operating, including owner names and
contact information.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
The Contractor shall perform testing as specified herein.
467
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Mechanical Treatment Curb Inlets
1.
2.
3.
Mechanical treatment system shall have Washington GULD
certification for basic treatment.
Catch Basin Solid Lid: Solid lid shall be gray cast iron, treated
with non slip surfacing, and shall meet AASHTO H-20 loading
requirements, and shall be provided according to ASTM A48.
Contractor Provided Components
a.
All contractor-provided components shall meet the
requirements of this section, the plans specifications and
contract documents. In the case of conflict, the more stringent
specification shall apply.
1)
Crushed rock base material per section 9-03.12(3) of
the Standard Specifications. Unsuitable material below
sub-grade shall be replaced to engineer’s approval.
2)
Concrete: Shall be 3000 psi, 28 day strength, 3/4 inch
round rock, 4-inch slump maximum, placed within 90
minutes of initial mixing, or as otherwise specified in
the specifications.
3)
Rebar: Shall meet ASTM A-615M Grade 420 (60 ksi) or
as otherwise specified in the specifications.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1
CONSTRUCTION
A.
General
1.
2.
Foundation Stabilization
a.
If, in the opinion of the Resident Engineer, unstable material
exists that will not support the drywell, oil/water separator,
inlet or other structure, the Contractor shall excavate below
grade and backfill with trench foundation stabilization
material in accordance with Section 31 23 33 – Trenching
and Backfilling.
Pipe Connections
a.
Special care shall be taken to see that the openings through
which pipes enter the structure are completely watertight. All
pipe shall be connected to manholes according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
468
b.
3.
Concrete pipe connections to sanitary or storm drain
manholes shall be grouted watertight with non-shrink grout
conforming to 2.01.G.2 of this Section.
c.
PVC pipe shall be connected to sanitary or storm drain
manholes using an approved adapter specifically manufactured
for the intended service. PVC pipe adapters shall be Fernco
CMA, Romac LCT, Tylox Manhole Adapters, Vassally Series
32850, Kor-N-Seal, Sealtite, Z-Lok-XP, or approved equal
commercial products.
Field-fabricated waterstops or
improvised adapters shall not be used. Adapters requiring the
use of grout for installation shall be anchored and finished
using non-shrink grout of non-metallic cementitious
commercial grout exhibiting zero shrinkage per ASTM C-827
and CRD-C-621.
Mechanical Treatment Inlet Catch Basins
a.
Where the design drawings indicate a catch basin or inlet located
at a low point in the curb and gutter grade, the Contractor will
be responsible to place the catch basin at the low point to
provide for correct drainage to the catch basin or inlet.
b.
Catch basin top finish grade shall be even with surrounding
finish grade surface unless otherwise noted on plans. Contractor
shall prevent sediment and debris from entering the filter unit
during construction.
c.
Contractor shall compact sub-base per Section 31 23 33,
Trenching and Backfilling.
d.
If necessary, the inlet chamber may be filled with clean water to
assist in preventing flotation during construction until the
structure is backfilled and the surrounding concrete curb and
sidewalks are poured.
e.
Contractor shall compact backfill per Section 31 23 33,
Trenching and Backfilling.
f.
Catch basin outlet shall be connected to downstream piping
using a flexible- type coupling.
END OF SECTION
469
SECTION 33 49 00 STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES (SECTION 7-05)
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Sections 705 – Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins and Drywells, and other sections
referenced therein, of the Standard Specifications, as amended herein.
B.
For the purposes of this Special Provision, references to “Commercial Grade
Concrete” herein or in Section 7-05 of the Standard Specifications shall
mean Cast-in-Place Concrete as defined in Section 03 30 00 with the
following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Description
1.
D.
Entrained Air – 4.0 percent to 7.0 percent
Slump – 5 inches or less
Compressive Strength – Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days
Temperature – Minimum 50 oF to 90 oF.
This Section covers the Work necessary for construction of manholes,
concrete catch basins, pre-sedimentation manholes, drywells, and
miscellaneous sewer structures.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
01 27 00 - Measurement
01 29 73 - Payment
01 33 00 - Submittals
01 45 10 - Quality Control Requirements
01 57 13 - Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control
03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement
31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling
31 23 34 - Structure Excavation and Backfill
31 34 19.16 - Geotextile Soil Reinforcement
32 16 14 - Concrete Curbs and Gutters
33 44 19 - Stormwater Treatment Structures
33 49 00 - Storm Drainage Structures
33 49 23 - Bioretention Basins
470
E.
Measurement
1.
F.
Section 7-05.4 of the Standard Specifications shall be replaced with
the following:
a.
Cutting into an Existing Stormwater Structure (Manhole, Inlet or
Catch Basin) will be measured as defined in Section 33 41
00, Storm Drainage and Sanitary Sewer Piping.
b.
Mechanical Treatment Inlet Catch Basins will be measured as
defined in Section 33 44 19, Stormwater Treatment Structures.
c.
Manholes, Standard, Dia., will be measured per each,
complete, in place. Measurement shall be irrespective of the
depth of the manhole.
d.
Standard Drywells will be measured per each, complete, in place.
e.
Shallow Flat Top Drywells will be measured per each, complete,
in place.
f.
Clean existing drainage structure will be measured per each,
measurement shall be irrespective of the depth or type of
structure.
g.
Catch Basins will be measured per each, complete, in place.
h.
Curb Inlets will be measured per each, complete, in place.
i.
Pre-sedimentation Manholes will be measured per each,
complete, in place.
j.
24” Atrium Drains will be measure per each, complete, in place.
k.
There will be no separate measurement for Manhole, Catch
Basin, and Inlet appurtenances, including but not limited to:
frames, grates, lids, steps.
Payment
1.
Section 7-05.5 of the Standard Specifications shall be replaced with
the following:
a.
The Contract Price will be payment in full for furnishing all
labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary
to complete the Work as specified.
Pay Item
Pay Unit
33 49 00.01
Manholes, Standard, 48” Dia.
EA
33 49 00.02
Standard Precast Drywells
EA
33 49 00.03
Shallow Flat Top Drywells
EA
33 49 00.04
Clean Drainage Structure
EA
33 49 00.05
Catch Basin
EA
471
2.
3.
4.
1.2
33 49 00.06
Curb Inlet
EA
33 49 00.07
Combination Curb Inlet
EA
33 49 00.08
Pre-sedimentation Manhole
EA
33 49 00.09
24” Atrium Drain
EA
No separate or additional payment will be made for: Earthwork, pipe
connections, rock backfill, aggregate base backfill, drain tile, gravel
base for drains, geotextile, or acceptance testing.
No separate or additional payment will be made for: Manhole, Catch
Basin, and Inlet appurtenances, including but not limited to: frames,
grates, lids, and steps.
Payment for connection of new storm and sewer piping to existing
storm and sewer piping or structures is included in Section 33 41 00,
Storm Drainage and Sanitary Sewer Piping. No separate payment will
be included under this Section.
REFERENCES
Sponsor
ASTM
ASTM
Number
A48
A453
ASTM
ASTM
A536
C14
ASTM
C387
ASTM
C443
ASTM
(AASHT
ASTM
OC478
M199)
C827
ASTM
C990
ASTM
A615
ASTM
C1244
Subject
Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
Standard Specification for High-Temperature bolting, with
Expansion Coefficients Comparable to Austenitic Stainless
Steels
Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete
Sewer, Storm Drain and Culvert Pipe
Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined
Materials for Concrete and High Strength Mortar
Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and
Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets
Precast Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Sections
Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages
of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures
Standard Specifications for Joints for Concrete Pipe,
Manholes, and Precast box Sections Using Preformed
Flexible Joint Sealants
Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain billetSteel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by
the Negative Air Pressure (Vacuum) Test Prior to Backfill
472
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33
00 – Submittals, except as modified herein.
B.
Product Data shall be submitted for the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Rubber gaskets.
Details of precast concrete components.
Details of cast iron frames, grates and lids for manholes, drywells,
atrium drains and catch basins.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
The Contractor shall perform testing as specified herein.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Precast Concrete Drywell
1.
2.
Materials shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C478 and City of
Vancouver Standard Detail D-2.2. Minimum wall thickness shall be 5".
Cones shall have the same wall thickness and reinforcement as riser
sections.
Drywells shall be 48” nominal diameter, with 3’-0” cone, and two 5’-0”
perforated sections, constructed to the elevations shown on the Plans.
B.
Gravel backfill for drywells shall conform to Section 9-03.12(5) of the Standard
Specifications.
C.
Precast Pre-Sedimentation Manholes
1.
2.
3.
Materials shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C478 and City of
Vancouver Standard Detail D-2.1. Minimum wall thickness shall be 5".
Prior to delivery of precast manhole sections to the jobsite, yard
permeability tests may be required at the point of manufacture. The
precast sections to be tested will be selected at random from the
stockpiled material which is to be supplied to the project. All test
specimens will be mat tested, and shall meet the permeability test
requirements of ASTM C14.
Precast manhole sections shall consist of circular sections in standard
nominal inside diameters of 48", as shown on the drawings. Heights of
sections shall be multiples of 12". Heights of manhole sections 72"
through 96" in diameter shall be as required to fit site conditions.
Other sections shall be 24" riser and flat-top sections.
473
D.
Metal Castings
1.
2.
E.
Cap Screws
1.
F.
General
a.
Manhole covers shall be designed so they may be secured to the
frames. Matching surfaces of covers and frames shall be flat to
prevent any movement of covers within the frames. Covers and
frames shall be interchangeable.
Cast Iron
a.
Cast iron materials shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
A48, Class 30B. The foundry shall certify as to the tensile and
transverse properties and the Brinell Hardness. The Owner
reserves the right to require a rough transverse bar (size of bar
1.2" in diameter by 20" long) and/or a tensile bar as per ASTM
A48 for each 20 castings or heat when less than 20 castings are
made.
Cap screws and washers for watertight manhole covers shall be
stainless steel with 60,000 psi minimum tensile strength conforming to
the requirements of ASTM A453.
Joint Materials
1.
2.
Mortar
a.
Mortar shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C387, or be
proportioned one part Type II Portland cement or two parts
clean, well- graded sand which will pass a 1/8" screen.
Admixtures may be used not exceeding the following
percentages of weight of cement: Hydrated lime, 10 percent;
diatomaceous earth or other inert materials, 5 percent. The
consistency of the mortar shall be such that it will readily adhere
to the precast concrete if using the standard tongue-and-groove
type joint. Mortar mixed for longer than 30 minutes shall not be
used.
Non-Shrink Grout
a.
Non-shrink grout shall be Sika 212, Euco N-S, Five-Star, or
approved equal non-metallic cementitious commercial grout
exhibiting zero shrinkage per ASTM C827 and CRD C621. Grout
shall not be amended with cement or sand and shall not be
reconditioned with water after initial mixing. Unused grout
shall be discarded after 20 minutes and shall not be used.
b.
Non-shrink grouts shall be placed or packed only with the use of
an approved commercial concrete bonding agent applied to all
cured concrete surfaces being grouted. The bonding agent shall
be compatible with the brand of grout used. Water shall not be
used as a substitute for the commercial bonding agent.
474
3.
4.
G.
Preformed Plastic Gaskets
a.
Preformed plastic gaskets shall meet all the requirements of
ASTM C990.
Rubber Gaskets
a.
Materials shall conform to ASTM C443.
Manhole Steps
1.
Manhole steps shall be Lane P-14850 Polypropylene Manhole Steps, or
Approved Equal.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1
CONSTRUCTION
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
Foundation Stabilization
a.
If, in the opinion of the Resident Engineer, unstable material
exists that will not support the manhole or other structure, the
Contractor shall excavate below grade and backfill with trench
foundation stabilization material in accordance with Section 31
23 33 – Trenching and Backfilling.
Pipe Connections
a.
Special care shall be taken to see that the openings through
which pipes enter the structure are completely watertight. All
pipe shall be connected to manholes according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
b.
Concrete pipe connections to sanitary manholes shall be grouted
watertight with non-shrink grout conforming with 2.01.G.2 of
this Section.
c.
PVC pipe shall be connected to sanitary manholes using an
approved adapter specifically manufactured for the intended
service. PVC pipe adapters shall be Fernco CMA, Romac LCT,
Tylox Manhole Adapters, Vassally Series 32850, Kor-N-Seal,
Sealtite, Z-Lok-XP, or approved equal commercial products.
Field-fabricated waterstops or improvised adapters shall not be
used. Adapters requiring the use of grout for installation shall
be anchored and finished using non-shrink grout of non-metallic
cementitious commercial grout exhibiting zero shrinkage per
ASTM C-827 and CRD-C-621.
Catch Basin Inlets
Where the design drawings indicate a catch basin or inlet located at a
low point in the curb and gutter grade, the Contractor will be
responsible to place the catch basin at the low point to provide for
correct drainage to the catch basin or inlet.
475
B.
Precast Concrete Manholes
1.
Precast manhole components may be used to construct standard,
shallow, drop, and carry-through manholes. Sanitary and stormwater
manholes less than 4 feet in depth measured from the springline of the
pipe to the bottom of the lower riser ring shall be flat-top manholes.
a.
Bases
1) If bases are cast-in-place, the concrete shall be
consolidated by mechanical vibration. The concrete shall
be screeded off in such a manner that the first manhole
section to be placed has a level uniform bearing for the
full circumference.
2) If bases are precast, the base section shall be carefully
placed on the prepared bedding so as to be fully and
uniformly supported at true grade and alignment.
3) The invert shall be constructed and channelized with
mortar to a section identical with that of the sewer pipe
up to the springline of the pipe. Where the size of sewer
pipe is changed at the manhole, the invert shall be
constructed to form a smooth transition without abrupt
breaks or unevenness of the invert surfaces. Where a full
section of concrete sewer pipe is laid through the
manhole, the top shall be broken out to the spring line of
the pipe for the full width of the manhole, and the
exposed edge of the pipe completely covered with mortar.
During construction, the Contractor shall divert existing
flows of water or sewage from new concrete or mortar
surfaces to prevent damage to the fresh concrete or
mortar until the initial set has been achieved.
b.
Precast Manhole Sections
1) All lift holes shall be thoroughly wetted, then completely
filled with nonshrink grout, and smoothed and pointed
both inside and out to ensure watertightness.
2) Preformed plastic or rubber gaskets shall be used on all
sanitary manholes. Mortar will be allowed on storm
manholes, and on 24" extension rings above the cone. All
mortar joints between precast elements shall be
thoroughly wetted, then completely filled with mortar.
On proposed street grades, a minimum of one 24" precast
riser will be required between the cone and manhole
cover frame.
c.
Grates, Frames, and Covers
1) Manhole frames, grates, and covers shall be installed in
such a manner as to prevent infiltration of surface or
ground water between the frame and the concrete of the
manhole section. All mortared sanitary sewer manhole
476
necks and all riser ring joints made with mortar shall be
constructed using an approved commercial concrete
bonding agent applied to all cured concrete surfaces
being mortared. No joints, necks, or frames on sanitary
manholes shall be mortared without an approved bonding
agent.
C.
Cast-In-Place Catch Basins and Inlets
1.
2.
3.
D.
Precast Concrete Units
1.
E.
Precast catch basins and inlets shall meet the City of Vancouver
standard details, and be installed at the specified line and grade as
shown on the Contract Plans.
Installation of Tracer Wire
1.
F.
Forms shall be tight and well braced. The corners shall be chamfered.
All water and debris shall be removed.
Immediately after placement, the concrete shall be consolidated with an
approved vibrator. Vibration time shall be limited to that necessary to
produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation. The
top surface shall be screeded and exposed surfaces trowelled to a
smooth finish free from marks or irregularities. Exposed edges shall be
rediused with a steel edging tool. After forms are removed, the
Contractor shall patch any defects in the concrete with approved mortar
mix. Concrete shall conform to Section 32 16 14 – Concrete Curbs and
Gutters.
Immediately after removal of forms and final finishing, the concrete
shall be treated with an approved curing compound.
The tracer wire shall enter into the catch basin or inlet and leave the
tracer wire to extend 18" beyond the catch basin or inlet.
Clean Drainage Structure
1.
Existing drainage structures shall be cleaned using a vactor truck to
remove all sediment within the existing structure and sump. Structure
openings may need to be water-jetted out to allow free flow.
Structures shall be cleaned out to the approval of the Resident
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
477
SECTION 33 49 23 BIORETENTION BASINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with all
applicable sections of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except as
amended herein.
B.
Description
1.
C.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
D.
This section specifies the construction of Bioretention Basins to
the lines and grades shown in the contract plans.
01 33 00 – Submittals
01 45 10 – Quality Control Requirements
03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcement
03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling
31 23 34 – Structure Excavation and Backfill
32 16 14 – Concrete Curbs and Gutters
32 16 16 – Cement Concrete Sidewalks
32 93 43 – Tree Shrub Planting
33 41 00 – Storm Drainage and Sanitary Sewer Piping
33 49 00 – Storm Drainage Structures
Measurement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bioretention Basins will be measured per square foot of area as
shown on the plans. Sizes will be determined by the planar area of
the basin as measured at the overflow elevation.
There will be no separate measurement for excavation, backfill,
bioretention soil mix, choker rock, or drainage rock for the
bioretention basins.
Measurement for bioretention basin piping, atrium style overflow
drain, mulching and plantings shall be as defined in other Sections of
these specifications.
18” Curb Openings will be measured per each, complete, in place.
There will be no separate measurement for metal inlet frames,
splash blocks or other paving work associated with construction of
the curb opening.
The Contract Price will be payment in full for furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the
Work as specified.
478
E.
Payment
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Payment will be made at the Contract unit price under:
Pay Item
Pay Unit
33 49 23.01 Bioretention Basin
SF
33 49 23.02 18” Curb Openings
EA
Payment for Bioretention Basin piping, atrium style overflow
drains, bioretention soil mix and plantings shall be as defined in and
included under other Sections of these specifications.
There will be no separate payment for excavation, backfill, soil mix,
check dams or other appurtenances associated with the Bioretention
Basins.
Payment for metal inlet frames, splash blocks, curb and gutter
work and other associated paving work are incidental to the price of
18” Curb Openings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
The following shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of
Section 01 33 00 Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Contractor’s detailed work plan for construction of the bioretention
basins, focusing on protection of the basin from construction
sedimentation and soil compaction. Work plan shall include
construction methods, equipment, and materials used.
1/8 cubic foot of Bioretention Soil Mix proposed for use in the
project shall be submitted to the Engineer of Record. Submit
manufacturer’s data for Bioretention Soil Mix, or individual
components to be used in the mixture, showing conformance with
this specification.
A manufacturer's certification with supporting documentation shall
be submitted for aggregate products according to Section 1.04 and
Section 2.02.
Sustainability Submittals, Submit product data stating products
meet the following requirements referenced in Division 1 Section
“Sustainability Requirements”
a.
Regional Materials: Provide manufacturer’s data for
Bioretention Soil Mix, Choker Rock and Drainage Rock
showing location of extraction and manufacturing.
479
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General
1.
Quality assurance/quality control shall be made in accordance
with the requirements of Section 01 45 00, Quality Control
Requirements, except as modified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Solid Wall Piping: Meet the requirements of Section 33 41 00, Storm
Drainage and Sanitary Sewer Piping.
B.
Atrium Style Overflow Drains: Meet the requirements of Section 33 49 00,
Storm Drainage Structures.
C.
Plantings: Meet the requirements of Section 32 93 43, Tree Shrub Planting.
D.
Choker Rock: Furnish 3/4” – No. 4 open graded aggregate meeting the
following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing (by weight)
1”
100
3/4”
90 – 100
3/8”
20 – 55
No. 4
0 – 10
No. 8
0-5
E.
Drainage Rock for bioretention basins and infiltration chambers: Furnish
washed open graded crushed aggregate meeting the requirements of Gravel
Backfill for Drains, section 9- 03.12(4) of the Standard Specifications.
F.
Bioretention Soil Mix
1.
Furnish bioretention basin planting soil to depths as indicated on Civil
drawings and conforming to the following:
a.
General Composition – The material shall be a loamy sand
(USDA Soil Textural Classification), composed of a mix of sand
and mature compost, blended by volume consisting of 60-70
percent sand and 30-40 percent compost (by volume).
480
b.
Analysis Requirements – A particle gradation analysis of the
blended material, including compost, shall be conducted in
conformance with ASTM C117/C136 (AASHTO T11/T27) or
ASTM D422/D1140.
1)
The analysis shall include the following sieve sizes: 1
inch, 3/8 inch, #4, #10, #20, #40, #60, #100, #200.
The gradation of the blend shall meet the following
gradation criteria:
Sieve Size
1 inch
Percent Passing
100
#4
75-100
# 10
40-100
# 40
15-50
#100
5-25
#200
5-15
2)
c.
The blend shall have a coefficient of Uniformity
equal(D60/D10)
or greater than 6 to ensure it is well graded
(has a broad range of particle sizes). The coefficient is
the ratio of two particle diameters on a grain-size
distribution curve; it is the particle diameter at 60
percent passing divided by the particle diameter at 10
percent passing.
3)
The final soil mix (including compost and soil) should
have a minimum short-term hydraulic conductivity of
1.0 inches/hour per ASTM Designation D 2434
(Standard Test Method for Permeability of Granular
Soils) at 80 percent compaction per ASTM Designation D
1557.
4)
The pH of the blended material shall be tested and be
between 6.0 and 8.0.
Composted Material
1)
Compost shall be the result of the biological degradation
of Type 2, 3, or 4 feedstocks, under controlled conditions
designed to promote aerobic decomposition, per WAC
173-350-220.
2)
Maturity shall be over 80 percent per TMECC 05.05-A,
“Germination and Vigor.”
3)
Organic matter content shall be between 45 and 65
percent by dry weight.
481
4)
d.
Carbon to nitrogen ratio between 20:1 and 35:1. (35:1
CN ratio recommended if using all native plants)
General Requirements for the Blended Material:
1)
The material shall be loose and friable.
2)
It shall be well mixed and homogenous.
3)
It shall be free of wood pieces, plastic, and other foreign
matter.
4)
It shall have no visible free water
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Construct the Bioretention Basins as shown in the Contract Drawings, and
in accordance with the applicable sections of these specifications and the
Standard Specifications.
END OF SECTION
482
SECTION 34 41 13 TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Work under this section shall be completed in conformance with Section 8-20 – Illumination,
Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation Systems, and Electrical, Section 9-29
– Illumination, Signal, and Electrical, and other sections referenced therein, of the
Standard Specifications, as amended herein.
8-20 ILLUMINATION, TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS, INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION
SYSTEMS, AND ELECTRICAL
MATERIALS
Standard Junction Box
Section 9-29.2(1) is supplemented with the following:
(February 1, 2007 COV)
Grounding
A ground rod shall be installed in each junction box that carries 110 volts or
more.
(February 1, 2007 COV)
Modified Type 2 Junction Box
The modified Type 2 junction box shall be a QuaziteR Composolite Standard
Box Part Number PG2436BA18 with a QuaziteR Composolite Non-Locking
Cover Part Number PG2436WA00 or an approved equal. The junction box
extension shall be a QuaziteR Composite Extension Part Number
PG2436EA08 or an approved equal.
The junction box, cover and extension shall be the same manufacturer’s product for
each installation, including an approved equal.
Standard Duty Junction Boxes
Section 9-29.2(1)A is supplemented with the following:
(January 7, 2013)
Concrete Junction Boxes
Both the slip-resistant lid and slip-resistant frame shall be treated with
Mebac#1 as manufactured by IKG industries, or SlipNOT Grade 3-coarse as
manufactured by W.S. Molnar Co. Where the exposed portion of the frame is
½ inch wide or less the slip-resistant treatment may be omitted on that
portion of the frame. The slip-resistant lid shall be identified with permanent
marking on the underside indicating the type of surface treatment (“M1” for
Mebac#1; or “S3” for SlipNOT Grade 3-coarse) and the year manufactured.
The permanent marking shall be 1/8 inch line thickness formed with a
stainless steel weld bead.
483
Standard Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes
Section 9-29.2(2)A is supplemented with the following:
(January 7, 2013)
Both the slip-resistant lid and slip-resistant frame shall be treated with
Mebac#1 as manufactured by IKG industries, or SlipNOT Grade 3-coarse as
manufactured by W.S. Molnar Co. Where the exposed portion of the frame is
0.50 inch wide or less the slip-resistant treatment may be omitted on that
portion of the frame. The slip-resistant lid shall be identified with permanent
marking on the underside indicating the type of surface treatment (“M1” for
Mebac#1; or “S3” for SlipNOT Grade 3-coarse) and the year manufactured.
The permanent marking shall be 1 / 8 i nch line thickness formed with a
stainless steel weld bead.
Cover Markings
The second paragraph of Section 9-29.2(4) is revised to read as follows:
(February 1, 2007 COV)
Junction boxes shall be marked or embossed for use in accordance with
the Plans and the following schedule:
System Type
Traffic Signal
Legend
TRAFFIC/SIGNALS or SIGNALS
The inscription on all boxes used for the same function shall be consistent throughout
the project.
Electrical Conductors and Cable
Section 9-29.3(2)F is revised to read as follows:
(February 1, 2007 COV)
All loop wire shall be ‘RENO A & E’ Part # LW-116-S. Section 9-29.3 is
supplemented with the following:
All Detector Lead-In Cable (DLC) shall be ‘RENO A & E’ Part # LW-216
Splicing and Connectors
All splices shall be soldered and utilize one of the silicon filled waterproof direct
burial wire connectors from the list below:
“IDEAL” Underground #20-#10 Wire Gauge, Part # 30-160 “King Innovation”
DRYCONN, Part # 61345
484
Sealant
All saw-cut slots shall be sealed per COV Standard Plans with “Crafco Loop Detector
Sealant 271”.
Backer Rod
‘RENO A & E’ Part # BR-250
Light and Signal Standards
Section 9-29.6 is supplemented with the following:
(February 1, 2007 COV)
All traffic signal standards shall be manufactured with recessed terminal
compartments with terminal strips, in accordance with COV Standard Plan
T20-03.
Cobra Head Luminaires
Section 9-29.10(1) is supplemented with the following:
(*****)
HPS cobra head luminaires shall be Lumec Schreder HBS Series E-18. The
lamps shall be of the wattage indicated in the Plans.
LED cobra head luminaires shall be either of the following LEOTEK ECobra-head
LED Street Lights, as indicated in the Plans:


EC3-10M-MV-NW-2-GY-700
EC7-20M-MV-NW-3-YY-530
The photo eye shall be ALR 20-90NPS.
Traffic Signal Controllers
Section 9-29.13 is supplemented with the following:
(February 1, 2007 COV)
Controller shall be a Naztec 2070N supplied with:
2070 Module, CPU Card and Data Key, Model 2070-1C module
w/Ethernet Port for 2070 controller, 8MB DRAM, Naztec. Includes the
latest version of the Naztec Apogee software local intersection
software and license Controller, Model 2070LN, NEMA, Mfg. Naztec,
Inc., with following Modules:
2070-1C CPU with 10Mb Ethernet
2070-2B Field I/O for NEMA Controllers
2070-3B High resolution display (8 line x 40 char) and dual
keypad
485
2070-4B Heavy Duty Power Supply, 3 Ampere output
2070-5 VME Card Cage Option
2070-8 NEMA TS1 Base Adaptor Module, A - D Connectors, MS
Naztec Hardware Validation Suite (Valsuite) test
software Naztec Model 980 NEMA TS2 Type-2 (ENET)
Emergency Preemption
Section 9-29.13(3) is supplemented with the following:
(February 1, 2007 COV)
Emergency preemption detectors shall be a GTT Opticom Model 722.
Pedestrian Signals
Section 9-29.20 is supplemented with the following:
(February 1, 2009 COV)
Pedestrian signal heads shall be GE Countdown PED Model PS7-CFF1-26A or
approved equal.
H-frame pedestrian pushbuttons shall be
(Momentary LED Model) or approved equal.
REES
Bulldog
BDLM2
APS pedestrian pushbuttons shall be Polara APS Navigator or approved equal.
Vehicle Signal Optical Units
Section 9-29.16(2)A is supplemented with the following :
(March 10, 2009 COV)
Vehicle Signal Optical units shall be GE “GT1 “ series LED modules.
(******)
9-29.22 Video Detection System
9-29.22(A) Video Detection Processors
The video detection processors shall be rack mounted Traficon VIP3D.2 “S”: 10-4320.
9-29.22(B) Video Image Processor Expansion Boards
The video image processor expansion boards shall be rack mounted Traficon 4 I/O
“S”: 10-4420.
9-29.22(C) Video Communication Boards
The video communication boards shall be rack mounted Traficon Viewcom/E Max.
9-29.22(D) Video Image Processor Set-Up Keypad
The video image processor set-up keypad shall be Traficon 10.0021.
486
9-29.22(E) Color LCD Monitor
The color LCD monitor shall be Rainbow 8-inch TFT Color LCD Monitor.
9-29.22(F) Zoom Box
The zoom box shall be Kar-Gor Zoom Box.
9-29.22(G) BnC to Two Wire Connector
The BnC to two wire connector shall be Kar-Gor BnC to Two Wire Connector.
9-29.22(H) Focus/Zoom Terminal Block
The focus/zoom terminal block shall be Kar-Gor Focus/Zoom Terminal Block.
9-29.22(I) Video Surge Suppressor
The video surge suppressor shall be Hesco HE75CX.
9-29.22(J) Amp Breaker
The amp breaker shall be ABB S201-C1.
9-29.22(K) Video Detection Rack with Power Supply
The stand alone single video detection rack with power supply shall be Kar-Gor
Stand Alone Single Rack with 24VDC Power Supply and shall be made to
accommodate a video communication board in the rack.
9-29.22(K) 6-Position Video Detection Rack with Power Supply
The 6-position video detection rack with power supply shall be Kar-Gor 6Position Rack with 24VDC Power Supply.
9-29.22(L) CCTV Cameras
The CCTV cameras shall be Rainbow Model DNL46D.
9-29.22(M) CCTV Camera Lenses
The CCTV camera lenses shall be Rainbow Model L10X65MGECS.
9-29.22(N) Camera Housing/Sunshield
The camera housings/sunshields shall be Aigis Model HS9384-6H-T/9388SS.
9-29.22(O) Video Camera Mount Assemblies
The video camera mount assemblies shall be Pelco Astro Brac-AS-0619-5-84-SS-ALO.
9-29.22(P) Camera Mount Utility Box with Connectors
The camera mount utility box with connectors shall be Kar-Gor Camera Mount
Utility Box with Connectors (Mounted).
9-29.22(Q) Coaxial Power Cable
The coaxial power cable shall be Kar-Gor Composite Cable 75 ohm RG 59/U with
18 awg 5 conductors Part Number KG-9915.
487
(******)
9-29.23 Opticom GPS System
9-29.23(A) Opticom GPS System
Components of the Opticom GPS system at each traffic signal include:
Vendor
GTT
GTT
GTT
GTT GTT
GTT
Any
Part No.
Model 3100
Model 768
Model 764
Model 1070
Model 760
Model 755
Submit for approval
Item
GPS Radio Unit
Auxiliary Interface Panel
Multimode Phase Selector
11-conductor radio/GPS cable
Card Rack
Four-Channel Adapter Card
GPS radio unit mounting
hardware
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Conduit
Section 8-20.3(5) is revised to read as follows:
(June 1, 2010 COV)
A 12 gauge stranded tracer wire shall be installed in all empty conduits and
all conduits with fiber optic cable where fiber optic cable is being installed
regardless of whether the conduit is existing or new. A mule tape pull line
shall be installed in each conduit.
Testing
Section 8-20.3(11) is supplemented with the following: (******)
Shop Testing – Signal Controllers
All traffic signal controllers being supplied under this contract shall be shoptested to the satisfaction of the City of Vancouver Maintenance. The
equipment will also be functionally tested after installation in the field. Shop
testing will be performed at the following location:
City of Vancouver Public Works Department
Attn: Jeff Herb
4711 E Fourth Plain Blvd
Vancouver, WA 98668
Shop testing will verify specific Plan requirements, in addition to testing
requirements listed in the Standard Specifications. All costs for transporting
signal controllers to and from the Contracting Agency shall be included in
the Contractor's bid price for the respective items.
488
Five (5) working days notice to the Engineer is required prior to the start of
the test period.
Preemption Indicator Lights
There shall be one preemption indicator light, located as detailed in the Plans, for
each of the four emergency vehicle preempt channels.
The yellow position of the pedestrian load switch for the appropriate phase may be
used to drive the preemption indicator lights.
MEASUREMENT
Section 8-20.4 is supplemented with the following:
(******)
No unit of measure shall apply to the lump sum prices for traffic signal system,
traffic signal modification, HAWK signal system, and flashing beacon removal.
PAYMENT
Section 8-20.5 is supplemented with the following:
(******)
Add the following Bid items:
















34 41 13.01 Traffic Signal System Fort Vancouver Way/Air Force Ave, lump sum.
34 41 13.02 Traffic Signal System Fort Vancouver Way/North College Access,
lump sum.
34 41 13.03 Traffic Signal System Parkway Dr/Vancouver Mall, lump sum.
34 41 13.04 Traffic Signal Modification Fort Vancouver Way/McLoughlin Blvd,
lump sum.
34 41 13.05 Traffic Signal Modification Fort Vancouver Way/Fourth Plain Blvd,
lump sum.
34 41 13.06 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/Grand Blvd, lump sum.
34 41 13.07 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/Norris Rd, lump sum.
34 41 13.08 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/Brandt Rd, lump sum.
34 41 13.09 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/Falk Rd, lump sum.
34 41 13.10 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/Wintler Dr-Caples Ave,
lump sum.
34 41 13.11 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/General Anderson
Ave, lump sum.
34 41 13.12 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/Stapleton Rd, lump
sum.
34 41 13.13 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/57th Ave, lump sum.
34 41 13.14 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/62nd Ave, lump sum.
34 41 13.15 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/65th-66th Ave, lump
sum.
34 41 13.16 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/Andresen Rd, lump
489









sum.
34 41 13.17 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/Burton Rd-Auto Mall
Dr, lump sum.
34 41 13.18 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/78th Ave, lump sum.
34 41 13.19 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/86th Ave, lump sum.
34 41 13.20 Traffic Signal Modification Fourth Plain Blvd/Thurston Rd, lump
sum.
34 41 13.21 Traffic Signal Modification Thurston Rd/Vancouver Plaza Dr, lump
sum.
34 41 13.22 Traffic Signal Modification Thurston Rd/SR500, lump sum.
34 41 13.23 Traffic Signal Modification Thurston Rd/Parkway Dr, lump sum.
34 41 13.24 HAWK Signal System Fourth Plain Blvd, lump sum.
34 41 13.25 Flashing Beacon Removal Fort Vancouver Way, lump sum.
Items “Traffic Signal System ” include furnishing and installing new traffic signal
equipment, as shown or specified. Major components include poles, arms, display
equipment, control equipment, control equipment testing, detection, emergency
preemption and Opticom GPS system, luminaires and lamps, signs, conduits, junction
boxes, foundations, cabinets, and TSP equipment. All additional materials and labor
not shown in the plans, called for herein, or as directed by the Engineer that are
required to complete this work shall be included in the lump sum price. The
intersection location will be inserted in the blank.
Items “Traffic Signal Modification ” include removal, relocation and abandonment of
existing traffic signal equipment and furnishing and installing new traffic signal
equipment, as shown or specified. Major components include poles, arms, display
equipment, control equipment, control equipment testing, detection, emergency
preemption and Opticom GPS system, luminaires and lamps, signs, conduits, junction
boxes, foundations, cabinets, and TSP equipment. All additional materials and labor
not shown in the plans, called for herein, or as directed by the Engineer that are
required to complete this work shall be included in the lump sum price. The
intersection location will be inserted in the blank.
The item “HAWK Signal System” includes furnishing and installing new HAWK signal
equipment, as shown or specified. Major components include poles, arms, display
equipment, control equipment, control equipment testing, detection, emergency
preemption system, luminaires and lamps, signs, conduits, junction boxes,
foundations, and cabinets. All additional materials and labor not shown in the plans,
called for herein, or as directed by the Engineer that are required to complete this
work shall be included in the lump sum price. The intersection location will be
inserted in the blank.
The item “Flashing Beacon Removal ” includes removal of traffic signal equipment, as
shown or specified. All additional materials and labor not shown in the plans, called
for herein, or as directed by the Engineer that are required to complete this work
490
shall be included in the lump sum price. The intersection location will be inserted in
the blank.
END OF SECTION
491
APPENDIX A BRT
TYPICAL SHELTER COLOR SCHEDULE
Color names in parentheses ( ) indicate generic color names for reference purposes only.
*Colors not noted will be determined by Architect from standard colors.
**Welds: Maintain a crisp line between colors at all weld locations.
***Colors not noted will be determined by Architect from standard colors.
03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Concrete Platform and Ramps Finish: Sand
Color: Standard Gray
Concrete Pad w/Chamfered Edges at Elect/Comm. Cabinet Finish: Sand
Color: Standard Gray
Concrete Paving Joint Filler Color: Match Adjacent Concrete
Concrete Sidewalks
Color: See Civil
05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
1.
2.
See BRT Station – Color Diagrams
See Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
1.
2.
See BRT Station – Color Diagrams
See Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating
06 64 10 – TRANSLUCENT RESIN PANEL SYSTEM
1.
Accent Stick Cap
Manufacturer: 3-Form
Product: Chroma XT
Finish: Renewable Matte Finish
Color: Glacier x 2
07 41 13 – METAL ROOF PANELS
1.
MRP-1: Metal Roof Panel
Manufacturer: AEP Span
Product: Design Span 16” Wide Panels
Color: Cool Zinc Gray
Color Underside: Manufacturer’s Standard (White)
2.
Pre-Finished Sheet Metal Roof Flashing and Trim
Color: Match “Cool Zinc Gray” by AEP Span
492
07 62 00 – SHEET METAL FLASHING and TRIM
1.
Pre-Finished Sheet Metal Back Roof
Color: Match “Cool Zinc Gray” by AEP Span
07 92 00 - JOINT SEALERS
1.
2.
3.
Pedestrian Walkway Control Joints - To be selected from manufacturer’s
standard colors
Sheet Metal Sealant – Match color of adjacent sheet metal
Masonry Sand – Match grout color for concrete detectable warning pavers
08 84 00 – POLYCARBONATE PLASTIC GLAZING
1.
Clear Upper Windscreen Manufacturer: 3-Form Product: Koda XT Finish:
Sandstone Color: Crystal Clear
2.
Clear Flag Windscreen Manufacturer: 3-Form
Product: Koda XT
Finish: Sandstone
Color: Crystal Clear
3.
Colored Lower Windscreen Manufacturer: 3-Form
Product: Koda XT
Finish: Sandstone
Color: G-12 + G-06
4.
Colored Icon Translucent Resin Panels Manufacturer: 3-Form
Product: Koda XT Finish: Sandstone
Color: G-12 + G-06 + N-03
09 90 00 - PAINTING AND COATING
1.
2.
3.
PT-1: Exterior Paint (Light Gray)
Color: Match Duranar UC103499 (Similar to PPG 518-4 Flagstone)
PT-2: Exterior Paint (Dark Gray)
Color: Match Duranar UC98171 (Similar to PPG 518-6 Knight’s Armor)
PT-3: Exterior Paint (Reflective White Paint for Steel)
Color: Reflective White
10 14 00 – SIGNS AND IDENTIFYING DEVICES – SEE SPECIFICATIONS
493
12 93 00 - SITE FURNISHINGS
1.
2.
Trash and Recycling Receptacle
Manufacturer: Forms + Surfaces
Model: Dispatch Litter and Recycling Receptacle Receptacle Frame, Body and
Lid Color: Silver Texture
Ash Urn Manufacturer: TimberForm
Product: Custom Butt-Out Post
Color: RAL 7042 49/3250 38/70042
26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL
1.
2.
Exposed Conduit - Match Adjacent Material Color
Electrical Access Cover Plates - Match Adjacent Material Color
27 00 00 – COMMUNICATIONS
1.
2.
3.
Real Time Sign
Finish: Anti-graffiti, and anti-vandalism
Color: Charcoal Gray, confirm color with architect.
Ticket Vending Machine
Finish: Anti-graffiti, anti-vandalism, and flame resistant
Color: Charcoal Gray, confirm color with architect.
Ticket Validator
Color: To be selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard
32 14 13 – PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING
1.
2.
3.
Precast Concrete Paver, Type 1 (Gray) Manufacturer: Wausau Tile
Product: Architectural Pavers
Item: Detectable Warning Pavers
Style: ADA-2 Truncated Dome
Color: A-100
Precast Concrete Paver, Type 2 (Yellow) Manufacturer: Wausau Tile
Product: Architectural Pavers
Item: Detectable Warning Pavers
Style: ADA-2 Truncated Dome
Color: A-120
Precast Concrete Paver, Type 3 (Yellow)
Manufacturer: Wausau Tile
Product: Architectural Pavers
Item: Detectable Warning Pavers
Style: Tactile Warning Pattern
Color: A-120
494
4.
5.
Precast Concrete Paver, Type 4 (Yellow)
Manufacturer: Wausau Tile
Product: Custom Item: Engraved
Pattern: Bike Symbol as shown on drawings
Color: A-120
Precast Concrete Paver, Type 5 (Yellow)
Manufacturer: Wausau Tile
Product: Custom Item: Engraved
Pattern: ADA Symbol as shown on drawings
Color: A-120
495
APPENDIX B
EVENT ROUTE MAPS
Vancouver USA Marathon (Downtown Portion)
496
Vancouver U S A Marathon
Freedom 5K
497
Cruisin the Gut 2015
498
Cosmo 7K
August 8, 2015
499
Champagne Bike Ride 35 Mile
August 9, 2015
500
Vancouver Century
(Downtown Portion)
August 29, 2015
501
Friends of the Poor
September 26, 2015
502
Girlfriend’s Half Marathon
October 11, 2015
503